














+4 















Oo 


















^u v^ =\- 






'W 



^ V 1 



^ ^ 



^ 






r> 












J * 









N°°, 












f Q' 






^ 






"<> 



^ 









^ <T 









o 







^ '' 































* o~ 



o v , 






y v - <^ 





A~ * 




ARNOLD'S 

i 






FIKST LATIN BOOK; 



REMODELLED AND EEWRITTEN, 



AND ADAPTED TO THE 



OLLENDORFF METHOD OF INSTRUCTION 



est 
ALBERT BARENESS 

SENIOR MASTER IN THE PROVIDENCE HIGU SCHOOL. 



SIXTEENTH EDITION. 



NEW-YORK : 

D APPLETON & COMPANY, 



3 4 C & 848 BEOADWAY. 
M.DOCO.LVII. 



! 



OjOSI 






Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1851, by 

D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 

fn the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of New- York. 



48 6555 

AUG -4 1942 



PREFACE. 



Arnold's First and Second Latin Boole was introduced to the 
American public some five years since, under the editorial care 
of Professor Spencer. As the system was, at that time, quite 
new in this country, and comparatively so in England, the Ame- 
rican editor did not think it best " to make any material alteration 
in the original work.'* The marked favor with which the volume 
was at once received, and the almost unprecedented success 
which has since attended it, are a sufficient proof of its excellence. 
The test of the class-room and the improved methods of instruc- 
tion have, however, convinced teachers that, with many rare 
merits, and with a general plan most happily adapted to the 
wants of the beginner in Latin, it was still, in some important 
respects, quite incomplete in its execution and details. The pre- 
sent volume, undertaken at the request of the publishers, is the 
result of an attempt to remove these defects, and thus to rendei 



IV PRE/ACE. 

the work worthy of yet higher favor and success. The entire 
book has been rewritten and many important additions hava 
been made. 

The Latin of the First and Second Latin Book has been re- 
tained, so far as consistent with our purpose ; but as it has been 
found necessary to add many new selections, care has been taken 
to secure pure classic Latin, by resorting -exclusively to the pages 
of Caesar and Cicero. 

In the preparation of this book, it has been a leading object 
with the editor, so to classify and arrange the various topics as 
to simplify, and, as far as possible, to remove the disheartening 
difficulties too often encountered by the learner at the very out- 
set in the study of an ancient language. He has accordingly 
endeavored so to present each new subject as to enable the be- 
ginner fully to master it, before he is called upon to perplex 
himself with its more difficult combinations. The lessons have 
been prepared with constant reference to the Ollendorff method of 
instruction, while, at the same time, special pains have been taken 
to present a complete and systematic outline, both of the gram- 
matical forms and of the elementary principles of the language. 
An effort has thus been made to combine the respective advan- 
tages of two systems, distinct in themselves, but by no means 
inconsistent with each other. 

In the earlier portions of the book, the exercises for translation 
consist of two paragraphs of Latin sentences and two of English, 



• 

4 



PREFACE. 



the first of each being designed to illustrate the particular topic 
which chances to be the subject of the lesson, and the second to 
furnish miscellaneous examples on the various subjects already 
learned. Thus each lesson becomes at once an advance and a 
review. 

For convenience of reference and for the purposes of general 
review, a summary of Paradigms and an outline of Syntax have 
been appended to the lessons. The Syntax will be found, it is 
hoped, to be an improvement, at least in point of classification 
and arrangement, upon that ordinarily presented in Latin Gram- 
mars. In a Second Latin Book, now in preparation — being at 
once a Reader and an Exercise Book — the editor contemplates a 
fuller development and illustration of the Latin Syntax, in a series 
of exercises on the principle of analysis and synthesis. 

The present volume, as already intimated, has been prepared 
mainly from Arnold's First and Second Latin Booh ; the editor 
has, however, had before him numerous other works of a kindred 
character, from some of which he has derived valuable aid. 
Among these may be mentioned, in addition to the various Latin 
Grammars in use in this country and in England, Allen's New 
Latin Delectus ; Analysis of Latin Verbs, by the same author ; 
and Pinnock's First Latin Grammar ; together with numerous other 
elementary works, among which the editor is happy to specify 
the First Latin Book, by Professors M'Clintock and Crooks. 

Professor Spencer's edition of Arnold's Latin Prose Compo- 



» 



VI PREFACE. 



sition, one of the volumes of the excellent Classical Series pub- 
lished by the Messrs. Appleton, has been consulted with much 
advantage. 

For valuable assistance in the preparation of the Syntax, the 
editor is happy to acknowledge his indebtedness to Greene's Ana* 
lysis of the English Language. 

A, HAEKNESS. 
Providence, July 18, 1851 



CONTENla 



INTRODUCTION 

PRONUNCIATION. 

Page 

L Letters ..... I 

II. Syllables . 2 

IIL Quantity . . . » 2 

IV. Accentuation . . . • . 2 

V. Sounds of the Letters ...» 3 

i. The Continental Method . . 3 

ii. The English Method ... 4 

LESSON'S AND EXERCISES. 
Lesson. 

I. Parts of Speech. — Proposition. — Subject. — Predicate 7 

II. Verbs. — First Conjugation .... 8 

III. First Conjugation — continued . . .11 

IV. Second Conjugation . . . .12 
V. Third Conjugation . . .14 

VI. Fourth Conjugation . .16 

VII. Four Conjugations. — Plural Number . . .17 

VIII. Nouns. — Nominative Case . . . .19 

IX. Nominative Case — continued . .23 

X. Vocative Case ..... 24 

XI. Apposition. — Modified Subject . . .26 

XII. Genitive Case.— Modified Subject . 27 

XIII. Accusative Case. — Direct Object of Predicate . 31 

XIV. Accusative — continued. — Adverbial Modifiers . 34 
XV. Dative Case. — Indirect Object of Predicate . .35 

XVI. Ablative Case.— Modified Predicate . . 38 

XVII. First Declension . . . . .40 

XVIII Second Declension. — Nouns in us and Um * 43 



V1U CONTENTS. 

Lesa, l Page, 

XIX. Second Declension. — Nouns in er and %r .46 

XX. Adjectives of the First and Second Declension . 47 

XXI. First and Second Declension — continued . .51 

XXII. First and Second Declension, continued. — Price, Value, 

and Degree of Estimation . . . .53 

XXIII. Nouns. — Third Declension. — Class L .55 

XXIV. Third Declensioa— Class IL . . .58 
XXV. Third Declension.— Class III. . . 60 

XXVI Third Declension.— Class IV. . . . 63 

XXVII. Third Declension. — Genitives in ium. — Gender . 66 

XXVIII. Third Declension. — Formation of Cases from each other 68 

XXIX. Adjectives. — Third Declension . . . .71 

XXX. Adjectives, continued. — Nouns. — Fourth Declension 75 

XXXI. Nouns.— Fifth Declension . . . .78 

XXXII. Five Declensions. — Greek Nouns. — Gender 81 

XXXIII. Verbs. — Esse, to be. — Predicate, Esse with a Noun or an 

Adjective . . . . . .85 

XXXIV. Infinitive as Subject. — Genitive with Esse in the Pre- 

dicate ...... 87 

XXXV Tenses for Completed Action. — First, Second, and Fourth 

Conjugations . . . . 90 

XXX VL Third Conjugation. — Class I. — Second Root the same as 

the First . .... 93 

XXXVII. Third Conjugation. — Class II. — Second Root formed by 

adding s to the First . . . .96 

XXXVIII. Third Conjugation. — Class IL, continued. — Second Root 

formed by adding s to the First ... 97 

XXXIX. Third Conjugation. — Class IL, continued. — Second Root 

formed by adding s to the First . . .100 

XL. Formation of the Second Root. — First Irregularity — 

Radical Vowel lengthened (and of ten changed) . 103 
XLI. Formation of the Second Root. — Second Irregularity — 

Reduplication . . . . .105 

XLII. Formation of the Second Root. — Third Irregularity — 

Second Root after the analogy of other conjugations 107 
XLIII. Subjunctive Mood . . ' . . .110 

XI>FV Subjunctive Mood. — Purpose . . . .113 

XLV. Persons of Verbs. — Indicative Mood. — First Conjugation 115 
XL VI. Indicative Mood. — Four Conjugations. — Personal Pro- 
nouns . . . . . .119 

XL VII. Subjunctive Mood- -Four Conjugations 123 



CONTENTS. 



Lesson 
XLVIII. 



XLIX. 

L. 

LI. 

LII. 

LIIL 

LIV. 

LV. 

LVI. 

LVIL 

LVIIL 

llX. 

LX. 

LXL 

LXII. 

LXIII 

LXIV. 

LXY. 

LXVL 

LXVIL 

LXVIIL 

LXIX. 

LXX 

LXXL 

LXXII 

LXXIII 

LXXIV 

LXXY. 

LXXVI. 

LXXVIL 

LXXVIII. 

LXXIX. 



IX 
Page 



Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Verbs 
in io of the Third Conjugation. — Demonstrative Pro- 
nouns ...... 127 

Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Inten- 
sive Pronoun . . . . . .130 

Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Relative 

and Interrogative Pronouns . . . 132 

Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Inter- 
rogative Particles . . . . 134 

Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued.- -Inde- 
finite and Possessive Pronouns . . . 136 
Verb Esse, to be . . .138 
Verb Esse, continued.— Comparison of Adjectives . 142 
Compounds of Esse. — Comparison of Adverbs. — Nume- 
ral Adjectives . . . . .145 

Passive Voice. — Third Persons of Tenses for Continued 
Action . . . . . .148. 

Passive Voice. — Third Persons of Tenses for Completed 
Action ...... 151 

Indicative Mood of the Passive Voice . . 154 

Subjunctive Mood of the Passive Voice . .158 

Imperative Mood — Active and Passive . . 160 

Infinitive Mood . . . . . .163 

Participles. — Ablative Absolute . . • 166 

Gerunds and Supines . . . . .169 

Participle in dus . . • • .172 

First Conjugation . . • . .174 

Second Conjugation . • • • .175 

Third Conjugation . . . . .176 

Fourth Conjugation . . . . .177 

Verbs with the Dative. — Indirect Object sjtBjr 

Deponent Verbs ..... ■■■^jfK 

Irregular Verbs. — Posse, Velle, Nolle, Malle . .182 

Irregular Verbs, continued. — Ferre, Fieri . 185 

Irregular Verbs, continued. — Ire, Eclere . .189 

Periphrastic Conjugations . . . 191 

Impersonal Verbs . . . .193 

Impersonal Periphrastic . . . .195 

Impersonal Passive Verbs. — Prepositions . .197 

Conjunctions . . . . . 199 

Subjunctive Mood with ui, ne, quo , . .201 



CONTENTS. 



Oonjuno 



Lesson. 
LXXX. Subjunctive with quoniinus, quin, and other 

tions ...... 

LXXXI. Interrogative Sentences .... 

LXXXII. Conditional Sentences.—- Subjunctive in Relative Clau- 
ses and with quum . 
LXXXIII. Participles . 

LXXXIY. Participles, continued . 

LXXXV. Derivation of Nouns .... 

LXXX VI. Derivation of Adjectives . . 

LXXXVII. Derivation of Verbs and Adverbs 
LXXXVIII. Composition of Words 



Paga. 

203 
205 

207 
209 
212 
215 
217 
219 
222 



PARADIGMS, &c. 



1. Nouns. — Endings of Genitive Singular 


227 


2. Gender ..... 


. 227 


3. First Declension ..... 


227 


4. Second Declension .... 


. 228 


5. Third Declension ..... 


229 


6. Fourth Declension .... 


. 232 


7. Fifth Declension ..... 


233 


8. Case-Endings of Substantives . 


. 233 


9. Table of Genders .... 


. 234 


10. Adjectives. — First and Second Declension 


235 


11. Third Declension 


. 236 


12. Comparison of Adjectives 


238 


13, Numerals 


. 238 


14. Substantive Pronouns 


239 


15. Adjective Pronouns .... 


. 239 


16. Verbs. — Esse ..... 


241 


17. . Infinitive Endings . . 


243 


18."' First Conjugation ..... 


243 


19. Second Conjugation .... 


245 


20. Third Conjugation .... 


247 


21. Fourth Conjugation .... 


. 250 


22. Formation of Second Root 


252 


23. Deponent Verbs .... 


. 252 


24. Irregular Verbs ..... 


252 


25. Periphrastic Conjugations 


257 


26. Impersonal Verbs .... 


257 



CONTENTS. 



SYNTAX. 

Page 
Introduction . . . . . 259 



CHAPTER I. 

Essential Elements of Sentences. — Subject and Predicate, 

Section I. Subject • . . . • . 260 

" II. Predicate . .260 

CHAPTER II. 

Subordinate Elements. — Modifiers, 

Section I. Use of Modifiers .... 262 

« II. Modifiers of Nouns . . . . .262 

" III. Modifiers of Adjectives . . 263 

« IV. Modifiers of Verbs 264 

« « § I. Objects .... 265 

« « § II. Adverbial Modifiers . . . .268 

" V. Modifiers of Adverbs ... 271 

CHAPTER HI. 

Use of Moods, Participles, Gerunds, and Supines , 211 

Differences of Idiom . • • 275 

Cautions . • . * • . 2*77 

Latin-English Vocabulary . , 279 

English-Latin Vocabulary • 291 



EXPLANATIONS. 

The small numerals above the line in the Exercises refer to Difference* 
of Idiom, page 275 ; the small letters to Cautions, page 2*11. 

The numerals enclosed in parentheses refer to articles in the body of 
the work. 

In the Exercises, words connected by hyphens are to be rendered into 
Latin by a single word ; as, natural-to-rnan, humanus ; it-is, est, Ac. 



INTRODUCTION. 



PKONUNCIATIOR 

The two Methods, the Continental and the English, which at prea* 
ent prevail in tho pronunciation of Latin, differ from each other 
chiefly in the sounds of the vowels ; we shall accordingly first state 
the settled principles in which they agree (as accent, quantity, &c), 
and then present the vowel sounds of each separately, hoping, how- 
'ever, that, in tins country, the Continental Method will soon com- 
mend itself to general favor. With the important merit of uniform 
consistency, it is, at the same time, the only pronunciation intelli- 
gible on the Continent of Europe, the very place where the Ameri- 
can scholar will most need his Latin as a medium of communication. 

I. LETTERS. 

The Latin Language has six characters, or letters, 
representing vowel sounds, and nineteen representing 
consonant sounds. 

Rem. 1. The vowel sounds are <x, e, i, o, u, and y ; the consonants 
are the same as in English, with the omission of w, which is not 
used in Latin. 

Rem. 2. Two yowels sometimes unite in sound, and form a diph- 
thong, as in English ; e. g., m in Csesar. 

Rem. 3. X and z* are called double consonants ; I, m, n, and r, 
liquids, and the other consonants, vith the exception of h and s, 
mutes. 



X is equivalent to cs or as, and z to d§. 



2 FIRST LATIN BOOK. 

II. SYLLABLES. 

In the pronunciation of Latin, every word lias as 
many syllables as it has vowels and diphthongs ; thus 
the Latin words, more, vice, acute, and persuade, are pro- 
nounced, not as the same words are in English, but 
with their vowel sounds all heard in separate syllables ; 
thus, mo-re, vi-ce, a-cu-te, per-sua-de. 

IIL QUANTITY. 

Syllables are, in quantity or length, either long, short, 
or common (i. e. sometimes long and sometimes short). 

1. A syllable is long in quantity : 

1) When it contains a diphthong, as the first syllable 
of ccedo. 

2) When its vowel is followed by j\ x, z, or any two 
consonants, except a mute followed by a liquid; as the 
second syllables of erexit and magister. 

2. A syllable is short, when its vowel is followed by 
another vowel, or a diphthong, as the second syllable 
of indies. 

Rem. The letter h does not affect the quantity of the preceding voweL 

The quantity of syllables, when not determined by these rules, will 
be indicated in the vocabularies (and, in some instances, in the exercises) 
by the dash - when long, by the curve ~ when short, and by the two 
together * when common. 

IV. ACCENTUATION. 

1. The primary (or principal) accent, or stress ot 
voice, is placed : 

1) In words of two syllables, always on the first; 
as, homo, a man. 



SOUNDS OF THE LETTEES. 3 

2) In words of more than two syllables, on the penult 
(the last syllable but one), if that is long in quantity ; 
otherwise on the antepenult (the last syllable but two) ; 
as, radicis, consults. 

2. An additional accent is placed on each, second syl- 
lable preceding the primary accent ; as, demonstrdtur. 

Y. SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 

I. The Continental Method.* 

1. The Sounds of the Vowels. 

The Continental sounds of the vowels are as fol- 
lows : — 

a a in father ; e. g., aris. 

1. a in made; e.g., edit. 



1 2. e in met; e. g., amet. 

i e in me; e. g., ire. 

1. o in no ; e. g., ora. 



o . 

2. o in nor; e.g., amor. 

u 6 in do ; e. g., una. 

y e in me; e. g., nympha. 

Rem. Y is used only in words derived from the Greek. 

These sounds are uniformly the same in all situa- 
tions, except as modified by quantity and accent, (III. 
and IV.) 

2. The Sounds of the Diphthongs. 

se and oe . . . a in made; e. g\, aetas, coelum, 
au ... oumout; e. g\, auriim. 

Rem. The vowels in ei and eu are generally pronounced separately 

*For the Continental Pronunciation the editor is indebted to the 
kindness of Mr. George W. Greene, Instructor in Modern Languages in 
Brown University. 



4 FIRST LiriN BOOK. 

3. The Sounds of the Consonants. 

The pronunciation of the consonants is nearly the 
same as in English, though it varies somewhat in differ- 
ent countries. 

II. The English Method. 

1. The Sounds of the Voivels * 

In the English method, the vowels generally have the long or short 
English sounds : the length of the sound, however, is not dependent upon 
the quantity of the vowel, but must be determined by its situation or 
accent. 

(a) In all monosyllables, vowels have 

1) The long sound if at the end of^he word ; as, si, re. 

2) The short sound if followed by a consonant ; as, 
sit, rem; except post, monosyllables in es, and plural 
cases in os ; as, hos (a plural case). 

(b) In an accented penidt, vowels have 

1) The long sound before a vowel, diphthong, single 
consonant, or a mute followed b y I, r, or h ; as, deus ? 
pater, patres ; except tibi and sibi. 

2) The short sound before a double consonant, or 
any two single consonants except a mute followed by 
I, r, or h ; as, bellum, rextt. 

(c) In any accented syllable except the penult, vowels 
have 

1) The long sound before a vowel or diphthong ; as 
e in eadem. 

* The system of vowel sounds here presented is the same as that 
given in Andrews and Stoddard's Latin Grammar, and, like that, is based 
upon Walker's Key to the Pronunciation of Greek and Latin Proper 
Names. The rules, however, unlike those of Andrews and Stoddard, are 
so prepared as to show the sounds of the vowels, in all their various 
situations, independently of the division of words into syllables. This, it 
is hoped, will facilitate then application. 



SOUKDS OF THE LETTERS. 5 

2) The short sound before a consonant; as o in 
dominus: except, 

a) t U before a single consonant, or a mute followed 
by r or h (and perhaps I)] as ; Punicus, salubritas. 

b) A, e, and o, before a single consonant (or a mute 
before Z, r, or /z), followed by e or £ before another 
vowel; as, dcceo, dcria. 

(d) In all unaccented syllables, vowels have the short 
sound ; as, cantamus, vigilat : except, 

1) Final a in words of more than one syllable. This 
has the sound of ah, as in the word America ; e. g^ 
musa (musah). 

2) Final syllables in i (except tibi and sibi), es, and 
OS, in plural cases ; as, homini, dies, illos (a plural case). 

3) The first syllable of words accented on the second, 
when the first either begins with an i followed by a sin- 
gle consonant, or contains i before a vowel ; as, diebus, 
irdtus. 

Rem. E, o, and u, unaccented before a vowel, diphthong, a single 
consonant, or a mute followed by I, r, or h, are not quite as short 
in sound as the other vowels in the same situations. 

i 

2. The Sounds of the Diphthongs. 

JE and oe, like e in the same situation; e. g., Ccesar, 

Daedalus. 

Au, as in the English, author ; e. g., aurum. 
Eu, " " neuter; e. g., neuter (both Eng. 

and Latin). 

Ei, as in the English, height; e. g., dein. 
Oi, " " coin; e. g., jproin. 

Rem. 1. The vowels in ei and oi are generally pronounced sepa- 
rately. 
Rem. 2. A few other combinations seem sometimes to be used a3 



3 FIEST LATIN BOOK. 

diphthongs. U is always the first element of these combin* 
tions, and has then the sound of w; as, suade = swade: except, 
TJi in huic, and cui, which has the sound of long I. 

3. The Sounds of the Consonants. 

The consonants are pronounced nearly as in Eng- 
lish ; c and g, however, are soft before e, i, and y, and 
the diphthongs ce and as, and hard in other situations : 
ch is always hard, like h ; as, charta (kartah). 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



LESSON I. 
Parts of Speech, — Proposition, — Subject — Prediiate. 

1. Ik Latin, as in English, words are divided, ac- 
cording to their use, into eight classes, called Parts of 
Speech, viz. : Nouns, Adjectives, Pronouns, Verbs, Adverbs } 
Prepositions j Conjunctions, and Interjections, 

2. These parts of speech, either singly or combined, 
form propositions or sentences ; as, amas, thou lovest; 
puer ludit, the boy plays. 

3. Every proposition, however simple, consists of 
two parts : (1.) the subject, or the person or thing of which 
it speaks ; and, (2.) the predicate, or that which is said of 
the subject: thus ; in the proposition, puer ludit, puer 
(the boy) is the subject of which the proposition speaks, 
and ludit (plays) is the predicate which is affirmed of 
the subject. 

4. In Latin the subject is often omitted, because 
the form of the predicate shows what subject is meant; 
thus the proposition amas, thou lovest, consists in Latin 
of a single word, because the ending as, of amas, shows 
(as we shall see by and by) that the subject cannot be 
I, he, or they, but must be thou, 

5. When a proposition thus consists of a single 
word, that word is always a verb ; e. g., amdt, he loves. 



8 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [6 — 8 

6. The analysis of a proposition consists in separate 
ing it into its elements. 

Example 1.- — Proposition, Puer (the boy) ludii (plays). 

Piter (the boy) is the subject, because it is that of 
which the proposition speaks (8). Ludit (plays) is the 
predicate, because it is that which is said of the sub- 
ject (3). 

Example 2. — Proposition, Arnds (thou loyest). 

Arnds is the predicate, because it is that which is said 
of the subject. Thou, the subject in English, is omitted 
in Latin, because the ending as, of the predicate amas, 
fully implies it. 

7. Exercise in Analysis* 

Puella {the girl) cantat {sings). Puer {the boy) 
ludet (ic ill play). Pater {the father) yidebit {will see). 
Mater (the mother) ridebat (was laughing). Currebat 
(he ivas running). Cantabit (he icill sing). Ludebat (he 
was playing). Arabat (he v: as ploughing). 



LESSON II. 
Verbs.- — First Conjugation. 

8. A vebjb expresses existence, condition, or action (ge- 
nerally the existence, condition, or action of some person 

* These propositions are to be analyzed according to the examples 
just given. The object is twofold : first, to fix definitely the distinction 
between subject and predicate ; and, secondly, to show the learner that 
when the subject is a personal pronoun (English, I, thou, he, &c), it is 
generally omitted in Latin. The use of the pronoun to express emphasis 
or contrast will be considered in another place. 



9 — 13.] VEKBS.— FIEST CONJUGATION. 9 

or thing, called its subject) : as, est, he is ; dormit, he 
sleeps (is sleeping, or is asleep) ; dmdt, he loyes. 

9. When a verb expresses simply its meaning, with- 
out reference to any person or thing, as dmare, to love, 
it is said to be in the Infinitive Hood. 

10. When a verb expresses its meaning in the form 
of an assertion or question, referring to its subject, as 
dmdt, he loyes, it is said to be in the Indicative Mood* 

11. A verb may represent its subject, 

1) As acting in present time ; as, dmdt, lie loves. 
It is then said to be in the Present Tense. 

2) As acting in past time ; as, amabat, he was lov- 
ing. It is then said to be in the Imperfect Tense. 

8) As acting in future time (i. e., about to act) ; 
as, dmabit, he will love. It is then said to be 
in the Future Tense* 

12. A verb may represent its subject, 

1) As speaking of himself; as, dmo, I love, and 
then both subject and verb are said to be in 
the First Person. 

2) As spoken to ; as, dmas, thou lovest, and then 
both subject and verb are said to be in the 
Second Person. 

3) As spoken of; as, dmdt, he loves, and then both 

subject and verb are said to be in the Third 
Person. 

18. A verb may represent its subject, 

1) As consisting of only one person or thing ; as, 
dmdt, he, she, or it loves, and then both sub- 
ject and verb are said to be in the Singular 

Number. 



* The other moods and tenses will be noticed ir another place. 



10 FIRST LATIN" BOOK. [14 — 16 

2) As consisting of more than one person or thing; 
as, dmant, they love ; and then both subject 
and verb are said to be in the Plural Number. 

14. Every verb consists of two parts, viz. : 

1) The Root, or that part of the verb which re- 
mains unchanged throughout the various 
moods, tenses, numbers, and persons; as, 
dm in amare, dmb, amat, and amabit. 

2) The Endings which are added to this root, to 
form the moods, tenses, numbers, and persons ; 
thus, in the forms just noticed — viz., amare, 
amo, ama£, and &mabit — the endings are, are, o, 
at, and abit. 

15. Some verbs have the infinitive in are; as, am- 
dtre, to love. These are said to be of 

The First Conjugation. 

16. In verbs of this conjugation, 

1) The root is found by dropping the infinitive 
ending are; as, amare; root, am. 

2) The third persons singular of the present, im- 
perfect, and future tenses of the indicative are 
formed by adding to this root the following 
endings : 



*esent 


Imperfect. 


Future. 


at, 


abat, 

PARADIGM. 


abit. 



Amare, to love : root, 



am. 



Present. Am-at, he, she, or it loves (or, is loving). 

Imperfect. Am-abat, " " " was loving. 

Future. Am-abit, " " " will love (will be loving). 



17 — 19.] VERBS. — FIRST CONJUGATION. 



11 



17. VOCABULAKY. 






Latin. 


Meaning. 


Key-words* 


Am are, 


to love 


(amorous). 


Arare, 


to plough 


(arable). 


Cantare, 


to sing 


(canto). 


Laborare, 


to labor 


(labor). 


Vigilare, 


to watch 


(vigilant). 



18. Exercise. 
1. Laborat.f 2. Cantat. 3. Arat. 4. Arabat. 
5. Amabat. 6. Vigilabat. 7. Vigilabit. 8. Cantabit. 
9. Laborabit. 10. Vigilat. 11. Laborabat. 12. Ama- 
bit. 13. Amat. 14. Cantabat. 15. Arabit. 



LESSON III. 




First Conjugation — continued. 


19, Vocabulary. 




Ambiilare, to walk 


(ambulatory). 


Jurare, to swear. 




Pugnare, to fight 


(pugnacious). 


Salt are, to dance. 




Sperare, to hope. 




Vocare, * to call 


(vocation). 



* These Key- words, derived from the Latin, are introduced partly as 
a key or help to the learner, in fixing the meaning of the Latin, and 
partly as specimens of English derivatives of Latin origin. 

f The subject of each of these verbs may be, in English, either he, she, 
or it. The ending, at, shows the number and person of the subject, but 
not its gender (see Paradigm). When the subject is thus omitted in 
Latin, we can usually determine from the connection which subject to 
ujie just as in English we determine the meaning of the pronoun they, 
which may represent either things or persons, and either males ox fe- 
males In these exercises the pupil may use he as the subject. 



12 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [20—22. 

20. In English, the tenses, numbers, and persons of 
verbs are indicated by certain ivords or signs ; as, 

Present. Imperfect. Future. 

He loves, He was loving, He will love. 

In Latin, however, no such signs are used; bui 
their place . is supplied by the endings of the verb. 
Hence, in translating English into Latin, omit these 
signs and express the tense, number, and person of the 
verb by the proper endings ; e. g. : 

Present. Imperfect. Future. 

Eng. He loves ? He was loving, He will love. 
Lat. Amat, Amabat, Amabit. 

21. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Saltafc. 2. Cantat. 3. AmMlat. 4. Ambu- 
labat. 5. Jurabat. 6. Vocabat. 7. Sperabat. 8. Spe- 
rabit. 9. Ambulabit. 10. Saltabit. 11. Jurat. 12. 
Cantabat. 13. Yocat. 14. Laborabat. 15. Jurabit. 

(b) 1. He calls. 2. He is ploughing. 3. He hopes. 
4. He swears. 5. He is laboring. 8. He was laboring. 
7. He was walking. 8. He was dancing. 9. He was 
singing. 10. He was ploughing. 11. He will plough. 
12. He will call. 13. He will swear. 14. He will hope. 
15. He will labor. 16. He is walking. 17. He was 
hoping. 18. He will walk. 19. He dances. 20. He 
was fighting. 21. He will sing. 



LESSON IV. 

Verbs. — Second Conjugation. 

22. Some Yerbs have the infinitive in ere; as, morvere, 
to advise. These are said to be of 



23 — 25.] VERBS. — SECOND CONJUGATION". 



13 



The Second Conjugation. 

23. In verbs of this conjugation, 

1) The root is found by dropping the infinitive 
ending ere ; as, monere ; root, mon. 

2) The third persons singular of the present, im- 
perfect, and future tenses of the indicative are 
formed by adding to this root the following 
endings : 

Present Imperfect. Future. 



et, 



ebat. 



ebit. 







PARADIGM 






Present. 

Imperfect 

Future. 


Monere, to advise : 

Mon-et, he, she, or 
Mon-ebat, " " 
Mon-ehit, " " 


root, mon. 

it advises (is advi 
" was "advising. 
" will advise. 


sing). 



24. 



Vocabulary. 

Docere, 

Dolere, 

Flere, 

Manere, 

Movere, 

Nere, 

Respondere, 

Rldere, 

Timere, 



to teach 
to grieve 
to weep, 
to remain, 
to move 
to spin, 
to answer 
to laugh 



(docile), 
(doleful). 



(move), 

(respond), 
(ridicule). 



to fear, to be afraid (timid). 



25. Exercises. 
(a) 1. Eidet. 2, Docet. . 3. Bespondet. 4. Dolet. 
5. Dolebat. 6. Nebat. 7. Flebat. 8. Manehat. 9. Mo- 
vebat, 10. Movebit. 11. Dolebit, 12. Docebit. 13. 
Eespondebit. 14. Eidebit. 15. Movet. 16. Docebat, 
17. Manebit. 18. Flet. 19. Eidebat. 20. Nebit. 



14 FIRST LATIN" BOOK [26, 27 

21. Pugnat. 22. Manet, 23. Pugnabat. 24. Mane- 
bat. 25. Pugnabit. 26. Manebit. 27. Oantat. 28. 
Timet, 29. Saltabat. 30. Kespondebat. 31. Ambu- 
iabit. 32. Timebit. 33. Laborat. 34. Movet, 35. 
Saltabat. 36. Docebat. 37. Yocabit. 38. Dolebit. 

(b) 1. He remains. 2. He moves. 3. He weeps. 4. 
He spins. 5. He was spinning. 6. He was laughing. 
7. He was teaching. 8. He was grieving. 9. He was 
answering. 10. He will answer. 11. He will weep. 
12. He will remain. 13. He will spin. 14. He is laugh- 
ing. 15. He was weeping. 16. He will teach. 17. 
He teaches. 18. He was moving. 19. He will laugh. 

20. He dances. 21. He laughs. 22. He was call- 
ing. 23. He was weeping. 24. He walks. 25. He 
answers. 26. He was ploughing. 27. He was laugh- 
ing. 28. He will sing. 29. He will move. 



LESSON V. 

Verbs. — Third Conjugation. 

26. Some verbs have the infinitive in ere ; as, regere, 
to rule. These are said to be of 

TJie Third Conjugation. 

27. In verbs of this conjugation, 

1) The root is found by dropping the infinitive 
ending ere; as, r eg ere; root, reg. 

2) The third persons singidar of the present, im- 
perfect, and future tenses of the indicative are 
formed by adding to this root the following 
endings : 



28. 29.] VERBS. — THIRD CONJUGATION. 



15 



Present 

it, 


Imperfect 

ebat, 

PARADIGM. 


Future. 

et. 



Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 


Begere, to rule : root, reg. 

Reg-it, he, she, or it rules (is ruling). 
Reg-ebat, " " " was ruling. 
Reg-et, " " " will rule. 



28. VOCABULARY. 



Bibere, 


to drink 


(bibber ; as, wine-bibber) 


Cadere, 


to fall 


(cadence). 


Currere, 


to run 


(current). 


Discere, 


to learn 


(disciple). 


Legere, 


to read 


(legible). 


Ludere, 


to play- 


(ludicrous). 


Scrlbere, 


to write 


(scribe, scribble). 



29. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Ludit. 2. Currit. 3. Discit. 4. Discebat. 5. 
Scribebat. 6. Bibebat. 7. Bibet. 8. Cadet. 9. Leget. 
10. Legit. 11. Currebat. 12. Scribet. 13. Scribit. 
14. Ludebat. 15. Discet. 

16. Lafeorat. 17. Mo vet. 18. Cadit. 19. Yocabat. 
20. Bidebat. 21. Legebat. 22. Sperat. 23. Dolet 
24. Bibit. 25. Jurabat. 26. Flebat. 27. Cadebat. 
28. Arabit. 29. Bespondebit. 30. Lndet. 

(b) 1. He writes. 2. He drinks. 3. He falls. 4. He 
was falling. 5. He was reading. 6. He was playing. 
7. He will play. 8. He will run. 9. He will learn. 10. 
He learns. 11. He was writing. 12. He will read. 13. 
He is playing. 14. He was running. 15. He will fall. 

16. He is fighting. 17. He fears. 18. He reads. 
19. He was singing. 20. He was spinning. 21. He 
was learning. 22. He will labor. 23. He will re- 
main. 24. He will write. 



16 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[30—33. 



LESSON VI. 

Verbs. — Fourth Conjugation. 

30. Some verbs have the infinitive in Ire ; as, audire, 
to hear. These are said to be of 

The Fourth Conjugation. 

31. In verbs of this conjugation, 

1) The root is found by dropping the infinitive 
ending Ire ; as, audire; root, aud. 

2) The third persons singular of the present, imper- 
fect, and future tenses of the indicative are formed 
by adding to this root the following endings : 

Present. Imperfect Future. 

it, iebat, iet. 

PARADIGM. 



Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 


Anclire, to hear : 

Aud-it, he, she, 
Aud-iebat, " " 
Aud-iet, " " 


root, aud. 

or it hears (is hearing). 
" was hearing. 
" will hear. 



32. Vocabulary. 



Audire, 


to hear 


(audible). 


Custodlre, 


to guard 


{custody). 


Dormlre, 


to sleep 


(dormant). 


Erudlre, 


to instruct 


(erudition) 


Scire, 


to know 


{science). 


Sltlre, 


to thirst. 




Venire, 


to come. 





33. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Custodit. 2. Eiudit. 3. Sitit. 4. Sitiebat 
5. Veniebat. 6. Sciebat. 7. Sciet. 8. Audiet. 9. 
Dormiet. 10. Dormit. 11. Erudiebat. 12. Custodiet, 
13. Yenit. 14. Audiebat. 15. Erudiet. 



84.] VEBBS.— FOUB CONJUGATIONS. 17 

16. Ambiilat. 17. Docet. 18. Currit. 19. Audit 
20. Cantabat. 21. Kidebat. 22. Ludebat. 23. Dormie- 
bat. 24. Saltabit. 25. Nebit. 26. Discet. 27. Veniet. 

(b) 1. He thirsts. 2. He knows. 3. He guards. 4. 
He was guarding. 5. He was instructing. 6. He was 
coming. 7. He will come. 8. He will hear. 9. He 
will thirst. 10. He will know. 11. He hears. 12. 
He was thirsting. 13. He will instruct. 14. He sleeps. 
15. He was hearing. 16. He will guard. 

17. He walks. 18. He spins. 19. He runs. 20. He 
comes. 21. He was dancing. 22. He was teaching. 
23. He was writing. 24. He was .sleeping. 25. He will 
sing. 26. He will laugh. 27. He will play. 28. He 
will instruct. 29. He labors. 30. He was weeping. 
31. He will learn. 32. He will sleep. 



LESSON YII. 

Verbs, — Four Conjugations. — Plural Number. 

34. The Four Conjugations already noticed contain 
all the regular verbs of the Latin language : hence, 

1) In any regular verb, the root is found by drop- 
ping the infinitive ending of the conjugation 
to which it belongs. These endings in the four 
conjugations are as follows : 

Conj. I. Conj. II. Conj. III. Conj. IV. 

are, ere, ere, ire. 

a) These endings, it must be observed, differ from 
each other only in the vowel before re, which is called 
the characteristic vowel of the conjugation. The char- 
acteristic vowels in the four conjugations are as follows : 



18 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



res. 



Conj, L Conj. II. 



a, 



Conj. IIL 



Cow/. IV. 
1. 



Rem:. — These voxels occur so frequently in their respective conjuga- 
tions, that they are called favorite vowels of the conjugations. 
The third conjugation has also i as a favorite vowel, as in the 
present ending, It ; e. g., regit, he rules. 

2) In any regular verb, the third persons singular 
of the present, imperfect, and future tenses of 
the indicative are formed by adding to the root 
the endings of the conjugation to which the 
verb belongs. These endings in the four con- 
jugations are as follows : 





Pres. 


Imperf. 


Fat. 


Conj. I. 


at, 


a bat, 


abit. 


II. 


et, 


ebat, 


ebit. 


III. 


it, 


ebat, 


et. 


. jy. 


it, 


iebat, 


iet. 



85, In any regular verb, the third persons plural, in 
the tenses already noticed, ar£ formed by simply in- 
serting n before t in the endings of the third singular. 

Exc. — If i immediately precedes t, it must be changed, in the fourth 
conjugation, into in ; as, audit, he hears ; audiunt, they hear : and in the 
other conjugations into u ; as, amabit, he will love ; amabunt, they will 
love. 

PARADIGM. 





Present. 


Imperfect. 


Picture. 


"■+*{!& 


Ani-at, 


am-abat, 


a^ablt. 


Am-ant, 


am-aba?zt, 


am-abiint. 


tt 5 Sing- 
I Plur. 


Mon-et, 


mon-ebat, 


mon-ebit. 


Mon-ent, 


mon-eba?it, 


mon-ehunt. 


ra SSing. 
fPlur, 


Reg- it, 


reg-ebat, 


reg-et. 


Reg-wnt, 


reg-ebant, 


reg-ent. 


iv \ Sin s- 

(Plur, 


Aud-it, 


aud-iebat, 


aud-iet. 


Aud-iunt, 


aud-iebant, 


aud-ient. 



36, 37.] K0UNS. — NOMINATIVE CASE. 19 

36. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Saltat. 2. Saltant. 3. Ambulabat. 4, Ambu 
labant. 5. Arabit. 6. Arabunt. 7. Docet. 8. Docent. 
9, Timebat. 10. Timebant. 11. Kidebit. 12. Kide- 
bunt. 13. Ludit. 14. Ludunt. 15. Scribebat. 16. 
Scribebant. 17. Curret. 18. Current. 19. Dormit. 
20. Dormiunt. 21. Yeniebat. 22. Yeniebant. 23. 
Custodiet. 24. Custodient. 25. Yocant. 26. Dolent. 
27. Discunt. 28. Sciunt, 29. Saltabunt. 30. Move- 
bant, 31. Legebant. 32. Erudiebant. 33. Jurabunt. 
34. Manebunt. 35. Cadent. 36. Sitient. 

(b) 1. He sings. 2. They sing. 3. He was swearing. 
4. They were swearing. 5. He will labor. 6. They 
will labor. 7. He laughs. 8. They laugh. 9. He was 
spinning. 10. They were spinning. 11. He will re- 
main. 12. They will remain. 13. He runs. 14. They 
run. 15. He was playing. 16. They were playing. 
17. He will drink. 18. They will drink/ 19. He 
knows. 20. They know. 21. He was guarding. 22. 
They were guarding. 23. He will hear. 24. They 
will hear. 25, They walk. 26. They answer. 27. 
They write. 28. They sleep. 29. They were plough- 
ing. 30. They were teaching. 31. They were learn- 
ing. 32. They were instructing. 33. They will sing. 
34. They will weep. 85. They will read. 36. They 
will come. 



LESSON YIII. 
Nouns. — Nominative Case. 

37. Ik Latin, as in English, all names, whether of 
persons, places, or things, are called Nouns ; as, Ccesar, 
puer, a boy, &e. 



20 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [38 — 44 

Rem. 1. — Names of individual persons or objects are called proper 
nouns; as, Ccesar ; Roma, Rome. 

Rem. 2. — Names apjDlicable to persons or objects, not as individuals, 
but as members of a class, are called common norms ; as, equus, 
a horse (a name applicable to all animals of this class). 

88. All nouns have gender, number, person, and case, 

39. The Gender of a noun is either masculine, femi 
nine, common, or neuter. 

40. In Latin, as in English, all nouns denoting ob 
jects which have sex, except such names of animals as 
are applicable to both sexes, are, 

1) Masculine, when they denote male beings ; as, 
homines, men ; puer, a boy ; leones, lions. 

2) Feminine, when they denote female beings; 
as, mulier, a woman ; puelld, a girl ; lecena, a 
lioness. 

3) Common, when they apply alike to both sexes ; 
as, parens, a parent (either male or female)] 
testis, a witness (either male or female). 

41. "When gender is employed to denote sex, as in 
the cases just noticed, it is called natural gender. 

42. In nouns denoting objects without sex {neuter 
in English), and in most names applicable to animals 
of both sexes, the gender in Latin is entirely inde- 
pendent of sex, and is accordingly called grammatical 
gender. 

Some of these nouns are grammatically masculine ; 
some, grammatically feminine ; and some, J^mmati- 
cally neuter. 

43. The grammatical gender of nouns is determined 
partly by their signification, but principcdly by their 
endings. 

44. The gereral rules for ascertaining the grammati- 
cal gender of nouns, independently of their endings, 
are : 



45 — 49.] NOUNS. — NOMINATIVE CASE. 21 

1) Most names of rivers, winds, and months are 
masculine ; as, Bhenus, the Rhine ; auster, the 
south wind : Aprilis, April. 

2) Most names of countries, towns, islands, and 
trees are feminine ; as JEgyptus, Egypt ; Roma, 
Rome ; Dllos, name of an island ; laurus, the 
laurel-tree. 

3) Indeclinable nouns* and clauses used as nouns, 
are neuter ; as, fas, right ; nihil, nothing. 

Gender, as determined by the endings of nouns, will be noticed in 
connection with the several declensions. 

45. The Numbers and Persons are the same in Latin 
as in English. The first person denotes the speaker: 
the second, the person spoken to ; and the third, the per- 
son spoken of. The singular number denotes one ; and 
the plural, more than one. 

46. The Cases of Latin nouns are six in number, 
viz. : Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, Vocative, 
and Ablative. 

47. The^ase of a noun is indicated by its ending ; 
and the formation of its several cases is called Be 
clension. 

48. The Nominative Case corresponds to the nomina- 
tive in English, both in name and use ; e. g., 

Puer luclit, the boy plays. 

49. Kule of Syntax.! — The subject of a finite 
(i. e. not infinitive) verb is put in the nominative. 

Rem. 1. — Thus, in the example, puer is in the nominative by this rule. 
Rem. 2. — The subject stands before the verb, as in English. 

* Such as have but one form for all cases and both numbers. 
\ Rules for the government and agreement of words are called Rules 
of Syntax, 



22 FIRST LATI^T BOOK. [50 — 52. 

50. Eule of Syntax. — A finite verb must agree 
with, its subject in number ami person. 

Rem. — Thus, in the above example, ludit is in the third person singu- 
lar, to agree with its subject puer. 

(jgf" Determine which of the nouns in the following Vocabularies 
nave natural gender, and which grammatical, and apply rules. 

51. Vocabulary.* 



Caesar, m. 


Caesar, 








a celebrated Roman 


general 




Filius, m. 


son 




{filial). 


Pater, m. 


father 




{paternal), 


Puella,/. 


girl. 






Puer, m. 


boy 




{puerile). 


Vine ere, 


to conquer, 

52. Exercises. 




{vincible). 



(a) 1. Paterf docet. 2. Puer ludit. 3. Filius disce- 
bat. 4 Caesar vincebat. 5. Puer veniet. 6. Puella 
cantabat. 7. Pater scribebat. 

(b) 1. The girl will learn. 2. The fath^j will con- 
quer. 3. The boy dances. 4. The son was learning. 
5. The father was ploughing. 6. The boy was play- 
ing. 7. The girl will sing. 8. Caesar was coming. 

* Gender is indicated in the Vocabularies by m. for masculine, f. foi 
feminine, c. for common, and n. for neicter. 

f As the Latin has no article, a noun may be translated, (1) without 
the article ; as, pater, father : (2) with the indefinite article ; as, pater, a 
father : (3) with the definite article ; as, pater, the father. 



I 5 54.] no 


UNS. — NOMINATIVE 

LESSON IX. 


CASE. 


Nouns.- 


—Nominative Ccse— 


-Continued. 


53. Vocabulary.* 




Aqua,/ 


water 


{aqueous). 


Aquila,/. 


eagle 


{aquiline). 


Avis,/. 


bird. 




Cams, c. 


dog 


*emine). 


Equus, m. 


horse 


{equestrian). 


Frlia,/ 


daughter 


{filial). 


Fluere, 


to flow 


{fluent). 


Hostis, c 


enemy 


(hostile). 


Imperare 


to command 


{imperative). 


Magister, 


master, teacher 


{magisterial), 


Mater, 


mother 


(maternal). 


Mors,/. 


death 


{mortal). 


Nubes,/. 


cloud. 




Rex, 


king 


{regal). 


Serviis, m. 


slave 


{servant). 


Volare, 


to fly 


(volatile). 



23 



54. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Mors yeniet. 2. Aquila volat. 3. Hostis re- 
niebat. 4. Nubes movet. 5. Aqua fluit. 6. Cania 
ludebat. 7. Equus curret. 8. Magister erudiebat. 9. 
Eex imperabat. 

10. Avis volat. 11. Volant. 12. Servus pugnabit. 
13. Pugnabant. 14. Puer timebat. 15. Tiniebant. 
16. Puella discebat. 17. Discebant. 18. Filia dormie- 
bat. 19. Dormiebant. 

(b) 1. The bird will fly. 2. The eagle was flying. 
3. The king will come. 4. The mother will teach. 5. 
The daughter will learn. 6. The dog will run. 7. The 



* In this and the following Vocabularies, whenever the gender of a 
noun is not marked, the pupil is expected to determine it by the rules 
already given. 



24 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [55 — 57. 

slave will swear. 8. Caesar was coming. 9. The slave 
is ploughing. 

10. They were ploughing. 11. The king will con- 
quer. 12. They are conquering. 13. The dog will 
come. 14. They were coming. 15. The girl is weep- 
ing. 16. They will weep. 17. The boy is singing 
18. They will laugh. 



LESSON X. 

Nouns. — Vocative Case. 

55. The same form* of the noun which is called the 
nominative, when spoken of, is called the vocative, when 
spoken to. This corresponds to the nominative independ- 
ent in English ; e. g. 

Voc. . JSfom. 

♦Pater, puer cadet. 

J?ather (or, father), the boy will fall. 

Rem. — In very short sentences, like the above, the vocative may be 
placed either at the beginning or close ; in other cases, however, 
it is generally preceded by one or more words in the sentence. 

56. Kule of Syntax. — -The name of the person or 
thing addressed is put in the vocative. 

Rem. — The interjection is sometimes used before the name address 
ed, both in Latin and English. 

57. Vocabulary. 

Agncola, husbandman (agriculture). 

Balbiis, Balbus, a marts name. 

Cains, Caius, a marts name. 

Discipuliis, pupil (disciple). 

Mordere, to bite. 

* A single exception will be noticed in another place. 



58 J NOUN'S.— VOCATIVE CASE. 25 

O (interj.) y O, used in direct address. 

Peccare, to sin (peccant), 

Reglna, queen. 

Soror, sister. 

58. JExercises. 

(a) 1. Puer jurat. 2. mater, puer jurat. 8. Puer 
udebat. 4. Puer ludebat, magister. 5. Eex saltabat. 
h reglna, rex saltabat. 7. Mater dolebit. 8. Soror, 

mater dolebit. 9. Cards mordebit. 10. puer, earns 

mordebit. 

11. Mors veniet. 12. Balbus jurabat: 13. Jurabunt. 
14. Agricola arabit. 15. Arant. 16. Servus peccat. 
17. Peccabant. 18. Magister erudiet. 19. Hostis 
vincet. 20. Vincebant. 21. Scient. 22. Discebant. 
23. Puella legebat. 24. Eex imperabat. 25. Nubes mo- 
vet. 26. Pugnabant. 27. Yincunt. 

(b) 1. The king will conquer. 2. queen, the king 
will conquer. 3. The slave was weeping. 4^ Father, 
the slave was weeping. 5. The boy is swearing {swears), 
6. Master, the boy is swearing {swears). 7. The dog 
will bite. 8. Brother, the dog will bite. 9. They will 
dance. 10. Mother, they will dance. 11. The master 
will hear. 12. Sister, the master will hear. 13. The 
horse will run. 14. Daughter, the horse will run. 15. 
Death will come. 16. Death will come, Icing. 

17. Caius is ploughing. 18. They will plough. 19. 
Balbus was fighting. 20. They are fighting. 21. The 
girl was writing. 22. They will learn. 23. The pupil 
will learn. 24. The master is teaching. 25. The queen 
is weeping. 26. They will weep. 27. They were read- 
ing. 28. The eagle was flying. 29. The king will 
command. 30. The mother will teach. 31. The king 
is conquering. 32. The father will come. 
2 



26 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[59, 60. 



LESSON XL 
Nouns, — Apposition. — Modified Sublet. 

59. The subject of a proposition may have a noun 
denoting the same person or thing connected with it to 
explain or limit its meaning. The subject is then said 
to be modified by the limiting noun ; e. g. 

Subject not modified. Subject modified. 

1. Latinus regnabat. 2, Latinus rex regnabat. 

Latinus was reigning. Latinus the king was reigning. 

Kem. 1. — Hex, in the above example, limits Latinus ; i. e. it shows 
that the predicate regnabat is not affirmed of every one who may 
have borne the name Latinus, but only of Latinus the king. Rex 
is in the same case as the subject, i. e. nominative, and is said to 
be in apposition with it. 

Rem. 2. — The noun in apposition is generally placed after the noun 
which it limits, as in the above example ; if, however, it is emphar 
tic, it is placed before that noun. 



60. Vocabulary. 




Auriim, 


gold. 




Crescere, 


{ to grow, ) 
t to wax (as moon) S 


(crescent), 


Faustulus, 

Latinus, 

Lavinia, 


Faustulus, 

an Italian shepherd. 

Latinus, 

a king of Latium. 

Lavinia, 

daughter of Latinus, 




Luna, 


moon 


(lunar). 


Mlcare, 


to glitter, to shine. 




Miles, 
Numa, 

Pastor, 


soldier 
Numa, 

second king of Rome. 
shepherd 


{military), 
(pastor, pastoral)* 



61, 62.] NOUNS. — GENITIVE CASE. 27 

RegnarS, to reign (regnant, reign). 

Tullia, * Tullia, 

a queen of Rome. 
Victoria, Victoria, 

queen of England. 



61. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Balbus dormiebat. 2. Balbus servus dormit. 
3. Latinus regnabat. 4. Latinus rex vincebat. 5. Tul- 
lia cantabat. 6. Tullia regina saltabit. 7. Cains pastor 
cantabit. 

8. Luna crescit. 9. Aurum micat. 10. Lavinia 
regina regnabat. 11. Currebant. 12. Current. 13. 
Pastor ridebit. 14. Eidebant. 15. Canis inordebit. 
16. Mordebunt. 17. Puella nebit. 18. Nebunt. 

(b) 1. Numa was reigning. 2. King Numa was 
reigning. 3. Faustulus a shejiherd v^as singing. 4. 
Queen Victoria was reigning. 

5. The boy was ploughing. 6. They were playing. 
7. They will write. 8. The queen was weeping. 9. 
They are weeping. 10. The soldier will fight. 11. 
The girl will learn. 12. The daughter is spinning. 
13. They will spin. 14. The boy will fight. 15. They 
will fight. 



LESSON XII. 

■Nouns. — Genitive Case. — Modified Subject. 

62. Nouns in Latin are declined in five different 
ways, and are accordingly divided into five classes, 
called Declensions, distinguished from each other by the 
following 



28 FIRST LATI^T BOOK. [63, t)i 



GENITIVE ENDINGS. 



Dec. I. 


Dec. IL Dec. IIL 


Dec. IV. Dec. V. 


ae, 


I, Is, 


us, el.* 




EXAMPLES 






Nominative. 


Genitive. 


Dec. I. 


Musa, a muse, 


musae, of a muse. 


H. 


Servus, a slave, 


servl, of a slave. 


III. 


Honor, an honor, 


honoris, of an honor. 


IV. 


Fruetus, a fruit, 


f. met us, of a fruit 


V. 


Dies, a day, 


diel, of a day. 



Rem. — The genitive endings are usually added to the word after the 
ending of the nominative is dropped ; but, as this is not always 
the case, it becomes necessary, in order to decline a noun correctly, 
to know both the nominative and the genitive : accordingly, both 
these forms are given in the Vocabularies. 

63. The Genitive Case expresses possession, and the 
various relations denoted by the preposition of, and ac- 
cordingly corresponds both to the English Possessive, 
and the English Objective with of; as, regis corona, the 
king's crown (or the crown of the king) ; amor gloriae, 
the love of glory. 

64. The subject of a proposition may have a noun 
denoting a different person or thing connected with it, to 
explain or limit its meaning. The subject is then said 
to be modified by such noun ; e. g. 

Subject not modified. Subject modified. 

1. Filius regnabit. 2. Regis filius regnabit. 

The son will reign. The son of the king will reign. 

Rem. — The genitive regis (of the king), in the above example, modi 
fies filius (the son) ; L e. it shows that the predicate regnabit 

* In this ending e is long except in spei, fidei, and rei. 



65, 66.] NOUNS. — MODIFIED SUBJECT. 29 

(will reign) is not affirmed of every son, but only of the son of 
the king. 

a) In the example, the limiting genitive stands be- 
fore the noun which it limits. This seems to be the 
more common order, when no emphasis is intended, 
though we often find it reversed. 

b) If the noun which is limited by the genitive is 
emphatic, or is a monosyllable, it generally stands before 
the genitive ; e. g. 

1. Cicero, pater patriae. 

Cicero, the father of (his) country. 

2. Lex naturae. 

The laiv of nature. 

Hem. — In the first example, pater is emphatic, and in the second, lex 
is a monosyllable ; they accordingly stand before their genitives. 

65. Eule of Syntax. — A noun limiting the mean- 
ing of another noun is put, 

1) In the same case as that noun, when it denotes 
the same person or thing; e. g. Latlnus rex, 
Latinus the king (59, Eem. 1). 

2) In the genitive, when it denotes a different 
person or thing ; e. g. Regis films, the son of 
the king. 



66. Vocabulary * 




AgTicola, 


Gen. agricolae, 


husbandman (agriculture) 


Amicus, 


" amiei, 


friend (amicable). 


Balbus, 


" Balbl, 


Balbus, a man's name. 


Cams, 


" Cail, 


Caius, a man's name. 


Cams, 


" cams, 


dog (canine). 


Filia, 


" flliae, 


daughter. 



* The genitive is given in the Vocabulary ; and the pupil may deter- 
mine from the genitive ending to which declension the noun belongs. 



so 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[67 



Filius, 


Gen. filii, 


son 




(filial). 


Frater, 


it 


fratris, 


brother 




(fraternal), 


Latinus* 


a 


Latlnl, 


Latinus, 












a king of Latium. 


Miles, 


a 


mllitis, 


soldier 




(military). 


Pater, 


a 


patris^ 


father 




(paternal). 


Puer, 


a 


puerl, 


boy- 




(puerile). 


Reglna, 


a 


reglnae, 


queen. 






Rex, 


a 


regis, 


king 




(regal). 


Servus, 


a 


servl, 


slave 




(servant) 


Tullia, 


u 


Tulliae, 


Tullia, 












a queen 


of Rome 








67. 


Exercises. 







(a) 1. Servus dorniit. 2. BaTbi servus dormiet. 3. 
Filius ludit 4. Regis filius ludebat. 5. Reglnae pater 
docebat. 6. Filia ridebat. 7. Filia reglnae ridebat. 
8. Amicus regis cadet. 

9. Balbus servus veniebat. 10. BaTbi servus dormit. 
11. Pastor cantabit. 12. Canis pastoris mordebit. 13. 
Mordebunt. 14. Filia pastoris nebit. 15. Regis amicus 
timebit. 16. Caius, regis amicus, timebit. 17. Tullia, 
regis filia, cantabat. 

(b) 1. The brother will conquer. 2. The king wil] 
conquer. 3. The brother of the Icing will conquer. 4. 
The daughter of the king is singing. 5. The queen 
will read. 6. The daughter of the queen will read. 
7. The father of Balbus was laughing. 

8. The shepherd's dog (the dog of the shepherd) will 
bite. 9. The boy's dog will bite. 10. The husband 
man's dog will play. 11. The soldier will fight. 12. 
The son of the soldier will fight. 13. Latinus the king 
was conquering. 14. The shepherds daughter (the 
daughter of the shepherd) is spinning. 



68—70.] NOUNS. — ACCUSATIVE CASE. 31 

LESSON XIIL 

Nouns. — Accusative Case. — Direct Object of Predicate. 

68. Every noun consists of two distinct parts, viz : — 

1) The Boot, or that part which remains un- 
changed throughout the various cases of both 
numbers , as mus in musd, musae, and musdm. 

2) The Endings, which are added to the root to 
form these cases; thus, in the forms just no- 
ticed, viz., musa, musae, and musam, the end- 
ings are a, ae, and dm. 

69. In any noun, of whatever declension, 

1) The root may be found by dropping the end- 
ing of the genitive ' singular (62) ; as, musd, 
Gen. musae; root, mus: servus, Gen. servl; root, 
sew: honor, Gen. honoris; root, honor, &c. 

2) Any case may be formed (with a few excep- 
tions) by adding to this root the proper end- 
ing. 

70. L) The Accusative Singular of neuter nouns is the 

same as the Nominative; e. g., Nom. sceptrum, 
a sceptre ; Accus. sceptrum. 
2) The Accusative Singular of masculine and femi- 
nine nouns is formed from the root, by adding 
one* of the following 

ACCUSATIVE ENDINGS. 



Dec. I. Dec. II. Dec. III. Dec. IV. Dec. V. 

am, urn, em, urn, em. 



* If the noun is of the first declension, the learner will, of course, add 
the ending given for the first declension ; if of the second, the ending 
given for the second ; and so on. 



82 



FIKST LATIN BOOK. 



[71—75. 



EXAMPLES. 



f 

j 


Genitive, 


Root Ending. 


Accusative, 


Dec. I. 


Musae, of a muse ; 


mus -am; 


musam, a muse. 


II. 


Servi, of a slave ; 


serv -um; 


servum, a slave. 


III. 


Honoris, of an honor , 


honor- em; 


honorem, an honor. 


1 iv. 


Fructus, of a fruit ; 


fruct -um; 


fructum, a fruit. 


1 v. 


Diel, of a day ; 


di -em; 


diem, a day. 



71. The accusative case corresponds very nearly to 
the English, objective, and is used after transitive verts 
and certain prepositions. 

72. "When a verb represents its subject as acting 
upon some other person or thing, it is said to be tran- 
sitive ; and the person or thing upon which the action 
is exerted, is called its direct object; e. g. 

Servius imperium administrat. 
{Servius the government administers) 
Servius administers the government. 

73. In English the object is placed after the verb ; 
thus, government is placed after administers; but m Latin 
the object precedes the verb; thus, imperium precedes 
administrat 

74. Eule of Syntax. — The Direct Object of an 
action is put in the accusative. 

75. Vocabulary. 



Aedlflcare, 




to build 


(edifice). 


Dies, 


Gen. diel, 


day. 




Dommiis, 


" dominl, 


master, as owner 


(domineer) 


Epistola, - 


" epistolae,/ 


letter 


(epistle). 


Laudare, 




to praise 


(laud). 


Monstrare, 




to show. 




Mors, 


" mortis,/. 


death 


(mortal). 



76.J 


NOUNS. — a 


1CCUSATTVE CASE. 




Muriis, 


Gen. murl, m. 


wall 


(muraT). 


Occidere, 




to kill. 




Puella, 


" puellae, 


girl. 




Senatus, 


r< senatus, 5 


m. senate 


(senate). 


Sperare, 




to hope for. 




Terr ere, 




to terrify. 




Tiinere, 




to fear 


(timid). 


Via, 


" viae,/. 


way, road. 




Videre, 




to see. 




Vltare, 




to shun. 






76. 


Exercises. 





33 



(a) 1, (%ius>pmllam laudat. 2. Puer mvrum aeJifl 
cabat. 3. Rex imSrum ridet. 4. Puer mortem vitat. 
5. Puella diem sperabat. 6. Puella viam monstrabit. 
7. Servus dominum occldit. 

8. Puella puerum laudat. § 9. Eex senatum timet. 
10. Puer canem timebit^ 1A. Epistolam seribit. 12. 
Puer canem occidebat. <^B. Mortem vitant. 14. Mor- 
tem timent. »15. Balbus seryus dominum timebit. 
16. Balbum servum docent. 17. Balbi filius puerum 
laudabat. 

(b) 1. The boy will stow the road. 2. Balbus is 
building a wall 3. Caius was praising the boy. 4. 
The slave is showing the way. 5. The king hopes for 
the day. 6. The girl will shun the dog. 

7. The dog will bite the girl, 8. Father is writing 
a letter. 9. The father will praise the daughter. 10. 
They are building a wall. 11. They are killing the 
slave. 12. The king's son will play. 13. The king 
fears death. 14. The death of the father will terrify 
the son. 



2* 



34 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[77—79. 



LESSON XIY. 

Nouns, — Accusative, continued, — Adverbial Modifiers, 

77. Eule of Syntax. — Certain qualifying words, 
called adverbs, are often connected with, verbs, merely 
to modify tlieir meaning ; e. g., 

1. Miles foriiter pugnat. 2. Miles non pugnat. 
(The soldier bravely fights,) (The soldier not fights,) 
The soldier fights bravely. The soldier does not fight. 

Rem. — In these examples, fortifier (bravely) and non (not) are adverbs 
modifying pugnat. In Latin the adverb generally precedes th<* 
verb, as in these instances. 

78. Vocabulary.* 



Anguis, anguis, c. 


snake, serpent. 




Christianus, I, m. 


Christian 


( Christian) 


Fortiter, 


bravely. 
la? %■ 




Lex, legis,/. 


(legal). 


Mater, matris, 


mother 


(maternal). 


Negligere, 


to disregard 


(neglect). 


Non, 


not. 




Pastor, pastoris, 


shepherd 


(pastor). 


Pecunia, ae,/. 


money 


(pecuniary) 


Servius, I, 


Servius, a maris narm 


3 £ 


Vox, vocis,/. 


voice 

79. Exercises. 


(vocal). 



(a) 1. Servius pugnat. 2. Servius fortiter pugnat. 
3. Mors Christianum non\ terret. 4. Agricola anguem 
timebit.. 5. Agricola anguem non timebit. 6. Pater 

* In this and the following Vocabularies, either the genitive or its 
ending is given immediately after each substantive. 

f In translating non before a verb, place 'i >t' after the English 
tense-sign; thus, non terret, does not terrify, or is not terrifying. 



80, 81.] NOUNS. — DATIVE CASE. 35 

filiam audiebat. 7. Pater filii vocem audiebat. 8. Wa- 
ter Yocem negliget. 9. Mater filiae vocem non negliget. 

10. Cains legem negligebat. 11. Christianus pecuniam 
negliget. 12. Pecuniam negligent. 13. Puerum decent. 
14. Christianus mortem non timet. 

(b) 1. The husbandman will fight. 2. The husband- 
man will not fight. 3. Servius fears death. 4. Servius 
does not fear death. 5. The slave hears the voice of 
(his) master. 6. The boy was killing the dog. 7. The 
boy was killing the shepherd's dog. 8. The dog will 
not bite. 9. Servius will avenge the death of the king. 

10. They do not fear death. 11. They will fight 
bravely. 12. Caius is teaching the boy. 13. The 
daughter of the queen is singing. 14. They did not 
hear (were not hearing). 15. They will not disregard 
the law. 



LESSON XV, 
Nouns. — Dative Case. — Indirect Obf&ct'&f Predicate. 

80. The Dative Case in Latin corresponds to the ob- 
jective with to or for in English ; as, musa, a muse ; 
Dat. musae, to or for a muse. 

81. The Dative Singular of a nouii may be formed by 
adding to its root one of the following 

DATIVE ENDINGS. \ 



Dec. I. Dec. 11. Dec. HI. Dec. IV. Dec. V. 
ae, o, I, ui,* el.f 



* Neuter nouns of the fourth declension are exceptions, as they* have 
Ihe dative singular like the nominative. 

f In this ending e is long except in spei, fidei, and rel. 



86 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [82—84 

EXAMPLES. 



Genitive. 


Hoot. Ending. Dative. 


Dec. I. Musae, of a muse; 


mus - ae ; musae, to or for a muse. 


II: Servl, of a slave ; 


serv - o ; servo, " 


" a slave. 


III. Honoris, of honor; 


h 5 n o r - I ; honorl, " 


" mi honor. 


IV. Fructus, of fruit; 


fruct -hi; fructui, " 


M a fruit. 


V. Diei, of day; 


di - el ; diei, " 


" a day. 



82. The person or thing to or for which any thing is, 
or is done, is called an indirect object; e. g. ? 

Baltms jpuero viam monstrat. 
{BaTbus to the boy the way shows.) 
Balbus shows the way to the boy. 

Eem. — In the example it -will be observed that the indirect object 
precedes the direct. This is the more common order, though no* 
unfrequently reversed. 

83. Eule of Syntax — Any transitive verb may 
take the accusative of the direct object and the dative oi 
the indirect object. 

84. YOCABULABY. 



(close}. 



Domus, domus, or doml^f. house (domestic). 

Evertere, to pull down, to overthrow. 

lndlcere, to declare (as war). 

Leo, leonls, m. lion. 

Miles, Itis, m. (rarely/), soldier (military). 

* Dare is of the first conjugation, with a short, contrary to the gene 
ral rule. 



Accusare, 


to accuse. 


Bellum, I, n. 


war. 


Claudere, 


to shut 


Condere, 


to found, to build 


Dare,* 


to give 



85.] 



NOUNS. — INDIRECT OBJECT. 



87 



Porta, ae,/. 

Reperlre, 
Romulus, I, 



Sceptrum, 1, n. 
Urbs, is,/. 



gate 

to find. 
Romulus, 

the founder of Rome, 
sceptre, 
city 



S (portal), 
(porter). 



(urbane). 



85. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Pastor viam monstrat. 2. Pastor puero viam 
monstrat. 3. Puer viam monstrabit. 4. Puer pastori 
viam monstrabit. 5. Servus portam claudet. 6. Ser- 
vus regi portam claudet. 

7. Komiilus urbem condebat. 8. Agricola anguem 
reperit. 9. Miles agricolae domum evertet. 10. Eegis 
sceptrum videbant. 11. Militi viam monstrant. 12. 
Leonenitinicbant. 

(b) l**Che slave is building a wall. 2. The slave is 
building a wall for the king. 3. The boy was showing 
the road. 4. The boy was showing the road to the 
husbandman. 5. The husbandman is showing the 
road to the boy. 6. They will declare war against 
the city. 

7. They are founding a city for the queen. 8. They 
will not disregard the law. 9. They were writing for 
the. king. 10. They will accuse the boy. 11. They 
were praising the queen. 12. They will praise the 
queen's daughter. 13. The king will declare war 
against the senate. 14. The king will give the city to 
(his) son. 



38 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [86—89 

LESSON XVI. 

Nouns. — Ablative Case. — Modified Predicate. 

86. The Ablative Case in Latin, corresponds to the oh 
jective with from, by, in, or with in English ; as, inusd, 
a muse ; Abl. musa, from a muse, or by, in, or with a 
muse.* 

87. The Ablative Singular of a noun may be formed 
by adding to its root one of the following 

ABLATIVE ENDINGS. 



Dec. I. Dec. II Dec. III. Dec. IV. Dec. Y. 
a, 6, e,f u, e. 



EXAMPLES. 



1 

Genitive. 


Hoot. Ending. Ablative. 


Dec. I. Musae, of a muse ; 


mus -a; musa, /rom, 


z?2, &c, a muse. 


II. Servi, of a slave ; 


serv - o; servo, " 


" " a slave. 


III. Honoris, of honor ; 


h o n 6 r - e ; honore, " 


" " honor. 


IV. Fructus, of fruit; 


fruct - u; fruetu, " 


" " fruit. 


V. Diei, of day ; 


di - e ; die, " 


" " day. 



88. The predicate may be modified by a noun denot- 
ing the time of an action ; e. g., 

Hierrie ursiis dormit. 
{In winter the bear sleeps!) 
The bear sleeps (when ?) in winter. 

89. Kule of Syntax. — The time when is put in the 

* The preposition is, however, often expressed before the ablative, as 
it is before the objective in English. 

f As an exception to this, a few nouns of the third declension form 
the ablative in l, as we shall see by-and-by. 



90 — 93.] NOUNS. — MODIFIEr PREDICATE. 



39 



ablative without a preposition (i. e., without any word 
for the English at, in, &c.) 

Rem. — The ablative of time often stands first in a sentence, as in the 
example. 

90. The predicate may be modified by a noun denot- 
ing the place of its action ; e. g., 

Ursiis in antro dormit. 
(The hear in a cave sleeps.) 
The bear sleeps (where ?) in a cave. 

91. Eule of Syntax. — The name of a place where 
any thing is, or is done, when not a town (227), is gener- 
ally put in the ablative with a preposition. 

fl^f° The pupil, in preparing his exercises, should imitate the ordet 
ir the examples, whenever nothing is said on the point. 



92. Vocabulary. 






Aestas, atis,/. 


summer. 




Ager, agrl, m. 


field 


(agriculture). 


Antrum, I, n. 


cave. 




Asmus, I, m. 


ass. 




Avis, is,/. 


bird 


(aviary). 


Dilaniare, 


to :ear in pieces. 




Equus, I, m. 


horse 


(equestrian). 


Hiems, eniis,/ 


winter. 




Hortus, I, m." 


garden 


(horticulture). 


In (prep, with abl), 


in. 




Luciis, I, 772. 


grove. 




MonS, tlS, 772. 


mountain. 




Pratiim, I, n. 


meadow. 




UrSUS, 1, 777. 


bear. 





93. Exercises. 
(a) 1. Ursus dormit. 2. Ursus in antro dormit. 3 
Canis currit. 4. Cards in horio currit. 5. Puer lude- 
bat. 6. Puer in agro ludebat. 7. Hieme ursus in 



40 FIKST LATIN BOOK, [94, 95, 

antro dormiet. 8. Komulus urbem condebat. 9. Ko- 
mulus urbem in monte condebat. 10. Hieme ursus in 
antro dormit. 

11. Servus re^em occidet. 12. Leo asinum dilauiat. 
13. Eex reginam accusabat. 14. Eegina filiam docebit. 
15. In luco ludunt. 16. Leo equum dilaniabit. 

(b) 1. The boy is playing. 2. The boy is playing in 
the garden. 3. The dog is running. 4. The dog is 
running in the meadow. 5. The bird will not sing. 6. 
The bird will not sing in winter. 7. The daughter was 
singing in the grove. 8. They will walk in the field. 
9. They will play in summer. 

10. Balbus will fear Caius. 11. They will fear the 
queen. 12. He was building a wall. 13. They are 
building a wall. 14. The queen is walking in the field. 
15. The queen's mother was weeping. 16. The slave 
is showing the boy (to the boy) the way. 17. The slave 
was shutting the gate. 18. The boy will shut the gate. 



LESS01N XVII. 

Nouns. — First declension* 

94. To the First Declension belong all nouns which 
have the genitive in ae (62). They all end in a (except 
a few Greek nouns. See 174). 

95. Latin nouns of this declension are grammatically 
feminine; unless their • gender is determined by their 
signification, according to previous rules (40, 44). 

* Haying learned in the previous Lessons the use of the several case* 
of the Latin language, the pupil Tvill now find little difficulty in master- 
ing thejftytf declensions (62) in all the cases of both numbers. 



96—98.] NOUNS.— FIRST DECLENSION. 



41 



96. We have already learned that the root of a 
noun may always be found from the genitive singular 
(69, 1), but, as it may also be formed without much 
difficulty from the nominative, it will be well for us to 
notice, in connection with the different declensions, the 
manner in which this may be done. 

97. In the First Declension, 

1) The root may be found by dropping the nomi- 
native ending a, as musd ; root, mus (69, 1). 

2) Any noun may he declined (i. e., all the cases 
of both numbers may be formed) by adding 
to the root the following 



CASE-ENDINGS. 



Nom. 


Gen. 


Dat. 


Accus. 


Voc. 


Abl. 


Sing, a, 


ae, 


ae, 


am, 


a, 


a, 


Plur. ae, 


arum, 


Is, 


as, 


ae, 


IS. 



PARADIGM. 



Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom. Mus-a, a muse. 


Nom. Mus-ae, muses. 


Gen. Mus-ae, of a muse. 


Gen. Mus-arum, of muses. 


Dat. Mus-ae, to, for a muse. 


Dat. Mus-Is, to, for muses. 


Ace. Mus-am, a muse. 


Ace. Mus-as, muses. 


Voc. Mus-a, muse. 


Voc. Mus-ae, muses. 


Abl. Mus-a, from, &c. a muse. 


Abl. Mus-is, from, &c. muses. 



98. Vocabulary.* 

Aperlre, to open, to uncover 

Aquila, ae, eagle 

Caput, Itis, n. head 

Columba, ae, dove. 



(aperture), 
(aquiline), 
(capital). 



* The pupil must apply rules for gender. 



42 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[9! 



Corona, ae, 
Dolor, oris, m. 
Luscmia, ae, 

Rldere, 
Sentlre, 
Vinclre, 



garland, crown 
pain, grief, sorrow 
nightingale. 

S to laugh, ) 

f to laugh at ) 

5 to feel, to perceive 

( by the senses. 

^ to bind, 

( t© bind up. 

99. Exercises. 



(coronation), 
(dolorous). 

(ridicule) 



(a) 1. P-uellae saltant. 2. Aquilae volant. 3. Ee- 
gina puellas docebit. -4. Tulliae filiae ridebunt. 5. 
Tulliae filias ridebit. 6. Aquila columbas occidet. 
7. Lusciniae cantabant. 

8. Balbus vocem audit. 9. Cams dolorem vitabit. 
10. Puellae dolorem sentiunt. 11. Servus epistolas 
scribit. 12. Puer caput vineiebat. 13. Eegina puellae 
coronam dabit. 14, Eegina puellis coronas dabit. 

(b) 1. The girl was writing a letter. 2. The girls 
are writing letters. 3. The queen will call (her) daugh- 
ter. 4. The queen is calling (her) daughters. 5. Tul- 
lia will give a garland to her daughter. 

6. They will give garlands to (their) daughters. 7. 
He is reading the queen's letter. 8. They are reading 
the girls 7 letters (the letters of the girls). 9. They 
will show the way to the queen. 10. The husband- 
man will shut the .gate. 11. The doves will fly. 12. 
The nightingales are singing. 13. The boy hears (his) 
father's voice. 14. The boy is opening the letters. 
15. The slave will open (his) master's letters. 



100 — 103.] jsroujsrs. — second declension". 43 

LESSON XYIII. 

Nouns. — Second Declension. — Nouns in us and iim. 

100. To the Second Declension belong all nouns which 
have the genitive singular in % (62). They end in us, 
um, er, and vr (except a few Greek nouns. See 174). 

101. In this declension nouns in um are grammati- 
cally neuter ; and the rest (with a few exceptions*) are 
grammatically masculine ; unless their gender is deter- 
mined by their signification, according to previous 
rules (40, 44). 

102. In nouns in us and um, of this declension, the 
root is found by dropping the nominative ending ; as, 
serv-as, a slave; root, sew : regn-um, a kingdom; root, 
regn. 

103. Nouns in us are declined by adding to the root 
the following 

CASE-ENDINGS. 



Nom. 


Gen. 


Dat. 


Accus. 


Voc. 


AM. 


Sing, us, 


h 


°, 


um, 


e,f 


o, 


Plur. I, 


oriim, 


Is, 


OS, 


*j 


Is. 



* It has not been thought best to burden the memory of the learner 
with lists of exceptions, at this early stage of his study. Accordingly, 
general rules, covering the great majority of cases, are given for immedi- 
ate and constant use ; thus the pupil may fix the general principles of 
the language, and become better prepared to understand and recollect 
the exceptions as they occur in his lessons. Such exceptions, whether 
pertaining to gender or other subjects, will be marked in the Vocabula- 
ries. 

f The vocative singular, in nouns in us of this declension, is not like 

the nominative (see 55 and note). Proper nouns in ius drop the ending 
e in the vocative singular ; as, Tullius (proper name), Voc. Tulll. Films, 
a son, and genius, a guardian angel, also drop the ending e in the voca- 
tive sinsn-ilar. 



44 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[104. 



PARADIGM. 



Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom. Serv-us, a slave. 


Nom. Serv-I, slaves. 


Gen. Serv-I, of a slave. 


Gen. Serv-orum, of slaves. ~ 


Dat. Serv-o, to, for a slave. 


Dat. Serv-Is, to, /or slaves. ' 


Ace. Serv-fim, a slave. 


Ace. Serv-os, slaves. 


Yoc. Serv-e, slave. 


Yoc. Serv-I, slaves. 


Abl. Sevy-G, from, by a slave. 


Abl. Serv-Is, /row?, 02/ slaves. 



Rem. — It will be well for the pupil to accustom himself to compare 
the several cases with each other, and to associate together such 
as are alike, or nearly so. 

104. Nouns in urn are declined by adding to the root 
the following 

NEUTER CASE-ENDINGS. 





Nom. 


Gen. 


Dat. 


A ecus. 


Voc. 


Abl. 


Sing. 


urn, 


h 


6, 


urn, 


urn, 


o, 


Plur. 


a, 


orum, 


is, 


a, 


a, 


is. 



PARADIGM. 



Singular. 


Plural. 


Norn. Regn-um, a kingdom. 


Nom. Regn-a, kingdoms. 


Gen. Regn-I, of a kingdom. 


Gen. Regn-orum, of kingdoms. 


Dat. Regn-o, to, for a kingdom. 


Dat. Regn-Is, to, /or kingdoms. 


Ace. Regn-um, a kingdom. 


Ace. Regn-a, kingdoms. 


Voc. Regn-um, kingdom. 


Voc. Regn-a, kingdoms. 


Abl. Regii-o,/row?, by a kingdom. 


Abl. R e gn-ls,/rom, oy kingdom s. 



Rem. 1. — In neuters of all declensions, the www., «cc, and wc. are alike 
in each number, and in the plural end in a, as in the paradigm 
just given. 

Rem. 2. — Neuters in um are declined like masculines in us of this 
declension, except in the cases just mentioned {nom., ace, and voc). 
Compare paradigms. 



105, 106.] NOUNS. — SECOND DECLENSION. 



45 



105. VOCABULAEY. 



Agnus, I, 
Discipulus, I, 
Dominus, I, 


lamb, 
pupil 
master, as owner 


(disciple), 
(domineer) . 


Gerere, 

Haedus, I, 
Lupus, T, 
Magister, tri, 


^ to carry on, 

( to wage (as war). 

kid. 

wolf. 

master, as teacher 


(magisterial) 



106. Exercises. 

{a) 1. Cains Balbum docebat. 2. Balbus Caium 
docebat. 3. Servus domimim occidet. 4. Servi domi- 
nos timent. 5. Balbus filios laudabit. 6. Seryus do- 
mini filios timet. 7. Servi dominorum filios timebunt. 

8. Puellae d^lorem sentiebant. 9. Servi muros aedi- 
ficabunt. 10. Pastor filiis canem dabit. 11. Pastor 
filiabus* haedum dabit. 

(b) 1, Balbus will instruct the slave. 2. Caius will 
punish the pupil. 3. They will instruct (their) pupils. 
4. The slaves will fear JBalbus. 5. The master was 
punishing (his) slaves. 6. Caius will kill the wolf. 7. 
Wolves will kill lambs. 8. The wolves do not see (see 
not) the kids. 

9. Caius was waging war. 10. They are waging 
wars. 11. Balbus will fight. 12. The sons of Balbus 
will fight. 13. The master is Teaching the boys. 14. 
The master is teaching his pupils in the garden. 15. 
The girls were walking in the garden. 16. He was 
playing in the meadow. 17. They will play in the 
fields. 18. The slaves were reading (their) master's 
letters. 



* Fllia has the dative and ablative plur. in abus, to distinguish ii 
from the same cases of films. 



46 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[107, 108. 



LESSON XIX. 

Nouns. — -Second Declension, continued. — Nouns in 
er and ir. 

107. Nouns in er and ?r, of the second declension, 
have tlie nominative and vocative singular alike, and in 
all the other cases are declined like servus (103), with 
the single exception that most nouns in er drop e in 
the root. 

PARADIGMS. 



1. Gener, a son-in-law : r 


oot, ^ener (e not dropped). 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Norn. Gener, a son-in-law. 


Nom. Gener-I, sons-in-law. 


Gen. Gener-I, of son-in-law. 


Gen. Gener-orum, of sons-in-law. 


Dat. Gener-o, to son-in-law. 


Dat. Gener-Is, to sons-in-law. 


Ace. Gener-iim, son-in-law. 


Ace. Gener-os, sons-in-law. 


Voc. Gener, son-in-law. 


Voc. Gener-I, sons-in-law, 


ALL Gener-o, from son-in-law. 


ALL Gener-Is, /rom sons-in-law. 


2. Ager, a field : r< 


Dot, agr (e dropped). 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom. Ager, afield. 


Nom. Agr-T, fields. 


Gen. Agr-I, of a field. 


Gen. Agr-orum, of fields. 


Dat. Agr-o, to afield. 


Dat. Agr-Is, to fields. 


Ace. Agr-mn, afield. 


Ace. Agr-os, ^eMs. 


Voc. Ager, field. 


Voc. Agr-I, fields. 


ALL AgY-6,from afield. 


ALL Agv-is, from fields. 



^W Vir (a maw) and its compounds are tLe only nouns in Ir, and 
are declined like gener. 



108. Vocabulary. 




Armiger, I, 


armor-bearer. 


Diligentia, ae, 


diligence. 


Gener, I, 


son-in-law. 


LiLer, libri, 


book. 


Vulpes, is, /. 


fox. 



109—111.] ADJECTIVES. 47 

109. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Puer in agro ludit. 2. Pueri in agris lude- 
bant. 3. Magister pueros docebit. 4. Magistri disci- 
piilos docebunt. 5. Magister pueris libros dabit. 6. 
Armigerum occidebant. „ 

7. Pater diligentiam (64, b) filiorum laudabat. 8. 
Keginae filia in luco ambulabat. 9. Lusciniae in lucis 
cantant. 10. Magistri legem non negligent. 11. Pueri 
vulpem non Occident. 

(b) 1. The boy was running in the fields. 2. The 
boys will run in the fields. 3. The boys saw the mas- 
ter's book. 4. The pupils will give the master a book 
(a book to the master). 5. They will give books to 
(their) masters. 6. He will punish the armor-bearer. 
7. He will accuse (his) son-in-law. 8. They will accuse 
(their) sons-in-law. 

9. The master was praising (his) pupils. 10. The 
master was praising the diligence of (his) pupils. 11. 
The pupils do not hear the master. 12. The slaves 
will shut the gates of the city. 13. The boys were 
reading in the garden. 14. The girls are reading in 
the meadow. 



LFSSCN XX 

Adjectives of the First and Second Declension. 

110. The Adjective is that part of speech which is 
used to qualify substantives ; as, bonus, good ; magnzis, 
great. 

111. The form of the adjective often depends, in 
part, upon the gender of the noun which it quali ^js; 



48 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [112, 113. 

e, g\, "Bonus puer, a good hoy ; Bon&puella, a good girl: 
and Boniim regnum, a good kingdom. Thus, bonus is 
the form of the adjective when used with masc. nouns, 
bond with fem., and bonum with neuter. 

112. These three forms of the adjective are declined 
like nouns of the same endings. Thus, the masculine 
is declined like servus (103), and is accordingly of the 
second declension ; the feminine like rnusa (97), and is 
of the first declension; and the neuter like regnum 
(104), and is of the second declension. 

PARADIGM. 





Bonus, good. 








SINGULAR. 






Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


Bon-us, 


bon-a, 


bon-um. 


Gen. 


Bon-i 5 


bon-ae, 


bon-l. 


Dat. 


Bon-o, 


bon-ae, 


bon-o. 


1 Ace. 


Bon-um, 


bon-am, 


bon-um. 


Voc. 


Bon-e, 


bon-a, 


bon-um. 


J Abl. 


Bon-o, 


bon-a, 

PLURAL. 


bon-o. 


Nom. 


Bon-I, 


bon-ae, 


bon-a. 


Gen. 


Bon-orum, 


bon-arum, 


bon-orum. 


Dat, 


Bon-Is, 


bon-ls, 


bon-ls. 


Ace. 


Bon-os, 


bon-as, 


bon-a. 


Voc. 


Bon-I, 


bon-ae, 


bon-a. 


Abl. 


Bon-Is, 


ton-is, 


bon-ls. 



Rem. — Adjectives like the above are called adjectives of the First 
and Second Declension, because they are declined like nouns of 
these declensions ; the masc. and neut, being declined like nouns 
of the second declension, and the fern, like those of the first. 

113. Some adjectives of this declension Lave the 
nom. and voc. sing, in er, like nouns in er of the second 
declension. These, in all their other forms, are de- 



113.] 



ADJECTIVES. 



49 



clined like bonus in the Paradigm above, with the ex- 
ception, that most of them drop c before r of the root in 
all genders. 

PARADIGMS. 



1. Tener, tender : 


root, tener (e 


not dropped). 






SINGULAR. 






Masc. 


Fern. 


JSTeut. 


Norn. 


Tener, 


tener-a, 


tener-um. 


Gen. 


Tener-I, 


tener-ae, 


tener-I. 


Dat. 


Tener-o, 


tener-ae, 


tener-o. 


Ace. 


Tener-um, 


tener-am, 


tener-um. 


Voc. 


Tener, 


tener-a, 


tener-um. 


Abl. 


Tener-o, 


tener-a, 

PLURAL. 


tener-o. 


Norn. 


Tener-I, 


tener-ae, 


tener-a. 


Gen. 


Tener-orum, 


tener-arum, 


tener-orum. 


Dat. 


Tener-ls, 


tener-ls, 


tener-ls. 


Ace. 


Tener-os, 


tener-as, 


tener-a. 


Voe. 


Tener-I, 


tener-ae, 


tener-a. 


Abl. 


Tener-ls, 


tener-ls, 


tener-ls. 


2. 


Aeger, sick 


: root, aegr (e dropped). 






SINGULAR. 






Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Norn. 


Aeger, 


aegr- a, 


aegr-um. 


Gen. 


Aegr-I, 


aegr-ae, 


aegr-I. 


Dat. 


Aegr-o, 


aegr-ae> 


aegr-o. 


Ace. 


Aegr-iim, 


aegr-am ? . 


aegr-um. 


Voc. 


Aeger, 


aegr-a, 


aegr-iim. 


Abl. 


Aegr-o, 


aegr-a, 

PLURAL. 


aegr-o. 


Norn. 


Aegr-T, 


aegr-ae, 


aegr-a. 


Gen. 


Aegr-orum, 


aegr-arum, 


aegr-orum. 


Dat. 


Aegr-Is, 


aegr-ls, 


aegr-ls. 


Ace. 


Aegr-os, 


aegr-as, 


aegr-a. 


Voc. 


Aegr-I, 


aegr-ae, 


aegr-a. 


Abl. 


Aogr-ls, 


aegr-ls, 


aegr-Ts. 



50 FIRST LATEST BOOK. |114, 115 

Rem. — The following adjectives have the genitive singular in lus (the 
* is generally short in alterius), and the dative singular in I in all 
genders, viz. : alius, another ; nullus, no one ; solus, alone ; totus, 
the whole ; ullus, any ; units, one ; alter, the other ; neuter, nei- 
ther ; and titer, which (of the two). 

114. Kule of Syntax. — Adjectives agree with, the 
nouns which they qualify, in gender, number, and 
case; e. g., 

Mater bonam f Iliam laudat. 
(The mother (her) good daughter praises). 
The mother praises her good daughter. 

Rem. 1. — The adjective bonam is in the feminine accusative singular^ 

to agree with its noun flliam. 
Rem. 2. — The position of the adjective seems to depend principally 
upon emphasis ; and accordingly the adjective precedes ox follows 
its noun, according as it is or is not emphatic. In the example, 
bonam is emphatic. 
Rem. 3. — Mens, my ; tuus, yom* (or thy) ; suits, his, her, &c, though call- 
ed adjective pronouns (273 and 295), are in declension and agree- 
ment really adjectives. They usually follow their nouns : e. g., 
Mulier anciJlarn suam excitat. 
{The woman maid her awakens.) 
The woman awakens her maid. 



115. Vocabulary. 






Benlgnus, a, urn, 


kind 


(benign). 


Bonus, a, urn, 


good. 




Magnus, a, urn, 


large, great 


(magnitude), 


Meus,* a, um, 


my. 




Pulcher, chra, chrum, 


beautiful. 




Sepelire, 


to bury. 




Studiosus, a, um, 


studious. 




Suus,f a, um, 


his, her, its, their. 




Tuus, a, um, 


your, thy. 





* Voc. sing. masc. is ml. 

f The meaning of this word depends in part upon the gender and 
number of the subject of the proposition in which it is used. Thus, in the 



116, 117.] ADJECTIVES. 51 

116. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Regina pueros laudabat. 2. Regina pueros 
bonos laudabat. 3. Pater filium suum* docebat. 4. 
Mater filias suas amabit. 5. Bona mater filias suas 
amabit. 

6. Magister pueros docebit. 7. Bonus magister stu- 
diosos pueros docebit. 8. Agricolae anguem non 
timebunt. 9. Caius bonam legem non negliget. 10. 
Christiani legem bonam non negligunt. 11. Pater 
meus in prato ambulat. 

(b) 1. The father was burying his a son. 2. They are 
burying their* sons. 3. My friend does not hear my 
voice. 4. The daughters love (their) kind mother. 5. 
The mother will instruct her beautiful daughters. 

6. Caius disregards the law. 7. They disregard the 
good laws. 8. The boys are killing your dog* 9. Good 
boys will not kill dogs. 10. Your dog will kill the 
wolf. 11. Dogs will kill large wolves. 



LESSON XXL 

Adjectives of the First and Second Declension, continued. 

117. The noun which the adjective qualifies is often 
omitted in Latin ; and then in translating into English 
the word man must be supplied, if the adjective i? 
masc. sing. ; woman, if fern. sing. ; and thing, if neuter 
sing. ; e. g., 

above example (Mulier ancillam suam excitat), suam means her, becauso 
the subject mulier is fern. sing. ; with a masculine subject it woiJd mean 
his, and with a plural subject, their, <fcc. 



/ 



62 FIRST LATIN - BOOK. [118 — 120 

Avariis pecuniam amat. 
{The avaricious {man) money loves.) 
The avaricious man loves money. 

Rem. — After a plur. adjec. the noun is sometimes expressed and 
sometimes omitted in the Eng. translation ; thus, avdrl may be 
translated avaricious men, or simply the avaricious. 

118. When a noun is limited by a genitive, one or 
both nouns may be qualified by an adjective ; e. g., 

1. Magna regis corona. 

{The great of the king crown,} 
The king's great crown. 

2. Magna boni regis corona. 

{The great of the good king crown.) 
The good king's great crown. 

119. Vocabulary. 

Aureus, a, urn, golden. 

Avarltia, ae, avarice. 

Avariis, a, urn, avaricious. 

Impius, a, urn, impious. 

Indoctus, a, urn, unlearned. 

Labor, oris, m. labor. 

Poeta, ae, m. poet. 

Sapientia, ae, wisdom. 

Vindicare to avenge. 

120. Exercises. 

{a) 1. Avm/pn. regis coronam videbant. 2. Servi 
magnam regis coronam videbunt. 8. Balbi domum 
e^rtent^ 4. Impii domum evertebant, 5. Indoctus 
saHentiani laudabat. 

6. Magnum boni regis sceptrum timebunt. 7. Amici 
sapientiam tuam laudant. 8. Christiani avaritiam vita- 
bunt. 9. Mater bonas filias laudabat. 

{b) 1. He disregards his slave's labor. 2. He disre- 



121, 122.] KOTOS AND ADJECTIVES. 53 

gards his slave's great labor. 3. The beautiful daugh- 
ters of the queen will dance. 4. The poet was holding 
the beautiful crown. 5. The poet was holding the good 
queen's beautiful crown. 6. The good (man) will not 
disregard the law. 7. The poet will laugh aV the un- 
learned (man). 8. The good will not fear death. 

9. They will avenge the death of their father. 10. 
They were avenging the death of the good (woman). 
11. The impious (man) will fear death. 12. The poet 
will build a beautiful house. 



LESSON XXII. 

Nouns and Adjectives. — First and Second Declension, 
continued. — Price, Value, and Degree of Estimation. 

121. The predicate of a proposition may be modified 
by a noun or adjective denoting price, value, or degree 
of estimation ; e. g., 

1. Avariis patriam auro vendet. 

{The avaricious (man) (his) country for gold will sell.) 
The avaricious man will sell his country for gold. 

2. Avariis pecuniam magni aestimat. 

(The avaricious (man) money ai a great (price) values.) 
The avaricious man values money at a great price 
(cr highly). 

122. Kule of Syntax. — Price, when expressed by 
nouns, is generally put in the ablative, and when ex- 
pressed by adjectives, generally in the genitive. 

Rem. 1. — The genitive of a few nouns and the ablative of a few adjec 
tives sometimes occur in expressions of price and value. 

Rem. 2. — In example 1. the noun auro is in the ablative, and in ex- 
ample 2. the adjective magni is in the genitive, by the above rule, 



64 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[123, 124 



.23. Vocabulary. 






Aestimare, 




to value 


(estimate) 


Aurum, I, 




gold. 


m 


Magnl, 




{ at a great price, 
( at a high price. 




Magnl aestimare, 




$ to prize highly, 
r to think highly of. 




Parvi, 




S at a little price, 
( at a low price. 




Parvl aestimare, 




to think little of. 




Patria, ae, 




native country 


(patriotic) 


Proditor, oris, 




traitor. 




Vendere, 




to sell 


(vend). 


Verus, a, iim, 




true, real. 




Virtus, utis, /. 




virtue. 






124. Exercises. 





(a) 1. Impius patriam auro vendebat. 2. Proditor 
patriam parvi 3 aestimabit. 3. Cains amici sui laborem 
parvi aestimat. 4. Boni virtutem magni 2 aestimant. 

5. Bex servum magni aestimabit. G^Begma auream 
coronam magni aestimat. 7. Magnam urbis portam 
claudent. 8. Dominus servi sui epistolas aperiet. 9. 
Servus pueros vocabit. 

(b) 1. The traitor will sell (his) country for gold. 
2. Caius values true virtue at a great {price). 2 3. The 
master thinks little 3 of f the labor of his slave. 

4. The poet will fee] real sorrow. 5. A father will 
not disregard the sorrow of his son. 6. The avaricious 
(man) will value virtue at a low {price). 3 7. The avari- 
cious value money at a high {price). 2 8. Christians 
think little 3 of f money. 



125, 126.] NOUNS. — V&IBD DECLENSION. 55 

LESSON XXIIL 

Nouns. — Third Declension. — Class I. 

125. To the Third Declension belong all nouns which 
have the genitive singular in is. They end in a, e, i, 
o, y, c, I, 72, r, 5, £, as, and may be divided into four 
classes : 

1) Those which have the root the same aj th$ 
nominative singular (except, in a few in- 
stances, the omission or change of the radical 
vowel) : as, mulier, a woman ; root, mulier. 

2) Those which form the root by adding a single 
letter to the nominative singular: as, led, a 
lion; root, Icon. 

3) Those which form the root by dropping the 
ending of the nominative singular : as, urbs, 
a city ; root, urb. 

4) Those which form the root by changing the 
ending of the nominative singular : as, pietas, 
piety ; root, pietat. 

126. Class I. — This class comprises nouns in c* I, n, 
r y t, and y. These either have the root the same as the 
nominative singular, or form it (with a few exceptions) 
by one of the following slight vowel changes : 

1) Nouns in ter. and her generally drop e in the 
root : as, pater, a father ; root, patr. 

2) Nouns in en generally change e into i in the 
root : &s,.flumen, a river ; root, fliimin. 

3) Nouns in ut change u into % in the root : as, 
caput, a head; root, capit. 



* There are only two nouns with this ending, one of which belongs 
to Class II. 



66 



FIRST LATEST BOOK. 



[127, 128 



Rem. — The quantity of the radical vowel is sometimes changed ; this 
is the case in m©st nouns in al and er, which generally lengthen 
the yowel in the root, 

127. Neuter nouns of this declension have the nomi- 
native, accusative, and vocative singular alike, and are 
declined in the other cases by adding to the root the 
following 

CASE-ENDINGS. 





Norn. 


Gen. 


Bat. 


Accus. 


Voc. 


All. J 


Sing. 
Plur. 


a (ia), 


is, 

um (ium), 


ibus, 


a (ia), 


a (ia), 


e(l). 
ibus. 



Rem. — The inclosed endings belong only to neuters in e, al, and ar. 

PARADIGMS. 



1. Caput, n. 


a head. 


2. Animal, n n an animal. 


(root, capit [126, 3].) 


(root, same as nom* [126].) 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. Plural. 


Nom. Caput, 


Capit-a. 


Nom. Animal, Animal-ia. 


Gen. Capit-is, 


Capit-iim. 


Gen. Animal-is, Ammal-ium. 


Dat. Capit-I, 


Capit-ibus. 


Dat. Animal-I, Animal-ibus. 


Ace. Caput, 


Capit-a. 


Ace. Animal, Animal-ia. 


Voc. Caput, 


Capit-a. 


Voc_ Animal, Animal-ia. 


Abl. CapTt-e, 


Capit-ibus. 


Abl. Animal-I, Animal-ibus. 



128. Masculine and feminine nouns of this declen- 
sion are declined, in all the cases except the nominative 
and vocative singular (which are alike), by adding to the 



root the following 



CASE-ENDIXGS. 



Nom, 


Gen. 


Dai. 


Accus. 


Voc. 


Abl. 


Sing. — 


is, 


i, 


em (Im), 


— 


e(i). 


Plur. es, 


um (ium), 


ibus, 


es, 


es, 


ibus. 



With the radical vovel lengthened (126, Rem.). 



129.1 



NOUNS. — THIRD DECLENSION. 



57 



Hem. — The inclosed endings (except that of the genitive plural, which 
will be noticed again, 141) beloi_g only to a few words. 

PARADIGMS. 



1. Labor, m., labor. 

(root, same as nom* [126].) 
Singular Plural. 

Nom. Labor, Labor-es. 

Gen. Labor-Is, Labor-urn. 

Dat. Labor-I, Labor-ibus. 

Ace. Labor-em, Labor-es. 

Voc. Labor, Labor-es. 

Abl. Labor-e, Labor-ibus. 



2. Miilier, /, a woman. 

(root, same as nom. [126].) 
Singular. Plural. 
Nom. Mulier, Mulier-es. 
Gen. Mulier-is, Mulier-um. 
Dat. Mulier-I, Mulier-ibus. 
Ace. Mulier-era, Mulier-es. 
Voc. Mulier, Mulier-es. 
Abl. Mulier-e, Mulier-Ibus. 



3. Pater, 

(root, pair 
Singular. 
Nom. Pater, 
Gen. Patr-is, 
Dat. Patr-I, 
Aec. Patr-em, 
Voc. Pater, 
Abl. Patr-e, 



a father. 
[126, l].) 
Plural. 

Patr-e s. 

Patr-um. 

Patr-ibus. 

Patr-e s. 

Patr-es. 

Patr-ibus. 



4. Frater, 

(root, fratr 
Singular. 
Nom. Frater, 
Gen. Fratr-is, 
Dat. Fratr-I, 
Ace. Fratr-em, 
Voc. Frater, 
Abl. Fratr-e, 



a brother. 
[126, 1].) 

Plural. 

Fratr-es. 

Fratr-um. 

Fratr-ibiis. 

Fratr-es. 

Fratr-es. 

Fratr-ibiis. 



129. Vocabulary. 




Brutus, I, 


# 
Brutus, a Roman consul. 


Caecus, a, um, 


blind. 


Consul, is, 


consul, Roman chief magistrate. 


Flnlre, 


to finish. 


Frater, tris. 


brother. 


Lucere, 


to shine. 


Mulier, eris, 


woman. 


Senator, oris, 


senator. 


Siren, is, f. . 


siren. 


Sol, is, m. 


sun. 


Soror, oris, 


sister. 



* With the radical vowel lengthened (126, Rem.). 

3* 



58 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [130, 181 

130. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Agricola laborem finiebat. 2. Mulier sorores 
accnsabit. 3. Brutum consulem occidebat. 4. Sena- 
tores Caesarem occidebant. 

5. Bonus puer caput aperiet. 6. Servi capita aperie- 
bant. 7. Sirenes cantabant. 8. Sol lucebat. 9. Caeci 
solem non vident. 10. Pastores aurum magni aestimant. 

(b) 1. The boy accuses his brother. 2. They accuse 
their brothers. 3. The consuls were waging war. 4. 
The senators fear the consul. 5. The /consuls fear the 
senators. 6. The shepherd values his dog at a high 
(price). 2 7. They will finish their labor. 

8. They fear the sirens. 9. Good^boys uncover their 
heads. 10. The blind boy does not see the sun. 11. 
The blind do not see the sun. 12. The good woman 
loves (her) beautiful daughters. 13. Good daughters 
love their mothers. 14. Good mothers instruct their 
daughters. 



LESSON XXIY. 

Nouns. — Third Declension. — Glass II. 

131. Class II. comprises nouns of the third declen* 
sion in a, o, and a few in i. These form the root by 
adding a letter to the nominative singular. 

1) Nouns in a, and a few in z, add t: as, poema, 
a poem; root, poemat: hydromeli, mead ; root, 
hydromelzt. 

2) Nouns in o add n : as, leo 1 a lion ; root, lean. 

Rem. 1. — is long in the root. 

Rem. 2. — Nouns in do and go change o into i, before n in the root, 
as virgo, sl virgin ; root, virgin. 



132.] 



NOUNS. — THIKD DECLENSION. 



59 






A.RADIGMS. 



1. Poema, n., a poem: 


root, poemdt (131, 1). 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. Poema, 


N. Poemat-a. 


G. Poemat-is, 


G. Poemat-um. 


D. Poemat-I, 


D. Poemat-ibus, or Is.* 


A. Poema, 


A. Poemat-a. 


V. Poema, 


V. Poemat-a. 


A. Poemat-e, 


A. Poemat-ibus, or is.* 


2. Sermo, m., a discourse. 


3. Yirgo, /, a virgin. 


(root, sermon [131, 2].) 


(root, virgin [131, 2. Rem. 2],) 


Singular. Plural. 


Singular. Plural. 


N. Sermo, Sermon-es. 


N. Virgo, Virgin-es. 


G. Sermon-is, Sermon-urn. 


G. Virgin-is, Virgin-urn. 


D. Sermon-I, Sermon-ibiis. 


D. Virgin-I, Virgin-ibus. 


A. Sermon-em, Sermon-es. 


A. Virgin-em, Virgin-es. 


V. Sermo, Sermon-es. 


V. Virgo, Virgin-es. 


A. Sermon-e, Sermon-ibiis. 


A. Virgin-e, Virgin-ibus. 



132. Vocabulary. 



Accipiter, tris, m. 


hawk. 




Homo, mis, 


man. 




Optio, onis,/. 


choice 


(optional). 


Oratio, onis,/. 


oration. 




Orator, oris, 


orator. 




PavO, onis, m. 


peacock. 




Poema, tis, n. 


poem. 




Sermo, onis, m. 


discourse 


(sermon). 


Timid-iis, a, urn, 


timid. 




Virgo, mis, 


maiden, virgin 


(virgin). 



* Nouns in a generally take the ending Is instead of ibus in the dat 
and abl. pluraL 



60 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [133, 134. 

133. Exercv^.. 

(a) 1. Pater tuus poemata loebat... 2. Poeta sermo* 
nem tuum laudabit. 3. Tim .ae puellae pavonem 
timent. 4. Yirgines homini viam monstrabunt. 

5. Bonus puer fratri optionem dabit. 6. Pueri homi- 
nes timent. . 7. Indocti sapientiam^>ari;i 3 aestimabunt. 
8. Puellae sorores suas amant. 

(b) 1. My brother is reading your discourse. 2. The 
beys will kill the peacock. 3. They will kill the beau- 
tiful peacocks. 4. Your mother is reading the poem. 
5. The girls are reading poems. 6. The doves fear the 
hawk. 7. The hawk will kill your doye. 

8. The hawks will kill the beautiful doves. 9. Mo 
thers feel real sorrow. 10. The unlearned will laugh at f 
the orator. 11. The poet will hear the oration. 12. 
The orator prizes wisdom highly. 2 13. The avaricious 
think little 3 of wisdom. 



LESSON XXY. 

Nouns. — Third Declension. — Class III. 

134. Class III. comprises nouns of the third declen- 
sion in bs, ms, ps, x (= es or gs\ is, ys, e r a few in i* and 
a few in es. They form the root by dropping the 
nominative ending. 

1) Nouns in bs 7 ms y ps T and;z/s ; drop s: as,, urbs, a 
city ; root, urb ; litems r winter ; root, hiem. 

2) Nouns in x (= cs or gs) drop the s in x : as r 
vox (cs), a voice ; root, voe \ rex (gs\ a king ; 
root, rig. 

* Nouns in i are of Greek origin : most of these are indeclinable ; a 
few form the root by dropping i, and a few by adding t (131, 1). 



134.] 



NOUNS. — THIRD DECLENSION. 



61 



8) Nouns in is, e, and a few in es, drop those 
endings ,W Br Aos^s, an enemy; root, host: 
nubeSj a cloud ; root, nub: mare, a sea; root f 



mar. 



PARADIGMS. 



1. Urbs, /, a city. 

(root, urb [134, 1].) 



2. Mare, n. } a sea. 

(root, mar [134, 3}) 





Singular. 


Plural. 




Singular. 


Plural. 


N. 


Urb-s, 


Urb-es. 


N. 


Mar-e, 


Mar-ia.f 


G. 


Urb-is, 


Urb-ium.* 


G. 


Mar-Is, 


Mar-ium. 


D. 


Urb-I, 


Urb-ibus. 


D. 


Mar-I, 


Mar-Ibus. 


A. 


Urb-em, 


Urb-es. 


A. 


Mar-e, 


Mar-ia. 


V. 


Urb-s, 


Urb-es. 


V. 


Mar-e, 


Mar-ia. 


A. 


Urb-e, 


Urb-ibus. 


A. 


Mar-I,f 


Mar-Ibus. 



3. Arx (cs), /, a citadel. 

(root, arc [134, 2].) 
Singular. Plural. 

N. Arx, Arc-es. 

G. Arc-is, Arc-iiim.* 

D. Arc-i, Arc-ibiis. 

A. Arc-em, Arc-es. 

V. Arx, Arc-es. 

A. Arc-e, Arc-ibus. 

5. Hostis, c, an enemy. 

(root, host [134, 3].) 
Singular. Plural. 

N. Host-is, Host-es. 

G. Host-is, Host-ium. 

D. Host-l, Host-ibus. 
A. Host-em, Host-es. 

V. Host-is, Host-es. 

A. Host-e, Host-ibus. 



4. Eex (gs), m.j a king. 

(root, reg [134, 2].) 



Singular. 

N. Rex, 

G. Reg-is, 

D. Reg-T, 

A. Reg-em, 

V. Rex, 

A. Reg-e, 



Plural. 
Reg-es. 
Reg-iim. 
Reg-Ibus. 
Reg-es. 
Reg-es. 
Reg-Ibus. 



6. Nubes, /, a cloud. 

(root, nub [134, 3].) 

Singular. Plural. 

N. Nub-es, Niib-es. 

G. Nub-is, Nob-ium. 

D. Nub-i, Nub-ibus. 

A. Nub-em, Nub-es. 

V. Nub-es, Nub-es. 

A. Nub-e, Nub-ibus. 



* Monosyllables in s or x, preceded by a consonant, have ium in the 
genitive plural. See 141, 3. 
\ See 121. 



62 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[135, 136. 



135. Vocabulary. 







Ifl 




Arx, arcis, /. 




citadel, tjwer. 




Clvis, Is, m. and 


•/ 


citizen 


(civil). 


Frutex, Icis, m. 




shrub. 




Grex, egis, m. 




flock, herd 


(gregarious). 


Hostis, is, m. sen 


Af. 


enemy 


(hostile). 


Judex, icis, 




judge 


(judicial). 


Pax, pacis, /. 




peace 


(pacific). 


Reus, I, 




criminal. 




Servare, 




to keep, observe 


(serve) 


Viol are, 




to violate. 
136. Exercises. 





(a) 1. Caius leges violabit. 2. Kegina urbem con- 
iebat. 3. Pueri magnam urbis portam claudunt. 4. 
Pastores arcem condent. 5. Keus judicis yocem 
timet. 

6. Cives regem accusabant. 7. Consoles hostes 
vincebant. 8.3§||stor gregem magni 2 aestimat. 9. 
Boni cives pacem magni aestimant. 10. Filii patrem 
vindicabunt. 11. Servus fruticem in horto reperiebat. 
12. Impii patriam auro vendunt. 13. Eei j ndicis yocem 
timebunt. 14. Proditor patriam parvi 3 aestimat. 15. 
Proditores patriam parvi aestimabunt. 16. Agricola 
laborem finiebat. 

(b) 1. The boys will not observe trie law. 2. Good 
citizens observe the laws. 3. They will guard the city. 
4. Soldiers will guard the cities. 5. They accuse the 
judge. 6. The criminals will accuse their judges. 7. 
The king is violating the law. 

8. Slaves fear their masters. 9. Slaves fear the 
voices of their masters. 10. The king will conquer 
the enemy (pi.). 11. The shepherd will guard his flock. 
12. Shepherds guard their flocks. 13. The poet will 



137.] NOUNS. — THIRD DECLENSION. 63 

praise the judge. 14. They praise the judges. 15. 
Christians will observe the laws of the city. 16. He 
does not observe the laws of the city. 17. Good citi- 
zens will not violate the laws. 18. The boy is accus- 
ing his sister. 19. They are accusing their fathers. 
20. Traitors will sell their country for gold. 21. They 
think little 3 of f virtue. 22. They prize money highly.* 



LESSON XXYI. 
Nouns. — Third Declension. — Class IV. 

137. Class IY. comprises nouns of the third de- 
clension in as, os , us, Is, ns, rs, and most 'of those 
in es. These form the root by changing &into r, t, 
or d. 

1) Nouns in as, Is, ns, rs, afccLmost of those in es, 
generally change s into t: as, pietas, piety; 
root, pietat: mons, a mountain^ root, mont: 
Shies, a fir-tree ; root, abut : unites, a soldier ; 
root, milit. (See Eem. 2, below.) 

Rem. 1. — Masculines in as, of Greek origin, insert n before t in tho 

root : as, elephas, an elephant ; root, elephant. 
Rem. 2. — Many nouns in es change e into % before t, in the root : as, 

miles ; root, milit. 

2) Nouns in os and us generally change s into r or 
t: 2&,flos, a flower; root, flor: sacerdos, a priest ; 
root, sacerdot : virtus, virtue ; root, virtut : 
genus, a kind ; root, gener : tempus, time ; root, 
tempor. 

Rem. — Most nouns in us change s into r, and u of the nominative be- 
comes e or 6 in the root, as in these examples. 



64 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[138, 



PARADIGMS. 



1. Ci vitas, 


/, a state. 


2. Ars, 


/., art 


(root, clvitat [131, 1].) 


(root, art 


[137,1].) 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. Civitas, 


Clvitat-es. 


N. Ars, 


Art-es. 


G. Civitat-is, 


Clvitat-um. 


G. Art-Is, 


Art-iiim. 


D. Clvitat-I, 


Civitat-ibus. 


D. Art-I, 


Art-ibus. 


A. Clvltat-em, 


Clvitat-es. 


A. Art-em, 


Art-es. 


V. Clvitas, 


Clvitat-es. 


V. Ars, 


Art-es. 


A. Clvitat-e, 


Clvltat-Ibus. 


A. Art-e, 


Art-ibus. 


3. Miles, C. 


, a soldier. 


4. Corpiis, 


n.j a body. 


(root, milit [137, 1, Rem. 2].) 


(root, corpor [137, 2].) 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. Miles, 


Mllit-es. 


N. Corpus, 


Corpor-a. 


G. Millt-is, 


Mllit-um. 


G. Corpor-is, 


Corpor-um. 


D. Millt-l, 


Mllit-ibus. 


D. Corpor-I, 


Corpor-lbus. 


A. Mlllt-em, 


Mllit-es. 


A. Corpus, 


Corpor-a. 


V. Miles, 


Mllit-es. 


V. Corpus, 


Corp5r-a. 


A. Mlllt-e, 


Mlllt-ibus. 


A. Corpor-e, 


Corpor-ibus. 



138. The Latin, like every other language, has. 
certain forms of expression peculiar to itself, called 
Idioms:* e. g., 

$ something of time 

( some time 



Aliquidf tempSris, 
Multiimf bonl, 
Quantumf voluptatis, 
Nihil stabilitatis, 



much of good 
much good 



(Lat. Idiom). 

(Eng. Idiom). 

(Lat. Idiom). 

(Eng. Idiorn). 



how much of pleasure (Lat. Idiom). 
how much pleasure (Eng. Idiom). 
nothing of stability (Lat. Idiom). 
no stability (Eng. Idioni). 

Rem. — These (f) are neuter adjectives used as nouns; they govern 
the genitive by the rule already given (65). 



* These should be carefully compared with the corresponding English. 
A table presenting the Differences of Idiom between the Latin and Eng- 
lish is inserted in this volume for the benefit of the learner. See p. 275, 



139, 140.] NOUNS. — THIED DECLENSION. 



65 



139. Vocabulary. 



Aliquid, 


something. 




Amittere, 


to lose. 




Avaritia, ae, 


avarice. 




Cl vitas, atis,/ 


state. 




Corpus, oris, n. 


body 


{ (corporal). 
1 (corporeal). 


Elephas, antis, m. 


elephant. 




Figura, ae, 


figure. 




Habere, 


to have. 




Improbus, a, urn, 


bad, wicked. 




Multiim (neut. adj.). 


much. 




Multum boni, 


much good. 




Multum temporis, 


much time. 




Nihil (indec), 


nothing. 




Perdere, 


to waste 


(perdition). 


Quantum (neut. adj.), 


how much ? 




Sacerdos, otis, m. and/. 


priest, priestess, 




Stabllitas, atis,/ 


firmness, stability (stability). 


Tempus, oris, n. 


time. 




Voluptas, atis,/. 


pleasure 


(voluptuous) 


140. 


Exercises. 





(a) 1. Ayaritia nihil habet voluntatis. 4 2. Multum 
temporis perdebat. 3. Figura nihil habet stdbilitdtis. 
4. Improbi leges ciyitatis yiolabunt. 5. Servus ele- 
phantis corpus puero monstrabat. 

6. Improbi virtutem paryi 3 aestimant. 7. Milites 
urbem custodient. 8. Sacerdotes bonam legem non 
violabunt. 9. Discipuli multum temporis perdunt. 10. 
Indocti multum voluptatis amittunt. 

(6) 1. The boy will waste mucli time. 4 2. They will 
lose much pleasure. 3. The state -will obserye its laws. 
4. The soldiers are violating the laws of the state. 5, 
The king will punish the soldiers. 



66 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [141, 142 

6. The priests were praising the queen. 7. The good 
queen will praise the priests. 8. The soldiers will fear 
the enemy. 9. The good value wisdom highly. 2 10. 
He will laugh at f the unlearned. 11. He is losing 
much time. 12. The unlearned lose much pleasure* 



LESSON XXVII. 



Nouns. — Third Declension, continued. — Genitives in 
ium.' — Gender. 

141. It has already been mentioned (128, Eem.) that 
some nouns of the third declension have the genitive 
plural in ium instead of urn. These are, 

L) Neuters in e, at, and ar: as, mare, murium , 
animal, dnimalium. 

2) Nouns in is and es of Class III. : as, hostis, 
hostium; nubes, nubium. 

3) All monosyllables in s or x preceded by a 
consonant: as, urbs, urbium ; arx, arcium. 

4) Nouns in ns and rs (though in these urn is 

sometimes used): as, cliens, clientium ; cohors, 

cohortium. 

Rem. — The use of ium in words not included in the above classes 
must be learned from observation. 

142. The gender of nouns of the third declension, 
when not determined by their signification (40, 44), 
may generally be ascertained from their endings, by the 
following 

RULES FOR GRAMMATICAL GENDER. 

1) Masculines. — Most nouns in er, or, os es, in- 
creasing in the genitive, and o, except do, go y 



143, 144.] NOUNS.— GENDER. 67 

and io, are masculine ; e. g., air, air ; honor, 
honor; flos, a flower; pes (gen. pedis), a foot; 
sermo, a discourse. 

2) Feminines. — Most nouns in do, go, io, as, is, ys, 
aus, s preceded by a consonant, x, and es not 
increasing in the .genitive, are feminine ; e. g., 
arundo, a reed; imago, an image; oratio, an 
oration ; aestas, summer ; turris, a tower ; laus, 
praise; hiems, winter; lex, a law; nules (gen. 
nubis), a cloud. 

3) Neuters. — Most nouns in a, e, i, y, c, I, n, t, ar, 
ur, and us, are neuter ; e. g., mare, a sea ; 
poema, a poem ; lac, milk ; animal, an animal ; 
jiumen, a river ; caput, a head, &c. 

For exceptions, see Table of Genders (579). 

143. Vocabulary. 

Amicus, I,* friend (amicable). 

Animus, I, mind, soul. 

Carper e, to gather, to pluck. 

Flos, oris, flower (floral). 

Ignavus, a, um, indolent, cowardly. 

Magnitude, Inis, greatness, size (magnitude). 

144. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Veram animi magnitudinem laudabunt. 2. 
Christiani leges bonas non violabunt. 3. Pueri multum 
temporis 4 perdunt. 4. Puer caput aperiet. 

5. Servus urbis portas claudit. 6. Servi dominum 
suum vindicabunt. 7. Puer patris vocem audit. 8. 

* Gender, when not given, must be determined by previous rules, 



68 F1KST LATIN BOOK. [145. 

Pueri patrum voces audient. 9. Lupus haedum dila- 
niabat. 10. Haedi lupos timent. 

(b) 1. The boys are gathering flowers. 2. He will 
pluck the beautiful flower. 3. The dog will fear the 
lion. 4. Dogs fear lions. 5. The girl will waste mvjch 
time. 4 6. Your father will lose much time. 7. The in- 
dolent lose much pleasure. 8. The priests are praising 
the king. 

9. The queen will not violate the laws. 10. The 
king's son was violating the laws of the state. 11. My 
\friend will not disregard my sorrow. 12. Your friends 
will not disregard your sorrow. 




LESSON XXYIIL 



Nouns. — Third Declension. — Formation of Cases from 

each other. 

145. 1) In any noun of the third declension, all 
the cases, except the nominative and vocative 
singular (and the accusative sing, in neuters), 
can be readily formed from each other, by a 
simple change of the endings : thus, the accu- 
sative sing, honorem gives (by a change of end- 
ing) the dat. honori, or the dat. and abl. plur. 
honoribus, or any other case which may be 
desired. 
2) The nominative and vocative singular (and ace. 
sing, in neuters) can generally be formed from 
any other case, in some one of the following 
ways : 



146, 147.] FORMATION OF CASES, 69 

a) By dropping the ending of the given case: as, 
honor em* Nom. honor, f 

Rem. 1. — This applies to many nouns whose root ends in I, n t or r, 
and to a few with the root in it. 

Rem. 2. — / is changed before t into w, and before n into e ; and e is 
inserted before r when preceded b y t or b (126, 1); e. g., Gen. 
capitis ; root, capit ; Nom. caput Gen. fluminis; root, flumm ; 
'Nom.. fiumen. Gen. pair is; root, pair ; Nom. pater. 

b) By changing the ending of the given case into 
5, es, Ss, (or for neuters into) e : as, i£r5zs, Nom. ot&s ; 
nubem, Nom. nuhes, &c. 

Rem. 1. — This applies to most nouns of this declension. 

Rem. 2. — T 9 d, or r, at the end of the root, is dropped before s, and % 
is changed into e ; cs or gs will of course be written x ; e. g., 
pietdtem, Nom. pietas (t dropped before s) ; militem, Nom. ww/es 
(£ dropped before s, and $ changed into e); regem, Nom. re# 
(regs. = rex). 

c) By changing the ending of the given case, to- 
gether with er or or, as the last syllable of the root, into 
us: as, generis , Nom. genus. 

Rem. — This applies only to a few of those words whose root ends in 
er or or. 

146. The predicate of a proposition may be modified 
by a noun denoting the manner or cause of its action, 
or the means or instrument employed ; e. g., 

Irani meam dono placabit. 
(Anger my with a gift he will appease.) 
He will appease my anger with a gift. 

147. Kule of Syntax.« — The cause or manner of an 



* The ace. sing, is used here, though any other case would do equally 
well. 

f The nom. and voc., it will be remembered, are the same in form. 



70 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[148, 149. 



action, and the means of instrument employed, are ex- 
pressed by the ablative. 

Rem. — In the above example, ddno expresses the means employed, 
and is accordingly in the ablative. 



148. YOCABULARY. 



Altiis, a, urn. 


liigh, lofty 


(altitude). 


Catena, ae, 


chain. 




Clngere, 


to surround. 




Complere, 


to fill 


(complement) 


Cunctus, a, iim, 


all (as a whole). 




Donum, I, 


gift 


(donation). 


Flume n, inis, 


river. 




Gladiiis, I, 


sword. 




Ulustrare, 


k to illumine 
( to illuminate 


i (illustrate) 


Tra, ae, 


anger 


C (ire). 

( (irascible). 


Lux, lucls, 


light 


(lucid). 


Mulier, eris, 


woman. 




Placare, \ 


to appease 


(placable). 


149. Exercises. 





(a) 1. Miles regem gladio occidebat. 2. Eegem catena 
vinciebat. 3. Sol urbem magnam sua luce illustrat. 
4. Irani dono placant. 5. Cives regis iram donis placa- 
bunt. 6. Flumen urbem cingit. 

7. Mulier bona epistolas scribit. 8. Agricola urbis 
portas claudet. 9. Poetarum filiae cantant. 10. Pul- 
chrae pastorum filiae saltabunt. 11. Oaii animum donis 
placabunt. 

(b) 1. The soldiers will bind the king with chains. 
2. The river will surround the beautiful city. 3. The 
boy surrounds his head with a garland. 4. He will 
surround his sister's head with garlands. 5. He will 



150, 151.] ADJECTIVES.— THIRD DECLENSION. 71 

give a -beautiful garland to his sister. 6. They will 
give beautiful garlands to their brothers. 

7. They were building a wall. 8. They will sur- 
round the city with a high wall. 9. The sun illumines 
ail (things) with its light. 10. The sun fills all (things) 
with its light. 11. The blind do not see the sun. 12. 
The blind do not see the light of the sun. 



LESSON XXIX. 

Adjectives.— Third Declension. 

150. Adjectives of the third declension may be 
divided into three classes, viz : 

1) Those which have three different forms in the 
nominative singular (one for each gender). 

2) Those which have two (the masc. and fern. 
being the same). 

3) Those which have but one (the same for all' 
genders). 

151. Adjectives of the third declension are declined 
in their several genders like nouns of the same declen- 
sion, gender , and ending. It must, however, be observed, 

1) That those which have only one form in the 
nominative singular have the abl. sing, in e or 
% and the rest, with the exception of compara- 
tives, in % only. 

2) That all except comparatives have, in the 
plural, the nom., ace, and voc. neuter in id, and 
the genitive in w, 



72 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [152, 153 



CLASS I. — THREE TERMINATIONS. 

152. Adjectives of the first class have in the nomi- 
native singular the masculine in er, the feminine in &, 
and the neuter in e. 

PARADIGM. 







Acer, sharp. 








SINGULAR. 






Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut 


N. 


Acer, 


acr-is, 


acr-e. 


G. 


Acr-is, 


acr-is, 


acr-is. 


D. 


Acr-I, 


aer-i, 


acr-I. 


A. 


Acr-em, 


acr-em, 


acr-e. 


V. 


Acer, 


acr-is, 


acr-e. 


A. 


Acr-I, 


acr-I, 

PLURAL. 


acr-I. 


N. 


Acr-es, 


acr-es, 


acr-ia. 


G. 


Acr-iiim, 


acr-ium, 


acr-ium. 


D. 


Acr-ibus, 


acr-ibus, 


acr-ibus. 


A. 


Acr-es, 


acr-es, 


acr-ia. 


V. 


Acr-es, 


acr-es, 


acr-ia. 


A. 


Acr-ibus, 


acr-ibus, 


acr-ibus. 



CLASS II. — TWO TERMINATIONS. 

153. Adjectives of the second class have both the 
masculine and feminine in 2s, and the neuter in e, ex- 
cept comparatives,* which have the masculine and 
feminine in tor, and the neuter in ius. 

* The use of comparatives will be illustrated in connection with the 
comparison of adjectives. 



154.] ADJECTIVES. — THIRD DECLENSION. 

PARADIGMS. 



73 



1. Tristis, sad 


SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


Masc. and Fein. Neut. 


Masc. and Fern. Neut. 


N. Trist-is, trist-e. 


N. Trist-es, trist-ia. 


G. Trist-is, trist-is. 


G. Trist-iiim, trist-ium. 


D. Trist-i, trist-T. 


D. Trist-ibus, trist-ibus. 


A. Trist-em, trist-e. 


A. Trist-es, trist-ia. 


V. Trist-is, trist-e. 


V. Trist-es, trist-ia. 


A. Trist-I, trist-i. 


A. Trist-ibus, trist-ibus. 


2. Tristior (corrupt 


irative)) more sad. 


SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


Masc. and Fein. Neut. 


Masc. and Fern. Neut. 


N. Tristior, tristius. 


N. Tristior-es, tristior-a. 


G. Tristior-is, tristior-is. 


G. Tristior-um, tristior-iim. 


D. Tristior-I, tristior-i. 


D. Tristior-ibus, tristior-ibus. 


A. Tristior-em, tristius. 


A. Tristior-es, tristior-a. 


V. Tristior, tristius. 


V. Tristior-es, tristior-a. 


A. Tristior- e (I), tristior-e'(l). 


A. Tristior-ibus, tristior-ibus. 



CLASS III. — ONE TERMINATION. 

154. All otter adjectives of this declension have 
only one form in the nominative singular for all genders. 



PARADIGMS. 





1. Felix, happy. 




SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


Masc. and Fern. 


Neut. 


Masc. and Fern. 


Neut. 


N. Felix, 


felix. 


N. Fellc-es, 


fellc-ia. 


G. Fellc-is, 


fellc-is. 


G. Fellc-ium, 


fellc-ium. 


D. Felic-I, 


felic-I. 


D. Fellc-ibus, 


fellc-ibus. 


A. Fellc-em, 


felix. 


A. Fellc-es, 


fellc-ia. 


V. Felix, 


felix. 


V. Felie-es, 


fellc-ia. 


A. Fellc-e (I), 


fellc-e (I). 


A. Fellc-ibus, 


fellc-ibus. 



i 



74 



FIKST LATIN BOOK. 

paradigms, — continued. 



[155, 156. 



2. Prudens, prudent 


SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


Masc. and Fern. Neut. 


Masc. and Fern. Neut. 


N. Prudens, prudens. 


N. Prudent-es, prudent-ia. 


G. Prudent-Is, prudent-is. 


G. Prudent-ium, prudent-ium. 


D. Prudent-I, prudent-I. 


D. Prudent-ibus, prudent-ibus. 


A. Prudent-em, prudens. 


A. Prudent-es, prudent-ia. 


V. Prudens, prudens. 


V. Prudent-es, prudent-ia. 


A. Prudent-e (I), prudent-e (l). 


A. Prudent-ibus, prudent-ibus. 





155. VOCABULAKY. 



Acer, acris, acre, 


sharp, severe (acrid). 


Fidelis, e, 


trusty, faithful (fidelity). 


Fortis, e, 


brave (fortitude). 


Gloria, ae, 


glory. 


Maculare, 


to blemish, to stain (maculate). 


MaxImT, 


at a very high (price), very highly. 


Maxim! aestlmare, 


to prize very highly. 


Pausanias, ae, 


Pausanias, 




a distinguished Spartan general. 


Prudens, entis, 


prudent, cautious. 


Turpis, e, 


base, disgraceful (turpitude) 


Sapiens, entis, 


wise. 


Splendens, entis, 


shining (splendid). 



156. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Pater meus fidelem servum vindicabat. 2. 
Fideles servi dominos suos vindicabunt. 3. Sol splen- 
dens cuncta sua luce illustrabat. 4. Sapientes virtutem 
maximi 2 aestimant. 

5. Sapiens leges acres non violabit. 6. Christiani 
virtutem laudant. 7. Boni virtutem ma#m aestimabant, 
8. Pausanias gloriam turpi morte maculabat. 9. Pausa 
nias magnam belli gloriam turpi morte maculabat. 

(b) 1. The brave soldier will fight. 2. The brave 
king will conquer the enemy (pi). 3. The brave will 



157, 158] 



ADJECTIVES. 



75 



conquer the cowardly. 4. "Wise (men) will not stain 
their glory by a base death. 

5. The good prize the laws of the state very highly* 
6. Kind masters do not punish faithful slaves. 7. A 
prudent (man) will not violate the laws of his country 
8. The prudent do not violate severe laws. 



LESSON XXX. 

Adjectives, continued*- — Nouns. — Fourth Declension. 

157. Adjectives are either of the first and second 
declension, or of the third only : those of the first and sec- 
ond declension are declined in the masculine and neuter 
like nouns of the second declension, and in the feminine 
like nouns of the first ; those of the third declension 
are declined throughout like nouns of the third. (See 
Lesson XXIII.) 

158. Endings of adjectives of the first and second 
declension. 





SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


AfewX have Sing, thus: 




Masc. Fern. Neut. 


Masc. Fern. Neut. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 




2* 1. 2. 


2. 1. 2. 








N. 


us, eiyf a, urn. 


I, ae, a. 


iis, er, 


a, 


um. 


G. 


I, ae, I. 


6mm, arum, orum. 


lus, 


lus, 


lus. 


D. 


o, ae, o. 


Is, is, Is. 


h 


i, 


I. 


A. 


um, am, iim. 


os, as, a. 


um, 


am, 


um. 


V. 


e, er,f a, um. 


i, ae, a* 


e, er, 


a, 


um. 


A. 


0, a, o. 


Is, Is, Is. 


6, 


a, 


o. 



* The declensions of the different genders are here indicated by nume- 
rals. 

| In adjectives in er, the masc. nom. sing, is generally the root (e is 
sometimes dropped) : er, therefore, is not properly a case-ending ; it is 
given merely to show the termination of the nam. and voc. sing., with- 
out regard to the root (107), 

\ See list, 113, Rem. 



76 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [159 — 163. 

- 159. Endings of adjectives of the Third Declension. 





THREE TERM. 


TWO TERM. 


COMPARATIVES. 


ONE TERM. 




M. 


F 


jar. 


M.&F. K 


M.&F. 


jsr. 


M.tkF. N. 


N. 


er,* 


is, 


e. 


is, 


e. 


6r,f 


us. 


various. 


G. 


is, 


IS, 


is. 


is, 


is. 


6rf-is, 


6r-is. 


is. 


D. 


h 


% 


I. 


h 


i. 


or-I, 


or-I. 


L i 


A. 


em, 


em, 


e. 


em, 


e. 


6r-em, 


us. 


em.f 


V. 


er,* 


is, 


err- 


is, 


e. 


or, 


us. 


like nom. 


A. 


h 


h 


I. 


h 


I. 


6r-e (or-l). 


or-e (or-l). 


« (D- | 


N. 


es, 


es, 


ia. 


es, 


ia. 


or-es, 


or-a. 


_ 1 
es, la. 


G. 


ium, 


ium, 


ium. 


ium, 


ium. 


or-um, 


or-um. 


ium, ium. 


D. 


lb as, 


lb us, 


ibus. 


Ibus, 


ibus. 


or-ibus, 


or-ibus. 


ibus, ibus. 


A. 


es, 


es, 


ia. 


es, 


ia. 


or-es, 


or-a. 


es, ia. 


V. 


es, 


es, 


ia. 


es, 


ia. 


or-es, 


or- a. 


es, ia. 


A. 


Ibus, 


ibus. 


ibus. 


ibus, 


ibus. 


or-ibus, 


or-ibus. 


ibus, ibus.' 



FOURTH DECLENSION. 

160. Nouns of the Fourth Declension have the geni- 
tive singular in us, and the nominative in us and u. 

161. In this declension, nouns in us (with a few ex- 
ceptions) are masculine, and those in u are neuter. 

162. The root is found by dropping the nominative 
ending: as, fructus, fruit; root, fruct: cornu, a horn; 
root, corn. 

163. Nouns in us (of the fourth declension) are de- 
clined with the following 

CASE-ENDINGS. 



Nom. 


Gen. 


Bat 


Accus. Voc. 


All. 


Sing us, 


us, 


ul, 


um, us, 


u. 


Plur. us, 


uum, 


ibus (ubus§), 


us, us, 


ibus (ubus§). 



* The remark on this ending, in adjectives of the first and second de« 
ciension, is also applicable here (See 158, Rem. 2.) 

\ The or here given in connection with the case-endings belongs to the 
root ; in the nom., ace, and voc. of the neut. sing., it is changed into us 

t Neut. like nom. § This ending is used only in a few words 



164, 165.] NOUNS. — FOURTH DECLENSION. 



77 



164. Neuters in u, though, formerly considered inde- 
clinable in the singular, are found to have the genitive 
in us, and are declined with the following 



NEUTER CASE-ENDINGS. 





Nom. 


Gen. 


Dat 




Accus. 


Voc. 


Abl. 




Sing. 


u 


us, 


u> 




u> 


u> 


Q. 




Plur. 


ua, 


uum, 


Ibus 


(ubus*), 


ua, 


ua, 


Ibus 


(ubus*). 



PARADIGMS. 



1. Fructus, 


m., fruit 


2. Oornu, 


ft., a horn. 


(root, fruct.) 


(root, 


corn.) 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. Fruct-us, 


Fruct-us. 


N. Corn-u, 


Cc rn-ua. 


G. Fruct-us, 


Fruct-uum. 


G. Corn-us, 


Corn-uiim. 


D. Fruct-ui, 


Fruct-ibus. 


D. Corn-u, 


Corn-ibus. 


A. Fruct-iim, 


Fruct-us. 


A. Corn-u, 


Corn-ua. 


V. Fruct-us, 


Fruct-us. 


V. Corn-u, 


Corn-ua. 


A. Fruct-Q. 


Fruct-ibiis. 


A. Corn-u, 


Corn-Ibus. 



165. YOCABULAEY. 

Curras, us, chariot. 

Dux, duels, m. andf. leader, guide 

Et, 

Excriiciare, 

Exercitiis, us, 

Innocens, entis, 



(duke), 
(excruciate). 



and. 

to torture 

armv. 

innocent. 
Luctiis, us, grief, sadness. 

Manus, us,/. hand (manacle), 

Metus, us, fear. 

Nesclre, not to know, to be ignorant of. 

{Sinus, us, bosom (sinuous). 

Sulla, ae, Sulla, a marts name. 



* This ending is used only in a few words. 



78 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [166 — 168. 

166. Exercises. 

(a) 1, Sinus metum nescit. 2. Luctus animum ex- 
cruciat. 3. Rex liosthim (141, 2) currus videt. 4 
Hostes regis currum audient. 5. Duces exercitui viam. 
monstrabunt. 6. Puella epistolam sua manu scribit. 

7. Caius epistolas sua manu scribebat. 8. Servi Sul- 
lae domum evertebant. 9. Servus domini mortem 
vindicabit. 10. Pastoris filius mortem non timet. 11. 
Luctus et metus animum excruciant (612, Rem.). 

(b) 1. The innocent (man) knows not fear. 2. The 
innocent know not fear. 3. The bosom of the inno- 
cent knows not fear. 4. The boy's mother will write 
the letter with her own hand. 5. The father is writing 
the letters with his own hand. 

6. The slave will show the beautiful chariot to his 
master. 7. The father will avenge the death of his 
son. 8. Fear tortures the cowardly. 9. Fear does not 
torture the brave. 10. The cowardly fear death. 11. 
Brave soldiers do not fear the enemy. 



LESSON XXXI. 

Nouns. — Fifth Declension. 



167. Nouns of the Fifth Declension have the genitive 
singular in a,* and the nominative in es. 

168. Nouns of this declension are feminine, except 
dies, a day, masculine and feminine in the singular, 

* In the ending of the gen. and dat. sing, e is long, except in spei 
(where it is short), Jidei, mx\rei (where it is common). 



169 — 171.] NOUNS. — FIFTH DECLENSION. 



79 



and masculine only in the plural ; and meridies, mid- 
day, masculine. 

Rem. — The fifth declension compnses only a few words, and of these 
few, only two, — dies, a day, and res, a thing, are complete in th© 
plural. 

169. The root is formed by dropping the nomina- 
tive ending : as, dies, a day ; root, di. 

170. Nouns of this declension are declined with the 
following 

CASE-ENDINGS. 



N~om. 


Gen. 


Bat 


Accus. 


Voc. 


Abl. \ 


Sing, es, 


el,* 


el,* 


em, 


es, 


e. 


Plur. es, 


erum, 


ebus, 


es, 


es, 


ebus. 



PARADIGMS. 



Res,/, a 


thing. 


Dies, m. and/., a day. 


(root, 


r.) 


(root, di.) 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. Plural. 


N. R-es, 


R-es. 


N. Di-es, Di-es. 


G. R-ei, 


R-erum. 


G. Di-ei, Di-erum. 


D. R-8i, 


R-ebus. 


D. Di-ei, Di-ebus. 


A. R-em, 


R-es. 


A. Di-em, Di-es. 


V. R-es, 


R-es. 


V. Di-es, Di-es. 


A. R-e, 


R-ebus. 


A. Di-e, Di-ebus. 



171. VOCABULARY. 

Acies, el, line of battle. 

Aciem instruere, to draw up an army in order of battle. 
Copiae,f arum, forces (copious). 

Dies, el, day. 



* See note on page 78. 

\ Copiae is of the first declension, plural ; the singular is not used 
with this signification. 



80 



) 


FIRST LATIN BOOK. 


[172, 


Edueere, 


to lead forth 


(educe). 


Ernere, 


to purchase. 




Equltatus, us, 


cavalry. 




Fides, el, 


faith, one's word 


(fidelity). 


Instruere, 


to arrange, to array 


(instruct). 


Omnis, e, 


all, every. 




Proximus, a, um, 


nearest, next 


('proximate) 


Reducere, 


to lead back 


(reduce). 


Servare, 


to keep, to observe 


(serve). 


Spes, el, 


hope. 

172. Exercises. 





(a) 1. Christianus fidem suam seryat. 2. Boni fideni 
suam non violant. 3. Dies veniet. 4. Proximo die 
(88) Caesar copias suas reducebat. 5. Proximo die 
Caesar aciem instruebat. 

6. Caesar equitatum omnem educebat. . 7. Pnellam 
regis currum videbat. 8. Hostium (141, 2) copias 
videbunt. 9. Tullia puellis viam monstrabit. 10. 
Tullia epistolam sua maim scribit. 

(b) 1. The king will keep bis word. 2. The queen 
will not break her word. 3. All (men) prize hope very 
highly.- 4. They do not purchase hope with gold. 5. 
The w r ise will not sell hope for gold (122). 

6. He prizes his cavalry very highly. 7. The king 
thinks highly of f his whole army. 8. The soldiers will 
observe the laws. 9. The citizens, will observe all the 
laws of the state. 10. The wise value true greatness 
of mind very highly. 11. The avaricious value money 
very highly. 



173, 174.] nouns. — five declensions. 



81 



LESSON XXXII 



Nouns. — JPive Declensions. — Greeh Nouns. — Gender. 
173. Terminations of Substantives. 







SINGULAR. 






Dec.L 


Dec. II. 


Dec. III. 


Dec. IV. 


Dec.Y 




F. 


M. 


N. 


M. $ F. N. 


M. N. 


F. 


N. 


a. 


us, er, lr 


um. 


various. 


US. u. 


es. 


G. 


ae. 


I. 




is. 


US. 


el.* 


D. 


ae. 


6. 




I. 


Ul. U. 


ei.* 


A. 


am. 


um. 




em (Im). like nom. 


um. u. 


em. 


V. 


a. 


e, er, lr. 


um. 


like nom. 


us. n. 


es. 


A. 


a. 


0. 




e(l). 


u. 


e. 






PLURAL. 




N. 


ae. 


T. 


a. 


es, a, or ia. 


us. ua. 


es. 


G. 


arum. 


oriim 




um (ium). 


uum. 


erum. 


D. 


is. 


Is. 




Ibus. 


ibus (ubiis). 


ebus. 


A. 


as. 


os. 


a. 


es. a, or ia. 


us. ua. 


es. 


V. 


ae. 


I. 


a. 


es. a, or ia. 


us, ua. 


es. 


A. 


Is. 


IS. 




ibus. 


Ibus (ubus). 


ebus. 

• 



Rem. — The above table presents the endings of all nouns in the Latin 
language, except a few derived from the Greek. The only nomi- 
native endings not already noticed, are e, as, and es, in the first 



declension, and os and on in the second. 



174. The following are specimens of the declension 
of Greek nouns. 



* See 161 Rem. 



82 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[174. 



DECLENSION I. 


1. Aeneas (a marHs name), 


2. Anchlses (a man's name). 


N. Aene-as, 


N. Anchls-es, 


G. Aene-ae, 


G. Anchis-ae, 


D. Aene-ae, 


D. Anchls-ae, 


A. Aene-am (an), 


A. Anchls-en, 


V. Aene-a, 


V. Anchls-e (a), 


A. Aene-a. 


A. Anchis-e (a). 


3. Epitome, an abridgment 


Singular. Plural. 


N. Epltoni-e, Epitom-ae. 


G. Epitom-es, Epltom-arum. 


D. Epitom-ae, Epitom-Is. 


A. Epitom-en, Epitom-as. 


V. Epltom-e, Epitom-ae. 


A. Epitom-e, Epitom-Is. 


DECLENSION II. 


1. Hion, n. (name of a city). 


2. Delos, / (name of an 




island). 


N. Ili-on, 


N. Del-os, 


G. m-i, 


G. Del-I, 


D, Ili-o, 


D. Del-o, 


A, Ili-on, 


A. Del-6n, 


V, Ili-6n, 


V. Del-e, 


A. Ili-o. 


A. Del-o. 


DECLENSION III. 


1. Pericles (a man's name). 


2. Her OS - , a hero. 




Singular. Plural. 


N. Pericl-es, 


N. Hero-s, Hero-es. 


G. Pencl-is, 


G. Hero-is, Hero-um. 


D. Pericl-I, 


D. Hero-I, Hero-ibus. 


A. Pencl-em (ea), 


A. Hero-em (a), Hero-es (as). 


V. Pericl-es (e), 


V. Hero-s, Hero-es. 


A. Pericl-e. 


A. Hero-e, Hero-Ibiis. 



175, 176.] 



GENDER. 



83 



175. Table of Genders of Nouns as determined by 
Nom. Ending. 





MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


Dec. I. 


as and es. 


a. and e. 




Dec. II. 


er, lr, iis (and os*). 




urn (and on*). 


Dec. III. 


er, or, os, es, in- 
creasing in gen. 
and o, except do, 
go, and io. 


do, go, io, as, is, ys, 
aus, s impure,! 
x and es not in- 
creasing in gen. 


a, e, i, y, c, 1, n, t, 
ar, ur, and us 


Dec. IV. 


us. 




u. 


Dec. Y. 




es. 





(For exceptions see Table of Genders [579]). 

176. VOCABULARY. 

AccrpereJ to receive, to accept. 

Achilles, 5 is Achilles, 

a Grecian hero. 
Aeneas, ae, Aeneas, 

a Trojan prince. 

Anchlsgs, ae, Anchises, 

the father of Aeneas. 

Ascanius, I, Ascanius, 

the son of Aeneas. 

Carthago", mis, Carthage, 

a city in the northern part of Africa. 



* Tbs inclosed endings belong to Greek nouns, many of which, being 
proper names (of men and women), have natural gender. 

f Preceded by a consonant. 

% Accipere' forms its imperfect and future tenses like verbs of the 
fourth conjugation. (See 210, 271.) 

5 Achilles, being a Greek noun, is declined like Pericles (lH). 



84: FIKST LATIK BOOK. [177, 

Dido,'- us, or onis, Dido, 

queen of Tyre and afterwards the 
foundress of Carthage. 
Epitome, es, abridgment (epitome) 

Heros, ois, hero. 

Historia, ae, history. 

Industria, ae, industry. 

Noster, tra, trum, our. 
Regniim, I, kingdom, government. 

Roma, ae, Rome^ 

city of 'Italy \ on the river Tiber. 
Trojanus, a, urn, Trojan. 

177. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Aeneas, Anchisae filius ; urbem condebat. 2. 
Ascanius, Aeneae films, regnum accipit. 3. Dido 
Carthaginem condebat. 4. Epitomen orationis suae 
scribet. 

5. Caesar milites omnes educebat. 6. Industria mul- 
turn voluntatis habet. 7. Laborem suum finiet. 8. Horti 
nostri multos flores habent. 9. Servus pueros vocabit. 

(b) 1. Aeneas was founding Borne. 2. The son of 
Anchises was founding Eome. 3. Aeneas ? the son of 
Anchises, was founding the city of Eome (the city 
Eome), 4. The Trojan hero loves queen Dido. 5. 
They will kill the Trojan hero. 

6. They are reading an abridgment of the history. 
7. The soldiers praise Caesar. 8. Aeneas praises his 
father Anchises. 9. The Trojans fear Achilles. 10. 
Achilles was slaying the Trojans. 11. The soldier is 
showing his sword to the boy. 12. They will show 
their swords to the boys. 

* Dido is sometimes declined regularly, as a Latin noun of the third 
declension, and sometimes has the genitive in us, and all the other cases 
like the nom. 



178 180.] VERBS. — PREDICATE. 85 

■i- 

LESSON XXXIII. 

Verhd, — Esse, to he. Predicate, Esse, with a Noun or 

an Adjective. 

178. Esse, to be, is an irregular verb (i. e., it does 
not belong to either of the four conjugations already 
noticed), and gives us in the third persons of the present, 
imperfect, and future tenses, the following 

PARADIGM. 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Present. 


Est, he, she, or it is, 


Sunt, they are, 


Imperfect. 


Erat, " " " was, 


Erant, " were, 


Future. 


Erit, " " "will be. 


Erunt, " will be. 



179. The predicate of a proposition is sometimes 
expressed by the verb esse (to be), with a noun or an 
adjective ; e. g., 

1. Terra est rotunda. 

The earth is round. 

Rem. 1. — In this example, the predicate is not simply est, but est 
rotunda ; for the assertion is not that the earth is (i. e. exists), but 
that the eartfc is round. 

Kem. 2.^-The adjective rotunda agrees with the subject terra in gen- 
der, number, and case, by the rule already given. (114)". 

2. Plurimae stellae soles sunt. 
( Very many stars suns are.) 
Very many stars are suns. 

Rem. — Here the predicate is soles sunt. 

180. Rule of Syntax. — A noun in the predicate 
after esse is put in the same case as the subject when it 
denotes the same person or thing. 

Rem. — In example 2, soles is in the nominative by this rule. 



86 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[181, 182 



181. Eule of Syntax. — The adjectives dignus, in* 
dzgnus, contentus, praeditus, fretus ) and liber, take the 
ablative ; e. g., 

Virtus parvo contents est. 
( Virtue with little content is,) 
Virtue is content with little. 

Rem. — Parvo in this example is a neut. adj. used as a noun ; it is put 
in the ablative after contenta, by the rule just given 



182. Vocabulary. 






Arbor, oris,/. 


tree 


(arbor). 


Beatus, a, urn, 


happy 


(beatitude) 


Candidus, a, um, 


white 


(candid). 


Contentus, a, iim, 


content, contented. 




Culpa, ae, 


blame, fault 


(culpable). 


Dlgnus, a, um, 


worthy 


(dignity). 


Esse, 


to be. 




Est, 


is, it is. 




Facere,* 


to do, to make. 




Florere, 


to flourish. 




Fretiis*a, um, 


relying on. 




Indlgniis, a, um, 


unworthy 


(indignity). 


Laus, dis, 


praise 


(laud). 


Liber, era, erum, 


free 


(liberty). 


Nemo (inis,f) 


nobody, no one. 




Nix, nivis, 


snow. 




Nunquam, 


never. 




Parvum (neut adj.), 


little, a little. 




Praeditus, a, um, 


endued with. 




Quam, 


how. 




Quam multl, ae, a, 


how many. 




Semper, 


always. 




Vires, vlrium, plur. of vis, 


strength. 




Vita, ae, 


life ot 

- 


(vital). 



* This verb, together with some others of the third conjugation, has 
the imperfect and future like verbs of the fourth conjugation. 

f The genitive neminis and ablative nemine are not in good use. 



183, 184.] VEBBS.— INFINITIVE A6 SUBJECT. 87 

183. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Nix est Candida. 2. Bonus est beatus. 3, 
Boni sunt beati. 4. Sapientes parvo contenti sunt. 
5. Servus laude dignus est. 6. Patris mei servus laude 
indignus est. 

7. Caius patriam auro vendebat. 8. Caius, homo 
vita indignus, patriam auro vendet. 9. Quam multi 
indigni luce sunt! 10. Arbor florebat. 11. Balbus 
multa laude florebat. 

(b) 1. No-one is always nappy. 2. The avaricious 
(man) will never be contented. 3. The avaricious are 
not contented, 4. Caius is not free from blame. 5. 
Caius is unworthy of praise. 

6. Balbus praises my fidelity. 7. Balbus, a man en- 
dued with great virtue, was praising my fidelity. 8. 
Balbus does much good. 4 9. Caius is unworthy of life. 
10. Caius, a man unworthy of life, does no good} 11. 
Caius, relying on his strength, does not fear the lion. 
12. The slaves are not free from blame. 13. Christians 
are contented with little. 



LESSON XXXIY. 



Verbs. — Infinitive as Subject. — Genitive with Esse in the 

Predicate. 
184. An infinitive mood (with the words belonging 
to it) (9) may be used as a noun, and thus become the 
subject of a verb. "When thus used it is in the neuter 
gender (44, 3), and of course takes the adjectives in 
agreement with it in the same gender; e. g., 



88 "FIRST LATIN BOOK. [185 — 187 

Difficile est judicare. 
(Difficult (it) is to judge,) 
It is difficult to judge, or, To judge is difficult. 

Rem. — Here judicare (to judge) is the subject of the proposition, for 
it is that of which the predicate difficile est (is difficult) is affirmed. 
It is in the nominative case, and subject of the verb est, and the 
adjective difficile agrees with it. 

185. When the noun in the predicate after esse does 
not denote the same person or thing as the subject, it 
is put in the genitive; e. g., 

Christian! est neminem violare. 
(Of a Christian it is nobody to wrong.) 
It is the duty (or part) of a Christian to wrong nobody, 

Rem. 1. — In this example the subject is neminem violare, and the pre- 
dicate, Christianl est. 
Rem. 2. — Combining articles 180 and 185 we have the following 

186. Kule of Syntax. — A noun in the predicate, 
after the verb esse, is put, 

1) In the same case as the subject when it de 
notes the same person or thing; e. g., Cicero 
erat consul, Cicero was consul. 

2) In the genitive when it denotes a different per- 
son or thing ; e. g., Christianl est neminem vio- 
lare, it is the duty of a Christian to wrong nobody. 

187. In rendering into English, when a genitive fol- 
lows any part of the verb esse (as est, erat, erit, &c), 
such a substantive as duty, part, mark, business, &c, 
must be supplied. 

English Idiom. Latin Idiom. 

It is the part 



duty- 
business 
mark 
character j 



> of a wise man. It is of a wise man. 



188, 189.] PREDICATE WITH ESSE. 



89 



188. Vocabulary. 



DifFieilis, e, 
Err are, 
Facilis, e, 
Fidem violare, 
Humaniis, a, um, 
Magnum est, 
Peccare, 
Turpis, e, 

Violare, 



difficult. 

to err. 

easy 

to break one's word. 

human, natural to man. 

it is a great thing. 

to sin, to do wrong. 

base, disgraceful 



(facility). 



(turpitude), 

{ t® offend against, to wrong, to ^ • 

( break a law, one's word, &c. $ ^ 



189. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Humanum 6 est peccare. 2. Humanum est 
errare. 3. Turpe est fidem suam violare. 4. Patris 7 
est filium stium docere. 5. Regis est regnare. 

6. Matris est filias suas docere. 7. Servi est viam 
monstrare. 8. Turpe est poetae domum evertere. 9. 
Matres filias laudant. 10. Boni est fidem servare. 11. 
Impii est fidem violare. 

Rem. 1. — In English, when an infinitive mood is the subject of a pro- 
position, the pronoun it is used before the verb is ; hence, in 
translating such sentences into Latin, this pronoun it, which repre- 
sents, as it were, the coming infinitive or clause, must be omitted. 

Rem. 2. — After it is, such a substantive as part, duty, business, mark, 
must be omitted in translating into Latin. 

. (h) 1. It is a great (thing) not to fear death. 6 2. It 
is easy to err. 8. It is (the duty) 7 of a Christian to 
keep (his) word. 4. It is (the part) of a wise (man) to 
keep the laws. 

5. It is disgraceful to neglect a son. 6. It is natural- 
to-man to prize money very highly. 7. It is the mark 
of an unlearned man to think little of wisdom. 8. 
It is the slave's business to shut the gates of the city. 
9. It is difficult to shut the gates of the city. 10. A 



90 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [190 — 192. 

good citizen will observe the laws of his country. 11. 
It is the part 7 of a good citizen to observe the laws of 
his country. 



LESSON XXXY. 



Verbs. — Tenses for Completed Action. — First, Second, and 

Fourth Conjugations. 

190. The tenses which we have thus far used, viz., 
the present, imperfect, and future, represent the action 
of the verb as continuing (11), i. e., as not completed. 
There are also three tenses for completed action, viz. : 

1) The Perfect, which represents the action as 
completed in present time, i. e., as just com- 
pleted ; e. g. ; amdvit, he has loved. 

2) The Pluperfect, which represents the action as 
completed in past time ; as, dmdverat, he had 
loved. 

3) The Future Perfect, which represents the action 
as completed in future time ; as, amdverit, he 
will have loved. 

191. The tenses for completed action are not formed 
from the same root as those for action not completed, 
but from anothef called the second root. This is formed 
in various ways. 

192. In the first, second, and fourth conjugations, 
the second root is formed by adding dv, u* and w, re- 
spectively, to the rootf of the verb ; e. g. : 

* A very few verbs of the second conjugation add ev, which may be 
regarded as the full form for which u is a contraction (the e being drop 
ped, and v changed to u). 

f This we will now call the 1st root, to distinguish it from the 2d. 



193, 194.] VERBS.— CONJUGATIONS. 91 

First Root. Second Root. 



amav. 



Conj. L Amare, am, 

Conj. II. Monere, mon, moni 

Conj. IV. Audire, and, audw. 

m 

193. In verbs of all the conjugations, the third per- 
sons singular of the tenses for completed action are formed 
by adding to the second root the following endings: 

Perfect Pluperfect Future Perfect 

it, erat, erit. 

PARADIGMS. 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 

Amare, to lote : 1st root, am ; 2d root, dmav. 

Perfect. Aroav-It, he, she, or it has loved (or loved).* 
Pluperf. Amav-erat, " " " had loved. 
Fut. Perf. Amav-erit, " " " will have loved. 

SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Monere, to advise : 1st root, mon ; 2d root, monu. 

Perfect. Monu-it, he, she, or it has advised (or advised).* 
Pluperf. Monu-erat, " " " had advised, 
Fut. Perf. Monu-erit, " " " shall have advised. 

FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Audire, to hear: 1st root, aud; 2d root, audiv. 

Perfect. Audlv-it, he, she, or it has heard (or heard).* 

Pluperf. Audlv-erat, " " " had heard. 

Fut. Perf. Audlv-erit, " " " shall have heard. 



194. In any regular verb, the third persons plural^ 
in the tenses for completed action, are formed by simply 

* The perfect in Latin corresponds sometimes to our perfect indefi- 
nite, and sometimes to our perfect definite (perfect with have) ; hence, 
timavit may be translated either he has loved, or he loved. 



92 



FIRST LATEST BOOK. 



[195, 196. 



inserting n before t in the ending of the third person 
singular (35), except in the perfect, where it must be 
changed into erunt; e. g., 

Perfect Pluperfect Fut Perfect 

j Sing. Amav-it, amav-erat, amav-erit. 
( Plur. Ajn&Y-erunt, amav-erarc£, amav-eriwfc 
j Sing. Monu-it, momi-erat, monu-erit. 



Conj. 
Conj. 



( Plur. MomL-erunt, monu-eran^, monu-erint. 
j Sing. Audiv-it, audiv-erat, audiy-erit. 
J ' ' (Plur. Aufov-erunt, audiv-eran^, audiv-eri?2* 

195. Vocabulary. 



Aestimare, av,* 


to estimate, to value. 




Arare, av, 


to plough 


(arable). 


Audlre, Iv, 


to hear 


(audible). 


Dllaniare, av, 


to tear in pieces. 




Jurare, av, 


to swear. 




Laudare, av, 


to praise 


(laudable.) 


Monstrare y av, 


to show. 




Placare, av, 


to appease 


(placable.) 


Sepellre, Iv, 


to bury. 




Servare, av, 


to keep, to observe. 




Terr ere, u, 


to terrify, to frighten. 





196. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Puer juraverat. 2. Pueri juraverunt. 3. Agri- 
cola araverit. 4. Servi araverint. 5. Vulpes pueros 
terruit. 6. Vulpes pueros terruerunt. 7. Poetae sapi- 
entiam parvi aestimavit. 

8. Veram virtutem magni aestimaverat. 9. Ohristi- 
anus pecuniam parvi aestimavit. 10. Christian! est 
pecunianr parvi aestimare. 11. Magnam poetae sapi- 



* The learner will readily form the second root from the first, by 
adding the endings here given. 



197 — 199.] VERBS. — THIRD CONJUGATION. 93 

entiam parvi aestimaverant. 12. Pater filium sepeli- 
vit. 13. Pueri patrem sepeliverant. 

(b) 1. The boy has heard a voice. 2. The boys had 
heard their father's voice. 3. The slave had shown 
the way to the shepherd. 4. They will have shown 
the house to their master. 

5. Caius had praised his son. 6. He has praised his 
slaves. 7. The lion has torn the horse in pieces. 8. 
The fox had frightened the boy. 9. They had valued 
wisdom at a low price. 10. It is easy to keep (one's) 
word. 11. It is difficult to appease anger. 12. He has 
appeased the boy's anger with a gift. 



LESSON XXXVI. 



Third Conjugation. — Glass I. — Second Root the same as 

the First. 

197. Most verbs of the third conjugation may be 
divided into two classes, viz. : 

1) Those which have the second root the same as 
the first. 

2) Those which form it by the addition of s. 

198. The first class comprises most verbs of this con- 
jugation which have the first root in a vowel, together 
with a few which have it in a consonant ; e. g., 

Suere, to seio: 1st root, sii; 2d root, sii. 

Defendere, to defend: " defend; " defend. 

199. The manner in which the third persons of the 
tenses for completed action are formed from the second 
root, has already been explained. See 193, 194. 



94 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



[200—202, 



PARADIGM. 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 


j 


Defendere, to defend: 1st root, defend. 


2d root, defend. 


Perfect Pluperfect. 


Future Perfect. 


Defend-it, defend-erat, 


defend-erit. 


D ef end- erunt, def end-erant, 


defend-erint. 



200. The Preposition is the part of speech which ex 
presses the various relations of objects ; * e. g., 

Eex per urbem ambulabat. 
(The king through the city was walking.) 
The king was walking through the city. 

Rem. — In this example, per, through, is a preposition. 

201. Partial Eule of Syntax. — Some preposi- 
tions govern the accusative, and some the ablative. 

Rem. 1. — Whenever a preposition occurs in the exercises, its particu- 
lar case will be given in the vocabularies. 

Rem. 2. — The accusative, urbem, in the above example, is governed 
by the preposition per. 

202. Vocabulary. 



Aedlf icium, I, 
Ambulare, av, 
Annuere, annu, 
Concilium, I, 
Conditio, onis, 



building, edifice. 

to walk. 

to assent, to give assent. 

council, meeting. 

condition, terms. 



Constituere, constitu, to arrange, to appoint 
Defendere, defend, to defend. 



Dormlre, Iv, 
Incendere, incend, 
Legio, onls, 
Per (prep, with ace), 
Proelium, I, 



to sleep 

to set on fire, to burn 

legion, body of foot-soldiers. 

through. 

battle. 



(constitute j, 

(dormant), 
(incendiary) 



* It will be remembered, however, that certain relations are some* 
times expressed by the cases of nouns (63, 80, 86), 



203.] k vekbs. 95 

Prlvatus, a, urn, private, personal. 

Rellquus, a, urn, remaining, the rest (relic). 

Respuere, respu, to reject. 

Romanl (adj. pL), Romans. 

Romanus, a, urn, Roman, belonging to Rome. 

Suere, su, to sew, to stitch. 

Timere, u, to fear (timid). 

Vestis, is, garment (vest). 

203. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Privatum aedificium incendit. 2. Keliqua 
privata aedificia incenderant. 3. Puellae vestem sue- 
runt. 4. Patres annuerant. 5. Milites urbem defende- 
rant. 6. Komani urbem defenderunt. 

7. Eeliquas legiones in acie constituit. 8. Ursi in 
antro dormiverunt. 9. Agricola per urbem ambulavit. 
10. JSTon respuit conditionem Caesar. 11. Diem conci- 
lio constituerunt. 12. Diem concilio constituent. 13. 
Servus viam monstraverat. 14. Puer mortem timuit. 
15. Humanum 6 est mortem timere. 16. Impii 7 est 
fidem violare. 

(6) 1. The king has appointed a day for the battle. 
2. They had appointed a day for the council. 3. The 
soldiers defended the building. 4. They had defended 
the poet's house. 5. The queen assented. 6. The 
king had not assented. 

7. The good boy will walk in the city. 8. The poet's 
daughter had walked through the great city. 9. They 
will set the house of the poet on fire. 10. It is the duty 7 
of a good man to defend the house of a friend. 11. 
The avaricious (man) will build a small house. 12. 
They will not defend the house of the avaricious. 13. 
They will not reject the condition. 14. Caesar had re- 
jected the terms. 15. He will have arranged his sol- 



96 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [204*206. 

diers in order of battle. 16. They had arranged their 
soldiers in order of battle. 



LESSON XXXVII. 



Third Conjugation. — Class II. — Second 'Root formed by 
adding s to the First. 

204. Verbs of the third conjugation which have the 
first root in a consonant, generally form the second 
from it by the addition of s; e. g., 

Carpere, to pluck; 1st root, carp; 2d root, carps. 
Repere, to creep ; " rep; " reps. 

Rem. — When b stands at the end of the first root, it is changed into 
p before s in the second ; e. g., 

Scribere, to write ; scrib ; scrips (not scribs). 
Nubere, to marry ; nub ; nups (not nubs). 

205. An adjective modifying the subject is some- 
times used in Latin instead of an adverb modifying the 
verb ; a g., 

Portam invitus claudet. 

{Lot. Id.) The gate unwilling he will shut {adj.). 
{Eng. Id.) He will shut the gate unwillingly {adv.). 



206. Vocabulary. 




Carpere, carps, 


to pluck, to card, to gather. 


Deglubere, deglups, 


to flay. 


Lana, ae, 


wool. 


Ludere, lus, 


to play. 


Malus, a, um, 


bad. 


Ovis, is, 


sheep. 


Scribere, scrips, 


to write. 


Uva, ae, 


grape. 



207, 208.] VERBS. — THIRD CONJUGATION. 97 

207. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Caius epistolas sua manu scripsit. 2. Puella 
epistolam sua manu scripserat. 3. Pueri lanam carpse- 
runt. 4. Malus pastor deglupsit oves. 

5. Facile est* lanam carpere. 6. Pater mens fidem 
servaverat. 7. Turpe est fidem suam non servare. 8. 
Sapientis est* virtutem magni aestimare. 0. Virtutem 
tnagni aestimaverint. 

(b) 1. The boy lias written a letter in sm own hand* 
2. The girl had written letters in her own hand. 3. 
They wrote letters. 4. The girl has plucked a flower. 
5. The shepherd's daughter had gathered flowers with 
her own hand. 

6. The boy will pluck the grape. 7. It is easy to 
pluck the grape. 8. The girls were gathering flowers. 
9. They had gathered flowers. 10. It is easy to gather 
flowers. 11. The slaves will card the wool. 12. They 
will have carded the wool. 13. In winter the bear 
will sleep in the cave. 14. In summer the girls will 
play in the garden. 



LESSON XXXVIII 



Third Conjugation. — Glass II., continued. — Second 
Eoot formed by adding s to the First. 

208. When a &-sound (c, g, h, qu) stands at the end 
of the first root, it generally unites, in the second, with 
the s which is added, and forms x (i. e. cs, gs, hs } or qus 
becomes x) ; e. g., 



* What is the subject of est? (608, 2.) 

5 



98 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[209. 



Cingere, to surround ; cing, cinx (rings). 

Tegere, to cover; teg, tex (tegs). 

Trahere, to draw ; trah, trax (trahs). 

Coquere, to cook ; coqu, cox (coqus). 

a) In a very few verbs gu and v must be treated as 
^-sounds in the formation of the second root ; e. g., 

Exstinguere, to extinguish ; exsting^, extincc. 



Vivere, to live; 



viv< 



Y1X. 



b) Fluere, to flow, and struere, to build, together with 
their compounds, have the second root in x, as if the 
first ended in a &-sound, as probably it did originally. 

c) The &-sound is sometimes dropped before s in the 
second root; e. g., 



Sparger e, to scatter ; 


sparg, 


spars. 


Mergere, to merge; 


merg, 


mers. 


Parcere, to spare; 


pare, 


pars. 


209. Vocabulary. 






Clbus, I, 


food. 






Cingere, cinx, 


to surround. 






Complere, ev, 


to fill 




(complement). 


Coquere, cox, 


to cook, to bake, to ripen. 




Dlcere, dix, 


to say 




(diction). 


Habere, habu, 


to have 




(habit). 


Illustrare, av, 


to illuminate, to enlighten. 




Mendacium, I, 


lie, falsehood 




(mendacious). 


Multa (neut. pi) 


, many (things). 






Mult us, a, lim, 


much, pi. many. 






Pallium, I, 


cloak 




(to palliate). 


Peccare, av, 


to sin, to do wrong. 




Prudentia, ae, 


prudence. 






Siinulatio, oms, 


assumed appearance, pretence (dissimulation) 


Stultitia, ae, 


folly 




(stultify). 



210.] VERBS.- -THIED CONJUGATION. 99 

Summus, a, urn, highest, greatest (summit). 

Tegere, tex, to cover. 

Violare, av, to violate, to break (violation). 



210. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Puer dixit. 2. Caius, homo vita indignus, 
dixerat. 3. Puellae dixerunt. 4. Flumen urbem 
cinxit. 5. Flumina urbes cinxerunt. 6. Amicus 
amici corpus suo pallio texit. 

7. Prudentiain simulatione stultitiae texerat. 8. 
Summam prudentiam simulatione stultitiae texerunt. 
9. Christiani non est mendacio culpam tegere. 10. 
Turpe est peccare. 11. Turpe est mendacio culpam 
tegere. 12. Sol cuncta sua luce illustraverat. 13. 
Caius leges civitatis violaverit. 

(b) 1. The woman has surrounded her head with a 
garland. 2. The slave has surrounded his head with 
a garland. 3. They had surrounded their heads with 
garlands. 4. The boy had said nothing. 5. The girl 
cooked the food. 6. They had cooked the food. 

7. The king had surrounded the city with a wall. 
8. They will surround the city with a wall. 9. They 
covered the fault with a lie. 10. It is disgraceful to 
cover a fault with a lie. 11. The slave had covered 
his master's body with a cloak. 12. The slave had 
said many (things). 13. The sun fills all things with 
its light. 14. It is the business of the slave 7 to cook 
food for his master. 15. It is never useful to lose time, 
16. He will lose much pleasure. 4 17. How much 
pleasure will he lose ? 



100 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [211—213. 

LESSON XXXIX. 

Third Conjugation. — Class II., continued. — Second Eoot 

formed by adding s to the First. 

211. Whenever a i-sound (d or t) stands at the end 
of the first root, it is generally dropped before s in the 
second, and the preceding vowel, if short, is length- 
ened; e. g\, 

Claudere, to shut; claud, clans (claucfe). 
Amittere, to lose; amitt, amis (amifts). 
Dividere, to divide; divid, divis (divicfe). 

212. When a limiting noun denotes some character- 
istic or quality of the noun which it limits, it is always 
accompanied by an adjective, and is put either in the 
genitive or ablative ; e. g., 

Puer eximiae pulchritudmis. 
Puer eximia pulchritudme. 
A boy of remarkable beauty. 

213. Combining the above with the rule already 
given (65), we have the following 

Eule of Syntax. — A noun limiting the meaning 
of another noun is put, 

1) In the same case as that noun, when it denotes 
the same person or thing ; as, Latiniis rex, 
Latinus the king. 

2) In the genitive, when it denotes a different 
person or thing; as, Regis filiiis, the king's 
son: except 

(a) When it denotes character or quality; it is then 
accompanied by an adjective, and is put either in the 
genitive or ablative ; as, Puer eximiae pulchritudmis ; 



214 — 216.] VERBS. — THIRD CONJUGATION. 101 

or, Puer eximia pulchritudme, a boy of remarkable 
beauty. 

214. Eule of Syntax. — Verbs of accusing, convict- 
ing, acquitting, teaming, and the like, take the accusa- 
tive of the person and the genitive of the crime, 
charge, &c. ; e. g. ; 

Caiiim proditionis accusant. 
( Caius of treachery they accuse.) 
They accuse Caius of treachery.* 

Rem. — Here proditionis is in the genitive, by the above rule. 

215. (Eng. Id.) To condemn to death. 

(Lot. Id) To condemn of the head {capitis).^ 



216. Vocabulary. 




Accusare, av, 


to accuse. 




Ambitus, us, 


bribery. 




Amittere, amis, 


to lose. 




Capitis (gen.), 


of the head, to death 


(capital). 


Claudere, claus, 


to shut 


(close). 


Damnare, av, 


to condemn. 




Fades, el, 


face, appearance. 




Furtiim, I, 


theft 


(furtive). 


Ingeniuin, I, 


talent, ability 


(ingenious). 


Ludere, lus, 


to play. 




Nunquam, 


never. 




Prodltio, onis, 


treachery. 




Salt are, av, 


to dance. 




Vir,J vlri, 


man, hero. 





* This genitive is not properly governed by the verb, but by a noun 
understood ; thus, if we supply crimine with proditionis in the example, 
the sense will not be changed ; as, ' They accuse Caius toith the charge 
of treachery.' 

f We may suppose that it was originally, " to condemn to the loss of 
the head;" or, "to the punishment of the head." 

\ Homo, G-. Jiominis, and vir are both man: but homo is man as 
opposed to other animals ; that is, a human being . whereas vir is man 



102 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [217. 

217. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Portas urbis clauserant. 2. Cains mill turn 
temporis amisit. 8. Cains, yir sumrao ingenio, mul- 
tum temporis amisit. 4. Balburn ambitus accusavS* 
rant. 5. Pueri in prato luserunt. 

6. Balbnm capitis damnabunt. 7. Christiani est 
avaritiam damnare. 8. Cainm accusavit. 9. Cainm, 
snmmo ingenio virum, proditionis accusaverat. 10. 
Facile est saltare. 11. Difficile est iram placare. 12. 
Facile est pueri animum dono placare. 13. Ursus in 
antro dormlvit 14. Hieme nrsi in antris dorminnt. 
15. Nnnqnam ntile est peccare. 

(b) 1. The slave has shnt the gates of the city. 2. 
They -will accnse the slave of treachery. 3. Cains had 
accnsed the slaves of theft. 4. He will have lost much 
time. 4 5. Balbns, a man of the greatest virtue, has 
praised the fidelity of the slave. 6. Balbns, a man en- 
dued with the greatest virtue, has accused the boy of 
theft. 

7. They have accused Balbus of bribery. 8. They 
had accused Balbus, a man of the greatest virtue, of 
bribery. 9. The sun had illuminated all things with 
its light. 10. The sun will have filled the world with 
its light. 11. They have written the letters with their 
own hands. 12. The queen had written a letter with 
her own hand. 13. He covered his face with his cloak. 
14. The} 7 had covered their faces with their cloaks. 

as opposed to ivoman. — When men means human beings, men generally 
(including both sexes), it should be translated bj homines. — When man 
is used contemptuously, it should also be translated by homo, because that 
word says nothing better of a person than that he is a human being. — 
When man is used respectfully, with any praise, <fcc, it should be trans- 
lated by vir. 



218, 219.] FORMATION OF SECOND ROOT. 103 



LESSON XL. 

Formation of the Second Root. — First Irregularity — 
Radical vowel lengthened (and often changed). 

218. Eegular Endings of the Second Eoot of Yerbs. 



Conj. I. 
1 av. 


Conj. II. 
u (or ev). 


Conj. III. 
s, or like 1st root. 


I 
Conj. IV. 

IV. 



Rem. — The above table presents only the regular endings of the 
second root; there are, however, several irregularities in the 
formation of that root which we must notice. 

219. Some verbs in each* of the four conjugations 
form the second root by lengthening the vowel of the 
first; e. g., 



Juvare, to assist; 


juv, 


juv. 


Yidere, to see ; 


vid, 


vid. 


Edere, to eat; 


ed, 


ed. 


Yenire, to come; 


ven, 


ven. 



1) In the third conjugation, 

a) If the first root has a, the second will have e. 

b) M and n are often dropped before a final mute ; e. g., 

Capere, to take ; cap, cep (a changed to e). 

Frangere, to breah; frang, freg { ^SgldtT^. 

Kumpere, to burst; rump, rup (m dropped). 
Yincere, to conquer ; vine, vie (n dropped), 

* In the first and fourth conjugations, jiivare, lavare, venire, and theif 
compounds, are probably the only instances. 



104 



FIKST LATIN BOOK. 



[220, 221. 



220. VOCABULAEY. 



jBrachium, I, 


arm. 




Capere, cep. 


to take, to receive. 




Gibus, T, 


food. 




Emere, em, 


to buy. 




Exereitus, us, 


army. 




Foedus, ens,. 


treaty 


(federal), 


Frangere, freg, 


to break 


(fragile). 


Gall us, i, 


{ a Gaul, an inhabitant of Gaul, 
( now France. 








Lavare, lav, 


to wash 


(lave). 


Mel, mellis, 


honey. 




Miles, itis s 


soldier 


(military) 


Neino, lms,* 


nohody, no one. 




Quia, 


because. 




Rump ere, rup, 


to break, to violate. 




Semper, 


always. 




Utilis, e, 


useful 


(utility). 


Venire, ven, 


to come. 




Videre, vld, 


to see 


(visible). 


Vinculum, I, 


chain. 

221. Exercises. 





(a) 1. Balbus manus lavit. 2. Pueri manns lave- 
rant. 8. Agricola exercitum vidit. 4. Milites vene- 
rant. 5. Cains brachium smim fregerat. 6. Quantum 
voluptatis ceperunt! 

7. Nunquam utile est foedns rumpere. 8. Nunquam 
utile est fidem yiolare, quia semper est tnrpe. 9. Fa- 
cile est puerorum amnios donis placare. 10. Turpe est 
foedera negligere. 11. Galli negligebant foedera. 12. 
Nemo semper laborat. 13. Culpas snas simulatione 
virtutis texit. 14. Multum voluptatis ceperant. 15. 



* The gen. neminis and abl. neniine are not in good use. 



222.] FORMATION OF SECOND BOOT. 105 

Multum voluptatis amiserant. 16. Quantum cibi 
amiserunt ! 

(b) 1. Cains has broken his arm. 2. They had broken 
their arms. 3. The king had broken the treaty. 4. 
The Gauls had broken the treaty. 5. Caesar had seen 
the army. 6. The girls will have seen the queen. 7. 
Caesar conquered the Gauls. 8. The Gauls did not 
conqiier Caesar. 

9. It is disgraceful to break a treaty. 10. It is diffi- 
cult to conquer the Gauls. 11. It is not easy to con- 
quer the enemy. 12. He had appeased Balbus. 13. 
They will break their chains. 14. They had broken 
their chains. 15. It is easy to break (one's) arm. 16. 
They are losing much money. 17. They had lost 
much money. 18. They were losing much pleasure. 
19. They will condemn Balbus to death (215). 20. 
He had conquered his enemies. 



LESSON XLI. 



Formation of the Second Root — Second Irregularity — 

Reduplication. 

222. A few verbs of the first, second, and third 
conjugations, form the second root by prefixing to the 
first their initial consonant, with the following vowel 
or with e; e. g., 

Dare, to give ; d, ded. 

Mordere, to bite; mord, momord. 

Currere, to run ; curr, ciicurr. 

Rem. — The radical vowel is also sometimes changed ; as, cadere, to 
fall ; 2d root, cecid (a changed to i). 

5* 



106 first latin book. [223, 224 

223. Vocabulary 



Ab (prep, with all), 


from. 


Auctumnus, I, 


autumn. 


Barb a, ae, 


beard. 


Color, oris, 


color. 


Currere, cueurr, 


to run. 


Dare, ded, 


to give. 


Finis, is, m. or/. 


end. 


Humerus, I, 


shoulder. 


Mordere, momord, 


to bite. 


Mutare, av, 


to change. 


Nox, noctis, 


night. 


Pendere, pepend, 


to hang (intrans.), 


Per (prep, with accus, 


.) through. 


Sagitta, ae, 


arrow. 


Tondere, totond, 


to shear, shave. 


224. 


^Exercises. 



(a) 1. Equus per urbem cucurrit. 2. Sagittae ab 
hamero pependerunt. 3. Nox proelio (64.-8) finem 
dedit. 4. Malus pastor oves non totondit. 5. Malus 
pastor deglupsit oves ; non totondit. 

6. Boni pastoris 7 est tondere oves, non deglubere. 
7. Pastores agricolas riserunt. 8. Lupus boni pastoris 
overn momorderit. 9. Boni canis 7 non est oves mor- 
dere. 10. Servus portas urbis clauserit. 11. Pueri 
regis sceptram videbunt. 12. Lusciniae colorem muta- 
bunt. 13. Auctumno lusciniae color em suum mutave- 
rint. 

(b) 1. The dog has bitten the sheep. 2. Your dog 
had bitten the girl. 3. My horses have been running 
(have run). 4. Balbus has given his dog to your son. 
5. They had given their dogs to the shepherd. 

6. The wolf had bitten the sheep. 7. The shepherd 
will shear his sheep. 8. A shepherd does not shear 



225.] FORMATION OF SECOND ROOT. 107 

his sheep in the winter. 9. The wolves have bitten my 
dog. 10. Caius will shave (his) beard. 11. The cloak 
was hanging from (his) shoulder. 12. The dog has 
bitten the wolf. 13. They wrote the letter. 14. Bal- 
bus had shaved (his) beard. 15. The girls have pluck- 
ed flowers in Caius's garden. 16. The girls will walk 
in the garden. 17. The queen was walking through 
the city. 18. They have surrounded the city with 
walls. 19. They have offended-against the laws of 
their country. 



LESSON XLII. 



Formation of the Second Root — Thirl Irregularity— 
Second root after the analogy of other conjugations. 

225. A few verbs in each conjugation form the se- 
cond root according to the analogy of one or more of 
the other conjugations. 

1) A few in the first conjugation follow the 
analogy of the second ; e. g., 

Micare, to glitter : 1st root, mic ; 2d root, micu. 

2) A few in the second follow the analogy of the 
third; e. g., 

Bidere, to laugh ; 1st root, rid; 2d root, ris (rids). 
Lugere, to mourn ; " lug; lux (lugs). 

3) A few in the third follow the analogy of the 
second or fourth ; e. g., 

Colere, to till; 1st root, col; 2d root, colu. 
Petere, to seek ; " pet; " petlv. 



108 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [226 — 228. 

4) A few in the fourth follow the analogy of the 
second or third ; e. g., 

Aperire, to open ; 1st root, dper ; 2d root, aperu. - 
Vincire, to bind; vine; " vinx (cs). 

Rem. — Verbs of the third codj. which haye the 1st root in sc, together 
•with a few others, generally change the consonant-ending of the 
1st root into v in the 2d ; as, crescere, to increase; 1st root, cresc ; 
2d, crev. Most of these verbs are supposed to have been derived 
from pure roots. 

226. Kule of Syntax. — Length of time is gener- 
ally expressed by the accusative ; e. g., 

Cains annum unum vixit. 
(Caius year one lived.) 
Cains lived one year. 

227. Eule of Syntax.— The name of a town (91) 
where any thing is or is done, if of the first or second 
declension, and singnlar number, is put in the genitive ? 
otherwise, in the ablative ; e. g\, 

1. Caius annum uniim Cortonae vixit. 
Caius lived one year at Cortona. 

2. Caius annum unum Tibure vixit. 
Caius lived one year at Tibur. 

Rem. — In these examples, Cortonae and Tibure are names of towns; 
the first is put in the genitive, because it is of the first declension 
and sing, number, and the second in the aMative, because it is of 

the third declension. 

to 

228. Vocabulary. 

Amittere, amis, to lose. 

Annus, I, year. 

Aperire, aperu, to open, to uncover. 

Eiennium, two years, space of two years 

Castlgrare, av, to chastise. 



229.] FORMATION OF SECOND ROOT. 109 

Invltus, a, urn, unwilling. 

Lugere, lux, to grieve, mourn, weep for. 

Manere, mans, to remain. 

Matrona, ae, matron. 

Roma, ae, Rome, 

a city of Italy, on the Tiber. 

Tlbur, uris, Tibur, 

a town in Latium, in Italy. 

Totus, a, um (g. ius), the whole, the entire. 

229. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Balbus multos annos Eomae manserat. 2. 
Biennium Carthagme manserant, 3. Mater luxerit. 
4. Matronae luxerunt. 5. Brutum Bomanae matronae 
luxerunt. 6. Pastores agricolas riserunt. 7. Pueri 
capita aperuerunt. 

8. Dominus servi sui epistolam aperiet. 9. Dominus 
seryi sui epistolas aperuerat. 10. Aliquid temporis 4 
invltus (205) amittet. 11. Christiani est nemmem vio- 
lare. 12. Neminem violavit. 13. Biennium Eomae 
manebit. 14. Biennium Carthagine manebunt. 

(b) 1. They remained at Tibur many years. 2. Cains 
remained at Carthage for the space-of-twc-years. 3. 
He lias opened his father's letter. 4. They had opened 
the letters at Carthage. 

5. My father will remain at Borne the whole win- 
ter. 6. He wrote the letters at Eome. 7. They are 
mourning for f their son. 8. They have been in mourn- 
ing two years. 9. The girls wore mourning for f their 
mother. 10. My father values industry very highly. 

11. Balbus has accused the shepherd's son of theft. 

12. They have accused Caius of bribery. 



110 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [230—234 

LESSON XLIII. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

230. The Subjunctive Mood represents tiie action or 
state expressed by the verb, not as a fact, but simply 
as & possibility, wish, or conception of the mind; e. g., 

( lie may write, 

1. Scribat, •< may lie write, 

( let him write. 

^ -TT- w, ~, _t v, ( he has come that he may write, 

2. Yenit ut scribat, \ 1 . -- ■ ■ 



, he has come to write. 
Rem. — Scribat in the above examples is in the present subjunctive. 

231. The present subjunctive, when not preceded by 
ut, generally expresses either a wish (to be translated 
by may he), or a command (to be translated by lei 
him, &c). 

232. If the wish or command is to be expressed neg- 
atively, ne (never non) must be used with the subjunc- 
tive ; e. g., 

]STe putet, let him not think. 

233. The tenses of the subjunctive mood* are the 
present, imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect. 

234. The endings of the third persons sing, of the 
tenses of the subjunctive are as follows : 





Present. 


Imperfect. 


Perfect. 


Pluperfect. 




(1st root.) 


(1st root.) 


(2d root.) 


(2d root.) 


Conj. 


I. et, 


aret, 


erit, 


isset. 


Conj. 


II. eat, 


eret, 


erit, 


isset. 


Conj. 


III. at, 


eret, 


erit, 


isset. 


Conj 


IV. lat, 


Iret, 


erit, 


isset. 



* The subjunctive has no futures. 



235, 236.] 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Ill 



Hem. — The third persons plural of the several tenses of the subjunc- 
tive are formed by inserting n before t in the ending of the third 
singular. 

235. The English, signs corresponding to the Latin 
subjunctive are as follows: 



Present, may or can. 

Imperfect, might, could, would, or should. 

Perfect, may have. 

Pluperfect, might, could, would, or should have. 



236. Partial Paradigm of the Subjunctive Mood. 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Pres. Am-et, 

he may or can love. 


Am-ent, 

they may or can love. 


Imp. Am-aret, 

he might, &c. love. 


Am-arent, 

they might, &c. love. 


Perf. Amav-erit, 

he may have loved. 


Amav-erint, 

they may have loved. 


Plup. Amav-isset, 

he might, &c. have loved. 


Amav-issent, 

they might, (fee. have loved. 


SECOND CO 


NJUGATION. 


Pres. Mon-eat, 

he may or can advise. 


Mon-eant, 

they may advise. 


Imp. Mon-eret, 

he might, &c. advise. 


Mon-erent, 

they might, &c. advise. 


Perf. Monu-erit, 

he may have advised. 


Monu-erint, 

they may have advised. 


Plup. Monu-isset, 

he might, &c. have advised. 


Monu-issent, 
they might, &c. have advised. 


THIRD COS 


[JUGATION. 


Pres. Reg-at, 

he may ride. 


Reg-ant, 

they may rule. 


Imp. Reg-eret, 

he might, &c. rule. 


Reg-erent, 

they might, &c. rule. 


Perf. Rex-ent, 

he may have ruled. 


Rex-erint, 

they may have ruled. 


Plup. Rex-isset, 

he might, <fec. have ruled. 


Rex-issent, 

they might, &c. have ruled. 



112 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [237 

paradigm — cont inued. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Pres. Aud-iat, 

he may hear. 


Aud-iant, 

they may hear. 


Imp. Aud-Iret, 

he might, <fec. hear. 


And-irent, 

they might, (fee. hear. 


Per£ Audiv-erit, 

he may have Jieard. 


Audiv-erint, 

they may haw heard. 


Plup. Audiv-isset, 

he might, &c. have heard. 


Audiv-issent, 

they might, <kc. have heard. 



237. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Scribat. 2. K~e scribant. 3. Seryus claudat 
portas. 4. Pueri ne claudant portas. 5. Cantet puella. 

6. Ludant Pueri. 7. Pater scriberet. 8. Scripsissent. 
9. Filium suum sepeliret. 10. Sepeliat filium. 

11. Placet pueri animum. 12. Ne multa discat. 13. 
Fidem suara seryayit. 14. Fidem suam servavissent, 
15. Fidem suam inyiti seryayerunt. 16. Puerum in 
urbe sepeliyerunt. 17. Patres filios suos docuerant. 

(b) 1. Let the slayes shut the gates of the city. 2. 
Do not let the slaye see the letter. 3. Let him write 
a letter. 4. He might haye come. 5. They may have 
read the book. 6. He would haye broken his arm. 

7. Do not let the dosr bite the boy. 

8. Balbus has kept his word. 9. He would haye 
broken his word. 10. Let him appease his father's 
anger. 11. He remained at Carthage many years. 

12. They would haye remained at Eome two years. 

13. They had remained in the city one year. 14. Let 
fathers teach their sons. 



238—242.] subjunctive mood. 113 

LESSON XLIV. 

Subjunctive Mood. — Purpose. 

238. The present and imperfect subjunctive in Latin 
are often used to express a purpose. 

239. The infinitive often denotes purpose in English, 
but never in Latin ; accordingly, in expressions of pur- 
pose, the idioms of the two languages are entirely dis- 
tinct from each other, and should be carefully studied. 

^ Ars ^ t-7 ( I have come to see you. 

240. Una. Id. \ T A J 

* 1 1 came to see you. 

(I have come that I may see you. 
Lat. Id. \ T . * J 

{ I came that 1 might see you. 

241. "When a purpose is to be expressed affirma- 
tively, ut is used with the subj., when negatively, 
rie ; e. g., 

1. Balbiim rogat ut pueriim doeeat. 
(Balbus he aslcs that the hoy he may teach.) 

He asks Balbus to teach the boy. 

2. Balbiim rogat ne pueriim doeeat. 
He asks Balbus not to teach the boy. 

242. The subjunctive expressing purpose must be in 
the present tense ; unless the verb on which it depends 
is in a past tense (imperfect, perfect indefinite, or pluper 
feet), and then it must be in the imperfect. 

Rem. — The perfect definite (193, Rem.), or perfect with have (which 
denotes that the action has been done in a period of time still 
present), is considered a present tense, and followed by the pres> 
ent subjunctive. 



114 fiest latin" book. [243 — 245, 

243. Examples. 

1. Venit iit portas claudat. 

(He is coming that the gates he may shut) 
He is coming to shut the gates. 

2. Venit (indef.) iit portas clauderet. 
(He came that the gates he might shut.) 

He came to shut the gates. 

3. Venit (def.) iit portas claudat. 

(He has come that the gates he may shut.) 
He has come to shut the gates. 

Rem. 1. — In the 1st example the subjunctive is in the present tense ; 

because the verb venit, on which it depends, is present ; while In 

the 2d, it is in the imperfect, because its verb, venit (came), is in 

the perfect indefinite. 
Rem. 2. — In the 3d example the subjunctive is m the present, because 

the verb venit (has come) is in the perfect definite, and, though in 

form the same as in the 2d example, really expresses different 

time. 
Rem. 3. — The Latin perfect, when followed by the present subjunctive, 

must be translated into English with the sign have, as in example 3. 

244. Vocabulary. 

Comparare, av, to procure, to raise, to levy. 

Discere, didic, to learn. 

Edere, ed, to eat (edible). 

Evertere, evert, to overthrow, to pull down. 

Legere, leg, to read (legible). 

Plurlmiis, a, urn, very much or great, pi, very many. 

Quiescere, quiev, to rest, be quiet (quiescent). 

Rogare, av, to ask, to entreat. 

Vlvere, vix, to live (vivid). 

245. Exercises. 

(Construe ut and the subjunctive by the infinitive.) 

(a) 1. Legit ut cliscat. 2. Legit * ut discat. Legit 
ut disceret (242). 3. Edit ut vivat. 4. Edit ut viveret 

* See 243, Rem. 3. 



246, 247.] 



PERSONS OF VERBS, 



115 



5. Servi veniunt ut port-as claudant. 6. Veniat sernis 
ut portas urbis claudat. 7. Caiiim rogat ut veniat. 

8. Yenit ut copias comparet. 9. Komae plurimi 
vivunt ut edant. 10. Cantent piiellae. 11. Quiescant 
servi. 12. Yeniat Caius at epistolam sua manu scribat. 
13. Yenerat Caius ut Balbi animum donis placaret. 

(b) 1. He lias come to read (241) your letter. 2. 
They came to read your book. 3. They will come to 
accuse the judge of theft. 4. The boy will come to 
give his sister a garland. 

5. Let the slaves shut the gates. 6. Do not let your 
dog bite the boy. 7. They had come to raise forces. 
8. The enemy will think little 3 of your forces. 9. He 
had come to surround the girl's head with a beautiful 
garland. 10. Let boys prize wisdom very highly. 



LESSON XLY. 

Persons of Verrbs. — Indicative Mood. — First Conjugation. 

246. It will be remembered that verbs have three 
persons (12) : these are distinguished from each other 
by certain terminations called Personal Endings. 

247. The three persons may be formed in the per- 
fect indicative (which is somewhat irregular) by chang- 
ing it, of the third person singular, into the following 



PERSONAL ENDINGS. 





Singular. 






Plural. 


IstPers. 


2dPers. 


3dPers. 


1st Pers. 


2d Pers. 3d Pers. 


h 


isti, 


it. 


lmus, 


istis, erunt (or ere). 



116 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[248 



248. In all the tenses* of the indicative and sub- 
junctive moods, except the perfect indicative, the three 
persons may be formed by changing i of the third sin- 
gular into the following 



PERSONAL ENDINGS. 



1st Pers 

m, 5, 



lingular. 






Plural. 




2d Pers. 


3d Pers. 


1st Pers. 


2d Pers. 


3d Per 


B, 


t. 


mus, 


tis, 


nt. 



a) The ending o, for the first person singular, belongs to the 
indicative present, future perfect, and, in the first and second conju- 
gations, to the future. The vowel which stands before t in the 
third person is dropped before o in the first person, except in whe 
present of the second and fourth conjugations (and in a few verbs 
of the third) ; e. g., 



3 d Person. 

Pres. 1st Conj. Amat, lie loves, 

" 2d " Monet, lie advises, 

" 3d " Regit, he rules, 

" 4th " Audit, lie hears, 



1st Person. 

amo (a dropped), Hove. 
moneo (e not dropped), I advise. 
rego (i dropped), I rule. 
audio (i not dropped), I hear. 



b) The ending m, for the first person singular, belongs to the 
indicative imperfect, pluperfect, and, in the third and fourth conjuga- 
tions, to the future, and to the subjunctive throughout all its tenses. 
In the future of the third and fourth conjugations, the vowel e, which 
stands before t in the third person, is changed into a before m in 
the first person ; e. g., 



Zd Person. 
» 
Imperf. Amabat, he was loving, 

Pluperf. Amaverat, he had loved, 

Fut. 3d Conj. Reget, he will rule, 

" 4th ' ; Audiet, he will hear, 



1st Person. 

amabam, I was loving. 
amaveram, / had loved. 
regam, I will rule. 
audiam, I will hear. 



* We of course speak only of the active voice, as the passive has not 
yet been noticed. 



249, 250.] indicative mood. 117 

c) In the present and future tenses of the indicative, if i stands 
before t in the third singular, it is changed into iu in the third plural, 
in the fourth conjugation, and into u in the other conjugations; e. g., 

Singular, Plural. 

Fut. IstConj. Amablt, Tie will love, amabunt, they will love. 

" 2d " Monebit, he will advise, monebunt, they ivill advise, 

Pres. 3d " Regit, he rules, regunt, they rule. 

" 4th " Audit, he hears, audiunt, they hear. 

249. The vowel before the personal endings mils 
and tis, is long in the imperfect and pluperfect of the 
indicative, and in all the tenses of the subjunctive, ex- 
cept the perfect, in which it is common* (long or 
short). 

250. Paradigm of the Indicative Mood — First Con- 
jugation. 



Amare, to love: 1st root, dm; 2d, dmctv. 


Present (1st root). 


Singular 


Plural. 


1. Am-6, Hove. 


1. Am-amws, ice love. 


2. Am-as, thou lovesL 


2. Arn-a/is, ye or you love. 


3. Am-aZ, he loves. 


3. Am-arc^, they love. 


Imperfect (1st root). 


Am-abam, I was loving. 


Am-zhzmus, we were loving. 


Am-abas, 


Ani-aba^s, 


thou wast loving. 


ye or you were loving. 


Am-abai, he was loving. 


Am-aba?^, they were loving. 


Future (1st root). 


Am-abo, I shall love. 


Am-abimzis, we shall love. 


Am-abls, thou wilt love. 


Am-abi^is, ye or you will love. 


Am-abl^, he will love. 


Am-abu72/, they will love. 



* The vowel is also generally considered common before these end 
ings in the future perfect ; the old grammarians, however, make it long. 



118 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 
paradigm — continued. 



[251, 252. 



Perfect (2d root). 


Amav-i, 

J loved or have loved. 


Amav-imus, 

we loved or Tiaa-e ZoreJ. 


Amav-isft, 

thou lovedst or hast loved. 


Amav-is^Is, 

ye or yow ZoreJ or have loved. 


Amav4z, 

he loved or has loved. 


Am&Y-erunt (ere), 

£7ie?/ loved or 7i#re Zored 


Pluperfect (2d root). 


Amav-3ra?n, / 7ia^ loved. 


Amav-eramus, we had Loved. 


Amav-eras, 

Zftow ftdttZsZ ZoretZ. 


Amav-era&s, 

?/e or ?/ow 7iad Zored. 


Amav-erat, Tie /ifld Zored. 


Amav-er«rrf, they had loved. 


Future Perfect (2d root). 


Amav-ero, 

J shall have loved. 


Amav-erimz/s, 

ice s7i#ZZ have loved. 


Amav-eris, 

#iow wilt have loved. 


Amav-erMs, 

?/e or you will have loved. 


Amav-5ri£, Tie wz'ZZ 7i#i;e ZoueJ. 


Amav-eriVtf, #ie?/ mji'ZZ Tiare Zore<Z. 



251. Vocabulary. 






Ad (prep, with ace). 


to. 




Ducere, dux. 


to lead 


(duke). 


Hesternus, a, urn, 


of yesterday. 




Incolfimis, e, 


safe, uninjured. 




Legatus, I, 


ambassador 


(legate). 


Mittere, mis, 


to send. 


(mission) 


Praemittere, 


to send before. 




Primus, a, urn, 


first 


(prime). 



252. Exercises. 
(a) 1. Violabas legem. 2. Violavisti leges. 3. BaL 
bum voeavi. 4. Hesterno die Balbum vocavimus. 5. 
Urbem servavi. 6. Cives incoliimes servavimus. 7. 
Caium, summo ingenio (213) virum, ambitus accusa- 
veralis. 8. Balbum capitis damnabitis. 



253.] 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



119 



9. Legatos ad Caesarem mittunt. 10. Prima luce 
omnem equitatum praemisit. 11. Christiarms nemi- 
nem violabit. 12. Nemmem yiolavisti. 13. Multos 
annos regnabis. 14. Balbus paryo (181) content-as est 
15. Servus multa laude dignus est. 

(b) 1. You have kept your word. 2. I will not 
break my word. 3. You {pi.) have violated the laws 
of the state. 4. You (pi.) prize money very highly. 
5. We shall condemn avarice. 6. I have never ac- 
cused the queen. 7. We shall accuse the priest of 
treachery. 

8. They appeased the anger of Caesar. 9. We will 
appease your anger. 10. Caesar thought very highly 
of his army. 11. We will send ambassadors to the 
king. 12. It is the duty of a Christian 7 to keep his 
word. 13. It is the part of a wise man to be content 
with little. 



LESSON XLVI. 




Indicative Mood. — Four Conjugations. — Personal 
Pronouns. 

253. Paradigm of the Indicative Mood. 



Present 


(1st root), am, ts, &c, loving. 




Conj. I. 


Conj. II. 


Conj. III. 


Conj. IV. 


S. 1. 


Ain-6, 


Mon-eo, 


Reg-6, 


Aud-io, 


2. 


Am-as, 


Mon-es, 


Reg-is, 


Aud-ls. 


1 3. 


Am-a£ ; 


Mbn-et; 


Reg-IZ; 


Aud-it ; 


IP. 1. 


Am-amw5, 


Mon-e«Wc5, 


Reg-imfts, 


And-imus, 


2. 


Am-afe, 


Mon-e#s, 


Reg-itts, 


Aud-lzJis, 


1 3 - 


Am-ant. 


Mon-enZ. 


Reg-unt. 


Aud-iunt. 



120 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 
paradigm — continued. 



[253. 



Imperfect (1st root), was, did. 


S. l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


Conj. I. 

Am-abazn, 

Am-aba's, 

Am-aba£ : 

Am-abamws, 

Am-aba&s, 

Am-abanZ. 


Om^L II. 

Mon-ebam, 

Mon-ebas, 

Mon-ebai ; 

Mon-ebaraws, 

Mon-eba^s, 

M.on-eh&nt. 


Conj. III. 
Reg-ebam, 
Reg-ebas, 
Reg-ebai ; 
Reg-ebamws, 
Reg-ebaiis, 
Reg-ebara£ 


Conj. IV. 

Aud-iebam, 

Aud-iebas, 

Aud-ieba^ ; 

Aud-iebamws, 

Aud-ieba#s, 

Aud-iebara 4 . 


Future (1st root), shall or vri 


11. 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


Am-abo, 

Am-abls, 

Am-abtf ; 

Am-abim7/s, 

Am-abi2is, 

Am-abum 4 . 


Mon-ebo, 

Mon-ebis, 

Mon-ebii ; 

Mon-ebimws, 

Mon-ebi&s, 

Mon-ebu72?. 


Reg-am, 

Reg-e.s, 

Reg-e7 ; 

Reg-emus, 

Reg-e#s, 

Regr-en^. 


And-iam, 

Aud-ies, 

Aud-ie£ ; 

Aud-iemus, 

Aud-iezlls, 

Aud-ient. 


Perfect (2d root), have. 




S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


Amav-i, 
Amav-is^, 
Amav-ii ; 
Amav4?m/s, 
Amav-is&s, 
Amav-mm2 or 


Monu-i, 
Mbmi-isti, 
Norm-it ; 
Moau-tftras, 

Monu-is^s, 
Monu-eruni or 


Rex-i, 
Rex-isti, 
Rex-it ; 
Rex-lmus, 
Rex-isits, 
Rex-erunt or 


Audlv-i, 

Audiv-isti, 
AudiY-it ; 
Audlv-imus, 
Audiv-istis, 
Aiidlv-erunt or 


1 ere. 


ere. 


ere'. 


ere. 


Pluperfect (2d root), had. 




S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 
3. 


Amav-eram, 

Amav-eras, 

Amav-eraZ; 

Amav-eramws, 

Amav-era&s, 

Amav-era?i7. 


Monu-eram, 

Monu-eras, 
Monu-erai ; 
Monu-eraraws, 
Monu-era^s, 
Monu-erawZ. 


Rex-eram, 

Rex-eras, 

Rex-erai ; 

Rex-eramws, 

Rex-era^is, 

Rex-erartf. 


Audiv-eram, 

Audlv-eras, 

Audlv-era^ ; 

Audlv-eramws, 

Audlv-era^i5, 

Audlv-eram*. 


Future Perfect (2d root), shall or \ 


mil have. 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 
3. 


Amav-ero, 

Amav-eris, 

Amav-eri£ ; 

Amatf-eriraws, 

Amav-eniis, 

Amav-erin*. 


Morm-ero, 
Momi-eris, 
M6nu-erI2 ; 
Monu-enmws, 

Monu-erMs, 
Monu-erin^. 


Rex-ero, 

Rex-ei\s, 

Rex-en Z ; 

Rex-enmfzs, 

Rex-eritis, 

Rex-evhit. 


Audiv-ero, 

Audlv-eris, 
Audlv-erlJ ; 
Audiv-eriVm/s, 
Au&iv-eritiSj 

Audiv-erinz\ 



254 — 258.] SUBSTANTIVE PK0N0UNS. 



121 



PRONOUNS. 

254. Pronouns are words which supply the j lace of 
nouns; as, ego^I] tu, tliou, &c. 

255. Pronouns are divided into two classes ; viz., 

1) Substantive Pronouns ; as, ego, til, &c. 

2) Adjective Pronouns ; as, hie, this; ille, that. 

256. Substantive Pronouns are tkree in number, 
viz. : ego, I (luliich is of course of the first person) ; tu, 
thou {second person) ; and sui, of himself {third person). 
These from their signification are often called Personal 
Pronouns. 

257. Substantive Pronouns are declined as follows : 





SINGULAR. 






1st Person. 


2d Person. 


3d Person. 


N. 


Ego, I. 


Tu, thou. 




G. 


Mel, of me. 


Tul, of thee. 


^ Sui, of himself herself 
( itself. 


D. 


Mihi, to or forme. 


Tibi, to or /or tfiee. 


Sibi, to himself &c. 


A. 


Me, me. 


Te, thee. 


Se, himself. 


V. 




Tu, O &om. 




A. 


Me, with, &c. me. 


Te, ztith thee. 


Se, wizft himself 




PLURAL. 




N. 


Nos, we. 


Vos, ye or you. 




G. 


Nostrum, ) r 
orNostrl, j °/ ws - 


Vestrum, ) r 
or Vestrl, £ ^ *»• 


Sui, of themselves. 


D. 


Nobis, to us. 


Vobls, to you. 


Sibi, to themselves. 


A. 


Nos, ws. 


Vos, t/ow. 


Se, themselves. 


V. 




Vos, ye or yow. 




A. 


Nobis, with us. 


Vobls, with you. 


Se, 2m'z7i themselves. 



258. As the ending of the verb shows the person of 
its subject, the nominative of pronouns is seldom ex- 
pressed as the subject, except for the sake of emphasis 
or contrast. 
6 



122 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[259, 260. 



259. Vocabulary. 

Agere, eg, to drive, to lead, to do. 

De (prep, with abl), from, concerning. 



Dedere, dedid, 


to surrender. 




Demonstrare, av, 
Ego, 


to show, to demonstrate 
I. 


(demonstration). 


Errare, av, 


to err 


(error). 


Exponere, exposu, 
Facere, (io), fee, 
Gratia, ae, 
Gratias agere, 


to set forth, to explain 
to make, to do, to act. 
gratitude, favor, pi. thanks, 
to give thanks. 


(expose). 


Iter, itineris, n. 
Judicare, av, 
Occultare, av, 
Poscere, pSposc, 
Res, rei, 
Sed, 


journey, route 

to judge 

to conceal 

to demand. 

thing, affair, subject. 

but. 


(itinerant). 

(judicature). 

(occultation) 


Sensus, us, 
Tu. 


feeling, perception 
thou, you. 

260. Exercises. 


(sense). 



(a) 1. Eem omnem exposui. 2. Erravi. 3. Ego 
de meo sensu judico. 4. Ego misi viros: pueros tu 
misisti. 5. Hesterno die Balbum ad me vocavi. 6. 
Vos judicavistis. 7. Nos judicabimus. 8. Mihi gra- 
tias egistis. # 

9. Cains itinera nostra servabat. 10. Fidem suani 
inviti servaverunt. 11. Agricolae est laborare. 12. 
Cains, nt demonstravimus, itinera nostra servabat. 
13. Caesar servos poposcit. 14. Nos servos non 
poposcimus. 

(b) 1. We have read your letters. 2. You were play- 
ing, but /was writing. 3. He has given me a beauti- 
ful book. 4. He will give you {to you) thanks. 5. 
We shall thank you. 6. I had called the boy to me 



261.] SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. — FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 123 

7. Yesterday you called the girls to you. 8. We have 
never opened your letters. 

9. I have kept my word. 10. You have never 
broken your word. 11. They have accused you of 
theft. 12. The judge has condemned us to death (215). 
13. We will not accuse you of treachery. 14. We 
shall not remain in the city. 



LESSON XLYII. 



Subjunctive Mood. — Four Conjugations. 
261. Paradigm of the Subjunctive Mood. 



PRESENT (1st rO0 


t), may or can. 


Conj. L 


Conj. II. 


Conj. III. 


Conj. IV. 


Am-era, 


Mon-eam, 


Reg-am, 


Aud-iara, 


Am-es, 


Mon-eas, 


Reg-as, 


Aud-ias, 


Am-eZ ; 


M6n-ea£ ; 


Reg-aZ; 


Aud-iai ; 


Am-emus, 


Mon-eam&s, 


Reg-a?mzs, 


Aud-iarafts, 


Am-etis, 


Mon-eaft's, 


Reg-ai(is, 


Aud-iatf-s, 


Am-ent. 


Mon-eawZ. 


Reg-am\ 


Aud-ianZ. 


IMPERFECT ( 


1st root), mig'l 


f it, could, WOK 


M, OT should. 


Am-arera, 


Mon-erewi, 


Reg-erem, 


Aud-Irewi, 


Am-ares, 


Mon-eres, 


Reg-eres, 


Aud-Ires, 


Am-are£ ; 


M6n-ere2 ; 


Reg-ere7; 


Aud-Ire* ; 


Am-aremws, 


Mon-eremws, 


Reg-eremiis, 


Aud-Ire?nws, 


Am-areZis, 


Mon-ere#s, 


Reg-ere7is, 


Aud-lreZis, 


Am-are7i£, 


Mon-erenf. 


Reg-event. 


Aud-IrenZ. 


p: 


ERFECT (2d IT 


ot), may hai 


;e. 


Amav-erim, 


Monu-erim, 


Rex-erlm, 


Audlv-erira, 


Amav-eris, 


Monu-eris, 


Rex-em, 


Audlv-eris, 


Amav-eri^ ; 


Monu-erft ; 


Rex-erl/ ; 


Audiv-erit ; 


Amav-enmws, 


Monu-enmws, 


Rex-erirafts, 


Audlv-erl77iws, 


Amav-erWls, 


Monu-enZis, 


Rex-erMs, 


Audlv-eri#s, 


Amav-erin*. 


Monu erint, 


Rex-erin*. 


Audiv-erln*. 



124 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 
paradigm — continued. 



[262—265. 



PLUPERFECI 


(2d root), might, could, would, or should 




have. 




Conj. L 


Conj. II. 


Conj. III. 


Conj. IV. 


Amav-issem, 


Monu-issem, 


Rex-issem, 


Audiv-issera, 


Amav-isses, 


Monu-isses, 


Rex-isses, 


Audlv-isses, 


Amav-isseZ ; 


M5nu-isse£ ; 


Rex-isse£ ; 


Audlv-isse7 ; 


Amav-issem&s, 


Mbrm-issemus, 


Rex-issemfts, 


Audlv-issemzis, 


Amav-isse7is, 


Monu-isseZis, 


Rex-issetfis, 


Audlv-isse7ls, 


Aniav-issenJ. 


Monu-issen^. 


Rex-isse?^. 


Audlv-issertf. 



Rem. — It will be observed that throughout the subjunctive the 1st 
person sing, ends in m. 

262. The subjunctive with ut is used to express a 
result; e. g\, 

Tantiim est frigiis ut nix non liquescat. 

The cold is so great that the snow does not melt. 

263. The subjunctive with ut, denoting result, gene- 
rally depends upon a proposition which contains some 
word signifying so, such, so great, &c. ; thus, in the above 
example, it depends upon tantum (so great, or such). 

264. Hence, in turning English into Latin, that after 
so, such, so great, &c, must be translated by ut, and the 
verb which follows must be put in the subjunctive. 
(See example above.) 

265. When the subjunctive depends upon a verb in 
the present, perfect definite, or future, it must be put in 
the present tense, unless it represents its action as com- 
pleted at the time denoted by the principal verb ; and 
then it must be in the perfect; e. g., 

1. Tanta est pueri industria iit multa discat. 

The boy's industry is so great that he learns much. 



266—268.] subjunctive mood. 125 

2. Nescio quid dixerit. 

I do not know what lie lias said. 

Rem. — In the first example, the subjunctive ducat (learns) is in the 
present tense, because the time of its action is the same as that of 
est (pres.) on which it depends, and in the second example dixerit 
(he has said) is in the perfect, because it represents its action as 
completed at the time denoted by nescio (i. e. pres.). 

266. When the subjunctive depends upon a verb in 
the imperfect, perfect indefinite, or pluperfect, it must be 
put in the imperfect tense, unless it represents its action 
as completed at the time denoted by the principal verb, 
and then it must be in the pluperfect, e. g., 

1. Tanta erat puerl industria iit multa disceret. 

The boy's industry was so great that he learned 
much. 

2. Nesclvl quid dixisset. 

I did not know what he had said. 

Rem. — The imperf. disceret represents its action as not completed, while 
the pluperfect dixisset represents its action as completed. 

266. A few adjectives in Latin are often used merely 
to specify some particular part of the nouns to which 
they belong ; e. g., 

In summo j on the highest mountain {Lat. Id.). 

monte, 1 on the top of the mountain {Eng. Id.). 
In mediis j in the middle waters {Lai. Id.). 

aquis, ( in the middle \ >r midst) of the waters 

{Eng. Id.). 

268. Vocabulary. 

Alpes, Alpiiim, Alps. 

Conservare, av, to preserve (conservative). 

Frangere, freg, to break. 



126 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [269. 



Fngus, oris, 


cold 


(frigid). 


Ibi, 


there. 




Liquescere, lieu, 


to melt 


(liquid). 


Medius, a, urn, 


middle, midst of, middle of (267). 




Nare, av, 


to swim. 




Nondum, 


not yet. 




Piscis, is, m., 


fish. 




Summus, a, urn, 


highest, top (267) 


(summit) 


Tantus, a, um, 


so great. 
269. Exercises. 





(a) 1. Yenit tit me audiat. 2. Yeni ut yos audiam. 
3. Yenerunt ut nos audiant. 4. Yenerunt ut te audi- 
rent. 5. ISTe violetis fidem. 6. In summo monte tan- 
tum est frigus nt nix ibi nunqnam liqnescat. 

7. In snmmis Alpibns tantnm erat frigns ut nix ibi 
nunquam liquesceret. 8. Venit ut patriam auro yen- 
dat. 9. Yenisti ut patriam auro yenderes. 10. Ayis 
in summa arbore cantabat. 11. Multum yoluptatis 
ceperam. 

(b) 1. The cold is so great that the snow does not 
melt (265). 2. The cold has been so great that the snow 
has not yet melted (265). 3. The cold was so great on 
the top of the mountain that the snow did not melt 
there (266). 4. The cold was so great on the top of the 
Alps that the snow did not melt there (266). 5. I haye 
come to learn. 6. You haye come to play. 

7. Let him keep his word. 8. Do not break your 
word. 9. Do not sell your country for gold. 10. On 
the top 10 of the mountain the snow never melts. 11. 
On the top of the Alps the snow never melts. 12. The 
fish is swimming in the middle 10 of the water. 



270, 271.] 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



127 



LESSON XLVIIL 

Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Verbs in io 
of the Third Conjugation. — Demonstrative Pronouns. 

270. A few verbs of the third conjugation are in- 
flected (i. e. form their tenses, numbers, and persons) 
in the present, imperfect, and future indicative, and in 
the present subjunctive, like verbs of the fourth con- 
jugation. The following is an example. 

Rem. In the present, first and second persons plural, the i in the 
penult is short ; as, capimics, capitis. 

271. Paradigm of Verbs in io of the Third Conju- 
gation. 



Capere, to take 


; 1st root, cap ; 2d, cep. 


INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 

Cap-io, I take. 
Cap-is, thou takest. 
Cap-it, he takes. 


PEES 


,ENT. 

Plural. 
Cap-imus, we take. 
Cap-itis, ye or you take. 
Cap-iunt, they take. 




IMPERFECT. 


Cap-iebam, I was taking. 
Cap-iebas, thou wast taking. 
Cap-iebat, he was taking. 


Cap-iebamus, we were taking. 
Cap-iebatis,2/e or you were taking. 
Cap-iebant, they were taking. 




FUTURE. 


Cap-iam, I shall take. 
Cap-ies, thou wilt take. 
Cap-iet, he will take. 




Cap-iemus, we shall take. 
Cap-ietis, ye or you will take. 
Cap-ient, they will take. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Cap-iam, I may take. 
Cap-ias, thou mayest take. 
Cap-iat, he may take. 


PRES 


ENT. 

Cap-iamiis, we may take. 
Cap-iatis, ye or you may take. 
Cap-iant, they may take. 



128 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



[272—274. 



Rem. — The remaining parts of the indicative and subjunctive moods, in 
verbs in io, are entirely regular. 

272. It has been stated (255) that pronouns are di- 
vided into two classes, viz., Substantive Pronouns and 
Adjective Pronouns. 

273. Adjective pronouns are so called, because they 
are sometimes used as pronouns to supply the place of 
nouns, and sometimes as adjectives to qualify nouns. 
These are divided into several classes. 

274. Demonstrative Pronouns , so called because they 
point out or specify the objects to which they refer, 
are hie, ille, iste, is, and their compounds, and are declined 

as follows : 



1. Hie, this. 



M. 

N. Hie, 

G. Hujus, 

D. Hulc, 

A. Hunc, 

V. 

A. Hoc, 



M. 

N. Ille, 

G. Illius, 

d. mi, 

A. Ilium, 

V. 

A. Illo, 



Singular. 
F. 

haec, 

hujus, 

hulc, 

hanc, 

hac, 



Singular. 
F. 
ilia, 
illms, 
illl, 
ill am, 



N. 
hoc. 
hujus. 
hulc. 
hoc. 

hoc. 



Plural. 
M. F. 

Hi, hae, 

Horum, harum, 
His, his, 
Hos, has, 



His, his, 

2. Ille, he or that 

Plural. 
N. M. F. 

illiid. Illl, illae, 

illius. Illorum, illarum, 
illl. Illls, illls, 

illud. Illos, 



ilia, 



illo. 



nils, 



illas, 

illls, 



N. 

haec. 
horum. 
his. 
haec. 

his. 



N. 
ilia. 

illorum. 
illls. 
ilia. 



illls. 



3. Iste, that. 

Iste, that, is declined like ille. It usually refers to objects which 
are present to the person addressed, and sometimes expresses contempt,] 



275.] 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

paradigms -continued. 



129 







4. Is, he 


i or that. 






( 


Xess specific than ille.) 




M. 

N. Is, 


Singular, 
F, 
ea, 


N. 

id. 


Plural. 
M. F, 
Ii, eae, 


N. 
ea. 


G. Ejus, 


ejus, 


ejus. 


Eorum, eariim, 


eorum. 


D. El, 


el, 


el. 


lis or els, ils or els, 


ils or els. 


A. Eiim, 
V. 
A. Eo, 


earn, 


Id. 


Eos, eas, 


ea. 


ea, 


eo. 


lis or ei%, ils ur els, 


ils or els. 






5. Idem, 


the same. 






(Formed by annexing dem to is.) 




M. 

N. Idem, 


Singular, 
F 
eadem, 


N. 
idem. 


Plural, 
M. F, 
Ildem, eaedem, 


N. 
eadem. 


G. Ejusdem, ejusdem 


, ejusdem. 


Eorundem,earundem,eorundem. 


D. Eldem, 


eldem, 


eldem. 


Eisdem, or eisdem, or eisdem, or 
Iisdem, iisdem, iisdem. 


A. Eundem, eandem 


idem. 


Eosdem, easdem, 


eadem. 


V. 










A. Eodem, 


eadem, 


eodem. 


Eisdem, or eisdem, or 
Iisdem, iisdem, 


■ eisdem, or 
iisdem. 



275. Vocabulary, 

Ab (prep, with abl.), 
Castra, orum (plur.), 
Celeriter, 
dementia, ae, 
Confugere (io), confug, 
Cum (prep, with abl.) 9 
Dlmittere, dlmls, 
Ex (prep, with abl.), 
Impetus, us, 
Imperata, orum, 
Locus, I, 
Movere, mov, 

6* 



from. 

camp. 

quickly. 

mildness, clemency. 

to flee for refuge. 

with. 

dismiss. 

from. 

attack (impetus)* 

commands. 

place, position (local). 

to move, to put in motion. 



130 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [276, 277. 

Postera, um (mas. not used), next, following. 

Postulare, av, to demand. 

Promittere, promis, to promise. 

Promovere, promov, to move forward, to advance. 

Vero, indeed, truly. 

276. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Postero die castra ex eo loco movent. 2. Idem 
facit Caesar. 3. Idem faciebant. 4. Ego vero istud 
non postulo. 5. Veni art legerem. 6. Haec promis- 
istis. 7. Eodem die castra promovit. 

8. Hi primi (205) cum gladiis impetum fecerunt. 
9. Uli imperata celeriter fecerunt. 10. Ibi me non 
occidisti. 11. Eum ab se dimittit. 12. Venisti ut eum 
videres. 13. Hunc capitis damnabunt. 14. HLos pro- 
ditionis inviti accusaveratis. 

(b) 1. I will give you this book. 2. "We prize these 
beautiful books very highly. 3. They will think little 
of those beautiful books. 4. You have condemned 
this man to death. 5. I will entreat him not to do 
(that he may not do) this. 

6. I have unwillingly condemned him to death. 7. 
We will not accuse you of treachery. 8. You have 
accused him of bribery. 9. We entreated him not to 
accuse his son. 10. We did not make the attack. 11. 
They asked us to make an attack. 



LESSON XLIX. 



Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Intensive 

Pronoun. 

277. The Intensive Pronoun, ipse, himself, is so 
called because it is used 4;o render an object emphatic; 



278—281.] 



INTENSIVE PKONOUN. 



131 



it is also called an adjunctive pronoun, because it is 
usually joined to a noun, or to some other pronoun ; 
as, Romulus ipse, Eomulus himself; tu ipse, you 
yourself. 

278. Ipse, when joined to a noun or pronoun, may 
sometimes be translated by very ; as, hoc ipsum, this 
very thing. 

279. Ipse is declined as follows : 





Singular. 






Plural. 




M. 


F. 


jsr. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


N. Ipse, 


ipsa, 


ipsiim. 


Ipsi, 


ipsae, 


ipsa. 


G. Ipsliis 


, ipsliis, 


ipsliis. 


Ipsoriim, 


ipsariim, 


ipsoriim. 


D. Ipsi, 


ipsi, 


ipsi. 


Ipsls, 


ipsls, 


ipsls. 


A. Ipsiim 


, ipsam, 


ipsiim. 


Ipsos, 


ipsas, 


ipsa. 


V. 












A. Ipso, 


ipsa, 


ipso. 


Ipsls, 


ipsls, 


ipsls. 



Rem. — The substantive pronouns are rendered intensive by annexing 
the syllable met ; as, egomet, I myself In the substantive pro- 
noun of the third person, sese is used intensively in the accusative 
and ablative of both numbers. 



280. Vocabulary. 



Accedere, access, to approach 


(access). 


At, but, yet. 




Fortuna, ae, fortune. 




Fiiga, ae, flight. 




Geniis, generis, kind, nature. 




Justus, a, iim, just, fair. 




Niimerus, I, number 


(numerous) 


Occultare, av, to conceal 


(occult). 


Respondere, respond, to answer 


(respond) 



Usque, 



as far as ; usque ad, even to. 



281. Exercises. 
(a) 1. Ipse fuga mortem vitaverat 2. Ipse ad castra 
hostium accessit. 3. Ipsi usque ad castra hostium 



132 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[282, 



accesserant. 4. Cains sese occultabat. 5. Servi nostri 
sese oecultabunt. 6. Ipse dixit. 7. Hoc ipsum justum 
est. 8. At te eadem tua fortuna servavit. 9. Caesar 
haec promisit. 10. Ad haec legati responderunt. 

(b) 1. He himself accused the son of the king. 2. 
We shall accuse the king himself. 3. You yourself 
gave me this book. 4. They will read this very (ipse) 
book. 5. We ourselves will go to see the queen. 6. 
They have gone to see the queen herself. 

7. You promised this. 8. We will ourselves do the 
same. 9. You have said nothing of (de) the nature of 
the war. 10. We shall say nothing of the war itself 
11. They had come to condemn me to death. 



LESSON L. 

Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Relative 
and Interrogative Pronouns. 

282. The Relative Pronoun, qui, who, is so called, 
because it always relates to some noun or pronoun, ex 
pressed or understood, called its antecedent It is de 
clined as follows : 



Singular. 






Plural. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


N. Qui, 


quae, 


quod. 


Qui, 


quae, 


quae. 


G. Cujus, 


cujus, 


cujus. 


Quorum, 


quarum, 


quorum. 


D. Cul, 


cul, 


cul. 


Qulbus, 


qulbus, 


qulbus. 


A. Quern, 


quam, 


quod. 


Quos, 


quas, 


quae. 


V. 












A. Quo, 


qua, 


quo. 


Qulbus, 


qulbus, 


qulbus. 



283—285.] INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 



183 



283. Eule of Syntax. — The relative agrees with 
its antecedent in gender and number ; as, Puer qui 
scribit, the boy who writes. 

Rem. — Qui is in the masculine singular, to agree -with its antecedent 
puer ; but it is in the nominative because it is the subject of 
scribit, and not because its antecedent is in the nominative. 

284. The Interrogative Pronouns, qms and gro, are so 
called because they are used in asking questions. 
Qui (which ? what ?) is used adjectively, and is declined 
like the relative. Qms (who ? which ? what ?) is gen- 
erally used substantively, and is declined like the rela- 
tive, except the forms qms, quid, as follows : 



Si 


ngular. 






Plural. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


N. Quis, 


quae, 


quid. 


Qui, 


quae, 


quae. 


G. Cujus, 


cujus, 


cujus. 


Quorum, 


quamm, 


quorum. 


D. Cul, 


cul, 


cul. 


Quibus, 


quibus, 


quibus. 


A, Quern, 


quam, 


quid. 


Quos, 


quas, 


quae. 


V. 












A. Quo, 


qua, 


quo. 


Quibus, 


quibus, 


quibus. 



285. YOCABULARY. 

Amplius (comp. adv. from ample), 

Cogitare, av, 

Cognoscere, cognov, 

Coram, 

Exspectare, av, 

Nuntius, I, 

Parvus, a, urn, 

Perspicere, perspex, 

Plane, 

Vocare, av, 



more, further. 

to think, to think about., 

to ascertain. 

openly, in person. 

to await, expect. 

messenger. 

little, small. 

to perceive, to see. 

plainly. 

to call. 



134 FIRST latin- BOOK. [286, 287 

286. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Quis nos vocabit ? 2. Quid dixisti? 3. Quid 
cogitas? 4. Quid times? 5. Quis tibi hunc librum 
dedit ? 6. Eadem quae ex nuntiis cognoT erat, coram 
perspicit. 7. In qua urbe vivimus? 8. Uli, quod 
nemo fecerat, fecerunt. 9. Quid est quod amplius ex- 
spectes? 10. Quam urbem habemus ? 11. Quis Caium 
proditionis (214) accusat ? 12. Quem ambitus accusa- 
visti? 13. Carthagine invitus manebo. 14. Bien- 
nium Eomae inviti manebant. 15. Summam pruden- 
tiam simulatione stultitiae texistis. 

(b) 1. "Whom do you love ? 2. I see the slave whom 
you punished. 3. Who has sold his country for gold? 
4. Who gave the boy this beautiful book? 5. Who 
will show me the way ? 6. I will show you the house 
which my father built. 

7. Which book were you reading ? 8. I was read- 
ing the book which you gave me. 9. We all read to 
learn (that we may learn). 10. You have remained at 
Eome many years. 11. How much time you have 
lost! 



LESSON LI. 



Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Inierroga- 

tive Particles. 

287. Ne and num are interrogative particles ; and 
when a question has no interrogative pronoun (284) oi 
interrogative adverb, one of these particles must be 
used. 



288 — 290.] INTERROGATIVE PARTICLES. 



135 



288. If ne is used, it must follow and be joined to 
some other word ; and, if there is a not in the sen- 
tence, it must be joined to the non (not), making 
nonne; e. g., 

1. Scribit?2e Caius ? Is Caius writing? 

2. Nonne scribit ? Is not he writing ? 

3. Num scribit Caius ? Is Cains writing ? [No,] 

Rem. — A question with ne and without non asks for information (Ex. 1), 
with non expects the answer yes (Ex. 2), and with num expects 
the answer no (Ex. 3) ; thus, Num scribit Caius, means, Caius is 
not writing, is he $ 



289. VOCABULARY * 

Aspergere, aspers, sprinkle. 
Ara, ae, altar. 
Auctumnus, I, autumn. 
Construere, construx, to build, 

construct. 
Immergere, immers, to plunge 

into. 
In (prep, with accus. or abl.), with 



accus., to, into, against; with 

abl., in. 
Nidus, I, nest. 

Perlculosus, a, um, dangerous. 
Sanguis, mis, ra., blood. 
Semen, Inis, seed. 
Spargere, spars, to scatter, to sow. 
Victim a, ae, victim. 



290. Exercises. 
(In construing, omit the ne or num, but make the sentence a question.) 

(a) 1. Scripsitne Cains ?f 2. Num scripseratis ? 3. 
Num rex portas urbis sua manu claudet ? 4. Quid 
rides ? 



* It has been thought unnecessary longer to insert Icey-words in the 
"Vocabularies, but it is hoped the pupil will still continue to accustom him- 
self to associate with his Latin at least some of the more common Eng- 
lish words which have been derived from it. 

\ In construing a question, the auxiliary verb {does, do, did, has, have) 
must be put before the subject; as, Scripsitne puer, Has the boy written ? 
or, Bid the boy write ? 



136 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [291—293. 

5. Cains se in flumen immersit. 6. Periculosum est 
hieme se in flumen immergere. 7. Puer se in flumen 
infmergat. 8. Agricoldrum est 7 semina auctumno spar- 
gere. 9. Nonne in summis Alpibus tantum est frigus, 
nt nix ibi nunquam liquescat ? 10. Sacerdos victima- 
rum sanguine aram aspersit. 11. Nonne boni est pas- 
toris 7 tondere oves, non deglubere ? 

(b) 1. Does lie live to eat? [No.] 2. Does not lie 
eat to live ? 3. The husbandman has scattered seeds. 
4. Have not the husbandmen scattered seeds ? 5. He 
has plunged the body into the middle of the waters. 6. 
Let fish swim in the midst of the waters. 7. They have 
come to condemn (239) you to death. 8 8. Can he swim 
in the middle of the waters? 10 [No.] 9. The boy's in- 
dustry is so-great, that he can learn all things. 10. 
Has not a wolf bitten the sheep? 11. Are you shear- 
ing the sheep ? 



LESSON LIT. 

Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Pronouns, 
Indefinite and Possessive. 

291. Indefinite Pronouns are so called because they 
do not definitely specify the objects to which they re- 
fer; e. g., quiddm, a certain one; aliquis, some one; 
quisque, every one ; slquis, if any, &c. 

292. The indefinite pronouns are compounds either of 
quis or qui, and are declined in nearly the same man- 
ner as the simple pronouns. 

293. Quiddm, compounded of qui and dam, is de- 
clined like qui, except in the neuter singular, where it 



294, 295.J INDEFINITE PKONOUNS. 



137 



takes quid (instead of quod) when used substantively and 
in the accusative singular and genitive plural, where 
m before d is changed into n ; as, quenddm (not quern* 
dam), quorunddm (not quorumdam). 

294. Aliquis, compounded of alius and quis, is de- 
clined like quis, except in the neuter singular, nomina- 
tive and accusative, where it has aliquod adjective, and 
aliquid substantive ; and in the feminine singular and 
neuter plural, where it has aliqua. It is declined as 
follows : 







SINGULAR. 






M. 


F. 


N. 


N. 


Aliquis, 


aliqua, 


aliquod or aliquid. 


G. 


Alicujus, 


allcujus, 


alicujus. 


D. 


Ali cm,' 


alicul, 


alicul. 


A. 


Aliquem, 


aliquam, 


aliquod or aliquid. 


V. 








A. 


Aliquo, 


aliqua, 

PLURAL. 


aliquo. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


N. 


Aliqui, 


aliquae, 


aliqua. 


G. 


Aliquorum, 


aliquarum, 


aliquorum. 


D. 


Aliquibus, 


aliquibus, 


aliquibus. 


A. 


Aliquos, 


aliquas, 


aliqua. 


V. 








A. 


Aliquibus, 


aliquibus, 


aliquibus. 



295. The Possessive Pronouns (so called because they 
denote possession), metis, med, metim ; tutis, tud, tutim ; 
suits, sua, sutim; nosier, nostra, nostrum; vester, vestrd, 
vestrtim, are declined, as we have already seen (114, 
Bem. 3), like adjectives of the first and second declen* 
sion. 



138 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [296—298, 



296. Vocabulary. 

A (prep, with abl), from. 
Argentum, I, silver. 
Concilium, I, council. 
Continere, u, to restrain, confine. 
Culpa, ae, fault. 



Indicere, indix, to declare (as war), 

Infllgere, inflix, inflict. 

Si, if. 

Ullus, a, urn (113, Rem.), any. 

Vulnus, eris, wound. 



297. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Aliquid temporis invitus amittes. 2. Non est 
tua "alia culpa, si te aliqui timuerunt. 3. Aliquis est 
in horto tuo. 4. Caesar suos a proelio continebat. 5. 
Legatos ad Caesarem misit. 6. Legati ad concilium 
venerunt. 7. Christianorum est fidem suam servare. 
8. Turpe est patriae tuae leges violare. 9. Eex urbi 
bellum indicet. 10. Anguis agricolae vulnus infligebat. 
11. Tanta est industria tua, ut multa discas. 12. Tanta 
fuit industria tua ut multa disceres. 

(b) 1. Some one lias accused you of bribery. 2. They 
have accused certain persons of theft. 3. He will con- 
demn some one to death. 4. We have lost some time. 
5. The shepherd has sold his dog for gold. 6. It is 
the duty of a father to instruct his sons. 7. Who 
has accused you of theft? 8. No one has accused me 
of theft. 9. Some one has accused you of treachery. 
10. Who has accused me of treachery ? 11. The king 
himself has accused you of treachery. 



LESSON LIII. 



Verb. — Esse. 
298. The verb esse, to be, is called a substantive 
verb, except when used as an auxiliary in the passive 



299.] 



ESSE — TO BE. 



139 



voice (not yet examined) of other verbs. Its conjuga- 
tion is quite irregular. 



299. Paradigm of the verb Esse. 



Sum, I am. 
Es, thou art. 
Est, he is. 



Eram, I was. 
Eras, thou wast. 
Erat, he was. 



Ero, I shall be. 
Eris, thou wilt be. 
Erit, he will be. 



jFul, I have been. 

iFuistl, thou hast been. 

I 

Fuit, he has been. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present (am). 

Singular. .Plural. 

Sumus, we are. 
Est is, you are. 
Sunt, they are. 

Imperfect (was). 

Eramus, we were. 
Eratls, you were. 
Erant, they were. 

Future (shall or will be). 

Erimiis, we shall be. 
Eritis, you will be. 
Erunt, they will be. 

Perfect (have been or was). 

Fulmus, we have been. 
Fuistls, you have been. 
Fu erunt, 
Fuere, 



runt, ) ., 
re, \ ihe y 



have been. 



Pluperfect (had been), 



Fueram, / had been. 
Fueras, thou hadst been. 
Fuerat, he had been. 



Fueramiis, we had been. 
Fueratis, you had been. 
Fuerant, they had been. 



Future Perfect (shall or will have been). 



Fuero, I shall have been. 
Fueris, thou wilt have been. 
Fuerit, he will have been. 



Fuerimiis, we shall have been. 
Fuerltis, you will have been. 
Fuerint, they will have been. 



140 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 
paradigm — continued. 



[299 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Present (may or can be). 


Singular, 


Plural, 


Sim, I may be. 


Simus, we may be. 


Sis, thou mayest be. 


Sltis, you may be. 


Sit, lie may be. 


Sint, they may be. 


Imperfect (might, could, would, or should be). 


Essem, I might be. 


Essemus, we might be. 


Esses, thou mightest be. 


Essetis, you might be. 


Esset, he might be. 


Essent, they might be. 


Perfect (may have been). 


Fuerim, I may have been. 


Fuerimus, we may have been. 


Fueris, thou mayest have been. 


Fuerltis, you may have been. 


Fuerit, he may have been. 


Fuerint, they may have been. 


Pluperfect (might, could, would, or should have been). 


Fuissem, I might have been. 


Fuissemus, we might have been. 


Fuisses, thou mightest have been. 


Fuissetis, you might have been. 


Fuisset, he might have been. 


Fuissent, they might have been. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD* 


Es, or esto, be thou. 


Este or estote, be ye. 


Esto, let him be. 


Sunto, let them be. 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 


Present, Esse, to be. 


Perfect, Fuisse, to have been. 


Future, Fiiturus (a, urn) esse, to be about to be. 


PARTICIPLE. 


Future, Fiiturus, a, urn, about to be. 



* The remaining forms are given here in order to complete the Par- 
adigm of the verb esse, although the nature and use of the imperative and 
infinitive moods, and of the participles, have not yet been examined ; a 
word of explanation will be sufficient for this place. 



300—304.] ESSE— TO BE. 141 

300. The Imperative Mood denotes a command, and 
of course is never used in the first person. 

301. The Infinitive Mood, as we have already seen 
(9), represents simply the meaning of the verb, with- 
out person or number. It has three tenses, present, 
perfect, and future. 

302. The Participle is that part of the verb which 
has the form and inflection of an adjective; thus, the 
participle futurus, a, urn, is declined like the adjective 
bonus, a, um (112). 



303. YOCABULAKY. 

Absolvere, absolv, to acquit 

Admlratio, onis, admiration. 

Brevis, e, short. 

Dlgnus, a, um, worthy. 

Ferrum, I, iron. 

Habitare, av, to dwell, to inhabit. 

Honor, oris, honor. 



Incertiis, a, um, uncertain. 
Indlgmls, a, um, unworthy. 
Mens, tis, mind, reasoning faculty. 
Opus, eris, work. 
Tranquillus, a, um, calm, tran- 
quil. 
Utilis, e, useful. 



304. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Mens sapientis semper erit tranquilla. 2. Est 
tuum* iter facere. 3. Puer in horto fuerat. 4. His 
honoribus (181) digni sitis. 5. Caius vita indlgnus est. 
6. Ferrum et aurum sunt utilia. 7. Haec opera sunt 
admiratione digna. 8. Yita est brevis et incerta. 9. 
Improborum 7 est malos laudare. 10. Yenimus ut 
patriae tuae leges violaremus. 11. Yeniant servi ut 
portas urbis claudant. 12. Multos annos Eomae habi- 
taveratis. 

(b) 1. The good will be happy. 2. May you be 
happy. 3. We all might have been happy. 4. It is 

* Est tuiim, it is yours; L e., your duty. 



142 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [305, 306, 

my duty to keep the laws of my country. 5. May he 
ever be worthy of this honor. 6. He would have been 
unworthy of his father. 

7. He had been king many years. 8. We will never 
praise the bad. 9. They will condemn us to death. 
10. We will never accuse the good. 11. He had broken 
his arm at Athens. 12. Virtue is the highest wisdom. 
13, We will acquit you of bribery (214.) 



LESSON LIV. 

Verb Esse, continued. — Comparison of Adjectives. 

305. Adjectives in Latin, as in English, may express 
different degrees of the quality which they denote ; e. g., 

Altiis, altior, altissimus. 

High, higher, highest. 

Rem. — In this example, altus (high) is said to be in the positive degree; 
altior, in the comparative ; and altissimus, in the superlative. 

306. In Latin, adjectives are compared by adding to 
the root of the positive the following endings : 

Comparative. Superlative. 

M. F. N. M. F. N. 

ior, ior, ius. issimus, isslma, issimum. 

Examples. Root. Comparative. Superlative. 

Altiis (high), alt. altior (i5r, ius), altissimiis (a, urn). 

Mltis (mild), mlt. mitior (ior, ifis), mltisslmiis (a, um). 

Rem. 1. — Adjectives in er add rimus (a, urn) to the positive, to form 
the superlative ; e. g., 

Pulcher, pulchrior, pulcherrin iis. 

Rem. 2. — A few adjectives in lis form the superlative by adding limfa 
to the root of the positive ; e. g., 



307 — 309.] COMPARISON - OF ADJECTIVES. 143 

Faciiis (easy), facilior, facillimus. 

DifficiLis (difficult), diff Icilior, diff icillimus. 

Similis (like), similior, simillimus. 

Dissimilis (unlike), dissimilior, dissimillimus. 

Hem. 3. — The following adjectives are quite irregular in their com* 
parison, viz. : 

Bonus (good), rnelior, optimiis. 

Maliis (bad), P e j° r » pessimiis. 

Magnus (great), major, maximus. 

Parvus (little), minor, minimus. 

Multus (much), plus (pi. plures, ) i^*^* 

plura), ) v ^^" • 

307. The conjunction quam is generally used with 
the comparative degree, unless one of the persons or 
things compared is the subject of the proposition, in 
which case quam is usually omitted, though sometimes 
used ; e. g., 

1, Nihil est dementia divlniiis. 
Nothing is more godlike than clemency. 

2. Europa minor est quam Asia. 
Europe is smaller than Asia. 

308. Eule of Syntax. — The comparative degree 
without quam is followed by the ablative. 

Rem. 1. — dementia in the first example is in the ablative by this rule. 

Rem. 2. — If quam is expressed, the following noun will be in the same 
case as that which precedes : thus, Asia, which follows quam in 
the second example, is in the same case as Europa, which precedes. 

309. The conjunction quam before a superlative ren- 
ders it intensive ; e. g., 

r, s, t - „ » ( Una. Id. As manv as possible. 
Quam plurimi, •< _ * _ 7 . _ J r 
K LaL Id. As the most. 

„■■■'• w j Eng. Id. \ £ ««»* as P 033 ^ 6 - 
Quam maximus, *\ ( The greatest possible. 

( Lot. Id. As the greatest. 



144 FIEST LATIN - BOOK. [310, 311 

Rem. — The superlative may often be best translated by very ir stead 
oimost; as, mons altissi?nus, a very high mountain. 

310. Vocabulary. 

Amplus, a, um, extensive, great 
Argentum, I, silver. 
Celeber, brls, bre, celebrated. 
Cicero, oms, Cicero. 
Dlvlnus, a, um, divine. 
Futurus, a, um, future. 
Gravis, e, heavy. 
Impendere, to overhang, to 
threaten. 



Ignoratio, oms, ignorance. 
Malum, I, an evil. 
Pretiosiis, a, iim, valuable. 
Quam, than. 
Quam maxlmus, a, um, as e;reat 

as possible. 
Ratio, oms, reason. 
Scientia, ae, knowledge. 
Turns, is, tower. 



311. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Aurum gravius est argento. 2. Ignoratio futa- 
rorum malorum utilior est quam scientia. 3. Difficilli- 
mum est iram placare. 4. In summis montibns l0 acer- 
rimum est frigus. 

5. Veniunt ut copias comparent. 6. Yenit nt quam 
maximas 9 copias compararet. 7. Tunis est altior muro. 

8. Quid est in liomine ratione divinius ? 9. Mons al- 
tissimus impendebat. 10. Cicero erat orator celeber- 
rimus. 11. Eomani ampliores copias exspectabant. 

(b) 1. Gold is very heavy. 2. Gold is more valua 
ble than silver. 3. Wisdom is more valuable than 
gold and silver. 4. You are building a very high, 
wall. 5. You have your wall higher than your tower. 
6. We shall raise very large forces. 7. You have 
raised larger forces than the king himself. 

8. We have come to raise as large forces as possible. 9 

9. Let them raise as large forces as possible. 10. It 
is 6 very easy to keep one's word. 11. It is easier to 
keep one's word than to appease anger. 12. Who was 
more celebrated than Cicero ? 13. He was a very cele- 
brated orator. 



312 — 315.] COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 145 

LESSON LV. 

Compounds o/'Esse. — Comparison of Adverbs. — Numeral 

Adjectives. 

312. The compounds of esse (except posse, to be able, 
which, is irregular, and will be noticed hereafter) are 
conjugated like the simple esse, prodesse, however 
(compounded of pro, for, and esse, to be), inserts d after 
pro in those parts which in the simple verb begin with 
e; as, 

Pres. Prosiim, proves, prodest, prosiimus, prodestis, 
prosunt, &c. 

313. The compounds of esse {except posse) are followed 
by the dative, as they take only an indirect object (82 
and 643, 2) ; e. g., 

Mihi profuit. 

It profited me (did good to me). 

Rem. — Here it is plain that mihi (to me) is not a direct, but only an 
indirect object. 

314. Most adverbs are derived from adjectives, and 
are dependent upon them for their comparison: the 
comparative of the adverb being the same as the neu- 
ter comparative of the adjective, and the superlative 
being formed from that of the adjective by changing 
the ending its into e ; as, 

Adj. Altiis, altior (ius neat), altissimus. 
Adv. Alte, altius, altissime. 

NUMERALS. 

315. Numerals comprise, 

(a) Numeral adjectives, consisting of three distinct 
classes ; viz., 

7 



146 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



[316, 317 



1) Cardinals, which, denote simply the number of 
objects; as, units, one; duo, two, &c. 

2) Ordinals, which denote the position of any ol> 
ject in a series; as, primus, first; secundus, 
second. 

3) Distributives, which denote the number of ob- 
jects which are taken at a time; as, singulis 
one by one ; bini, two by two. 

(b) Numeral adverbs ; as, semel, once ; bis, twice.. 
(See Numerals, 583.) 

316. Eule of Syntax. — Adverbs modify verbs, ad- 
jectives, and other adverbs; e. g., Miles fortiter pug- 
liat ; the soldier fights bravely. Haud difficilis, not dif- 
ficult. 

317. (a) The first three cardinals, unus, duo, and tres, 
are declined as follows : 

1. Paradigm of uniis, one. 



N. Unus, 


una, 


unum. 


Unl, 


unae, 


1 

una. 


G. Unlus, 


unlus, 


unlus. 


Unorum, 


unarum, 


1 
unorum. 


D. Unl, 


unl, 


unl. 


Unls, 


unls, 


unls. 


A. Uniim, 


On am, 


unum. 


Unos, 


Unas, 


una. 


V. Une, 


una, 


uniim. 






1 


A. Uno, 


una, 


uno. 


Unls, 


unls, 


unls. 



Rem. — The plural of units, as a numeral, is used only with nouns which 
have no singular. 

2. Paradigms of duo, two, and tres, three. 



N. Duo, duae, 


duo. 


Tres(>. 4/.), tria. 


G. Duorum, duarum, 


duorum. 


Trium, 


trium. 


D. Duobus, duabus, 


duobus. 


Tribus, 


tribus. 


A. Duos and) -. _ 
duo, I duas ' 


duo. 


Tres, 


tria. 


V. Duo, duae, 


duo. 


Tres, 


tria. 


A. Duobus, duabiis, 


duobus. 


Tribus, 


tribus. 






318 — 321.] NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 147 

Rem. — Tres is declined like the plural of tristis (153). 

(b) Cardinal numbers, from four to one hundred, are 
indeclinable; those denoting hundreds are declined 
like the plural of bonus (112) ; e. g., diicenti, ae, a, two 
hundred. 

318. Ordinals are declined like bonus. Distributives 
are declined like the plural of bonus. 

319. Whenever the same noun belongs to both mem- 
bers of a comparison in Latin, it is generally expressed 
in the first and omitted in the second ; in English, how- 
ever, it is expressed in the first, and represented in the 
second by the pronoun that or those : e. g., 

Maris superficies major est quam terrae. 

The sea's surface is greater than (that*) of the land. 

Rem. — Hence, in translating English into Latin, that, those, after than, 
should be omitted. 



320. Vocabulary. 

Concertare, av, to contend, quarrel. 

Continues, a, um, successive. 

Decern, ten. 

Decimus, a, um, tenth 

Duo, duae, duo, two. 

Interesse, interfu, to be engaged 

in. 
Mare, is, sea. 
Obesse, obfu, to be prejudicial to. 



Omnlno, altogether, in all. 
Prodesse, profu, to do good, to 

profit. 
Prcducere, produx, to lead for' 

ward or out. 
Quartus, a, um, fourth. 
Quinque, five. 
Superficies, el, surface. 
Terra, ae, earth. 



321. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Milites fortiter pugnant. 2. Eomani fortius 
quam hostes pugnaverunt. 3. Ex eo die dies conti- 
nuos quinque Caesar pro castris suas copias produxit. 
4. Erant omnino itinera duo. 5. Caesar quam max* 

* Her© that stands for the surface. 



148 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [322 

imas copias comparaverat. 6. Caius, vir summo inge* 
nio praeditus, Eomae habitat. 7. Servus meus proelio 
interfuit. 8. Fides plurimis profuit. 9. Christianorum 
est 7 avaritiam damnare. 10. Cains multis proeliis in- 
terfuerat. 11. Terrae superficies minor est quam maris. 
12. Caesar decimam legionem misit. 

(b) 1. They will fight bravely. 2. You fought more 
bravely than the Eomans. 3. The king himself was 
engaged in the battle. 4. He fought very bravely. 
5. Ten legions were engaged in the first battle. 6. 
The soldiers of the tenth legion fought more bravely 
than those h of the fourth. 7. Anger has often been 
prejudicial to states. 8. It is the part of a Christian to 
do good to as many as possible. 9. Caesar raised the 
greatest forces possible. 10. Many states relying on 
their strength will raise forces. 



LESSON LYI 



Passive Voice. — Third Persons of Tenses for continued 

Action. 

322. A transitive verb (72) may represent its 
subject, 

1) As acting upon some object; as, Pater f ilium 
docet, the father teaches his son ; it is then said 
to be in the Active Voice. 

2) As acted upon by some other person or thing; 
as, Flliiis a patre docetiir, the son is taught by 
his father ; it is then said to be in the Passive 
Voice. 



323, 324.] passive voice. — third persons. 



149 



Rem. — The forms which have been used in the previous exercises all 
belong to the active voice : we shall now consider the formation 
and use of the passive. 

323. The third persons (singular and plural) of the 
tenses for continued action (190), both in the indica- 
tive and subjunctive moods, are formed in the passive 
voice, by adding the ending ur to the corresponding 
forms of the active. 

a) But observe that the vowel before the t in the singular is long, 
except from it in the third conjugation, and from abil and eb'it. 

324. The following table presents the formation of 
the third persons of the passive in the moods and tenses 
just mentioned. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Present (1st root), is, are loved, &c. 


Conj. I. 


Conj. II. 


Conj. III. 


Conj. IV. 


Am- at, 


Mon-et, 


Reg-It, 


Aud-It, 


Am-atwr. 


Mon-etwr. 


Reg-itur. 


Aud-ltur. 


Am-ant, 


Mon-ent, 


Reg-unt, 


Aud-iunt, 


Am-antur. 


Mon-entwr. 


Reg-untu?*. Aud-iuntftr. 


Imperfect (1st root), was, were loved, &c. 


Am-abat, 


Mon-ebat, 


Reg-ebat, 


Aud-iebat, 


Am- abater. 


Mon-ebatftr. 


Reg-ebatftr. 


Aud-iebat&r. 


Am-abant, 


Mon-ebant, 


Reg-ebant, 


Aud-iebant, 


Am-abantwr. 


Mon-ebantftr. 


Reg-ebantu?*. 


Aud-iebantwr. 


Future (1st root), shall or will be loved. 


Am-abit, 


Mon-ebit, 


Reg-et, 


Aud-iet, 


Am-abitwr. 


Mon-ebit&r. 


Reg-etur. 


Aud-ietwr. 


Am-abunt, 


Mon-ebunt, 


Reg-ent, 


Aud-ient, 


Am-abuntftr. 


Mon-ebuntur. 


Reg-entftr. 


Aud-ient&r. 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Present (1st root), may or can be loved. 


Am-et, 


Mon-eat, 


Reg-at, 


Aud-iat, 


Am-etizr. 


Mon-eatftr. 


Reg-atur. 


Aud-iatz2r. 


Am-ent, 


Mon-eant, 


Reg-ant, 


Aud-iant, 


Am-entzir. 


Mon-eantwr. 


Reg-antwr. 


Aud-iantwr. 



150 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 
paradigm — continued. 



[325—327 



Am-aret, 

Am-aretwr. 

Am-arcnt, 

Am-arentftr. 



Imperfect (1st root), 

Mon-eret, 
Mon-eret&r. 

Mon-erent, 
Mon-erentftr 



might, could, &c, he loved, 

Reg-eret, Aud-Iret, 

Reg-eretftr. Aud-lret&r. 

Reg-erent, Aud-Irent, 

Reg-erentwr. Aud-irentzzr. 



325. Eule of Syntax. — Passive verbs are followed 
by the same cases as the active, except the direct ob 
ject, which becomes the subject of the passiye (322); 

«• g-i 

Act. 111! Balbiim furti accusant. 
They accuse Balbus of theft. 

Pass. Balbus ab illis furti accusatiir. 

Balbus is accused of theft by them. 

Rem. — Observe that the agent is put in the ablative ■with ab (ab illis) 
a, however, is often used before a consonant. 



326. Vocabulary. 

Colere, fl, to cultivate, to practise. 
Demonstrare, av, to show. 
Interf Icere (iS),interfec 9 to kill, to 

slay. 
Mittere, mis, to send. 
Pro (prep, with abl.),for, before. 



Rhenus, I, Rhine, a river. 

Rellquus, a, urn, the rest, the other 

Sex, six. 

Supra, above. 

Tangere, tetig, to touch, reach, 

UnuSj a, um, one, single, single one. 



327. Exercises. 
(a) 1. Caius filios docet. 2. Filii a Caio docentur. 
3. Legatos ad Caesarem mitteiit. 4. Legati ad Caesa- 
rem mittentur. 5. Mittantur legati. 6. Reliquas sex 
legiones pro castris in acie constituet. 7. Caium capitis 
damnabunt. 8. Caius capitis damnabitur. 9. Haec 
civitas Bhenum tangit. 10. Haec civitas Rhenum. 
ut supra demonstravimus, tangit. 11. Virtus ab omni- 
bus colatur. 



328—830.] passive voice. — third persons. 151 

(5) 1. Balbus will kill Cains. 2. He will be killed 
by Balbus. 3. Cams accuses me of theft. 4. He is 
accused of theft by Cains. 5. Let him be accused of 
bribery. 6. Let them be condemned to death. 7. 
They are killed in the first battle. 8. Let not the king 
be condemned to death. 9. The law will be broken. 

10. Will not the laws be broken by wicked (men)? 

11. Let not the laws of the city be broken by us. 



LESSON LVII. 



Passive Voice. — Third Persons of Tenses for Completed 

Action. 

328. The tenses for completed action in the passive 
voice are called Compound Forms, and consist of the 
perfect participle with certain parts of the verb esse 
(299). We must accordingly notice here the formation 
of this participle. 

329. The perfect participle is formed from what is 
called the third root, by the addition of the ending us 
(a, ik), and is declined like bonus. 

330. The third root is formed from the first, 

1) In the first, second, and fourth conjugations 
by the addition of the respective endings, at, 
it, and it; e.g., 

Amare, am, ama£. 

Monere, mon, momt. 

Audire, aud, aud^. 

2) In the third conjugation, by the addition of ^ 
or sometimes s (especially to the ^-sounds). 



152 



FlftST LATIN BOOK. 



[331, 332 



a) Any p-sound before t is p (i. e., pt or bt becomes pi). 
V) Any /i-sound before t is c (i. e,, cl, gt, or £w£ becomes c£). 
c) D, and sometimes g-, is dropped before s (see 208, c, and 211), 

Scrlbere, scrlfr, script (b changed to p). 

Regere, re>, rect (g changed to c). 

Claudere, claui, clans (cl dropped). 

331. The third persons singular of the perfect, plu- 
perfect, and future perfect of the passive indicative are 
formed respectively from the third singular of the pre- 
sent, imperfect, and future* of the indicative of the verb 
esse and the perfect participle ; and the plural is formed 
in the same way, by using the plural of the participle 
and verb. 

332. The third persons of the perfect and pluperfect 
passive subjunctive, are formed by a similar combina- 
tion of the perfect passive participle with the third 
persons of the present and imperfectf subjunctive 
of esse. 

PARADIGM. 





Conj. 


I. 




Amare. 


1st root, 


dm, 


3d 


a 


dmat. 





Conj. 


II. 




Monere. 


1st 


root, 


mo 72, 


3d 


u 


monit. 



Conj. Ill 

Regere. 
1st root, reg, 
3d " rect. 



Conj. IV. 

Audlre. 
1st root, and, 
3d " audit. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Perfect (has been or was loved, &c). 



AmatusJ est, I Monitiis est, 
AmatlJ sunt. MSnitI sunt. 



Rectus est, 
Recti sunt. 



Audita s est, 
Audit! sunt. 



* Instead of the present, imperfect, and future, the perfect, pluper- 
fect, and future perfect are sometimes used. 

f Instead of the present and imperfect, the perfect and pluperfect are 
sometimes used. 

% These participles, "which, it must be remembered, are declined like 
bdnus (302), are always of the same gender and number as the subject 
of the verb, thus : 



333.] PASSIVE VOICE.-— THIRD PERSONS. 

paradigm — continued. 



153 



Pluperfect (had been loved, &c). 



Amatus erat, I Momtus erat, 
Amatl erant. Monitl erant. 



Rectus erat, iAuditus erat, 
Recti erant. Audltl erant. 



Future Perfect (shall or will have been loved, &c). 



S. | Amatus erit, 
P. | Amatl erunt. 



Monitiis erit, 
Monitl erunt. 



Rectus erit, 
Recti erunt. 



Auclltus erit. 
Audltl erunt. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Perfect (may have been loved, &c). 



Amatus sit, 
Amatl sint. 



Momtus sit, 
Monltl sint. 



Rectus sit, 
Recti sint. 



Audit c s sit, 
Audltl sint. 



Pluperfect (might have been loved, &c). 



Amatus esset, 
Amatl essent. 



Momtus esset, 
Monitl essent. 



Rectus esset, 
Recti essent. 



Auditus esset, 
Audltl essent. 



333. Vocabulary. 

Aestimare, av, at, to value, to prize. 

Colloquium, I, conference, meeting. 

Consplcere (io), conspex, con- 
spect, to see, discover. 

Decernere, decrev, decret, to de- 
cree. 

Dicere, dix, diet, to say, speak, 
name. 

Facere (io), fee, fact, to do, make, 
perform. 

Frangere, freg, fract, to break, to 
violate. 



Interf icere (io), fee, feet, to kill. 
Interim, in the mean time, mean- 
while, 
Lenis, e, mild, merciful. 
Llterae, arum (pi.), letter, epistle. 
Mittere, mis, miss, to send. 
Par are, av, at, to prepare. 
Quintus, a, um, fifth. 
Secundiis, a, iim, second. 
Sententia, ae, sentiment. 
Supplicatio, onis, thanksgiving. 
Vlgintl, twenty. 



Amatus est, he has been loved. 

Amata est, she has been loved. 

Amatum est, it has been loved. 

Amatl sunt, they (men) have been loved. 

Amatae sunt, they (women) have been loved. 

Amata sunt, they (things) have been. loved. 



154 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [334, 335, 

334. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Supplicatio decreta est. 2. Mors omnibus 
parata est. 3. Dies colloquio dictus erat ex eo die quin- 
tals. 4. Multa ab Caesare in earn sententiam dicta 
sunt. 5. Faciam id quod est lenius et utilius. 6. Mit- 
tuntur ad Caesarem a Balbo literae. 7. Interim mili- 
tes legionum duarum ab hostibus conspiciebantur. 8. 
Milites legionum duarum conspecti sunt. 

(b) 1. A thanksgiving had been decreed to Caesar. 
2. Twenty soldiers of the tenth legion had been killed 
in the second battle. 3. Money has ever been valued 
very highly. 4. Has not money always been valued 
very highly ? 5. Were not the laws broken at Athens ? 
6. The laws had been broken at Eome. 7. We will 
appoint the tenth day for a conference. 8. Messengers 
had been sent to the king. 9. A soldier was sent to 
the king. 



LESSON LYIII. 



Indicative Mood of the Passive Voice. 

335. The persons of the tenses for continued action 
In the indicative and subjunctive moods may be formed 
from the corresponding parts of the active, as follows : 

a) The first persons, by dropping the final conso- 
nant (when there is one), and adding r ; e. g., 
Amo (act), amor (pass, r added). 

Amabam (act.),- amabar (pass, m dropped, r added). 

b) The second persons, by changing s (sing.) into 
ns (or re), and tis (plur.) into mini; e. g., 



836—338.] INDICATIVE PASSIVE. 



155 



Amas (act), amam (or re) (pass, s changed to ris or re). 
Amatis (act), amamini (pass, tis " " mini). 

c) The third persons, by adding ur (323) ; e. g., 

Amat (act), amatur (pass, voc added). 
Amant (act.), amantur (pass, ur added). 

336. The personal endings of the tenses for conti- 
nued action, in the indicative and subjunctive moods, 
active and passive, are as follows : 





Singular. 






Plural. 






1. 


2. 


3. 


1. 


2. 


3. 


Act. 
Pass. 


6, m, 
r. 


s, 
ris, re. 


t, 
tur. 


mus, 
mur. 


tis, 
mini. 


nt, 
ntur. 



337. The first and second persons of the passive may 
accordingly be formed directly from the third (as al- 
ready obtained), by changing its ending into those oi 
the first and second, and observing the same principles 
for vowel changes as apply to the active (248) ; e. g., 

3d Pers. 1st Pers. 2d Pers. 

Sing. Amffir, amor (vowel changed) amara (re). 
Plur. Am&ntur, amamwr, amamm?. 

338, The first and second persons of the tenses for 
completed action may be obtained directly from the 
third person, by simply changing the third person of 
the proper tense of esse into the first and second ; e. g., 

Sing. Amatiis est, amatiis sum, amatiis es. 
■Plur. Amati sunt, amati sumiis, amati estis» 



156 



FIRST LATIN EOOK. 



f389 



389. Paradigm of the Indicative Passive. 



Conj. I. 
Am-6r, 
Am-am (re), 
Am-a/wr ; 

Am-aminl, 
Am-nntiir. 



Present (1st root), am Zored, &c. 



Owy. II 
Mon-eor, 
Mon-em (re). 
Mbn-etur ; 
Mbn-emur, 
Mon-emml, 
Mbn-entur. 



Conj. III. 



Reg-6r, 



Reg-em (re), 
Heg-ilur ; 
Reg-imiir, 
Reg-iraim, 
Reg-uw^r. 



CV/i/. IV. 

Aud-ior, 
Aud-im (re), 
Aud-itur ; 
Aud-Imwr, 

Aud-l7Wl77l, 

Aud-iu7i#z?\ 



Imperfect (1st root), was loved, &c. 



Au-abar, 
Ani-abam (re), 
Am-aba&r ; 
Am-abamwr, 

Am-abamml, 
Am-aban/w?\ 



Reg-eba?', 

Reg-ebam(re), 

Reg-eba'ftr ; 

Reg-ebam&r, 

Reg-ebamml, 

Reg-eba?2/&r. 

Future (1st root), shall or will be loved, 



Mon-ebar, 

M6n-eba?is(re), 

Mon-ebartir ; 

Mon-ebamwr, 

Mon-ebamim, 

Mon-ebara/wr. 



Aud-iebar, 

Aud-iebaros(re), 

Aud-ieba&r; 

Aud-iebamwr. 

Aud-iebawi?it, 

Aud-ieban&r. 



Am-abor, 
Am-abem (re), 
Am-abMr ; 
Am-abim&r, 
Am-abi77W7n, 
Am-abun&r. 



Mon-ebor, 
Mon-ebem (re), 
Mon-ehitur ; 
Mon-ebimur, 
Mon-ebimiwi, 
Mon-ebu72^r. 



Reg-ar, 
Reg-eris (re), 
Reg-e^wr ; 
Reg-e?m2r, 
Reg-e mini, 
Reg-enlur. 



Aud-iar, 
Aud-iem (re), 
Aud-ielur ; 
Aud-ie mwr, 
Aud-iemini, 
Aud-ientur. 



Perfect (3d root, perf. part, and sum*), was or have been loved. 



Amat-us sum,* 
Amat-us es, 
Amat-us est; 
Amat-l sumus, 
Amat-i est Is, 
Amat-l sunt. 



Monit-us sum, 
Monlt-us es, 
Monit-us est; 
Monit-i sumus, 
Momt-i estis, 
Monit-I sunt. 



Rect-us sum, 
Rect-us es, 
Rect-us est; 
Rect-I sumus, 
Rect-i estis, 
Rect-I sunt. 



Audlt-us sum, 
Audlt-us es, 
Audlt-us est ; 
Audlt-I sumus, 
Audlt-I estis, 
Audlt-I sunt. 



Pluperfect (3d root, perf. part, and eramf), had been loved. 



Amat-us eram,f 
Amat-us eras, 
Amat-us erat; 
Amat-l eramus, 
Amat-l eratls, 
Amat-i erant. 



Monit-us eram, 
Momt-us eras, 
Monit-us erat ; 
Monit-I eramus, 
Monlt-l eratls, 
Monit-I erant. 



Rect-us eram, 
Rect-us eras, 
Rect-us erat; 



Audlt-us eram, 
Audlt-us eras, 
Audlt-us erat ; 



Rect-i eramus, Audlt-I eramus, 
Rect-l eratls, JAudit-l eratls, 
Rect-i erant. 'Audlt-I e*ant. 



* Ful is sometimes used instead of siim (331, K). 

f Fueram is sometimes used instead of eram (331, K), 






340, 341 J 



INDICATIVE PASSIVE. 
paradigm — continued. 



157 



Future Perfect (3d root, per/, fart, and ero*), shall or will . 
have been loved, &e. 



Am at- us ero,* 
Amat-us erls, 
Amat-us erit ; 
Amat-I erimus, 
Amat-I erltis, 
Amat-I erunt. 



M6mt-us ero, 
Monlt-us erls, 
Monit-us erit; 
Monit-I erimus, 
Monlt-I erltis, 
Monit-I erunt. 



Rect-us ero, 
Rect-us erls, 
Rect-iis erit; 
Rect-I erimus, 
Rect-I erltis, 
Rect-I erunt. 



Audit- us ero, 
Audlt-us erls, 
Audit-iis erit; 
Audlt-I erimus, 
Audlt-I erltis, 
Audlt-I erunt. 



340. Vocabulary. 

Accusare, av, at, to accuse. 

Admonere, u, it, to admonish, 
warn. 

Bene, well. 

Carthagmiensis, is, a Carthagi- 
nian, 

Clipeus, I, shield. 

Damnare, av, at, to condemn. 

Discere, didlc, to learn. 

Donare, av, at, to give, present. 

Excltare, av, at, to excite, arouse. 



Flnlre, Iv, It, to finish 
Graecl, orum, the Greeks. 
Hasta, ae, spear. 
Laudare, av, at, to praise. 
Mensis, is, m., month. 
Mutare, av, at, to change. 
November, bris (all. I), November. 
Pugnare, av, at, to fight. 
Punlre, Iv, It, to punish. 
Siiperare, av, at, to surpass, con* 
quer, to go over. 



341. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Tempora mutantur et nos mutamur in illis. 
2. Finitur labor agricolae mense Novembri. 3. Vos 
laudamini, pueri qui bene didicistis. 4. Donabor clipeo 
et hasta, si bene pro patria pugnavero. 5. Admonebe- 
ris, ne iram excites. 1 6. Graeci a Eomanis superati 
sunt. 7. Eodem anno Carthaginienses et Graeci a Eo- 
manis superati sunt 8. Proditionis accusati estis. 9. 
Ambitus accusati sumus. 

(b) 1. You will be punished. 2. Has he not been 
punished ? 3. We have been admonished not to ac- 



Fuero is sometimes used instead of ero (331, K). 



158 

euse tlie king. 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[342. 



4. Has the queen been condemned to 
death ? 8 (No.) 5. Who will be condemned to death ? 
6. Who have been accused of treason ? 7. We shall 
be presented with two beautiful books. 8. Have you 
not been presented with a very fine dog ? 9. Had not 
the Greeks been conquered by the Eomans ? 10. By 
whom were the Eomans conquered? 11. We shall be 
conquered by the enemy. 



LESSON LIX. 

/ Subjunctive Mood of the Passive Voice. 

342. Paradigm of the Subjunctive Passive. 



Present (1st root), may or can he loved, &c. 



Conj. I. 
Am-er, 
Am-em (re), 
Am-etur ; 
Am-emur, 
Am-emini, 
Am-entur. 



Conj. II. 
Mon-ear, 
Mon-eam (re), 
Mon-eatfzr ; 
Mon-eamwr, 
Mon-eawini, 
Mon-eanfc 



Gbnf. III. 

Reg-ar, 
Reg-aris (re), 
Keg-^tur ; 
Reg-amitr, 
Reg-amiTzI, 
Reg-an&r. 



Cb/y. IV. 
Aud-iar, 
Aud-iaris (re), 
Aud-ia^r ; 
Aud-iamftr, 
Aud-iamint, 
Aud-ian&r. 



Imperfect (1st root), might, could, &c, fe Zored, &c. 



Am-arer, 
Am-arer is (re), 
Am-are7wr ; 
Am-aremwr, 
Am-are7wini, 
Am-aren/wr. 



Mon-erer, 

Mon-erem(re), 

Mon-ere/zir ; 

Mon-eremwr, 

Mon-eremi?ii, 

M5n-eren/&r. 



Reg-erer, 

Reg-erem(re] 

Reg-ere7izr ; 

Reg-erem£r, 

Reg-eremim, 

Reg-ere»Z&r. 



Aud-lreV, 
Aud-irem (re), 
Aud-ire7wr ; 
Aud-iremur, 
Aud-iremini 9 
Aud-irenlur. 



Perfect (3d root- 



vrf. fart and slm or fuerim), may "have 
been loved, &c. 



Amat-us slm, 
A in at- us sis, 
Arnat-us sit, 
Amat-I slmus, 
Amat-I sltls, 
Amat-I sint. 



Monit-us sim, 
Monlt-us sis, 
Mon"t-us sit; 
Monlt-I slm us, 
Monit-i sitis, 
Monlt-I sint. 



Rect-us sim, 
Rect-us sis, 
Rect-us sit; 
Rect-i slm us, 
Rect-I sltls, 
Rect-i sint. 



Audlt-us sim, 
Audlt-us sis, 
Audlt-us sit; 
Audit-i slmus, 
Audit-I sltls, 
Audlt-I sint. 



343 — 345.] SUBJUNCTIVE PASSIVE. 

paradigm — continued. 



159 



Pluperfect (3d root — perf. part, and essem or fuissem), might 
have been loved, &c. 



Amat-us essem, 
Amat-us esses. 
Amat-us esset ; 
Amat-I essemus 
Amat-I essetis, 
Amat-I essent. 



M6nlt-us essem 
M6nlt-us esses, 
Monit-us esset; 
Monlt-I essemus 
Monlt-I essetis, 
Monlt-I essent. 



Rect-iis essem, 
Rect-us esses, 
Rect-us esset; 
Rect I essemus 
Rect-I essetis, 
Rect-I essent. 



Audlt-us essem, 
Audlt-us esses, 
Audlt-us esset; 
Audlt-I essemus 
Audlt-I essetis, 
Audlt-I essent. 



343. Eule of Syntax. — Verbs signifying to separate 
from, or deprive of, are followed by the ablative in ad- 
dition to the accusative of the direct object; e. g. f 

Me Zwce privant. 

They deprive me of light. 

344. Vocabulary. 



Adulatio, onls, flattery. 

Contra ( prep, with ace), against. 

Declpere (io), decep, deeept, to 
deceive. 

Fraudare, av, at, to defraud. 

Fugere (io), fug, fugit, to flee. 

Granfim, I, grain, grain of corn. 

Imprudens, tls, inconsiderate, im- 
prudent. 

Nequldein,* not even. 

Pauper, eris, a poor man. 

Perfugium, I, refuge. 

Praebere, u, It, to furnish, offer. 



Praeparare, av, at, to prepare. 
Princeps, princlpls, chief, leader. 
Prlvare, av, at, to deprive. 
Sanclre, sanx, sanct, to enact, con* 

firm. 
Senectus, utis, /. old age. 
Servare, av, at, to observe, keep. 
Speciosus, a, um, plausible, spe* 

cious. 
Tarn, so. 
Verbum, I, word. 
Vlvere, vix, vict, to live. 



345. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Non sum tarn imprudens nt verbis speciosis 
decipiar.* 2. Bonae leges a principibus sanciantur. 3. 

* The emphatic word is generally written between the two parts of 
this word ; thus, ne grand quidem, not even a grain. 



160 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [346 — 348 

Praeparetur animus contra omnia. 4. Praebeatur se< 
nectuti perfugium. 5. Ne me luce privetis. 6. Ne 
grano quidem uno pauperes fraudetis. 7. Pauperes ne 
grano quidem uno fraudentur. 8. Invitus 5 te furti 
accusaverat. 9. Caius, vir summo ingenio, Romae vivit. 
(b) 1. Be not deceived. 2. Let Mm not be deceived. 
3. I was so imprudent as to be deceived (that I was 
deceived) by specious words. 4. You will not be so 
imprudent as to be deceived by flattery. 5. Let all 
good laws be observed by the citizens. 6. The boys 
fled that i they might not be punished. 7. Do not de- 
fraud the poor. 8. Let not the poor be defrauded. 
9. May they never be defrauded by you. 10. You 
shall never be defrauded of even a single grain by us. 



LESSON LX. 



Imperative Mood — Active and Passive. 

346. The Imperative mood expresses a command, an 
exhortation, or entreaty. It is used only in the present 
tense, and in the second and third persons. 

347. If a negative accompanies the imperative, it 
must be expressed in Latin by ne (instead of nori) ; e. g., 

Ne peccate, do not sin. 

Rem. — -It ^ill be remembered that a command or exhortation may 
also be- expressed by the present subjunctive (231). 

348. The imperative is formed from the first root bj 
the addition of the following endings : 



49.] 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



>L 



161 



S. 2. 
3 

P. 2. 
3. 



S. 2. 

3. 
P. 2. 

3. 



Conj. I. 

a or atO, 

ato, 

ate, atote, 

anto, 



are or ator, 
ator, 
amlnl, 
antor, 



ACTIVE. 




Conj. II. 


Conj. Ill 


Conj. IV. 


e or etc, 


e or ltd, 


I or Ito. 


eto, 


ltO, 


Ito. 


ete, etote, 


ite. ltote, 


Ite, ltote. 


ento, 


unto, 


iunto. 



PASSIVE. 



ere or etor, 
etor, 
eminl, 
enter, 



ere or itor, 
itor, 
imlnl, 
untor, 



Ire or Itor. 
Itor. 
Imlnl. 
iuntor. 



349. Paradigm of the Imperative Mood. 



CONJUGATION I. 




Active. 


Passive. 


S. 2. 


Ani-a or am-ato, 


Am-are or am-ator, 




love thou, do thou love. 


be thou loved. 


3. 


Am-ato, let him love. 


Am-ator, let him be loved. 


P. 2. 


Am-ate or am-atote, 


Am-amlnl, 




love ye, do ye love. 


be ye loved. 


3. 


Am-anto, let them love. 


Am-antor, let them be loved. 


CONJUGATION II. 


S. 2. 


Mon-e or mon-eto, 


Mon-ere or mon-etor, 




advise thou. 


be thou advised. 


3. 


Mon-eto, let him advise. 


Mon-etor, let him be advised. 


P. 2. 


Mon-ete orjnon-etdte,adviseye 


Mon-eminl, be ye advised. 


3. 


Mon-ento, let them advise. 


Mon-entor, let them be advised. 


CONJUGATION III. 


S. 2. 


Reg-e or reg-ito, 


Reg-ere or reg-itor, 




rule thou. 


be thou ruled. 


3. 


Reg-ito, let him rule. 


Reg-itor, let him be ruled. 


P. 2. 


Reg-ite or reg-itote, rule ye. 


Reg-imlnT, be ye ruled. 


3. 


Reg-unt6, let them rule. 


Reg-untor, let them be ruled. 


CONJUGATION IV. 


S. 2. 


Aud-I or aud-lto, 


Aud-lre or aud-ltor, 




hear thou. 


be thou heard. 


3. 


Aud-lto, let him hear. 


Aud-ltor, let him be heard. 


P. 2. 


Aud-Ite or aud-ltote, hear ye. 


Aud-lmlnl, be ye heard. 


3. 


Aud-iunto, let them hear. 


Aud-iuntor, let them be heard. * 

. i 



162 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[350, 351. 



Hem. — The second forms of the imperative (to, tote, nto, &c.) are used 
in laws, rules, and other formal expressions of duty or permission, 

350. Vocabulary. 



Ac, and. 

Americanus, a, iim, American. 

Audlre. Iv, It, to hear, listen to. 

Castlgare, av, at, to chastise. 

Cogitare, av, at, to think about. 

Compescere, compescu, to re- 
strain, repress. 

Conjux, ugis, m. or/, husband, 
wife, spouse. 

Conservare, av, at, to preserve. 

Consilium, I, advice, instruction. 

Corrumpere, corrup, corrupt, to 
mislead, corrupt. 

Defendere, defend, defens, to de- 
fend. 

Deglubere, deglups, deglupt, to 
flay, to skin. 



Exorare, av, at, to supplicate, 
Libert, orum (pi), children. 
Nomen, Inis, name. 
Pernicies, el, destruction. 
Populus, I, people. 
Que (joined to the ivord it cotu 

necls), and. 
Ruere, ru, ruit (or rut), to rush. 
Salus, utis,/., safety. 
Scrlbere, scrips, script, to write. 
Sepellre, Iv, sepult, to bury, inter. 
Tondere, totond, tons, to shear, 

shave. 
Vester, tra, trum, your. 
Videre, vld, vis, to see. 



351. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Caium ne accusa. 2. B album ne accusate 
3. Tonde oves: ne deglube. 4. Tondete oves: ne 
deglubite. 5. Audi, puer, consilia sapientium. 6. 
Audite, pueri, consilia sapientium, et videte, ne in per- 
niciem ruatis. 7. Exorare, mi (115) pater, compesce 
iram. 8. Nemo in nrbe sepelitor. 9. Lex erat his 
verbis scripta : "Nemo in nrbe sepelitor." 10. Andi, 
mi fili (103, N.), ab improbis ne corrumpitor. 11. De 
vobis ac de liberis vestris cogitate. 12. Conservate 
vos, conjiiges, liberos, fortunasque vestras. 13. Populi 
Romani nomen salutemque defendite. 

(b) 1. Do not accuse me of theft. 2. Let him shear 
the sheep. 3. Let no one break the laws. 4. Let the 
laws be observed. 5. Do not chastise the slave. 6. 



352 — 355.] infinitive mood. 163 

Let not the slaves be chastised. 7. Let him be buried 
in the city. 8. Defend (ye) the name and the safety 
of the American people. 9. Defend (ye) the American 
eagle. 10. Let the American eagle be defended by all. 

11. Boys, listen to (hear) the instruction of your fathers. 

12. Do not break your word. 



LESSON LXI. 



Infinitive Mood, 

352. The Infiyiitive mood (as already stated, 9) re- 
presents the simple meaning of the verb without refer- 
ence to person or number. 

353. The infinitive mood has in each voice three 
tenses; viz., the present, perfect, and. future. 

Rem. — We must here give the formation of the supine and future act. 
'participle (both of which we shall soon notice), as they are used in 
forming the future infinitive. 

354. ^he future active participle and the active supine 
are formed from the third root ; the former by the ad- 
dition of urus (a, iim) ; as, amdt (3d root), amaturus (a, 
urn) ; and the latter by the addition of um ; as, amdt, 
imdtum. 

355. The infinitives are formed as follows : 

1) The present, from the first root by the addition 

Conj. IV. 

ire. 
in. 

2) The perfect active, from the second root by 



of the endings : 






Conj. I. 

Act. are, 


Conj. II. 

ere, 


Conj. III. 

ere, 


Pass. ari, 


eri, 


% 



164 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[356, 357, 



tlie addition of the ending isse; and the per- 
fect passive from the perfect participle and esse. 

3) The future active, from the future active par- 
ticiple and esse ; and the future passive from the 
supine and iri. 

356. Paradigm of the Infinitive Mood. 



1 

CONJ. I. 


1 


Active. 


Passive. 


Pres. 


Am-are, to love. 


Am-arl, to be loved. 


Perf. 


Amav-isse, 


Amat-us esse, 




to have loved. 


to have been loved. 


Fut. 


Amat-urus esse, 


Amat-um In, 




to he about to love. 


to be about to be loved. 


CONJ. II. 


Pres. 


Mon-ere, to advise. 


Mon-erl, to be advised. 


Perf. 


Monu-isse, 


Monit-us esse, 




to have advised* 


to have been advised. 


Fut. 


Monit-urus esse, 


Monit-um iri, 




to be about to advise. 


to be about to be advised. 


CONJ. III. 


Pres. 


Reg-ere, to rule. 


Reg-T, to be ruled. 


Perf. 


Rex-isse, 


Rect-us esse, 




to have ruled. 


to have been ruled. 


Fut. 


Rect-urus esse, 


Rect-ftm Iri, 




to be about to rule. 


to be about to be ruled. 


CONJ. IV. 


Pres. 


Aud-lre, to hear. 


Aud-irl, to be heard. 


Perf. 


Audlv-isse, 


Audlt-us esse, 




to have heard. 


to have been heard. 


Fut, 


Audit-urus esse, 


Audit-urn Iri, 




to be about to hear. 


to be about to be heard. 



357. Eule of Syntax. — The subject of an infinitive 
must be put in the accusative ; e. g., 

Videt te esse beatum. 

He sees that you are happy. 






358 — 360.] INFINITIVE MOOD. 165 

Rem. 1.— - The accusative te is the subject of esse. 

Rem. 2. — The use of the infinitive, as the subject of a finite verb, has 
been already considered (184). 

358/ Eule of Syntax. — The infinitive, either alone 
or with other words connected with it, may depend 
upon another verb ; e. g v 

1. Cupit sapere. 

He desires to be wise. 

2. Sperat se victurum esse. 
He hopes that he shall live. 

Rem. 1. — In most cases the infinitive is really the direct object of the 
verb on which it depends ; thus sapere (to be wise) is really the 
object desired. He desires (what ?) to be wise. 

Rem. 2. — In the compound infinitives (i. e., those which are made up 
of two words) the participles must agree in gender, number, and 
case with the subject of those infinitives ; but of course the supine 
remains unaltered. Thus, in the second example, victurum is in 
the accusative masculine singular, to agree with se, the subject of 
the infinitive. 

359. Two or more English sentences, joined by the 
conjunction that, are often made one Latin sentence, 
by leaving out the conjunction, and turning the follow- 
ing nominative into the accusative and the verb into 
the infinitive. 



360. Vocabulary. 

Certus, a , um, certain. 
Clemers tia, mild, merciful. 
Converter©, convert, convers, to 

turn, convert. 
Cupere (io), cupiv (or i), cupit, 

to desire. 
Dlvidere, d ivls, dlvls, to divide. 
Docere, u, doct, to teach. 
Oculus, I, t ye. 



Pars, partis, part. 

Peccare, av, at, to sin. 

Praeda, ae, booty. 

Sapere, Iv, i, or u, to be wise. 

Sperare, av, at, to hope. 

Timere, u, to fear. 

Tres, tria, three. 

Vender e, vendid, vendit, to sell 



166 FIKST LATIN BOOK, [361—364. 

361. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Balbi est omnia in tres partes dividere. 2. 
Nunquam utile est peccare. 3. Omnes homines beati 
esse cupiunt. 4. Cupio me esse elementem. 5. Doce- 
mus pueros ut sapere discant. 6. Yideo in me omnium 
vestrum ociilos esse con versos. 7. Sperant se victuros 
esse. 8. Oertum est Balbum patriam auro vendidisse. 

(b) 1. He is said to have divided the booty into ten 
parts. 2. They are said to have lived at Eome five 
years. 3. "We desire to be happy. 4. You all de- 
sire to be happy. 5. He is said to have been very 
happy. 6. He says, that all eyes were turned upon 
him. 7. He sees that you are happy. 8. It is certain, 
that a Christian does not fear death. 9. It is certain, 
that the boy has heard a voice. 10. It is certain, that 
Balbus will value my labors very highly. 2 11. It is 
certain, that the avaricious value money very highly 
12. It is certain, that Balbus will be condemned to death, 



LESSON LXIL 



Participles. — A blative Absolute. 

362. The participle is that part of the verb which 
has the form and inflection of an adjective. 

363. A verb may have four participles, viz. : the 
present void future in the active voice, and the perfect and 
future in the passive. 

364. The participles are formed as follows: 

1) The present active in the four conjugations, 
by the addition of the respective endings : 






865, 366.] ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 167 

1. 2. 3. 4. 

ans, ens, ens, iens, 

to the first root ; as, 
Amans (loving), monens, regens, aM&iens. 

2) The future active, from the third root, by the 
addition of the ending urus (a, urn) (302) ; as, 

Amaturus (about to love), monitwrus, rect- 
urus, audlturus. 

3) The perfect passive, from the third root, by 
the addition of the ending us (5, urn) (302); as, 

Amat^s (loved), monitws, recti2s, auditws. 

4) The future passive in the four conjugations, by 
the addition of the respective endings : 

1. 2. 3. 4. 

andus, endus, endiis, iendiis, 
to the first root ; as, 

Amandus (deserving to be loved), monen- 
duSj Tegendus, aM&iendus. 

365. The participle in ns answers to the English participle in ing. 
The participle in us answers to the English participle in ed, 

en, t, &c. 

The participle in dus must be translated by the present in- 
finitive passive, as used with a substantive. (A termination 
to he desired; a crime to he abhorred.) 

The participle in rus must be translated by ; about to (write) ;' 
or, 'going to (write).' 

366. Eule of Syntax. — A noun and a participle 
standing grammatically independent of the rest of the 
sentence are put in the ablative (called absolute) ; e. g., 

" Eng. Id. j Caesar having conquered 
Caesar, victis his enemies. 

hostibiis, | L a t, Id. Caesar his enemies being 

conquered. 



168 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [367—369. 

367. The want of a participle for the perfect active 
is supplied by the ablative absolute, or by quum (when) 
with the perfect or pluperfect subjunctive. The perfect 
subjunctive must be used, if the other verb is in the 
present tense ; e. g., 

Caesar having conquered ^Caesar, quum vicisset hostes. 
his enemies, I Caesar, victis hostibiis. 

368. YOCABULAEY. 



Aequitas, atls, equity, justice. 
Angustiae, arum (pl.) 9 a narrow 

pass, defile. 
Canere, cecin, cant, to sing. 
Compellere, compul, compuls, to 

drive, compel. 
Constituere, constitu, constitut, 

to arrange, constitute. 
Deprehendere, deprehend, de- 

prehens, to seize, catch. 



Devincere, devlc, devict, to con- 
quer. 

Exclamare, av, at, to cry out, ex- 
claim. 

Immergere, immers, immers, to 
plunge into, immerse. 

Ludere, lus, lus, to play, to sport 

Manere, mans, mans, to remain. 

Quum, when. 

Violarc, av, at, to violate, to break. 



369. Exercises. 

(a) 1. In via ludentem puerum vidi. 2. In via lu- 
dentes deprehendimus. 3. Caesar fugientes hostes in 
angustias compulit. 4. Fracto pueri brachio, Eomae 
manebit. 5. Violatis patriae legibus, vita indignus 
est. 6. Puer, quum manus in aquam immersisset, ex- 
clamavit. 7. Caesar, quum devicisset hostes, summa 
aequitate res constituit. 

(b) 1. Did you hear the nightingales singing in the 
grove ? 2.1 saw the fishes swimming on the surface 
(top) of the water. 10 3. Did you see the girls playing 
in the garden ? 4. Have you not seen the boys play- 
ing in the street ? 5. Caius, having broken his arm, 
remained at Eome. 6. The slave, having killed his 



370 — 373.] GEKUNDS AND SUPINES- 169 

master, was condemned. 7. They say that the slave 
has been condemned to death. 8. You are said to 
have been accused of treason. 9. Having violated the 
laws of the state, we shall all be punished. 



LESSON LXIII. 

Gerunds and Supines. 

370. The Gerund is that part of the verb which cor- 
responds to the participial substantive in ing in English. 

371. The gerund is really a verbal substantive of 
the neuter gender, used only in the genitive, dative, 
accusative, and ablative singular. 

Rem. — The infinitive supplies the place of the nominative of the 
gerund, as that is sometimes used as the subject of a verb (184). 

372. The genitive of the gerund ends, in the four 
conjugations, respectively in 

1. 2. 3. 4. 

andi, endi, endi, iendi. 

Amandi (of loving), monmcK, xegendi, audiendl. 

373. The gerund is declined in the parts in use pre- 
cisely like a neuter noun of the second declension ; e. g., 



Gen. 


Amandi, 


of loving. 


Dat 


Amando, 


to orfor loving, 


Ace. 


Amandum, 


loving. 


All. 


Amando, 


by loving. 



Rem. — The gerund, being a part of the verfy of course governs the 
same case. 

8 



170 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [374 — 379, 

374. Bule of Syntax. — The gerund is governed 
like a noun in the same case ; e. g., 

Inter ludendiim. 
{During playing.) 
While they are playing. 

375. The Latin verb has two supines ; one in um and 
one in u. 

376. The supines are formed by adding the above 
endings to the third root ; e. g., 

Amatiim (to love), monitum, rectum, auditum. 
Amatu (to be loved), monitu, rectu, audita. 

Hem. — The supine in um is generally Englished by the present infini- 
tive active, and that in u by the present infinitive passive, though 
it may be translated by the active, if that gives better English. 
Both supines are really active ; thus, factum means for doing, 
and factu in doing. 

377. Eule of Syntax. — The supine in um follows 
verbs of motion, to express the purpose or object of 
that motion ; e. g. ; 

Mittit legatos pacem petitum. 

He sends ambassadors to sue for peace. 

378. Eule of Syntax. — The supine in a is used 
after adjectives signifying good or bad, easy or difficult, 
agreeable or disagreeable, &c. ; e. g., 

Difficile est dictu. 
It is difficult to say. 

379. Eule of Syntax. — Many adjectives signifying 
desire, knowledge, skill, participation, recollection, fulness^ 



380, 881.] GERUNDS AND SUPINES. 171 

and the like, together with their contraries, govern the 
genitive; e.g., 

Ciipidus laudis, desirous of praise. 
380. Vocabulary. 



Aquarl, at, to bring water. 

Aquatum (sup.), to bring water, 

Auxilium, I, aid, help. 

Ciipidus, a, um, desirous, desi- 
rous of. 

Jucundus, a, iim, pleasant, de- 
lightful. 

Mirabilis, e, wonderful. 

Pabularl, at, to forage. 



Pabiilatum (sup.), to forage. 
Petere, Iv (i), It, to seek, ask, sue 

for. 
Rogare, av, at, to ask. 
Sumptus, us, expense. 
Supervacuiis, a, um, unnecessary 
Venarl, at, to hunt. 
Venatum (sup.), to hunt. 
Vltare, av, at, to avoid, shun. 



381. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Cupidi sunt docendi. 2. JSTum pueri ludendo 
discunt ? 3. Puer cupidus est discendi. 4. Miserunt 
legatos pacem petitum. 5. Legatos ad Caesarem mit- 
tunt rogatum auxilium. 6. Jucundum est audita. 7. 
Difficile est facta. 8. Mittantur iegati pacem petitum. 

9. Quantum temporis ludendo amiserunt ! 10. Multum 
temporis ludendo amittemus. 

(b) 1. He learns by teaching. 2. Have we not 
learned by teaching ? 3. Is there not much pleasure 
in learning ? 4. How much pleasure (there) is in learn- 
ing ! 5. There is much pleasure in teaching. 6. Do 
not boys learn while playing ? 7. The boy has been 
sent a hunting. 8. Caesar has sent the fourth legion 
to forage. 9. Ambassadors have been sent to ash peace. 

10. It is difficult to say. 11. It is wonderful to tell. 
12. Has not Caesar sent the fourth legion to bring 
water ? 



172 FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



LESSON LXIV. 



Participle in dus. 

382. Instead of a gerund governing its case, we may 
use a participle in dus agreeing with, a noun ; e. g. ; 

(JEng.) The intention of writing a letter. 
(Lat.) Consilium scrlbendi epistolam. 
(or) Consilium scribendae epistolae."* ' 

383. Thus, then, epistola scribenda may be declined 
throughout. 

Sing. 

N. Epistola scribenda, a letter to he written. 
Gr. epistolae scribendae, of writing a letter. 
D. epistolae scribendae, to or for writing a letter. 
Ace. (ad) epistolam scribendam, to write a letter (or 

for writing a letter). 
Abl. epistola scribenda, by writing a letter. 

Plur. 

N. epistolae scribendae, letters to be written. 
6k epistolarum scribendarum, of writing letters. 
D. epistolis scribendis, to or for writing letters. 
Ace. (ad) epistolas scribendas, to write letters (or for 

writing letters). 
Abl. epistolis scribendis, by writing letters. 

384. Vocabulary. 



Adj Omentum, i, aid, help. 
Arripere (id), arnpu, arrept, to 
snatch, seize. 



Athenae, amm, Athens, city of 

Greece. 
Augere, aux, auct, to increase. 



* The real meaning of ' consilium scribendae epistolae' is ' the design 
of (~ about) a letter to be written' 



385.1 PARTICIPLE IJST DUS. 173 



^upidior, oris (comp.), fonder. 

Elegantia, ae, elegance. 

Emere, em, empt, to buy, fur- 
chase. 

Exercere, exercu, exercit, to 
practise, exercise. 

Gerere, gess, gest, to carry on, 
to wage. 

Habere, ii, it, to have, enjoy. 



Legere, leg, lect, to read. 
Obtmcre, obtmu, obtent, to ob» 

tain, acquire. 
Occasid, orris, opportunity. 
Perltus, a, urn, skilful, skilled 

in. 
Regere, rex, rect, to govern^ 

rule. 
StMiosus, a, iim, very fond. 



385. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Balbus omnem occasionem exercendae i irtutis 
arripiebat. 2. Multi cupidiores sunt emendorum libro- 
rum quam legendorum. 3. Caesar belli gerendi perltus 
fait. 4. Omnis occasio exercendae virtutis arripiatur. 
5. Certum est, omnem occasionem exercendae virtutis 
a Christian© arripi. 6. Omnis dicendi elegantia auge- 
tur legendis oratoribus et poetis. 7. Homo magna 
habet adjumenta ad obtinendam sapientiam. 

(h) 1. The boy is very fond of writing letters. 2. He 
was very fond of hearing the orator. 3. Seize every 
opportunity of practising virtue. 4. The Eomans were 
fond of waging war. 5. Ambassadors are sent to beg 
for peace. 6. Ambassadors will be sent to sue for 
peace. 7. The law will be broken. 8. Will not the 
laws be broken by wicked (men) ? 9. It is certain, that 
the laws are broken by the wicked at Borne and at 
Athens. 10. Let your word be kept. 11. Let the 
state be ruled by the wise. 



174 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [386, 38' 

LESSON LXV. 

First Conjugation. 
386. Vocabulary.* 

Adeo, so, in such a manner. 
Cantare, av, at, to sing. 
Certamen, Inis, contest 
Crabro, onis, wasp. 
Inter, between, during. 



Inter ambulandum, while walking 
Irrltare, av, at, to trouble, irritate. 
Ornare, av, at, to adorn. 
Robustus, a, iim, robust, strong. 
Spoliare, av, at, to rob of, despoil. 



387. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Sapientis est supervacuos sumptus vitare. 2. 
Crabronem ne irrites (232). 3. Crabronem ne irritate 
(347). 4, Imtasne crabrones? 5. Nonne earn legem 
ipse violabas ? 6. Inter ambulandum cantabant. 7. 
Hie miles est adeo robustus, ut nemo eum in certamine 
superaverit. 8. Prata et agri pulcherrmiis floribus 
ornantur. 9. Oculisne me, judices, privabitis? 10. 
Violatis patriae legibus (366), mea me laude spoliatis. 
11. Num mea laude spoliabor? 

(6) 1. It is the duty of a Christian 7 to ayoid unne- 
cessary expense. 2. Did they not themselves yiolate 
those laws ? 3. Let not the laws be violated by Chris- 
tians. 4. We hope we shall never be accused, 5. 
Have you ever been accused ? 6. Let your laws be 
kept. 7. Is it not certain that the laws are broken by 
the wicked ? 8. Did they not condemn him to death ? 
9. Balbus is so strong that he has never been surpassed 
in a contest. 10. Have I not been deprived of my 
eyes? 

* Preparatory to this exercise, the pupi] : s expected to review tho 
roughly the Paradigm of the First Conjugation. See 588. 



388—390.] second conjugation. 175 

LESSON LXVI. 

Second Conjugation. 

388. Eule of Syntax. — Many verbs which signify 
to ash, demand, or teach, together with celctre (to conceal), 
take two objects, one of a person and another of a 
thing: e. g., 

Caesar frumentum Aeduos flagitabat, 
Caesar demanded corn of the Aedui. 



389. Vocabulary.* 

Divitiacus, I, Divitiacus, man's 

name, 
Imperare, av, at, to command, 

give commands. 
Jubere, juss, juss, to direct, or- 

der. 



Mordere, momord, mors, to Mis. 
Par ere, u, it, to obey. 
Propensus, a, urn, inclined to. 
Sanaje, av, at, to cure, reform. 
Tacere, u,it, to be silent, to pass 
over in silence. 



390. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Hostes non timemus. 2. Nonne respondebis? 
3. Docendo docemur. 4. Ego multa tacui : multa sa- 
navi. 5. Ad docendum propensi sunt. 6. Pareat 
animus: non imperet 7. Caesar Divitiacum ad se 
vocari jubet. 8. Te haec docebo. 9. Pueros haec 
docebant. 10. Pueri haec docti sunt. 11. Canis pue- 
rum momordit. 12. Nonne oyes totondistis ? 

(b) 1. Do you not fear the enemy? 2. Do not fear 
the enemy. 3. Who taught the boy this ? 4. Did you 
teach those boys this ? 5. Who sheared this sheep ? 
6. Let no one shear my sheep. 7. Did the dog bite 
you? 8. I have been bitten by your dog. 9. We 

* The pupil will, of course, review Paradigm. See 589. 



176 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [391—393 

have ourselves been taught by teaching. 10. Did you 
not laugh at yoiir father ? 



LESSON LXVII. 



Third Conjugation. 

391. Eule of Syntax. — After verbs of motion : 

1) The place to which the motion is directed, if 
a town or small island, is put in the accusative 
without a preposition ; e. g., 

Eomam venire, to come to Rome. 

2) The place from which the motion proceeds, if 
a town or small island, is put in the ablative 
without a preposition ; e. g., 

Roma venire, to come from Borne. 

Rem. — Before other names of places the preposition is generally 

expressed 
{Review Paradigm 590.) 

392. Vocabulary. 

Agere, eg, act, to do, act. 

Committere, mis, miss, to en- 
gage- 

Curare, av, at, to attend to, cause, 
&c. 

Dare, ded, dat, to give. 

Eques, Itis, horseman. 

Gratia, ae, favor ; pi., thanks. 



Gratias agere, to give thanks, tc 

thank. 
Injuria, ae, injury, wrong done. 
Pons, tis, m., bridge. 
Responsum, I, answer, reply. 
Tegere, tex, tect, to cover, con* 

ceal. 
Unquam, ever. 



393. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Caium Athenas mittat. 2. Servum Athenas 
miserat. 3. Mihi gratias egistis. 4. Sicut vixi, ut 



894, 395.] fourth conjugation. 177 

nemo unquam me ullius injuriae accusaverit. 5. Pon- 
tem in fhimme faciendum curavit. 6. Equites proe- 
lium committunt. 7. Hoc responso dato, equites proe- 
Hum committunt. 8. Certum est, Caesarem belli ge- 
rendi peritum fuisse. 9. Legatos ad enm miserunt. 
10. Omnis dicendi elegantia augetur legendis orato- 
ribus (382). 

(h) 1. He lias sent an ambassador to Eome. 2. Am- 
bassadors will be sent to sue for (377) peace. 3. Am- 
bassadors have been sent to sue for peace. 4. He has 
never been sent to Athens. 5. He is said to have been 
very desirous of (379) learning. 6. They say that you 
are desirous of engaging battle. 7. They are said to 
be skilful in waging war. 8. Having made this reply 
they engage battle. 9. It is disgraceful to cover a 
fault with a lie. 



LESSON LXVIII. 



Fourth Conjugation. 

{Review Paradigm 591.) 

394. Vocabulary. 



Antea, before. 
Captlvus, a, um, captive. 
Claudere, claus, claus, to shut. 
Fundus, I, estate, farm. 
Hannibal, alis, Hannibal. 
Intra (prep, with accus.), within. 
Italia, ae, Italy. 



Praeceptum, I, precept, instruction. 
Praesens, tis, present. 
Succurrere, curr, curs, to aid, 

succor. 
Tarentum, I, Tarentum, a town 

in Italy. 
Vetustus, a, um, old, ancient. 



395. Exercises. 
(a) 1. Haec ex captivis audiverat. 2. Yenit sacer 
dos ut aram sanguine aspergat. 3. Miles Tarentum 
8* 



178 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [39 & 

venit. 4. Hunc audiebant antea, nunc praesentem 
vident. 5. Fundo in tres partes diviso, Eomam venit. 
6. Yeni ut mihi succurras. 7. Hannibal, Alpibus su» 
peratis, in Italiam venit. 8. Lex erat Bomanorum ve^ 
tustissima, ne quis intra urbem sepeliretur. 

(b) 1. Have not the boys been sent to bring water? 
2. They have come to shut the gates of the city. 3. 
Will you come to shut the gates ? 4. Let them come 
to shut the gates. 5. Let all come to hear the instruc- 
tions of the wise. 6. Let the instructions of the wise 
be always heard. 7. By hearing the instructions of 
the wise we shall learn wisdom. 8. He has buried his 
father. 9. Has he buried him within the city ? 10. 
Do not bury him within the city. 



LESSON LXIX. 



Verbs with the Dative. — Indirect Object 

396. The use of the indirect object has been already 
illustrated ; but as some verbs in Latin are followed by 
the dative (the case of the indirect object) where we 
use no preposition, and should therefore be led by the 
English to put the accusative, it may be well to notice 
a few instances of this. The verbs of this class are 
principally such as signify : 

To command or obey, please or displease, favor or in- 
jure, serve or resist, together with to indulge, spare, par* 
don, envy, believe, persuade* 

* See 643 



897, 398.] INDIRECT OBJECT. 179 

Rem. 1. — Yacare (to have leisure) andnubere (to marry, used of fe- 
males), also take the dative. 

Rem. 2. — It will be readily perceived, in most cases, that t!ie dative 
after the above verbs is really the indirect and not the direct ob- 
ject ; thus, imperdre (to command) means to give a command to; 
placere (to please) to give pleasure to; and so of most, if not all, of 
the others. 

397. Vocabulary. 

Ars, artis, art. 

Beate, happily. 

Credere, credid, credit, to believe, 
put confidence in. 

Cuplditas, atis, desire, passion. 

Favere, fav, faut, to favor. 

Ignoscere, nov, not, to pardon. 

Indulgere, induls, indult, to in- 
dulge. 

Invidere, vld, vis, to envy. 



Nocere, nocu, nocit, to hurt. 
Parcere, peperc, parcit, to spare. 
Persuadere, persuas, persuas, to 

persuade. 
Resistere, stit, stit, to resist. 
Servlre, Iv (i), It, to serve, be a 

slave to. 
Studere, u, to study, strive for. 
Vacare, av, at, to have leisure 

for. 



398. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Irae multos annos servieras. 2. Eegendis 
animi cupiditatibus studeamus. 3. Caesar legendo 
libro vacabit. 4. Christiani est patriae suae legibns 
parere. 5. Ignosce mihi. , 6. Nemo tibi credet. 7. 
Improbus patriae legibus non parebit. 8. Num. legi- 
bus parebunt improbi, violata fide ? 9. Discant Chris- 
tiani animis suis imperare. 10. Sapientia ars est bene 
beateque yiyendi. 

(b) 1. I would have fayored Caius. 2. You would 
haye resisted anger. 3. You (pi.) would have hurt 
nobody. 4. We would haye indulged the desire. 5. 
I was hurting myself. 6. You were hurting me. 7. 
You had hurt Caius. 8. You had been-the-slave-of 
passion. 9. Do not be-the slaye-of passion. 10. You 
were sparing the enemies. 11. It is the duty of & Chris- 
tian to envy nobody. 12. Do not envy the good, 13, 



180 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [399 — 402, 

It is pleasant to succor the miserable. 14. Nobody 
will believe the wicked. 15. Death spares nobody. 
16. They had spared the gate of the city. 17. He 
spares himself in the winter. 18. He does not spare 
even himself. 19. Yon will never have persuaded me. 
20. Let the Christian learn to command himself. 



LESSON LXX. 



Deponent Verbs, 

899. A deponent verb is one which has a passive 
form, but an active meaning. 

400. Deponent verbs have all the four participles; e. g., 
1) Loquens, speaking ; 2) locutus, having spoken ; 

3) locuturus, about to speak ; 4) loquendus, to 
be spoken. 

Hem. — The past participle of a deponent verb is the participle of the 

perfect active, which other verbs do not have. 

401. Eule of Syntax. — The deponent verbs, utftr, 
fruor, fungor, potior, vescor, dignor, and their com- 
pounds, usually take the ablative ; e. g., 

Yoluptate fruitur, he enjoys pleasure. 

Rem. — The ablative after the above is not strictly the object, but the 
ablative of means ; thus, to enjoy pleasure, is to be delighted with 
pleasure. 

402. Eule of Syntax. — Verbs of reminding, remem- 
bering, forgetting, and pitying, usually take the genitive 
of the object remembered, forgotten, &c. ; e. g., 

Eeminiscor benef icii tin, I remember your kindness. 



403, 404.] 



DEPONENT VERBS. 



181 



Rem. — Most of these verbs, except those signifying to pity, sometimes 
take the accusative instead of the genitive. 



403. Vocabulary. 

Aliquando, some time or other, 

Benef icium, I, benefit. 

Flagitium, I, crime. 

Fungi, funct,fo discharge, 

LoquI, locut, to speak, 

Male, badly, 

Misererl, miserit, or misert, to 

pity, 
Obllvisci, obllt, to forget. 



Odium, I, hatred, 

Officium, I, duty. 

Post (prep, with accus,), after. 

Potirl, potlt, to get possession, 

Recordart, at, to remember, to 

recall to mind, 
Sempiterniis, a, urn, eternal. 
Uti, us, to use. 



404. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Christianorum est misereri pauperum. 2. 
Homo improbus aliquando cum dolore flagitidrum su- 
orum recordabitux. 3. Multi beneficiis male utuntur. 
4. Vincamus odium, paceque potiamur. 5. Christian! 
est injuriarum oblivisci. 6. Beatus est, qui omnibus 
yitae officiis fungitur. 7. Elegantiam loquendi legen- 
dis oratoribus et poetis auxerant. 

(b) 1. Let the Christian discharge all the duties of 
life. 2. Let us use our horses. 3. The good after 
death will enjoy eternal life. 4. "Will not the good 
after death enjoy eternal life ? 5. Is the life that we 
now enjoy eternal ? 6. Let boys learn to discharge all 
the duties of life. 7. Have you not spared the con 
quered?* 8. Spare (pi) the conquered. 9. Let us 
spare the conquered. 10. "We will resist anger. 11. 
Will you not resist anger ? 12. Let Caius, who sold 



Participles as well as adjectives (11^7) are sometimes used stibstan 



tively. 



182 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [405 — 407, 

his country for gold, be condemned to death. 13. Let 
the wicked, who sold their country for gold, be accused 
of treason. 



LESSON LXXI. 
Irregular Verbs. 

405. The irregular verbs are those which deviate 
from the ordinary rules, not only in the formation of 
their roots, but also in the inflection of some of their 
tenses. 

406. The irregular verb posse (to be able), com- 
pounded of pot (potis, able) and esse (to be), is conju- 
gated like the simple esse, except, 

1) T before s becomes s ; as, possum (potsiim). 

2) The /in the second root is dropped; as, potu 
(potfu). 

3) In the present infinitive and imperfect subjunctive 
there is a contraction ; as, posse (for potesse), 
possem (for potessem). 

407. Paradigm. 



Posse, to be able ; 2d root, potu. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres. Possum, potes, potest, possumus, potestis, possunt. 
Imp. poterarn; Fut. potero; Per/, potu-l; Pluperf. potu-eram; 
Fut. Perf. potu-er6. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres. possim; Imp. possem; Perf. potu-erim ; Pluperf. potu- 
issem. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres. posse ; Perf. potu-isse. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Potens (used as an adjective, powerful). 



408—410.] 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



183 



408. The various forms of posse are often best trans- 
lated by tlie auxiliaries, can, could, &c. ; e. g., 

Ego facere possum, lean do (am able to do). 

Rem. — When a past tense of posse is thus translated by could, any- 
present infinitive depending upon it must be translated by the 
English perfect ; e. g., 

Ego facere potul, / could have done. 

409. The irregular verb v ell e, to will, or be willing, ar.d its com- 
pounds, nolle, to be unwilling (from non and velle), and malle, 
to wish rather, to prefer (from mag [magis, more] and velle), are 
conjugated as in the following : 

410. Paradigms. 



Velle. 


Nolle. 


Malle. 


2d root, volu. 


2d root, nolu. 
INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 


2d root, mala. 


vm, 

Vis, 

Vult; 

Volumus, 

Vultis, 

Volunt. 


Nolo, 

Nonvis, 

Nonvult ; 

Nolumus, 

Nonvultis, 

Nolunt. 

IMPERFECT. 


Malo, 

Mavis, 

Mavult; 

Malumus, 

Mavultis, 

Malunt. 


Vo!-ebam, bas, &c. 


Nol-ebam, bas, &c. 

FUTURE. 


| Mal-ebam, bas, &c. 


Vol-am. 


| Nol-am. 

PERFECT. 


Mal-am. 


Volu-I. 


Nolu-I. 

PLUPERFECT. 


| Malu-I. 


Volu-eram. 


Nolu-eram. 

IUTURE PERFECT. 


Malu-eram. 


Volu-er6. 


Nolu-ero. 


| Malu-ero. 



184 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 
t&r&dig'ms— continued. 



[411, 412. 





SUBJUNCTIVE. 








PRESENT. 






Vel-im, Is, &c. 


Nol-im, is, &c. 

IMPERFECT. 


} 


Mal-im, Is, &c. 


Vell-em, es, &c. 


Noll-em. 

PERFECT. 


i 


Mall-em. 


Volu-erim. 


Nolu-erlm. 

PLUPERFECT. 


I 


Malu-erim. 


Volu-issem. 


Nolu-issem. 
IMPERATIVE. 


l 


Malu-isseni. 




Nol-I or Ito, 
Nol-Ite, Itote. 


I 






INFINITIVE. 






Pres. Velle. 
Per/. Volu-isse. 


Nolle. 
Nolu-isse. 

PARTICIPLES. 


1 


Malle. 
Malu-isse. 


Volens. 


Nolens. 


I 





411. YOCABULARY. 

Animal, alis, animal. 

Comgere, correx, correct, to cor- 
rect, reform. 

Cor, cordis, n., heart. 

Malle, malu, to prefer wish ra- 
ther. 

Nolle, nolu, to he unwilling. 

Nullus, a, iim (113,R.), no, not 
any. 



Occldere. occld, occls, to kill. 
Posse, potu, to be able. 
Praeteritus, a, iim, past; prae« 

terita, (neut. pi.), the past. 
Probus, a, um, honest, upright. 
Sclpio, oms, Scipio, a distin* 

guished Roman, 
Sine, without. 
Velle, volu, to wish. 



412. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Haec facere possiimiis. 2. Haec facere potu 
Lsti. 3. Multum discere vult. 4. Nolui hoc facere 



413, 414.] 



IRKEGULAK VERBS. 



185 



5. Praeterita mutare non possumus. 6. Nullum ani- 
mal quod sanguinem habet, sine corde esse potest. 7 
Discat ut possit docere. 8. Num. pueri regendae civi- 
tatis (382) periti esse possunt? 9. Si vis beatus esse, 
animo impera. 10. Probi semper vitam corrigere 
volunt. 11. Scipio dicebat, malle se unum civem ser- 
vare, quam mille hostes occidere. 

(b) 1. Do you wish to change the past? 2. We do 
not wish to change the past.. 3. You (pi) cannot change 
the past. 4. We cannot shun death. 5. Let us learn, 
that we may be able to teach others. 6. They wish to 
be happy. 7. We all wish to be happy. 8. Could 
you not have seen the king? 9. We might have 
learned much. 10. We were unwilling to accuse you. 
11. Were you not unwilling to accuse the king? 



LESSON LXXIL 



Irregular Verbs, continued. 

413. The irregular verb, f err e, to bear, drops e between two r's, 
as ferre for ferere, and i in the endings of the second and third sing, 
act., and of the third sing. pass. It borrows its second and third 
roots from other verbs. 

414. Paradigm. 



Ferre, to bear; 2d root, tul; 3d, lat. 

INDICATIVE. 



PRESENT. 



Active. 



Fer-5, fer-s, fer-t, fer-imus, 
fer-tis, fer-nnt. 



Passive. 



Fer-or, fer-ris, fer-tur, fer-imur, 
fer-imini, fer-imtur. 



186 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [414 

paradigm — continued. 





IMPERFECT. 


Active. Passive. 
Fer-ebam, bas, &c. Fer-ebar, bans, &c. 




1 

FUTURE. 


Fer-am, es, &c. 


! 

Fer-ar, eris, &c. 




PERFECT 


Tul-I, istl, &c. 


[ Lat-iis sum, es, &c. 




PLUPERFECT. 


Tul-eram, as, &e. 


Lat-iis eram, &c. 


FUTURE PERFECT. 


Tiil-er6, &c. 


Lat-us ero, &c. 




SUBJUNCTIVE. 

i 




PRESENT. 1 


Fer-am, as, &c. 


Fer-ar, aris, &c. 




IMPERFECT 


Fer-rem, res, &c. 


Fer-rer, reris, &c. 




PERFECT. 


Tul-erlm, &c. 


Lat-iis sim, &c. 




PLUPERFECT. 


Tul-issem. 


Lat-iis essem, &c. 




IMPERATIVE. 


Fer, or ferto, 
Fer-to ; 

Fer-te, or fer-tote. 
Fer-unto. 




Fer-re, or fer-tor, 
Fer-tor ; 
Fer-Iminl, 
Fer-untor. 




INFINITIVE. 


Pres. Fer-re, 
Perf. Tul-isse, 
Fut. Lat-urus esse. 


Fer-ri, 
Lat-us esse, 
Lat-um irl. 



415, 416.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 187 

paradigm — continued. 



PARTICIPLES. 



Active. 
Pres. Fer-ens, 
Fut. Lat-urus (a, urn). 



Passive. 

Perf. Lat-us (a, um). 
Fat. Fer-endus (a, um). 



GERUND. 
Fer-endl, do, dum, do. 

SUPINE. 
Lat-um. Lat-u. 



Rem. — The compounds of ferre are conjugated like the simple verb. 

415. The irregular verb, fieri, to become, be made, is used as 
the passive of facere, and, in the tenses for completed action, has 
the regular forms of the passive of that verb. 

416. Paradigm. 



Fieri, to become, be made. 

PRESENT. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Flo, f Is, fit, &c. Fi-am, f I-as, f I-at, &c. 

IMPERFECT. 

Fi-ebam, ebas, &c, Fi-erem, eres, &c. 

FUTURE. 

Fi-am, es, &c. 

PERFECT. 

Fact-iis sum, &c. Fact-us sim, &c. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Fact-us eram, &c. Fact-us essem, &c. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

Fact-us erO, &c. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sing. Fl, or f I-t6, Plur. Fite, or f I-tote, 

Fl-td. Fl-unto. 



188 



FIKST LATIN" BOOK. 
paradigm — cent inued. 



[417, 418. 







INFINITIVE. 






Pres. 


Fieri ; 


Perf. Fcict-us esse ; Fut. 
PAKTICIPLES. 


Fact-um 


in. 


Perf. 


Factr-iis 


(a, um) ; Fut. Faciendiis 


(a, um). 





417. YOCASULAPY. 

AfTerre, attul, all at, to bring, to 
bring to. 

Auctor j oris, author. 

Calamitas, atis, misfortune, ca- 
lamity. 

Creber, bra, brum, frequent, nu- 
merous. 

Ferre, tul, lat, to carry, bear, en- 
dure. 



Fieri, fact, to become, be made. 
Inferre, intul, illat, to bring a* 

gainst, to wage. 
Iterum, again. 
Referre, retul, relat, to bring 

back, to relate. 
Rumor, oris, report, rumor* 
Tertius, a, um, third. 
Utilitas, atis, profit, advantage. 



418. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Quid fers maim, mi fili? 2. Is labor utilis 
est qui auctori laudem fert, aliis utilitatem. 3. Tertio 
die auxilium tulerunt. 4. Orebri ad eum rumores affe- 
rebantur. 5. Dixit Gallos sibi bellum intulisse. 6. 
His responsis ad Caesarem relatis, iterum ad eum Cae- 
sar legatos mittit. 7. Brutus consul factus est. 

(6) 1. He has been made king. 2. Do you wish to 
become king ? (No.) 3. Many reports will be brought 
to you. 4. What reports have been brought to you ? 
5. Your father has become poor. 6. Shall you not 
bring us aid? 7. Do you not wish to carry aid to 
your brother? 8. Caesar waged many wars. 9. Cae- 
sar is said to have waged many wars. 10. He has 
endured many misfortunes. 11. Do you wish to wage 
war against your father? (No.) 12. We were unwil- 
ling to wage war against our country. 



419.] IEEEGULAE VEEBS. 189 

LESSON LXXIIL 

Irregular Verbs, continued. 

419. The irregular verb, ire, to go, is regular in 
the parts from tlie first root. 

PARADIGM. 



INFINITIVE. 
Pres. Ire ; Perf. Iv-isse ; Fut. Iturus, esse. 

PAETICIPLE6. 
Pres, lens (gen. euntis) ; Fut Itiiriis, a, urn. 

GEEUND. I SUPINE. 

Eundl, do, dum, do. Mm, itQ. 



Ire, to 


go; 2d root, w; 8d, it \ 




PRESENT. 


Indicative. 


| Subjunctive. 


Eo, Is, it ; Imus, Itis, eunt. | Earn, eas, &c. 




IMPERFECT. \ 


Ibam, ibas, &c. 


Irem, Ires, &c. 




FUTURE. 


Ibo, ibis, &c. 


1 




PERFECT. 


Iv-I, Iv-isti, &c. 


Iv-erim, eris, &c. 




PLUPERFECT. 


Iv-eram, eras, &c. 


Iv-issem, isses, &c. 




FUTURE PERFECT. 


Iv-er6, eris, &c. 


1 




IMPEEATIVE. 


Sing. I, or Ito, 
Ito. 


Plur. Ite, or Itote, 
Eunto. 



190 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[420—423. 



Rem. — The compounds of Ire are conjugated like the simple verb, but 
generally contract the perfect vol into it, and most of them want 
the supine. 

420. Edere, to eat, is conjugated regularly as a verb of the third 
conjugation, but has also certain forms like those of esse. These 
are as follows : 



Regular. 
Pres. Edo, &c. 

Imperat. Ede, &c. 
Subj. Imp. Ederem, &c. 
Infin. Edere. 



Irregular. 

Es, est, estis. 

Es, esto, este, estate. 

Essem, esses, &c. 

Esse. 



421. Eule of Syntax. — The words domus and rus, 
together with, the genitives hum\ lelli, and mllitiae, are 
construed like names of towns (see 227) ; e. g., 
Domum rediit, he returned home. 



422, VOCABULARY. 

Ahire, i, it, to go away, depart. 
DornI (gen. of domus), at home. 
Edere (esse), ed, es, to eat. 
Et — et, both — and. 
Evolare, ?v, at, to fly away, to 
flee. 



Ire, Iv, it, to go. 

Mllitiae (gen. ofmiUtia), on ser- 
vice, in the field. 
Nee — nee, neither — nor. 
Redlre, i, it, to return. 
Rus, runs, field, country. 



423. Exercises. * 

(a) 1. Fracto pueri brachio, abit. 2. Fundo in tres 
partes diviso, redit Athenas. 3. Pueri venatum 18 ive- 
runt. 4. Est {edit) utvivat. 5. Nonne estis utvivatis? 
6. Abeat Eomam. 7. Scriptis epistolis, abierunt. 8. 
Balbus, quum manus in aquam immersisset, abiit. 9. 
Cams rus ex nrbe evolaverit. 10. Caius nondum rare 
rediit. 11. Et Caesar et Balbus Eomam redierunt. 12. 
Venit sacerdos, ut aram floribus cingeret. 

(b) 1. Caesar has not yet returned to Borne. 2. The 



424—427.] PEKIPHRASTIC CONJUGATIONS. 191 

boys have gone a hunting. 11 3. Do you wish to go a 
hunting ? 4. They say he has gone a hunting. 5. He 
says that he wishes to go a hunting. 6. Do you not 
eat to live ? 7. He says that he eats to live. 8. Bal- 
bus, having crowned the boy's head with a garland, 
went away. 9. Caesar, having conquered his enemies, 
will return to Eome. 10. They all wish to return to 
Eome. 11. Do you wish to return home ? 12. Balbus 
is at his own house. 13. He was with me both at 
home and on service. 14. You have lived many years 
in the country. 



LESSON LXXIV. 



Periphrastic Conjugations. 

424. Theee are two periphrastic conjugations formed 
respectively from the future participles in rus and dus, 
combined with the various tenses of the verb esse. 
The first periphrastic conjugation represents the action 
as future, or as one that is about to be done; e. g., 
Scrip turns sum, i" am about to write. 

425. The second periphrastic conjugation expresses 
duty or necessity ; e. g., Virtus colenda est, virtue must 
be cultivated. 

426. Bule of Syntax. — The agent, or person by 
whom, is put in the dative with the part, in dus ; with 
other words it is generally governed in the ablative by 
a or ah. 

4:27. Bule of Syntax. — Many adjectives are fol- 
lowed by the dative of the object to which the quality 



192 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [428, 429. 

is directed, or for which, it exists ; e. g., Pax mihl gra- 
tissima erat, peace was very acceptable to me. 



428. Vocabulary. 

Blbere, bib, bibit, to drink, 
Del ere, ev, et, to destroy. 
Ignarus, a, urn, ignorant. 
Inutills, e, useless, unfit for. 
Marlmus, a, urn, marine, of the sea. 



Propior, us (pomp.), nearer. 
Putare, av, at, to think, regard 
Simplex, Icis, simple. 
Subvenire, ven, vent, to go to the 
assistance of, to aid. 



429. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Tondendae sunt oves, non deglubendae. 2. 
Exercenda est virtus. S. Nonne claudendae sunt urbis 
portae ? 4. Sapientia ars yiyeiidi putanda est. 5. Puer 
Eomam mittendus est. 6. Pauperibus qui ne grano 
quidem uno fraudandi sunt, subveniamus. 7. Quid 
facttiri estis ? 8. Simplex cibus pueris utilissimus est. 
9. Luna terrae propior est quam sol. 10. Aqua ma- 
rina inutilis est bibendo. 11. Inutiles sunt libri ignaro 
legendi. 

(b) 1. They must be sent to Athens. 2. They must 
be sent into the country. 3. We must be taught by 
the wise. 4. The city must be destroyed. 5. The 
gates must be shut. 6. Must not virtue be learned ? 
7. Must not virtue be practised? 8. Every opportu- 
nity of practising virtue 14 must be seized. 9. The poor 
must not be defrauded of even a single grain. 10. Has 
he not defrauded the poor ? 11. Let not the poor be 
defrauded of a single grain. 12. Is not the moon 
nearer the earth than the sun ? 



430 — 432.] IMPERSONAL VEKBS. 198 

LESSON LXXV. 

Impersonal Verbs. 

430. Impersonal verbs are such, as are used only in 
the third person singular, and never take a personal 
subject (as I, thou, he). The subject in English is gene- 
rally expressed by the pronoun it; e. g., 

Oportet, it behooves. 

Taedet me, it disgusts me (I am disgusted with). 

431. Besides the verbs which are strictly impersonal, 
many others are often used impersonally ; e. g., 

Constat, it is known. 
Juvat, it delights. 

432. The impersonal verb licet, it is lawful, ox is 
allowed, denotes permission, and may be translated by 
may and might; e. g., 

Licet, may (it is allowed). 
Licuit, might (it was allowed). 

Mihi ire licet, / may go. 

Tibi ire licet, You may go. 

111! ire licet, He may go. 

Nobis ire licet, We may go. 

Yobis ire licet, You may go. 

Illis ire licet, They may go. 

Mihi ire licuit, I might have gone. 

Tibl ire licuit, You might have gone. 

Rem. 1. — The dative in these examples is the indirect object after licet. 
Rem 2. — The present infinitive must be translated by the English 

perfect after licuit, might, as in the above examples. (See also 408, 

Rem.) 

9 



194 FIRST LATIN BOOK. ;433— 486 

(Eng.) I may go. (Lot. Id.) It is allowea me to go. 
(Eng.) I might have gone. (Lot. Id.) It was allowed 
me (then) to go. 

433. The impersonal verb oportet, it behooves, de- 
notes duty or propriety, and may be translated by 
ought; e. g\, 

Me ire oportet, / ought to go. 

Te ire oportet, &c. You ought to go. 

Me ire oportuit, I ought to have gone. 

Te ire oportuit, You ought to have gone. 

Rem. 1. — Observe that here, too, the present infinitive is to be trans- 
lated by the perfect after a past tense. 
Rem 2 — The infinitive after oportet takes a subject accusative. 

434. English. Latin Idiom. 

(a) I repent of my folly, It repents me of my folly. 

I am vexed at my folly, It vexes me of my folly. 

I am ashamed of my folly, It shames me of my folly. 

I pity the poor, It pities me of the poor. 

I am weary of life, It irks me of life. 

{ b) Me meae stultitiae poenltet, I repent of my folly. 

Me meae stultitiae piget, I am vexed at my folly. 

Me meae stultitiae pudet, I am ashamed of my folly. 

Miseret me pauperum, I pity the poor. 

Taedet me vltae, I am weary of life. 

435. Eule of Syntax. — The impersonal verbs of 
feeling, miseret, poeniiet, pudet, taedet, and piget, take the 
accusative of the person, together with the genitive of 
the object which produces the feeling. (See examples 
above.) 

436. Vocabulary. 



Adesse, adfu, to be present. 
Amicitia, ae, friendship. 
Constat, it is known, is an admit- 
led fact. 



Dlligens, entis, diligent. 
Habitare, av, at, to inhabit, dwell* 
Immortalis, e, immortal. 
Licet, it is lawful, is permitted* 



437, 438.] IMPERSONAL PERIPHRASTIC. 195 



Rec?pere (io), cep, cept, to r& 

ceive. 
Saepe, often. 
Sonus, I, sound, noise. 
Tardus, a, um, slow. 
Velox, ocis, swift 



Miseret, one pities; tulme mise- 
ret, I pity you. 

Oportet, it behooves, one ought. 

Piget, one is grieved at; me piget, 
I am grieved. 

Poenitet, it repents, one repents. 

Praestat, it is letter. 

437. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Constat soimm luce tardiorem esse. 2. Saepe 
facere praestat quam loqui. 3. Nonne licet Eomae 
habitare ? 4. Nonne licuit Athenis liabitare ? ^5>Nnn- 
quam licet peccare. 6. Num licet Christianis gloria^ 
servire ? 7. Pueros oportet diligentes esse. 8. Ami- 
citiam immortalem esse oportet. 9. Tui me miseret; 
mei piget. 10. Sapientia semper eo contenta est quod 
adest. 11. Ne multa loquere. 12. Miserere nostri. 13. 
Natura omnes propensi sumus ad discendum. 

(b) 1. It is well known that light is swifter than 
sound. 2. Is it not well known that the moon is nearer 
the earth than the sun ? 3. Is it not well known that 
sound is slower than light ? 4. He repents of his folly. 
5. I repented of my folly. 6. Ought not Christians to 
do good to as many as possible ? 7. Ought not Balbus 
to have kept m his word ? 8. Ought not Cams to have 
been condemned to death ? 9. I have received many 
letters from you. 10. The bird has flown away from 
my hands. 



LESSON LXXYI. 



Impersonal Periphrastic. 
438. The second periphrastic conjugation is often 
used impersonally ; e. g., 



L96 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [439—442. 

Mihi" scribendiim est, / must or sJwuld write. 

Tibi scribendiim est, you must or should write, 

111! scribendiim est, lie must or should write. 

Nobis scribendiini est, we must or should write. 

Vobis scribendiim est, you must or should write. 

Ulis scribendiim est, they must or shoidd write. 

439. Here too the agent is put in the dative (see 426) when ex- 
pressed. It is omitted : 

1) When it means everybody or people in general, though 
it may be translated by we or you ; e g., 

Edendum est, we or you (every body) must eat. 

2) When the persons meant are not likely to be mistaken. 

440. In the impersonal periphrastic construction, if 
the verb is one which governs a dative (396), its agent 
(the person by whom) must not be expressed; e. g., 

Credendum est Caio. 

We must believe Caius (not, Caius must believe). 

Rem. — If, in any instance, it is necessary to express the agent, it must 
either be done by means of the ablative with a or ab, or the form 
of the expression must be changed. The two datives would leave 
it doubtful which was the agent. 

441. VOCABULAEY. 



Etiam, even. 

Laborare, av, at, to labor, tou. 

Metuere, u, to fear. 



Senex, senis, an old man ; pi. the 



aged. 



442. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Mihi discendum est. 2. Etiam senibus dis 
cendum est. 3. Improbis metuendum est. 4. Tibi 
evolandum est ex urbe. 5. Manendum est Eomae 
6. Totam hiemem manendum est Carthagine. 7. Am 
bnlandum est per urbem. 8. Laborandum est, ut dis 
cas. 9. Nonne laborandum est, ut discamus? 10 



443.] IMPEKSOKAL PASSIVE VERBS. 197 

Num semper ludendum est ? 11. Nonne resistendum 
est irae ? 12. Num. credendum est improbis ? 13. 
Nonne resistendum est animo ? 14. Non omn.es ad 
discendum propensi sunt. 15. Discendum est, ut pos- 
sis docere. 16. Edendum est, ut possimus vivere, 

(b) 1. We must dwell in the country. 2. We must 
remain at home. 3. We must fly from the city (into) 
the country. 4. The unlearned must labor, that they 
may learn. 5. We nrast fight, that we may preserve 
our lives. 6. The girls must walk through the city. 
7. True greatness of mind must be valued at-a-very- 
high-price. 8. We should spare the conquered. 9. 
We should resist anger. 10. Should we not resist 
anger ? 11. We should obey the laws of our country. 
12. We must not spare even Balbus. 13. We must 
pardon both Caius and Balbus. 14. We must not be- 
lieve even Caesar himself. 15. Having written his 
letter, he will go a-hunting. 



LESSON LXXYII. 



Impersonal Passive Verbs. — Prepositions. 

443. Those verbs which take no direct object in the 
active, can only be used impersonally in the passive ; e. g., 

Mihi creditor, lam believed. 

Tibi creditur, Thou art believed. 

111! creditur, He is believed. 

Nobis creditur, We are believed. 

Vobis creditur, You are believed. 

Illis creditur, They are believed. 



198 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [444 449. 

444. Prepositions, as we have already seen (200), 
stow tte relation of objects to each otter ; e. g v in urbe 
habitat, he dwells in the city. 

445. Kule of Syntax. — The following twenty-six 
prepositions govern the accusative ; viz., Ad, adversiis, 
ante, apiicl, circa or circiim, cis or citra, contra, erga, 
extra, infra, inter, intra, juxta, ob, penes, per, pone, 
post, praeter, prope, propter, secundum, supra, trans, 
ultra, versus (rare). 

446. Kule of Syntax. — The following eleven pre- 
positions govern the ablative ; viz., A (ab or abs), ab- 
sque, coram, ciim, de, e or ex, palam, prae, pro, sine, 
teniis. 

447. Eule of Syntax. — The five prepositions, clam, 
in, sub, subter, and super, take sometimes the accusa- 
tive and sometimes the ablative, 

' Rem. — In and sub govern the accusative in answer to whither (i. e. 
after verbs of motion), and the ablative in answer to where (i. e. after 
verbs of rest). Subter generally takes the accusative. Super 
takes the accusative after verbs of motion and also when it signi- 
fies upon, and the ablative when it signifies on or of (as of a sub- 
ject spoken or written about) 

448. Vocabulary. 



Cis, on this side. 

Coelum, I, heaven, the heavens. 



Intra, within. 

Paucus, a, um, few, little. 



Coram, before, in the presence of Pietas, atls, loyalty, faithfulness. 



Erga, towards. 

Firmus, a, iim, firm, sure. 

Infra, below. 



Prae, before, in comparison with. 
Supra, above. 
Terra, ae, the earth. 



449. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Yobis non creditur. 2. Bonis creditur. 3. 
Grloriae tuae invidetur. 4. Irae resistitur. 5. Pauci 
veniunt ad senectutem. 6. Nulla est firma amicitia 



450—454.] conjunctions. 199 

inter malos. 7. Pietas erga patriam conservanda est. 
8. Gralli cis Khenum habitant. 9. Intra rmiros habi- 
tabat. 10. Coram populo loquetur. 11. Argentina 
prae auro contemnitur. 12. Caecus de coloribus judi- 
care non potest. 13. Supra nos coelum conspicinius ; 
infra nos terram. 

(b) 1. The good are always envied. 2. The wicked 
should never be believed. 3. The conquered must be 
spared. 4. We are envied. 5. They will be envied. 
6. He was buried within the walls. 7. They wish to 
be buried on-this-side-of the Khine. 8. Let us walk 
through the city. 9. They have returned from the 
city into the country. 10. Do you wish to go into the 
city ? 11. My father will remain in the city the whole 
winter. 



LESSON LXXVIII. 



Conjunctions. 

450. Conjunctions are merely connectives ; as, pater 
et f Ilius, the father and son. Certain combinations of 
these require some attention. 

451. Et followed by another et; turn or quum fol- 
lowed by fim, are both — and. 

452. Non solum — sed etiam, not only — but also. 

iso — as; as — as. 
as well — as. 
both — a,nd. 

454. Etiam, even, also ; etiam atque etiam, again and 
again ; quoque, also, too (follows the word it belongs to). 



200 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [455—461 

455. Ant, or ; aut — ant, vel — vel, either — or. 
Sive — sive, sen — sen, either — or, whether — or. 

456. Nee — nee, neque — neque, neither — nor. 

Vel, or , sometimes even ; with snperlatives, very^ 
extremely, possible. 

457. At, sed, autem, veriim, vero, hut. 
Attamen, tamen, veruntamen, yet, but, but yet 

458. Atqui, but, now (as used in reasoning). 

459. Nam, namque, enim, for. 



Ergo, 


therefore, then. 


Igitur, ideo, 


therefore. 


Itaque, 


accordingly, and so, there 




fore. 


Quare, 


wherefore. 


460. VOCABULARY. 





Amphibium, I. amphibious animal. 
Audax, acis, audacious, daring. 
Deterrere, u, it, to deter. 
Inceptum, I, purpose, undertaking. 
Impedlre, Iv, It, to impede, hinder. 



NascI, nat, to be born. 

Nimius, a, um, excessive, toe 

much. 
Pudor, oris, shame, sense of shame, 
Somnus, I, sleep. 



461. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Et discet pner et docebit. 2. Et Eomae vixi 
et Carthagine. 3. Lupus quum oyem turn canem mo- 
morderat. 4. Oyem non solum totondit, sed etiam 
deglupsit. 5. Nee timidus est, nee audax. 6. Nimius 
somnus neque ammo, neque corpori prodest. 7. Non 
deterreor ab incepto, sed pudore impedior. 8. Nihil 
laboras ; ideo nihil habes. 9. Nemo tarn pauper yiyit, 
quam natus est 10. Amphibia et in aqua et in terra 
yiyunt. 

(b) 1. "We shall go both to Eome and to Carthage. 
2. Will you also accuse me ? 3. Will they eyen con* 



462 — 466.] subjective mood with ut ; ne, quo. 201 

demn the. king to death.? [No.] 4. We must both 
learn and teach. 5. Do you not wish both to learn 
and to teach ? 6. We might have condemned not only 
the father, but also the son. 7. He will either remain 
at Rome, or go to Athens. 8 Dogs as well as wolves 
sometimes bite sheep. 9. He sent his son to Rome, 
but was unwilling to go himself. 10. Caius has been 
accused of treason, but he will never be condemned. 
11. He will not go a hunting, for he has buried his son. 



LESSON LXXIX. 

Subjunctive Mood with iit, ne, and quo. 

1. in order that, that, so that 

2. theinfin. (expressing purpose). 

462. Ut with subj.<^ 3. as, with infinitive. 

4. granting that, although. 

5. that, after to fear that not 

463. When ut introduces a purpose, the subjunctive 
may be rendered by may, might; when it introduces a 
consequence (as after so, such), it may be rendered by 
the indicative or infinitive. 

464. Ut with the indicative is as, when, since, after, how, 

"1. lest, that not. 
2. not with the infinitive. 
8. not with the imperative. 
4. after to fear that 
466. Ne with the imperative or subjunctive used 
imperatively, is simply not; as, ne scrwas, or ne scribe^ 
do not write. 
9* 



465. Ne withsubj.^ 



202 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [467 — 471. 

467. After verbs of fearing, ut and ne appear to 
change meanings; lit, that — not; ne, that on lest. 

468. After verbs of fearing, the subjunctive present 
must generally be rendered by the future; as, vereor ut 
faciam, I fear that I shall not do, vereor ne faciam, I fear 
that I shall do. 

469. Quo with the subjunctive is used to express 
purpose in sentences containing a comparative degree ; 
as, medico aliquid dandum est, quo sit studiosior, some- 
thing should be given to the physician, that he may be 
the more attentive. 

y^f For the use of tenses in the subjunctive, see 265 and 266. 



470. Vocabulary. 

Cavere, cav, caut, to take care, 

be careful. 
Cognitiis, a, urn, known. 
Efficere (io), fee, feet, to effect, 

accomplish. 
Fames, is, hunger. 
Incognitiis, a, urn, unknown. 
Medicus, I, physician. 
Monere, monu, monit, to advise, 

warn. 



Multitudo, mis, multitude. 
Numerare, av, at, to number. 
Quo, that, in order that. 
Satis (substantively), enough. 
Stella, ae, star. 
Sustmere, tinu, tent, to sustain, 

to endure. 
Vererl, verit, to fear. 



471. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Multi alios laudant, ut ab aliis laudentur. 2. 
Stellarum tanta multitudo est, ut numerari non possint. 
3. Medicis aliquid dandum est, quo sint studiosiores. 4. 
Cave ne incognita pro cognitis habeas. 5. Ne tentes 
quod effici non possit. 6. Yereor, ne labores tuos 
augeam. 7. Vereor ne brevi tempore fames in urbe 
sit. 8. Timeo ut labores tantos sustineas. 9. A varus 
semper veretur, ut satis habeat. 10. Yerebammi ut 
pax firma esset 



472, 473.] subjunctive with conjunctions. 203 

(b) 1. The cold is so great that the snow will not 
melt. 2. He praised us, in-order-that he might be 
praised by us. 3. The multitude of men was so great 
that it could not be numbered. 4. The multitude is 
so great that it cannot be numbered. 5. He has come 
to aid you. 6. They have gone to Eome to aid their 
father. 7. I sent him home, that he might not be bit- 
ten by the dog. 8. He warned his sons not to break 
the laws. 9. "We fear we shall increase your labors. 
10. They feared that he would not be acquitted. 



LESSON LXXX. 



Subjunctive with quominus, quin, and other Conjunctions. 

472. After verbs of hindering, quommiis is more 
common with the subjunctive than ne. It may gene- 
rally be translated by from, the verb being turned into 
the participial substantive. 

Rem. — Quominus (quo and miniis) means literally, by which the less t 
or, so that the less; e. g., 
Caio nihil obstat quominus sit beatus. 

(Nothing opposes Gains by which he should be the less happy) 
Nothing prevents Caius from being happy. 

1. but (as used after negatives). 

2. the relative with not 

3. as not with infinitive. 

4. that after doubt, deny in nega- 
tive sentences. 

5. from or without with the par- 
ticipial substantive, after 
prevent, escape, &c» 



473. Quin with subj, 



204 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [474— 478. 

474. Quin coincides very nearly with but; it is, 
however, generally better translated by some of the 
other forms given above ; e. g., 

*i \ rni • Ti — *-" i ^j_ S OUT TIVlYlrC-S, 

1) There is nobody, qum puteU _ _ _ . _ 

{who does not think. 

2) No one is so mad, quin piitet, as not to think. 

3) I do not deny, quin turpe sit, that it is disgraceful. 

4) They never saw him, quin rideret, without 

laughing. 

Rem. — Quin with the subjunctive is generally used after negative ex- 
pressions and those which imply doubt. 

475. The following conjunctions are used with the 
subjunctive; viz., 

Diirn, modo, dummodo, provided, if only. 
Licet, although. 

O si (0 if), utinam, would that. 
Quamvis, however much, however. 
Quasi, tanquam, as if 

Rem. — Not after provided, &c, is expressed by nS. 

476. Eule of Syntax. — Verbs signifying to abound. 
or be destitute of take the ablative ; e. g., Nemo alioriim 
ope carere potest, no one can be (do) without the assistance 
of others. 



477. Vocabulary. 

Dub it are, av, at, to doubt. 
Interdum, sometimes. 
Obstare, stit, stat, to oppose, pre- 
vent. 



Provides, a, iim, prudent, caw 

tious. 
Terrere, terru, territ, to terrify. 



478. Exercises. 

{a) 1. Nihil impedit, quominus id facere possimus. 
2. Quid obstat, quominus Caius sit beatus? 3. Non 



479—482.] INTERKOGATIVE SENTENCES. 205 

me terrebis, quominus illud faciam. 4. Sapiens nun- 
quam dubitabit, quin immortalis sit animus. 5. Nemo 
est tarn bonus ac providus, quin interdum peccet. 6. 
si sapiens virtutem colat ! 7. Utinam hoc verum 
sit. 8. Sic agis, quasi me ames. 

(b) 1. Nothing prevents you from being happy. 2. 
Nothing prevents him from doing this. 3. Does any 
thing prevent you from doing this ? 4. We have never 
doubted that the soul is immortal. 5. Do you doubt 
that the soul is immortal ? 6. There Is no one who 
does not think (473, 2) that you were engaged in the 
battle. 7. He never saw the shepherd without laugh- 
ing at him (474, 4). 8. Would that all citizens would 
observe the laws. 



LESSON LXXXI. 



Interrogative Sentences. 

479. All interrogatives take the indicative when the 
question is put directly ; as, num credis, do you believe? 

480. Nam and ne are merely interrogative particles, 
and are not construed in direct questions. 

481. All interrogatives take the subjunctive when 
the question is put indirectly or doubtfully, especially 
when it depends upon another verb. 

482. Double questions take two different construc- 
tions, viz. : 

1) The first clause is introduced by num, iitrum, 
or ne, and the second by an. 



206 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [483, 484, 

2) The first clause has no interrogative word, and 
the second has an or ne. 



483. Vocabulary. 

Enumerate, av, at, to enumerate, 

to count up. 
Ignis, is, m., fire, heat. 
Immobilis, e, immovable, fixed. 
Locu.pl es, etis, rich. 
Major, us, oris (pomp. o/*magrms), 

larger, greater. 
Minor, us, oris (comjp. of parvus), 

smaller. 
Mobilis, e, movable. 



Miser, era, erum, unhappy, miser* 

able. 
Mortalis, e, mortal, 
Nescire, Iv, It, to be ignorant, not 

to know. 
Olim, formerly. 
Quaestio, onis, question. 
Rotundiis, a, urn, round* 
Unde, whence. 



484. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Estne animus immortalis? 2. Visne miser 
esse? 3. Quis enumeret artium multitudinem ? 4. 
Nescio, unde sol ignem habeat. 5. Quid dicam nescio. 
6. Olim quaestio erat ; num terra rotunda esset. 7. 
Utrum major est sol, an minor, quam terra? 8. Num 
sol mobilis, an immobilis? 9. Sumusne immortales, 
an mortales ? 

(b) 1. Who has come ? 2. I do not know who has 
come. 3. Do not all men wish to live ? 4. Do you 
fear that the king will be conquered? 5. Do you not 
fear that we shall be condemned to death ? 6. What 
did he say ? 7. "We do not know what he said. 8. 
Are they rich or poor ? 9. You do not know whether 
we are rich or poor. 10. Whence does the moon de- 
rive (hdbwe) her light ? 11. He does not know whence 
the moon derives her light. 12. Who knows whence 
the sun derives his light ? 



485—487.] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 207 

LESSON LXXXII. 

Conditional Sentences. — Subjunctive in Relative Clauses 
and with Quum. 

485. Every conditional sentence consists of two 
parts, the condition and the consequence; e. g., 

Si quid habeat, dabit. 

If lie has any thing, he will giye it. 

Hem. — Here si quid habeat is the condition, and dalM Jie consequence. 

486. Conditional sentences are of three kinds : 

, 1) Those which assume the condition to be true; 

e.g., 
Si quid habet, dat. 
If he has any thing, he gives it. 

2) Those which represent the conditicn as pos- 
sible; e. g., 

Si quid habeat, dabit. 

If he has any thing, he will give it. 

3) Those which represent the condition as impos- 
sible; e. g., 

1. Si quid haberet, daret. 

If he had any thing, he would give it. 

2. Si quid habuisset, dedisset. 

If he had had any thing, he -would have 
given it. 

487. It must be observed : 

1) That the condition is expressed in the first of the 
above classes by the indicative, in the second 
by the subjunctive present or perfect, and in the 
third by the subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect 



208 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [488 — 490 

2) That the consequence is expressed in the first 
two of these classes by the indicative (or some' 
times by the imperative), and in the third by 
the subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect 

488. The relative clause takes the subjunctive : 

1) When it expresses & purpose or result; e. g\, 

1. Legatos miserunt, qui dicer ent. 

They sent ambassadors to say (that they might 
say). 

2. Neque enim tu is es qui nescias. 

Nor indeed are you such an one as not to 
know (ivho may not know). 
2^) When it defines or explains some indefinite an- 
tecedent, whether affirmative or negative ; e. g., 

1. Sunt qui piitent. 

There are (some) who think, or some persons 
think. 

2. Nemo est, qui haud intelligat. 

There is no one who does not understand. 

489. Quiim (cum) takes the subjunctive when it in- 
troduces a cause or reason, or in any way shows the de- 
pendence of one event upon another ; e. g., 

Quae cum ita sint. 

Since these things (lit. which things) are so. 

490. Quum, as an adverb of time (when), takes the 
indicative ; e. g., 

Iter faciebam quum Balbum videbam. 
I was travelling when I saw Balbus. 

The rise of quum with the perfect or pluperfect subjunctive to sup- 
ply the place of a perfect active participle, has already been noticed 
(367). 



491—493.] participles. 209 

491. Vocabulary. 



Consulere, siilu, suit, to consult, 

ask advice. 
Natio, onis, nation, 
Pertlmescere, timu, to fear 

greatly. 



Suadere, suas, suas, to advise. 
Sustmere, tinu, tent, to sustain, 

withstand. 
Vulnerare, av, at, to wound. 



492. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Peccavit, si id fecit. 2. Peccabit, si id faciat. 
3. Peccarent, si id facerent. 4. Peccavissent, si id 
fecissent. 5. Si vis beatus, impera animo. 6. Si me 
consulis, suadeo. 7. Patriam auro, si potuisset, vendi- 
disset. 8. Sunt qui rideant. 9. Erant qui saltavissent. 
10. Caesar equitatum, qui sustineret hostium impetum, 
misit. 11. Nulla est enim natio quam pertimescamus. 

(5) 1. If lie is alive (lives), lie is now at Athens. 2. 
If lie remains at Athens, he will learn much. 3. If he 
had gone to Kome, he would have been killed. 4. 
They would have sold their country, if they could. 5. 
If the king had been in the city, he would have par 
doned you. 6. There were some who were wounded. 
7. Since we cannot remain at Eome, we will go to 
Athens. 8. Caesar had sent two legions to attack 
(make an attack upon) the enemy. 



LESSON LXXXII1. 



Participles. 

493. Participles assume an assertion, which may be 
formally stated in a sentence whenever it is necessary 
or convenient to do so ; thus, puer rldens, may be vari- 



210 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [494 — 498. 

ously translated, according to the connection ; as, the 
boy who laughs, the boy when he laughs, &c. 

494. Participles may sometimes be translated by a 
relative clause ; e. g., 

- -o ^ _ 3 ( the boy who laughs. 

1. Puer ridens < _ _ J _ J _ 7 . 

( £/ie ooy tw&o t(;a5 Laughing. 

n -o w s, ( £Ae So?/ ttf/io is ot(7 to laugh. 

2. Puer risurus, < _ _ ^ _ v 77 7 * 7 * 

( £Ae 6oy w/io t^w laugh. 

3. Puer amatus, £Ae boy who is (or was) loved. 

4. Puer amandus, £Ae boy who ought to be loved. 

495. If no substantive is expressed, supply man, men, 
he, she, or those, &c. ; e. g., 

1. Riclentis, of him who laughs. 

2. RidentrBm, of those who laugh. 

496. With a neuter plural participle, supply things 

p, , v,, -. ~ ( things that will pass away. 
} what will pass away. 

Rem. — Participles, being parts of verbs, of course govern the same 



cases. 



497. Participles may sometimes be translated by cor- 
responding verbs with when or while; e. g., 

Ridens, when (or while) he is (or was) laughing. 

Rem. — In a sentence with when or while, we often omit the auxiliary 
verb; e. g., 

Ridens, when laughing. 

498. If the participle stands alone, he, they, a man, 
men, or one, &c, must be supplied as the subject of the 
verb ; e. g., 

1. Ridens, when he (or one) is laughing. 

2. Eidentes, when men (or they) are laughing. 



449—503.] 



PARTICIPLES. 



211 



499. Participles may sometimes be translated by cor- 
responding verbs with if; e. g., 

1. Ridens, if a man (he or one) laughs. 

2. Amatiis, if a man (he or one) is loved. 

500. Participles may sometimes be translated by cor 
responding verbs with because, for, since, or by partici- 
pial substantives with from or through. 

1. because I doubt 

2. for I doubt 
8. since I doubt 
4. from doubting. 

^ 5. through doubting. 



501. Dubitans, - 



502. Vocabulary. 

Adulator, oris, flatterer. 

Disjungere, junx, junct, to sepa- 
rate. 

Durare, av, at, to last. 

Expellere, pul, puis, to expel, 
banish. 

Felicitas, atls, happiness. 

Immensiis, a, urn, immense. 

Innoxius, a, urn, harmless. 

Interval lum, I, distance, space. 

Perf idia, ae, perfidy. 



Perpetuo, for ever, 

Pervenlre, ven, vent, to arrive 

at, reach. 
Pius, a, urn, pious. 
Placere, placu, placit, to please, 
Revertere, vert, vers, to return, 

turn back. 
Satiare, av, at, to satisfy. 
Viderl, vis, to seem. 
Vitiiperare, av, at, to reprove^ 

criticise. 



503. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Sapiens bona semper placitura laudat. 2. 
Pii homines ad felicitatem perpetno duraturam perve- 
nient. 3. Adulator ant laudat vituperanda, ant vitu- 
perat landanda. 4. Leones satiati (497) innoxii sunt. 
5. Bquum empttirus (499) cave ne decipiaris. 6. Eoma 
expulsus Carthagine pueros docebit. 7. Respondent 



212 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [504 — 506 

se perfidiam veritos (501) revertisse. 8. Stellae nobis 
parvae videntur, immenso inter vallo a nobis disjunctae. 
(b) 1. He who does wrong (494) is never happy. 2. 
Those who read this book will learn much. 3. There 
are some who think (488, 2) little of happiness which 
will not last. 4. The wise prize very highly the hap- 
piness which will last for ever. 5. They learned much 
while remaining at Eome (497). 6. If you love your 
parents (499), you will obey them. 7. We shall pardon 
him if condemned. 8. He fled from the city, because 
he had been accused of bribery (501). 



LESSON LXXXJV. 

Participles — continued. 

504. Participles may sometimes be translated by 
verbs with though or although; e. g., 

1. Eidens, though he laughs. 

2. Amatiis, though he is {was, &c.) loved. 

505. We often omit the auxiliary verb after though, 
e. £., 

1. Kidens, though laughing. 

2. Amatiis, though loved. 

506. Participles may sometimes be translated by 
verbs or participial nouns, with after ; e. g., 

1. Passus (Act.), | L after he has . (/zafZ ) su ff ered - 

t 2. after suffering. 

( 1. after he was (has been) loved. 

2. Amatiis, < 2. after he had been loved. 

{ 3. after having been loved 



507—510.] PARTICIPLES. 218 

507. Participles may sometimes be translated by 
corresponding verbs followed by the conjunction 
and; e.g. 

1. Eidens exclamat. 

He laughs and exclaims (lit. laughing be ex- 
claims). 

2. Eidens exclamavit. 

He laughed and exclaimed. 

Rem. — In the above examples the participle is coastrued by the same 
tense as the accompanying verb ; sometimes, however, a different 
tense must be used ; e. g., 

Correptum leporem lacerat. 

He has seized the hare and is mangling it. 

508. Participles with non may be translated by par- 
ticipial substantives depending upon the preposition 
without; e. g., 

1. Non ridens, without laughing. 

o at- _,v, ( 1. without being loved. 

2. JNonamatus, •< _ . _ _ ? _ . 

( 2. without loving firm. 

3. Yituperat libros non intellectos. 

He censures books {not understood) without un* 
derstanding them. 

509. Participles in the ablative absolute may be con- 
strued like participles in any other construction, the 
Latin substantive being translated either by the nom- 
inative or the objective; e. g., 

Tarquinio regnante, when Tarquin was Icing. 
Te sedente, as you were sitting. 
Capta Tyro, after Tyre was taken. 

510. Participles may often be translated by substan< 
tives of kindred meaning ; e. g., 



214 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [511, 512. 

Leges violatae, the violation of the laws (lit. the vio* 

lated laws). 
Vere appropinquante, on the approach of spring.. 



511. Vocabulary. 

Adventus, us, approach. 

Ante (prep, withaccus.), before. 

ApprSpinquare, av, at, to ap- 
proach. 

Coena, ae, supper, feast. 

Cognoscere, nov, nit, to ascertain. 

Comprehendere, hend, hens, to 
arrest, comprehend. 



Intelligere, lex, leet* to under* 

stand. 
Ponere, posu, posit, to place* 
Prof icisei, prefect, to set out, to 

start. 
Translre, i, it, to pass over, 
Ver, veris, n., spring. 



512. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Ad coenam vocatus, nondum venit. 2. Multa 
transimus ante ociilos posita. 3. Oculus, se non videns, 
alia yidet. 4. Cum legionibus profectus celeriter adero. 
5. Comprehension hominem Eomam ducebant. 6. 
Non petens regnum accepit. 7. Multi vituperant libros 
non intellectos. 8. His responsis datis, iterum ad eum 
Caesar legatos ^mittit. 9. Cognito Caesaris adventu^ 
legatos ad eum mittunt. 

(b) 1. He will not be condemned, although he has 
been accused of treason. 2. Although invited to the 
feast, they will not come. 3. They were accused and 
(507) condemned. 4. He will receive the government 
without seeking it (508). 5. We censure these boys 
without knowing them. 6. They were put to death 
without having been condemned. 7. Having ascer- 
tained the approach of our army, the enemy fled. 8. 
Birds will return on the approach of spring, 



518— 519.J deeivatiojst of nouns. 215 

LESSON LXXXY. 

( 
Derivation of Nouns. 

513. Wokds may be formed in two ways ; viz., 

1) By derivation, i. e., by the addition of certain 
endings to the roots of other words ; e. g., 
moeror, sadness, formed by the addition of or 
to moer, the root of moerere, to be sad. 

2) By composition, i. e., by the union of two or 
more words, or their roots ; e. g., benevolens, 
benevolent, well-wishing, from bene, well, and 
volens, wishing. 

514. Nouns may be derived from other nouns, and 
from adjectives and verbs. 

515. The endings, lus, Id, lum, added to the root of 
nouns, with a connecting vowel (sometimes i or o, but 
generally u, which sometimes takes c before it), form 
diminutives ; e. g., hortulus (hortus), a little garden. 

516. The masculine endings, ides (or ides), ddes, and 
iddes, and the feminine as and is, added to the root of 
names of persons, form patronymics or names of descent; 
e. g., Pridmides (Priamus), a son or descendant of Priam; 
Tantdlis (Tantalus), daughter of Tantalus. 

517. Atits, itds, and urd, added to the root of nouns, 
denote office, rank, or body of 'men ; e.g., consulates (con- 
sul), consulship ; civitds (civis), state, body of citizens, 

518. Ium, added to the root of nouns, denotes the 
state or condition of the objects expressed by the primi- 
tive; sometimes an assemblage of those objects; e. g., 
servitium (servus), either servitude or domestics. 

519. The endings, itds, id, itid, itudo, and tus (gen. 



216 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [520 — 525. 

tutu) ^ added to the root of adjectives, form abstract 
nouns ; e. g., bonitds (bonus), goodness ; diligentid (di- 
ligens), diligence ; multitudo (multus), multitude ; vir- 
tus (vir), virtue, manliness. 

520. The endings, a and o, added to the first root of 
verbs, and or (fern, rix) to the third, denote the agent 
or person who; e. g., scribd (scribere), a scribe; bibo 
(bibere), a drunkard ; victor (vincere), a conqueror. 

521. Or and ium, added to the first root, and ib, us, 
and urd to the third, denote the action or state expressed 
by the verb ; e. g., pavor (paver e), fear ; gaudium (gau- 
dere), joy; actio (agere, act), an action, &c. 

522. Idb and igb, added to the first root, denote the 
abstract of the primitive ; e. g., cufiido (cupere), desire. 

523. Men and mentum, added to the first root, denote 
the thing done, that by which it is done, or that which does ; 
e. g., tegmen (tegere), a covering; flumen (fluere), a 
stream, river. 

524. Urn, added to the third root, denotes the action 
of the verb, or the means or result of it ; e. g., tectum 
(tegere), roof, covering ; scrijptum (scribere), a writing. 



525. VOCABULAKY. 

Adjuvare, jiiv, jut, to aid, "help. 

Adventus, us (advenlre), ap- 
proach, arrival. 

Circumdare, ded, dat, to sur- 
round. 

Clvitas, atis (civis), state. 

Dlligentia, ae (diligens), dili- 
gence. 

Fugare, av, at, to put to flight. 

Hortulus, I (hortus), a little gar- 
den. 



Imperator, oris (imperare), com- 
mander. 

Multitudo, mis (multus), multi- 
tude. 

Nuntiare, av, at, to announce, re- 
port. 

Pastor, oris (pascere), shep- 
herd. 

Senatus, us (senex), senate* 



526 — 529.] DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 217 

526. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Hortuli nostri multos flores habent. 2. Im- 
perator quam maximas copias comparavit. 3. Dili- 
gentia tua laborem patris adjuvit. 4. Hie nuntius ad- 
ventum tuum nuntiaverat. 5. Ciceronem magna po- 
piili multitudo circumdedit. 6. Pastor fugavit lupum 
qui ovem imam momorderat. 

(b) 1. Have yon seen the shepherd's dog? 2. We 
went to see the boy's little garden. 3. Let them not 
come into the senate. 4. He has announced the arrival 
of the king. 5. Did you not announce the arrival of 
the leaders? 6. Caesar said that he would put to 
flight the forces of the enemy. 7. The commander 
has sent messengers to Eome. 8. The leaders will 
collect as large forces as possible. 9. The laws of the 
state have been violated by the commander. 



LESSON LXXXVL 
Derivation of Adjectives. 



527. Adjectives may be derived from nouns and 
verbs. 

528. The endings, alls, arts, icus, ilis, and ius, added 
to the root of nouns = of belonging to, related to ; e. g., 
regalis (rex), regal ; popularis (populus), popular ; cwl- 
Vis (civis), civil, &c. 

529. Aceus, icius, eus, and inns, denote the material y 
the first two sometimes origin, and the last two some- 
times similarity ; e. g v pUricius (pater), patrician ; a%* 
reus (aurum), golden, &c. 

10 



218 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [580 — 586. 

530. Osus and lentus (often with, connecting vowel u), 
denote fulness, abundance; e. g., aauosus (aqua), watery; 
lutulentus (lutum), full of mud. 

531. Aeus, anus (idnus), iensis, and mus, added to 
the root of proper names of places, denote native of 
occupant of; e. g., Bomanus (Eoma), a Eoman ; Aihe- 
niensis (Athenae), an Athenian, &c. 

532. Arius (generally used substantively), denotes 
occupation, sometimes pertaining to; e. g., consiliarius 
(consilium), counselling, or a counsellor. 

533. Atus, itics, and utus = furnished with, &c. ; e. g. ? 
auratus (aurum), gilt ; turritus (turns), turreted, &c. 

534. Sties = being in, having in one's self; e. g., ro~ 
bustus (robur), robust. 

535. Adjectives may be derived from verbs by the 
use of the following endings : 

1) Ax = having a propensity to perform the action 
of the verb ; e. g\, edax (edere), voracious. 

2) Bundus and cundus = the strengthened meaning 
of the present participle used adjectively ; e. g., 
rmrabundus (mirari), full of admiration, &o. 

3) Idics (and sometimes uus) = the quality indica- 
ted by the verb ; e. g., algidus (algere), cold. 

4) His and biTis = capable of being, easy to be ; e. g., 
docilis (docere), easy to be taught, docile ; ere* 
dibitis (credere), capable of being believed, 
credible. 



536. Vocabulary. 

Anulus, I. a ring, 

Atheniensis, e (Athenae), Athe- 
nian. 

Carthagmiensis, e (Carthago), 
Carthaginian. 



Civllis, e (civis), civil. 

Fallax, acis (fallere), false, de- 
ceptive. 

Fabulosus, a, urn (fabula), fa* 
bulous. 



537 -539.1 VERBS AND ADVEKBS. 



219 



Gallicus, a, um (Gallia), Gallic, 

pertaining to Gaul. 
Incredibilfs, e (in and credere), 

incredible. 
Narrare, av, at, to "elate. 
Narratio, onis (narrare), narra- 



tive, story. 



Octo, eight. 

Popularls, e (popiilus), popular. 

Socrates, is, Socrates, a celebia* 

ted Athenian philosopher 
Speciosiis, a, um (species), spe* 

cious, plausible. 
Vinclre, vinx, vinct, to bind. 



537. Exercises. 



(a) 1. Haec narratio est fabulosa. 2. Non sum tarn 
imprudens, ut verbis speciosis decipiar. 3. Spe fallaci 
decepti estis ; cavete ne iterum decipiamini. 4. Quis 
credat illud quod incredibile est ? 5. Caesar octo libris 
belhim Gallicum, tribus civile narravit. 6. Athenien- 
ses Socratis damnati (506) pedem ferro vinxerunt. 

(b) 1. Many have been deceived by false hopes. 2. 
Let us not be deceived by false words. 3. These nar- 
ratives are incredible. 4. He has given his sister two 
gold rings. 5. The Eomans waged many wars. 6. 
The Carthaginians were conquered by the Eomans. 
7. The Athenians condemned Socrates to death. 8. 
They cannot deceive the judge by specious words. 9. 
The senator wishes to be popular. 10. They are wag- 
ing a civil war. 



LESSON LXXXVII. 
Derivation of Verbs and Adverbs. 

538. Verbs may be derived from nouns and adjec- 
tives, and from other verbs. 

539. Verbs derived from nouns and adjectives are 
generally called denominatives 



220 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [54.0 — 547. 

540. Transitive denominatives end in are (dep. ari) 
or ire ; e. g., curare (cura), to take care of; finire (finis), 
to finish. 

541. Intransitive denominatives end in ere or scere; 
e. g., florere (flos), to bloom ; maturescere (maturus), to 
become ripe. 

Rem. — The ending scere is joined to the root by taeans of a connecting 
vowel ; e is the connecting vowel in the above example. 

542. Verbs derived from other verbs comprise four 
distinct classes, viz. : frequentatives, inchoatives, desidera- 
fives, and diminutives. 

543. Frequentatives denote repeated or continued 
action, and are formed by the addition of are or itare to 
the third root, except in the first conjugation, where 
they add itare to the first root ; e. g., habitare (habere), 
to inhabit ; voEtdre (volare), to fly often, to flit. 

544. Inchoatives denote the beginning or increase of 
an action, and are formed by the addition of scere to the 
first root with a connecting vowel ; e. g., clarescere (cla- 
rere), to grow bright, or clear. 

545. Desideratives denote a desire to do the action 
of the primitive, and are forme I by adding urire to the 
third root ; eg., esurire (edere), to desire to eat. 

546. Diminutives denote a feeble action, and are 
formed by adding illare to the first root ; e. g., cantillare 
(cantare), to sing in a feeble voice. 

547. Derivative adverbs generally take one of the 
following endings, viz. : 

1) When derived from nouns, tim, itus ; e. g., 
gregaMm (grex), in flocks ; funditus (fundus), 
from the foundation. 

2) When derived from adjectives, £, e, o, ier (con- 



548, 549.] 



VERBS AND ADVERBS. 



221 



necting vowel i except after n) ; e. g., vere 
(verus), truly; /acaZe (facilis), easily; a£o(citus), 
quickly ; fortiier (fortis), bravely. 
3) When derived from verbs, im added to the 
third root ; e. g.-, statim (stare, stat), imme 
diately. 



548. Vocabulary. 

Cant are, av, at (canere), to sing. 

Curare, av, at (cura), to take care 
of. [guard. 

Custodire, Iv, it (custos), to 

Flnlre, Iv, It (finis), to finish. 

Florescere (florere), to begin to 
bloom, 

Fortiter (fortis), bravely. 

Germania, ae, Germany. 

Habitare, av, at (habere), to in- 
habit, dwell. 

Ludus, I, play, sport, pi. games. 

Nuntiare, av, at (nuntius), to an- 
nounce, report. 



OccuJtare, av, at (occulere), to 

hide, conceal. 
Provincia, ae (pro and vincere), 

province. 
Pugnare, av, at (pugna), to fight. 
Saevlre, Iv or i, It (saevus), to 

rage, to be cruel. 
Spectare, av, at (specere), to see, 

look at 
Statim (stare), immediately. 
Tectum, I (tegere), a covering, 

roof, house. 
Vigilare, av, at (vigil), to watch, 

remain awake. 



549. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Laborem nostrum finivimus. 2. Canes tecta 
nostra custodiverunt. 3. Bellum saevit per Grerma- 
niam. 4. Dormivistine, an vigilasti? 5. Puellae in 
horto cantabant. 6. Corpora nostra curaveramus. 7. 
Pueri ludos spectaverunt. 8. Arbores florescunt. 9. 
Hie ad summam gloriam florescebat. 10. Decrevimus 
habitare in provincia. 11. Consilia sua occultaverunt. 
12. Si te viderit, statim curret ad te. 

(b) 1. Have they announced your arrival ? 2. Who 
will announce the arrival of the king ? 3. Caesar sent 



222 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [550. 

very large forces to guard the city. 4. They have 
gone into the country to witness the games. 5. They 
have finished the war. 6. We wish to finish the work. 
7. The enemy are said to have fought bravely. 8. 
The flowers are beginning to bloom in our garden. 
9, Do you wish to live (dwell) in the city ? 10. We 
wish to live in the country. 



LESSON LXXXYIIL 

Composition of Words. 

550. Prepositions often enter into eompositicn with 
other words, as prefixes. 

Rem. — Many prepositions undergo no change of form on entering into 
composition, and merely impart to the simple word their own 
force. These, of course, require no special notice ; others, how- 
ever, present some peculiarities. 

1) A, ab, abs = away from ; e. g., abstinere (abs and tenere), to 
abstain from. In substantives and adjectives, it denotes 
privation; e. g., omens (a and mens), without mind, mad. 

2) Ad = to (d often assimilated before consonants, except d y j, 
on, and v) ; e. g., accipere (ad and capere), to accept. 

3) Con (cum) = with, together, sometimes completely (co before h 
and vowels ; com before b, p, and sometimes before a vowel; 
n assimilated before I, m, and r) ; e. g., conducere (con and 
ducere), to lead together, collect. 

4) De =from, down; e. g., deducere (de and ducere), to deduca 
In substantives and adjectives, privation ; e. g., demens (de 
and mens), mad. 

5) E,ex= out of, thoroughly (e before liquids and b, d, g, and v, 
ef before/); e. £., expugncire (ex and pugnare), to vanquish 
storm. 

6) In = into, on, against (im before b and p; i before gn; n as 
similated before I, m, and r) ; e. g., incur rere (in and currere), 



551—654.] composition or words. 223 

-to attack. In adjectives, not; e.g., indignus (in and dig. 
nus), unworthy. 

7) Ob = against {b assimilated before c,f and usually p) ; e. g., 
opponere (ob and ponere), to place against, to oppose, 

8) Pro = for ', forth {prod before vowels); e. g., proponere (pro 
and ponere), to set forth, propose. 

9) Sub = under, from below, somewhat (b assimilated before c, /, 
g, and sometimes m, p, and r; sus in a few words) ; e. g., 
subjicere (sub and jacere), to throw under, to subject 

551. The inseparable prepositions, amb, around, 
about ; dts or di, asunder ; re {red before vowels), back, 
again, away; se, without, apart from; and ^6, not, often 
occur as prefixes in compound words; e. g., wnblre 
(amb and ire), to go round ; disponere (dis and ponere), 
to put asunder, to distribute ; rgdirg (red and ire), to 
return ; seducgrg (se and ducere), to lead apart ; vesanus 
(ve and sanus), not sane, insane. 

552. Adverbs are sometimes used as prefixes ; e. g., 
henevolens (bene and volens), benevolent; mdUvolens 
(male and volens), wishing ill, malevolent. 

553. Certain vowel-changes often take place in form- 
ing compound words ; thus, a, e and ae are often changed 
into i (a sometimes into e) ; e. g., accipere (ad and ca- 
pere), abstmerg (abs and tenere), occid$r$ (ob and caedere). 

Rem. 1. — Having examined the prefixes, we pass to notice a few ter- 
minations of frequent occurrence in compound words. 

Rem. 2. — When the first part of a compound is a noun, the connecting 
vowel is generally short i, as in Hgricola (ager and colere), a 
husbandman. 

554. From/ac^, to do, are derived, (l)fex, agent; 
e. g., artifix (ars and facere), an artist; ty/icium, cor- 
responding substantive of thing ; e. g., artificium, an 
art ; (S)ficus, he who does {objectively) ; e. g., beneficus, 
beneficent. 



224 



FIKST LATIN BOOK. 



[555—661. 



555. From capere, to take, are derived, (1) ceps, 
agent; e. g., princeps (primus and capere), one who 
takes the first (place), a prince, a leader ; (2) cipium, 
corresponding substantive of thing ; e. g., principium, 
a beginning. 

556. From dicere, to speak 5 are derived, (1) dex, agent, 
one who speaks; e. g., index, an informer; (2) diciurn, 
corresponding substantive of thing ; e. g., indicium, a 
disclosure ; (3) dicus {adj.), speaking ; e. g., malediciis, 
slanderous. 

557. From carter e, to sing; cm, agent; e.g., tubicen 
(tuba and canere), a trumpeter. 

558. From velle, to wish ; volens and voius {adj.), wish- 
ing; e. g., henevolens and hertevolus (bene and velle), 
benevolent. 

559. From ferre and gerere, to bear; fer and ger, one 
who bears ; e. g., Lucifer (lux and ferre), Venus as 
morning star, the bearer of light ; armiger (arma and 
gerere), armor-bearer. 

560. From colere, to cultivate ; cold, one who culti- 
vates, or dwells in ; e. g., sigricola (ager and colere), a 
field-tiller, a husbandman. 



561. VOCABULABY. 

Adducere, dux, duct (ad and 

due ere), to bring to. 
Attingere, tig, tact (ad and tan- 

gere), to reach, attain. 
Condere, did, dlt (con and dare), 

to found. 
Convenlre, ven, vent (con and 

venire), to assemble, convene. 
Expiignare, av, at (ex and pug- 

nare), to take by storm. 



Incertiis, a, urn (in and certus), 
uncertain. 

Incola, ae, m. &/. (in and co- 
lere), an inhabitant. 

Invader e, vas, vas (in and va- 
dere), to go against, invade. 

Italia, ae, Italy. 

Obses, Idis, m. &/, hostage. 

Occidere, cid, cas (ob and ca« 
dere), to fall, set. 



662.] COMPOSITION OP WORDS. 225 



Occldere, cid, els (ob and cae- 

dere), to kill. 
Philosophus, I, philosopher. 
Possidere, ed, ess, to possess. 



Princeps, ipis (primus and 
cap ere), the first, a leader, 
chief. 

Verum, I, truth. 



562. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Multi philosophi verum non attigerunt. 2. 
Eex portas urbis clausit hostibus invadentibus. 3. Has 
terras possidemus ; illas expugnabimus. 4. Gralli Eo- 
mam expugnaverunt. 5. Sol post montes illos in mare 
occidit. 6. Hie unus miles duos aut tres occidit. 7. 
Incolae ad eum legatos miserunt. 8. Caesar omnem 
senatum ad se convenire, principumque liberos ob- 
sides ad se adduci jussit. 9. Incertum est quo tem- 
pore Dido Carthagmem condiderit. 

(b) 1. The commander will collect large forces and 
invade Italy. 2. After having waged war for many 
years, they took the city by storm. 3. Caesar had or- 
dered all the inhabitants to assemble in his presence. 
4. Let us put the invading enemy to flight. 5. Eomu- 
lus is said to have founded Eome. 6. It is uncertain 
at what time Carthage was founded. 7. I do not know 
at what time he returned home. 8. They say that 
Caius was killed in the first battle. 



10* 



PARADIGMS. 



Dec. V. 



Nouns. — Five Declensions. 

563 Endings of the Genitive Singular. 

Dec. I. Dec. II. Dec. III. Dec. IV. 
ae, I, is, us ei.* 1 

Rem. —Some Greek nouns are exceptions. 

564. Gender in Latin is, 

1) Natural, when determined by sex, as in English ; as, Jiom5 
a man, masc. ; mulier, a woman, fern. 

2) Grammatical, when not determined by sex ; as, sermO, a 
discourse, masc. ; laurus, a laurel, fern. 

565. Natural Gender. 



Masculine. 
Names of males. 



Feminine. 
Names of females. 



Common. 

Names applicable tc 

both sexes. 



§66. The grammatical gender of nouns is determined partly by their 
signification, but principally by their endings. 

567. Grammatical Gender, when not determined by nom. ending. 



Masculine. 
Most names of rivers, 
winds, and months. 



Feminine. 
Most names of coun- 
tries, towns, islands, 
and trees. 



Neuter. 
Indeclinable nouns and 
clauses used as nouns. 



Rem.— Grammatical gender, as determined by the endings of nouns, will be noticed 
in connection with the several declensions. 

568. First Declension. 

1. Characteristic ae. 

2. Nominative endings : Latin a ; Greek e, as, and es. 

3. Grammatical gender : a and e, fern. ; as and es, masc. 

Rem*— Cases coming under previous rules (565 and 567) are, of course, excepted. 



* In this ending e is long, except in s p e I, £ i d e 1, and r e 1 



228 



FIBST LATIN BOOK. 



T569. 



4. Case-endings. 



Nom. Gen. 


Dat 


Ace Voc. AM. 


Sing. a, ae, 


ae 


, am, a, a. 


Plur. ae, arum, 


is, 


as, ae, is. 


Rem.— The declension of Greek 


nouns presents some exceptions 


5. Paradigms. 






1. Musa, a muse. 




2. Epitome, an abridgment 


Sing. Plur. 




Sing. Plur. 


N". Mus-a, Mus-ae. 




K Epitom-e, Epitom-ae. 


G. Mus-ae, Mus-arum. 




G. Epitom-es, Epitom-arum. 


D. Mus-ae, Mus-is. 




D. Epitom-ae, Epitom-is. 


A. Mus-am, Mus-as. 




A. Epitom-en, Epitom-as. 


V. Miis-a, Mus-ae. 




Y Epitom-e, Epitom-ae. 


A. Mus-a, Mus-is. 




A. Epitom-g, Epitom-is. 


3. Aeneas (a man's name). 




4. Anchises (a man's name). 


N. Aene-as. 




1ST. Anchis-es. 


G. Aene-ae. 




G. Anchis-ae. 


D. Aene-ae. 




D. Anchis-ae. 


A. Aene-am (an). 




A. Anchis-en. 


Y. Aene-a. 




Y. Anchis-e (a). 


A. Aene-a. 




A. Anchis-6 (a). 



569. Second Declension. 

1. Characteristic t. 

2. Nominative endings : Latin, er, ir, us, um ; Greek, os and on. 

3. Grammatical gender : um and on, neut. ; the rest masculine^ 
except, 

1) Alviis, domus, humus, and vannus, which are feminine ; pela- 
gus and virus, neuter ; and vulgiis, generally neuter, but some- 
times masculine. 

2) Such as come under previous rules. 

4. Case-endings. 

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. AbL 

Sing. Nom. end. i, 6, um, e (or like nom.), o, 

Plur. I {neut a), onim, Is, os {neut. a), i {neut. a), Is* 

Rem.— A few Greek nouns are exceptions. 






70.J 


PARADIGMS. 


22 


5. Paradigms. 


Servus, slave. I Regniim, king- 1 Gener, son-in- 1 Ager, field* 
dom, law. 


SINGULAR. 


Serv-us. 

Serv-L 

Serv-o. 

Serv-um. 

Serv-e. 

Serv-o. 


Regn-um. 

Regn-L 

Regn-o. 

Regn-um. 

Regn-um. 

Rggn-o. 


Gener. 

Gener-L 

Gener-o. 

Gener-um. 

Gener. 

Gener-o. 


Ager. 

Agr-L 

Agr~a 

Agr-iim. 

Ager. 

Agr-o. 


PLURAL. 


Serv-L 

Serv-orum. 

Serv-is. 

Serv-os. 

Serv-L 

Serv-is. 


Rggn-a. 

Regn-orum. 

Regn-is. 

Regn-a. 

Regn-a. 

Regn-is. 


Gener-L 

Gener-orum. 

Gener-is. 

Gener-os. 

Gener-L 

Gener-is. 


Agr-L 

Agr-orum, 

AgMs. 

Agr-os. 

Agr-L 

Agr-is. 


Rem.— VTr, a man, is declined like gener. 


6. Paradigms of Greek nouns. 


1. Ilion, n. (name of a city). 
K IH-oa 


2. Delos, f. (name of an island) 
K Del-os. 


G. Ili-L 


G. Del-L 


D. Hi-6. 


D. Del-o. 


A. Ili-on. 


A. Del-oa 


Y. Bi-on. 


V. Del-e. 


A. Li- 


■o. 


A. DeU 


). 



570. Third Declension. 

1. Characteristic is. 

2. Nominative endings : a, e, ?, o, y, c, I, n, r, s, t, x. 
3 Table of gender in the third declension. 



Masculine. 



ei,or,os, es increasing in 
gen. and o, except do, 
go, and io. 



Neuter. 
a, e, i^c^n^ar, 
ur, and us. 



[Feminine. 
do, go, io, as, is, ys, aus, 
s impure, es not in- 
creasing in gen. and x. 

For exceptions, see 579. 

4. Classification of nouns of the third declension, according to the 
formation of root from nominative ending. 



Class I.| 
Root like Nora. 



Class II. 
Root adds a let- 
ter. 



Class III. 

Root drops i>o*n- 

ending. 



Class. IV. 
Hoot changes 
noaa -Gilding. 



230 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [571, 572 

5. Masculine and feminine case-endings. 

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. 

Sing, is, i, em, (ini), . . £ (l), 

Plur. es, urn. (ivim), ibus, es, es, ibus. 

Rem. 1.— The inclosed endings im and l belong only to a few words. 

Rem. 2.— The ending ium of the genitive plural occurs in the following classes of 
nouns; viz., 

1) Neuters in e, al, and ar ; as, mare, mdrium; animal, animalium. 

2) Nouns in is and es of Class III. ; as, hostfe, hostium ; nubes, nubium. 

3) All monosyllables in s or x preceded ry a consonant ; as, urbs, urbiutn ; 
arx, arcium. 

4) Nouns in ns and rs (though in these um is sometimes used) ; as, cliens, 
clientium ; co/iors, cohortium. 

6. Neuter case-endings. 

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Ab. . 

Sing. is, I, . . . . e (l), 

Plur. a (ia), um (ium), ibus, a (ia), a (ia), ibus. 

Rem.— The inclosed endings belong to neuters in e, al, and ar. 

571. Class I. comprises nouns in c,* Z, n, r, t, and y. These 
either have the root the same as the nominative singular, or form it 
(with a few exceptions) by one of the following slight vowel-changes: 

1) Nouns in ter and her generally drop e in the root : as, pater, 
a father ; root, patr. 

2) Nouns in en generally change e into % in the root ; as, 
jlumen, a liver ; root,flumin. 

3) Nouns in ut change u into % in the root; as, caput, a head; 

root, capit. 

Rem.— The quantity of the radical vowel is sometimes changed ; this is the case in 
most nouns in al and or, which generally lengthen the vowel in the root. 

572. Class II. comprises nouns of the third declension in a, o> 
and a few in i. These form the root by adding a letter to the 
nominative singular. 

1) Nouns in a, and a few in i, add t; as, poemd, a poem; 
root, poemdt : hydromeli, mead ; root, hydromeMt. 

2) Nouns in o add n ; as, Zeo, a lion ; root, leon. 

Rem. 1.— O is long in the root. 

Rem. 2.— Nouns in do and go change o into », before n in the root; as, virgo, a vir- 
gin ; root, virgin. 

* There are only two nouns of this ending, one of which belongs to 
Class II. 



573— o"5.] 



PA EADIGMS — NOUNS. 



231 



573. Jlass III. comprises nouns of the third declension in bs, 
ms, p. , x (=cs or gs), is, ys,e, sl few in i 9 * and a few in es. They 
form the root by dropping the nominative ending. 

1) Nouns in bs, ms, ps, and ys, drop s; as, urbs 9 a city; root, 
urb ; hiems, winter; root, Mem. 

2) Nouns in x (=cs or gs) drop the s in x ; as, iwa? (es), a 
wee; root, voc; re# (gs), a king; root, reg*. 

3) Nouns in is, e, and a few in es, drop those endings ; as, 
hostis, an enemy; root, host: nubes, sl cloud; root, nub: 
mare, a sea; root, mar. 

574. Class IV. comprises nouns of the third declension in as, os, 
us, Is, ns, rs, and most of those in es. These form the root by 
changing s into r, t, or d. 

1) Nouns in as, Is, ns, rs, and most of those in es, generally 
change s into t; as, pietas, piety; root, pietat: mons, a 
mountain; root, mont: dbies, a fir-tree ; root, dbiet: miles, 
a soldier ; root, milit. (See Rem. 2, below.) 

Rem. 1. — Masculines in as, of Greek origin, insert n before t in the root ; as, elephas, 

an elephant ; root, elephant. 
Rem. 2.— Many nouns in es change e into t, before f, in the root ; as, miles ; root, 

mllit. 

2) Nouns in os and us generally change s into r or t; as,flos, 

sl flower ; root, flor : sacerdos, a priest ; root, sacerdot : 

virtus, virtue; root, virtut: genus, a kind; root, gener: 

tempus, time ; root, tempbr. 

Rem.— Most nouns in us change s into r, and u of the nominative becomes e or 6 in 
the root, as in these eYamples. 

575. Paradigms. 



Mulier, /, a woman. 
(root, same as nom. [126].) 



Singular. 
N". Mulier, 
G-. Mulier-is, 
D. Mulier-i, 
A. Mulier-em, 
V. Mulier, 
A.. Mulier-e, 



Plural. 
Mulier-es. 
Mulier-uni. 
Miilier-ibus. 
Mulier-es. 
Mulier-es. 
Mulier-ibiis. 



Virgo,/, a virgin. 
(root, virgin [131, 2. Rem. 2].) 



Singular. 
N. Virgg, 
G-. Virgin-is, 
D. Virgin-i, 
A. Virgin-eni, 
V. Virgg, 
A. Virgin-e, 



Plural. 
Virgin-es. 
Virgin-urn. 
Virgin-ibus. 
Virgin-es. 
Virgin-es. 
Virgin-ibus. 



* Nouns in i are of Greek origin : most of these are indeclinable ; a 
few form the root by dropping ?, and a few by adding t (572, 1)= 



232 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



[576 



Rex (gs), m., a king, 
(root, rig [134, 2].) 



Corpus, 77., a body, 
(root, corpor [137, 2].) 



Singular. 


Plural 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. Rex, 


Reg-e s. 


N. Corpus, 


Corpor-a. 


G-. Reg-is, 


Reg-urn. 


G-. Corpor-is, 


Corpor-um. 


D. Reg-I, 


Reg-ibus. 


D. Corpor-i, 


Corpor-ibua 


A. Reg-em, 


Reg-es. 


A. Corpus, 


Corpor-a. 


Y. Bex, 


Reg-es. 


Y. Corpus, 


Corpor-a. 


A. Reg-e, 


Reg-ibus. 


A. Corpor-e, 


Corpor-ibus 




GREEK 


NOUNS. 




Pericles (a marts name). 


Heros, a hero. 






Singular. 


Plural. 


1ST. Perfcl 


-es. 


K Hero-s, 


Hero-es. 


G. Perfcl 


-is. 


G-. Hero-is, 


Hero-um. 


D. Pericl 


■L 


D. Hero-I, 


Hero-ibus. 


A. Perfcl 


-em (ea). 


A. Hero-em 


(a), Hero-es (as). 


Y. Pericl-es (e). 


Y. Hero-s, 


Hero-es. 


A. Perfcl-e. 


A. Hero-e, 


Hero-ibus. 



576. Fourth Declension. 

1. Characteristic us, 

2. Nominative endings : us and u, 

3. Grammatical Gender: w, neuter; us, masculine ; except 

Acus, a needle ; doinus, a house ; mdnus, a hand ; idus y the ides 
porticus, a gallery ; tribus, a tribe ; which are ferninine. 

4. Masculine and feminine case-endings. 

Nom. Gen. Dat. Accus. Voc. Abl. 

Sing, us, us, ui, iim, us, Q. 

Plur. Gs, uiim, ibus (iibus*), us, us, ibus(ubus*), 

5. Neuter case-endings. 

Nom; Gen. Dat. Accus. Voc. Abl. 

Sing, ti, us, u, u, % u. 

Plur. ua, uiim, ibus (ubiis*), ua, ua, ibus (ubus*}. 



* This ending is used only in a few words. 



577, 578.] 



P A.KADIGMS — NOUNS. 



233 



6. 


Paradigms. 










Fructus, m 


., fruit 




Cornu, 72., a horn. 




(root, fruct.) 




(root, com.) 




Singular. 


Plural. 




Singular. . Plural. 


N. 


Fruct-us, 


Fruct-us. 


K 


Corn-u, Com-a&. 


G. 


Fruct-us, 


Fruct-uum. 


G. 


Corn-us, Corn-uum. 


D. 


Fruct-ui, 


Fruct-ibus. 


D 


Corn-u, Corn-ibtis. 


A, 


Fruct-um, 


Fruct-us. 


A. 


Corn-u, Corn-ua. 


y. 


Fruct-us, 


Fruct-us. 


Y. 


Corn-u, Corn-ua. 


A. 


Fruct-u, 


Fruct-ibus. 


A. 


Corn-u, Corn-ibtis. 



577. Fifth Declension. 

1. Characteristic ei.* 

2. Nominative ending : es. 

3. Grammatical gender feminine, except dies, a day (m. and/ in 
singular, and m. in plural), and meridies, mid-day (masc). 

4. Case-endings. 

Dat. Accus. Voc. Abl. 

el,* em, es, e. 
ebus, es, es, ebiis. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Nom. 
es, 



Gen. 
ei,* 
erum, 

5. Paradigms. 

Res, /., a thing. 

(root, r.) 
Singular. 
N". R-es, 



G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 
A. 



R-ei, 

R-ei, 

R-em, 

R-es, 

R-e, 



Plural. 
R-es. 
R-erum. 
R-ebus. 
R-es. 
R-es. 
R-ebiis. 



Dies, m. and/., a day. 
(root, di.) 



G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 
A. 



Singular. 
Di-es, 
Di-ei, 
Di-ei, 
Di-em, 
Di-es, 
Di-e, 



Plural. 

Di-es. 

Di-erum. 

Di-ebus. 

Di-es. 

Di-es. 

Di-ebus. 



578. Case-endings of Substantives. 





Dec. I. 


N. 


F. 

V 

a. 


G. 


ae. 


D. 


ae. 


A. 


am. 


V. 


a. 


A. 


a. 



Dec. II. 

M. N. 

us, er,ir, urn. 
I. 
5. 

rim . 

e, er, ir, urn. 
6. 



SINGULAR. 
Dec. in. 

M.SrF. N. 

various, 
is. 
I. 

em (im), like nom. 
like nom. 
e (I). 





Dec. 


IV. 




Dec. V. 


M. 






N. 


F. 


US. 






u. 


es. 


tis. 








ei.* 


Ul. 






u. 


eL* 


urn, 






u. 


em. 


tis. 






u. 


es. 


u. 








e. 



* In the ending of the gen. and dat. sing, e is long, except in spei 
(where it is short), Jidei, and r ei (where it is common). 



234 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[579. 





Dec. I. 


Dee. 


II. 




F. 


M. 


A T . 


N. 


ae. 


I. 


a. 


G. 


arum. 


orum. 




D. 


is. 


is. 




A. 


as. 


OS. 


a. 


V. 


ae. 


T. 


a. 


A. 


is. 


is. 





PLURAL. 
Dec. III. 

M. $F. N. 

es. a or ia. 

urn (iiiin). 

lbus. 

es, a or ia. 

es. a or ia. 

lbus. 



Dec. IV. Dec. V 

M. N. F. 

us. ua, es. 

uiim. erurn, 

lbus (ubua). ebus. 

us. , ua. es. 

us. ua. es. 

lbus (ubus). ebus. 

Rem. — The above table presents the endings of all nouns in the Latin language, 
except a few derived from the Greek. 



579. Table of Genders. 
I. Natural Gender. 



Masculine. 
Names of males. 


Feminine. 
Names of females. 


Common. 

Names applicable to 

both, sexes. 


IX. Grammatical Gender, independent of nominative ending. 


Masculine. 

Most names of rivers, 

■winds, and months. 


Feminine. 
Most names of coun- 
tries, towns, islands, 
and trees. 


Neuter. 
Indeclinable nouns, and 
clauses used as nouns. 


III. Grammatical Gender, as determined by nominative ending. 


Dec. I. 


Masculine. 
as, es. 


Feminine. 
a, e. 


Neuter. 


Dec. II. | er, us, os* | | um, on. 


Dec. III. 


er, or, os, es, in- 
creasing in gen., 
o except do, go, 
and io. 


do, go, io, as, is, ys, 
aus, s impure, x, 
es not increasing 
in gen. 


a, e, i, y, c, 1, n, t, 
ar, ur, us. 


Dec. IV. | us. u, 


Dec. V. 




i 


es. 




i 



Principal Exceptions.^ 



SECOND DECLENSION. 

Alvus domus, humus, and vannus, 2x& feminine; pelagiis and virus, 
neuter ; valgus, generally neuter, sometimes masculine. 



* Nouns in ir have natural gender. 

f This list of exceptions contains some whose gender is not gramma- 
tical. They are given here for convenience of reference. 



580.] GENDEKS, 235. 

THIRD DECLENSION. 

1) Masculines. 

(do and go.) Cardo, comedo, harpago, ordo, tinedo, ligo, ccxd iniargo 

(the last sometimes fern.), 
(as,) As and Greek nouns in as (gen. antis). 
(is.) Amnis, anguis, axis, cassis, cmis (or /.), collis, crinis, ensis, 

fascis, finis (or f.), follis, funis, ignis, lapis, mensis, orbis, panis, 

piscis, postis, pulvis, sanguis, torris, unguis, vectis, and vermis. 
(s impure.) Adeps, dens, fons, forceps (or/.), mons, pons, quadrans, 

and rudens. 
(x.) Calix, codex, cortex, grex, pollex, thorax, and vertex. 
(Ifr Sal and sol. 

(n.) Lien, pecten, ren, and many words of Greek origin. 
(ur.) Furfur, turtur, and vultur. 
(us.) Lepiis and miis. 

2) Feminines. 

(or and os.) Arbor, cos, and dos. 

(es increasing.) Compes, merces, merges, quigs, requies, seges, and 

-teges. 
(o.) Caro, echo, and Argo. 

(us) Grus (m.), incus, juventus, palus, peciis (tidis), salus, senectus, 
servittis, sus (m.), tellus, and virtus. 

8) Neuters. 

(er.) Cadaver, iter, tuber, uber, ver, verber, and names of plants in er. 
(or.) A dor, aequor, cor, and marmor. 
(as and es.) Fas, nefas, vas, and aes. 

(os.) Os (oris), 6s (ossis), and the Greek words, chaos, epos, ethfo, 
and melos. 

FOURTH DECLENSION. 

Acus, idiis, manus, porticus, and tribus, are feminine. 

FIFTH DECLENSION. 

Dies and meridies are masculine, though the former is sometimes 

fern, in sing. 

580. Adjectives. — First and second Declension. 
I. Case-endings of adjectives of the first and second declension. 



236 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[531 



N". 
G. 
D. 
A. 

y. 

A. 





Singular. 






Plural. 


A few! have Sing. 


thui 


M. F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


JV. 


M. 


F 


N 


2 


.* 1. 


2. 


2. 


1. 


2. 








us, 


er,f a, 


um. 


i, ^ 


ae, 


a. 


us, er, 


a, 


un\ 


1, 


ae, 


I. 


orum, 


arum, orum. 


lus, 


lus, 


lus. 


o, 


ae, 


0. 


Is, 


is, 


Is. 


i, 


1, 


L 


um, 


am, 


um. 


OS, 


as, 


a. 


um, 


am, 


um. 


e, er,f 


um. 


i, 


ae, 


a. 


e, er, 


a, 


um. 


o, 


a, 


6. 


is, 


Is, 


is. 


o, 


a, 


6. 


2. Paradigms. 






















Bonus, good. 










Singular. 






Plural. 






N. 


Bon-us, 


a, 


um; 




Bon-I, 


ae, 


a. 




G-. 


Bon-I, 


ae, 


i; 




Bon-oriim, arum, 


orum. 


D. 


Bon-o, 


ae, 


o; 




Bon-Is, 


is, 


Is. 




A. 


Bon-urn, 


am, 


iim; 




Bon-os, 


as, 


a. 




y. 


Bon-e, 


a, 


um; 




Bon-I, 


ae, 


a. 




A. 


Bon-o, 


a, 


6; 




Bon-Is, 


Is, 


Is. 






Tener. 


tender : root, tener (e not 


dropped). 








Singular. 






Plural. 






K 


Tener, 


a, 


um; 




Tener-I, 


ae, 


a. 




G. 


Tener-i, 


ae, 


i; 




Tener-ormn, arum, 


orum. 


D. 


Tener-o, 


ae, 


o; 




Tener-Is, 


is, 


Is. 




A. 


Tener-um, 


am, 


um; 




Tener-os, 


as, 


a. 




y. 


Tener, 


a, 


um; 




Tener-I, 


ae, 


a. 




A. 


Tener-o, 


a, 


o; 




Tener-Is, 


Is, 


Is. 





Rem. 1.— Most adjectives in er drop e before r of the root in all genders. 

Rem. 2.— The following adjectives have the genitive singular in lus (the i is gene- 
rally short in alterius), and the dative singular in i in all genders, viz. : alius, 
another; nulltis, no one ; solus, alone ; tutus, the whole ; ullus, any; units, one; 
after, the other ; neuter, neither ; and titer, which (of the two). 

581. Adjectives of the Third Declension. 

1. Adjectives of the third declension may be divided into three 
classes, viz. : 



* The declensions of the different genders are here indicated by nu- 
merals. 

•)• In adjectives in er, the masc. nom. sing, is generally the root (e is 
sometimes dropped): er, therefore, is not properly a case-ending; it is 
given merely to show the termination of the nom. and voc, sing., without 
regard to the root (107). 

% See list, 113, Rem. 



581.] 



PARADIGMS — ADJ ECTIVES. 



237 



1) Those which have three different forms in the nominative 
singular (one for each gender). 

2) Those which have two (the masc. and fern, being the same). 

3) Those which have but one (the same for all genders). 

2. Adjectives of the third declension are declined in their several 
genders like nouns of the same declension, gender, and ending. It 
must, however, be observed, 

1) That those which have only one form in the nominative 
singular have the abl. sing, in e or I, and the rest, with 
the exception of comparatives, in I only. 

2) That all except comparatives have, in the plural, the nom^ 
ace., and voc. neuter in ia, and the genitive in ium. 

3. Paradigms. 

Class I. 

Acer, sharp. 



G. 
D. 
A. 
Y. 
A. 



M. 

Acer, 

Acr-is, 

Acr-i, 

Acr-em, 

Acer, 

Acr-i, 



Singular. 
F. 

acr-is, 
acr-is, 
acr-i, 
acr-em, 
acr-is, 
acr-i, 



N. 

acr-e. 

acr-is. 

acr-i. 

acr-e. 

acr-e. 

acr-i. 



Plural. 
M. F. N. 

N". Acr-es, acr-es, acr-ia. 

G-. Acr-ium, acr-ium, acr-ium, 

D. Aer-ibiis, acr-ibus, acr-ibus. 

A. Acr-es, acr-es, acr-ia. 

Y. Acr-es, acr-es, acr-ia. 

A. Acr-ibus, acr-ibus, acr-ibus. 



Singular. 
M. $ F. 

N. Trist-is, 
G. Trist-is, 
D. Trist-i, 
A. Trist-em, 
Y. Trist-is, 
A. Trist-i, 



Class II. 
1. Tristis, sad. 



N. 


M. $ F. 


trist-e. 


N. Trist-es, 


trist-is. 


G. Trist-iiun, 


trist-L 


D. Trist-ibiis, 


trist-e. 


A. Trist-es, 


trist-e. 


Y. Trist-es, 


trist-L 


A. Trist-ibiis, 



Plural. 



2. Tristior (comparative), more sad. 



N. Tristior, 
G Tiistior-is, 
D. Tristior-i, 
A. Tristior-em, 
Y. Tristior, 



tristius. 

tristior-is. 

tristior-i. 

tristius. 

tristiiis. 



A.. Tiistior-e (i), tristior-e (i). 



N". Tristior-es, 
G. Tristior-um, 
D. Tristior-ibus, 
A. Tristior-es, 
Y. Tristior-es, 
A. Tristior-ibus, 



N. 
trist-ia. 
ti'ist-ium. 
trist-ibiis. 
trist-ia. 
trist-ia. 
trist-ibiis. 



tristior-a. 
tristior- iim. 
tristior-ibiis. 
tristior-a. 
tristior-a. 
tristior -ibus 



238 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[582, 583. 





Class III. 






Felix, 


happy. 




Singular. 




Plural. 


M. $ F. N. 




M. $ F, 


N. 


K Felix, felix. 




IS. Fellc-es, 


felic-ia. 


G. Felic-is, fehc-is. 




G-. Felic-ium, 


felic-ium. 


D. Felic-I, felic-i. 




D. Felic-ibus. 


felic-ibus, 


A. Fehc-em, felix. 




A. Felic-es, 


felic-ia. 


V. Felix, felix. 




V. Felic-es, 


felic-ia. 


A. Felic-e (I), felic-e ( 


0- 


A. Felic-ibus, 


felic-ibus 



582. Comparison of Adjectives. 

In Latin, adjectives are compared by adding to the root of the 
positive the following endings: 

Comparative. 
M. F. 

ior, ior, 

Examples. 



Altus {high), 
Mitis (mild), 



N. 
ius. 

Boot. 

alt. 

mit. 



M. 

issinms, 
Comparative. 



Superlative. 
F. 



issima, 



N. 
issimuni. 



Superlative. 



altior (ior, ius), altissimus (a, inn), 
mitior (ior, ius), mitissmms (a, um). 

Rem. 1. — Adjectives in er add rlmus (a, iim) to the positive, to form the superla- 
tive ; e. g., 

Pulcher, pulchrior, pulcherrimus. 

Rem. 2.— A few adjectives in lis form the superlative by adding limits to the root 
of the positive; e. g., 

Facilis (easy). facilior, f acillimus. 

Difficilis (difficult), difficilior, difficillimus. 

STmilTs (like), similior, simillimiis. 

Dissimilis (unlike), dissimilior, dissimillimus. 

Rem. 3.— The following adjectives are quite irregular in their comparison, viz.: 
Bonus (good), melior, optlmiis. 

Maliis (bad), pejor, pessimiis. 

Magnus (great), major, maximus. 

Parvus (little), minor, minimus, 

Multfis (much), pins (pi. plures, plura), plurimus. 



Cardinals. 
Unus, one. 
Duo. 
Tres. 



583, Numerals* 



Ordinals. 
Primus, first 
Secuudiis. 
Tertius. 



Distributives. 
Singuli, one by one. 

Bun. 

Term. 



Adverbs. 
Semel, once. 
Bis. 
Ter. 



* See Numerals, p. 145. 



584. 585.J PARADIGMS — PRONOUNS. 



2S9 



4 


Quatuor. 


6 
6 


Quinque. 
Sex. 


1 

8 


Septero. 
Octo. 


9 


Novem, 


10 


Decern. 



Quartus. 

Quintiis. 

Sextus. 

Septimus. 

Octavus. 

Noniis. 

Decimiis. 



Quaterni. 

Quini. * 

Seni. 

Septem. 

Octoni. 

Novem. 

Deni. 



584. Substantive Pronouns. 



N. 

G. 

D. 
A. 
V. 
A. 

K 
G. 

D. 

A. 
V. 

A. 



1st Person. 
Ego, 1. 

Mei, of me. 

MM, to ox for me. 
Me, me. 

Me, with, &c, me. 



Nos we. 

Nostrum, ) , 
or Nostri, ) * 
Nobis, to us. 
Nos, us. 



us. 



Nobis, with us. 



SINGULAR. 
2d Person. 
Tti, thou. 

Tui, of thee. 

Tibi, to or for thee. 
Te, thee. 
Tu, thou. 
T%, with thee. 

PLURAL. 

Vos, ye or you, 
Vestrum ) , 

or Vestri, ) J ^ 
Vobis, to you. 
Vos, you. 
Vos, ye or you. 
Vobis, with you. 



Quater. 

Quinquies. 

Sexies. 

Septies. 

Octies. 

Novies. 

Decies. 



3d Person. 



Sui, of himself her- 
self, itself 
Sibi, to himself <fcc. 
Se, himself 

Se, with himself 



Sui, of themselves. 

Sib!, to themselves. 
Se, themselves. 

Se, with themselves. 



585. Adjective Pronouns, 

I. The Possessive Pronouns (so called because they denote pos- 
session), mens, mea, meum ; tuus, lud, tuum; suits, sua, suum ; 
noster, nostra, nostrum ; vester, vestrd, vestrum, are declined, as we 
have already seen (114, Rem. 3), like adjectives of the first and 
second declension. 

II. Demonstrative Pronouns (so called because they point out or 
specify the objects to which they refer), are hie, ille, iste, is, and 
their compounds, and are declined as follows : 

1. Hie, this. 





Singular. 






Plural. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


N. Hie, 


haec, 


hoc. 


BS, 


hae, 


haec. 


G. Hujus, 


' hujiis, 


hujiis. 


Horum, 


hariim, 


horum. 


D. Hulc, 


hulc, 


hmc. 


His, 


his, 


his. 


A. Huiu,, 


hanc, 


hoc. 


Hos, 


ha&, 


haec. 


V. 












A. Hoc, 


hac, 


hoc. 


His, 


to, 


Ms. 



240 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



f585. 







2. Ille, he or that. 








Singular. 






Plural. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


N. Die, 


ilia, 


him. 


Eli, 


lllae, 


ilia. 


G. IlMs, 


illius, 


illius. 


niorum, 


illarum, 


illorurtL 


d. mi, 


illi, 


illl 


ILlis, 


ilils, 


Ulis. 


A. Ilium, 


illam, 


illtid. 


nios, 


iUas, 


ma. 


Y. 












A. Hlo, 


ilia, 


illo. 


mis, 


illis, 


illis. 



3. Iste, that. 

Iste, that, is declined like ille. It usually refers to objects which are 
present to the person addressed, and sometimes expresses contempt. 



4. Is, he or that. 

(Less specific than ille.) 





Singular. 






Plural. 




M. 


F. 


jsr. 


M 


F. 


N. 


M. Is, 


ea, 


id. 


E, 


eae, 


ea. 


G. Ejus, 


ejus, 


ejus. 


Eorum, 


ear urn, 


eorum. 


D. El, 


ei, 


ei. 


lis or els, 


lis or eis, 


iis or eis. 


A. Eum, 


earn, 


id. 


Eos, 


eas, 


ea. 


Y. 












A. Eo, 


ea, 


eo. 


lis or eis, 


iis or eis, 


iis or eis. 



M. 

N Idem, 

G. Ejusdem, ejusdem, 

D. Eidein, eidem, 

A. Eundem, eandem, 
Y. 

A. Eodem, eadem, 



5. Idem, the same. 

(Formed by annexing dem to is.) 

Singular. 
F. N. 

eadem, idem. 

ejusdem. 

eidem. 

idem. 



eodem. 



Plural. 

M. F. N. 

Iidem, eaedem, eadem. 

Eorundem, earundem, eorundem. 

Eisdem, or eisdem, or eisdem, or 

Iisdem, iisdem, , iisdem. 

Eosdem, easdem, eadem. 



Eisdem, or eisdem, or eisdem, or 
Iisdem, iisdem. iisdem. 



III. The Intensive Pronoun, ipse, himself, is so called because 
it is used to render an object emphatic. It is declined as follows : 



586.] 

M. 

N. Ipse, 

G. Ipsius, 

D. Ipsi, 

A. Ipsum, 

V. 

4, Ipso, 



PARADIGMS — VERBS. 



Singular. 
F. 

ipsa, 
ipsius, 
ipsi, 
ipsam, 

ipsa, 



.AT. 

ipsum. 

ipsius. 

ipsi. 

ipsum. 

ipso. 



M. 
Ipsi, 

Ipsorum, 
Ipsis, 
Ipsos, 

Ipsis, 



Pluial. 

F. 

ipsae, 
ipsarum, 
ipsis, 
ipsas, 

ipsis, 



241 

N. 

ipsa, 
ipsorum. 
ipsis. 
ipsa. 

ipsis. 



IV. The Relative Pronoun, qui, who, is so called because it 
always relates to some noun or pronoun, expressed or understood 3 
jailed its antecedent. It is declined as follows : 



M. 

N. Qui, 

G. Cujus, 

D. Cui, 

A. Quern, 

V. 

A. Quo, 



Singular. 
F. 

quae, 
cujus, 
cui, 
quam, 

qua, 



N. 

quod, 
cujus. 
cui. 
quod. 

quo. 



M. 

Qui, 

Quorum, 
Quibus, 
Quos, 



Plural. 
F. 
quae, 
quariim, 
quibiis, 
quas, 



AT. 

quae, 
quorum, 
quibiis. 
quae. 



Quibus, quibiis, quibus. 



V. The Interrogative Pronouns, quis and qui, are so called be- 
cause they are used in asking questions. Qui (which ? what ?) is 
used adjectively, and is declined like the relative. Quis (who? 
which 1 what ?) is generally used substantively, and is declined like 
the relative, except in the forms quis, nom. masc, and quid, nom. 
and ace. neut. 

VI. Indefinite Pronouns are so called because they do not de- 
finitely specify the objects to which they refer ; e. g., qulddm, a 
certain one ; aliquis, some one ; quisque, every one ; siquis, if any, 
&c. They are compounds either of quis or qui, and are declined 
in nearly the same manner as the simple pronouns. 

Rem. — The compounds of quis generally take quid in the neut. sing, when used 
substantively, and quod when used adjectively. Some of those compounds, as 
aUquis, slquis, take qua {not quae) in the fern. sing, and neut. plur. 

586. Paradigm of the verb Esse. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present (am). 



Singular. 
Siim, / am. 
Es, thou art 
Est, he is. 

li 



Plural. 
Sumiis, we are. 
Estis, you are. 
Sunt, they are. 



242 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[586. 



Si] 

Eram, I was. 
Eras, thou wast. 
Erat, he was. 

Ero, I shall be. 
Eris, thou wilt be. 
Erit, he will be. 



Fui, / have been. 
Fuisti, thou hast been. 



Fuit, he has been. 



Imperfect (was). 

Plural. 

Eramiis, ive were. 
Eratis, you were. 
Erant, they were. 

Future (shall or will be). 

Erimus, we shall be. 
Eritis, you will be. 
Erunt, they will be. 

Perfect (have been or was). 

Fuimus, we have been. 
Fuistis, you have been. 

' t they have been. 
Pluperfect (had been). 



Fueram, / had been. 
Fueras, thou hadst been. 
Fuerat, he had been. 



Fueramus, we had been. 
Fueratis, you had been. 
Fuerant, they had been. 



Future Perfect (shall or will have been). 



Fuero, / shall have been. 
Fueris, thou wilt have been. 
Fuerit, he will have been. 



Sim, / may be. 
Sis, thou mayest be. 
Sit, he may be. 



Fueiimiis, we shall have been. 
Fueiitis, you will have been. 
Fuerint, they will have been. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present (may or can be). 

Simus, we may be. 

Sitis, you may be. 

Sint, they may be. 



Imperfect (might, could, would, or should be). 



Essern, 1 might be. 
Esses, thou mightest be. 
Esset, he might be. 



Essemtis, we might be. 
Essetis, you might be. 
Essent, they might be. 



Perfect (may have been). 



Fuerim, I may have been. 
Fueris, thcu mayest have been. 
Fuerit, he may have been. 



Fuerimiis, we may have been. 
Fueritis, you may have been. 
Fuerint, they may have been. 



Pluperfect (might, could, would, or should have been). 



Fuissem, I might have been. 
Fuisses, thou mightest have been. 
Fuiss&t, he might have been. 



Fmssemus, we might have been 
Fuissetis, you might have been. 
Fuissent, they might have been. 



587, 588.] 



PARADIGMS. 



243 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Singular. 
Es, or esto, be thou. 
Esto, let him be. 



Plural. 
Este or estote, be ye. 
Sunto, let them be. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present, Esse, to be. 

Perfect, Fuisse, to have been. 

Future, Fiiturus (a, iim) esse, to be about to be 



Future, 



PARTICIPLE. 

Futurus, a, iim, about to be. 



2. 


3. 


4. 


ere, 


ere, 


Ire. 


2. 


3. 


4. 


e, 


e (ft 


L 



587. Regular Verbs.— Four Conjugations. 

1. Infinitive endings. 

1. 
are, 

2. Favorite vowels. 

1. 
a, 

588. First Conjugation (Inf. ending are). 

1. Regular endings of the 2d and 3d roots. 

2. 3. 

av, at. 

2. Paradigm. 

Amare, to love: 1st root, am; 2d, amav; 3d, dmdt. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

Passive, I am loved. 



Singular, 
Am-6, 
Am-as, 
Am-at ; 



Active, Hove. 

Plural 
Am-amus, 
Am-atis, 
Ani-ant. 



Singular. 
Am-or, 
Am-aris (re), 
Am-atur ; 



Plural, 
Am-amiir, 
Am-aminl, 
Am-antiir. 



Imperfect, was loving ; was loved. 



Am-abam, 
Am-abas, 
Am-abat ; 



Am-abamus, 

Am-abatis, 

Am-abant. 



Am-abar, Am-abamiir, 

Am-abaris (re), Am-abamini, 
Am-abatiir ; Am-abantui* 



244 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[588 



Future, will love ; will be loved. 



Singular. 
Am-abo, 
Am-abis, 
Am-abit ; 



Plural. 
Am-abuniis, 
Am-abitis, 
Am-abunt. 



Singular. 
Am-abor, 
Am-aberis (re), 
Am-abitur ; 



Plural. 
Ain-abimur, 
Am-abTmirn, 
Am-abuntiir. 



Perfect, have loved; have been loved. 



Amav-i, 
Amav-isti, 
Amav-it ; 



Amav-eram, 
Amav-eras, 
Amav-erat ; 



Amat-iis sum,* Amat-I sumus, 
Amat-iis es. Amat-I estis, 

Amat-iis est ; Amat-I sunt. 

Pluperfect, had loved; had been loved. 

Amat-iis eram,* Amat-I eramiis, 
Amat-iis eras, Amat-I eratis, 
Amat-iis erat ; Amat-i erant. 

Future Perfect, will have loved ; will have been loved. 



Amay-imus, 
Amav-istis, 
Amav-erunt (ere] 



Amay-eramiis, 

Amav-eratis, 

Amay-erant. 



Amav-ero, 
Amav-eris, 
Amav-erit ; 



A.mav-erimiis, 

Amav-eritis, 

Amay-erint. 



Amat-iis er6,* 
Amat-iis ens, 
Amat-iis erit : 



Amat-I erimus, 
Amat-I eritis, 
Amat-i erunt. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present, may love; may b-e loved. 



Am-em, 


Am-emus, 


Am-er, Am-emur 


Am-es, 


Am-etis, 


Am-eris (re), Am-emim, 


Am-et; 


Am-ent. 


Am-etur ; Am-entur. 




Imperfect, might love ; might be loved. 


Am-arem, 


Am-aremiis, 


Am-arer, Am-aremur, 


Am~ares, 


Am-aretis, 


Am-areris (re), Am-aremini, 


Am-aret ; 


Am-arent. 


Am-aretiir ; Am-arentiir. 


Perfect, may have loved ; may have been loved. 


Amay-erim, 


Amay-eiimiis, 


Amat-iis sim,| Amat-I simiis, 


Amay-eris, 


Amay-eritis, 


Amat-iis sis, Amat-I sitis, 


A.may-erit ; 


Amay-erint. 


Amat-us sit ; Amat-I sint. 



Pluperfect, might have loved; might have been loved. 
A^may-issem, Amay-issemiis, Amat-iis essem,f Amat-I essemus. 



Amay-isses, 
Amay-isset ; 



Amay-issetis, 
Amay-issent. 



Amat-iis esses, 
Amat-us esset 



Amat-I essetis, 
Amat-i essent. 



* See 331, N. 



f See 332, N". 



589.] 



PARADIGMS. 



245 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Singular. 
Ain-a, or 
am-ato, 

Am-ato : 



Pres. 
Perf. 



Plural. 

Am-ate, or 

am-atote, 

Am-ant6. 



Singular. 
Am-are, 
or am-ator, 

Am-ator ; 



Plural 
Am-amini 
Am-antor 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Am-are. I Ain-arE. 

Amav-isse. \ Amat-iis essS. 



Fut. Arnat-urus esse. 



Amat-um iri. 



Pres. 
Fut. 



Am-ans. 
Amat-urus. 



PARTICIPLES. 

IPerf. 
Fut. 



Amat-us. 
Am-andus. 



GERUND. 

Am-andi, ando, andum, ando. 

SUPINES. 
Amat-um. Amat-u. 

589. Second Conjugation (Inf. ending ere). 
Regular endings of the 2d and 3d roots. 
2. 3. 

u (ev) * it 

Paradigm. 
Monere, to advise: 1st root, mbn; 2d, mbnu; 3d, mbniU 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 



Active, I advise. 
Singular. Plural. 
Mon-eo, Mon-emus, 
Mon-es, Mon-etis, 
M6n-et ; Mon-ent. 


Passive, / 
Singular. 
Mon-eor, 
Mon-eris (re), 
Mon-etiir ; 


am advised. 

Plural. 
Mon-emur, 
Mon-emTnT, 
Mon-entur. 


Mon-ebam, 
Mon-ebas, 
Mon-ebat ; 


Imperfect, was adi 
Mon-ebamiis, 
Mon-ebatTs, 
Mon-ebant. 


ising ; was advised, 
Mon-ebar, Mon-ebamur, 
Mon-ebaris (re), Mon-ebamim, 
Mon-ebatur ; Mon-ebantur 


Mon-ebo, 
Mon-ebis, 
Mon-ebit ; 


Future, shall advi 
Mon-ebimus, 
Mon-ebitis, 
Mon-ebunt. 


se ; shall be advised. 
Mon-ebor, M5n-ebimur, 
Mon-eberis (re), Mon-ebnnini, 
Mon-ebitur ; Mon-ebuntur. 




*Seel 


92, N. 





246 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[589. 



Perfect, have advised ; have been advised. 



Singular. 
Momi-i, 
Monu-isti, 
Monu-it ; 


Plural. 
Monu-imiis, 
Monu-istis, 
Monu-grunt (ere). 


Singular. 
Monit-us sum,* 
Monit-iis es, 
Monit-us est ; 


Plural. 
Monit-I siimus,^ 
Monit-I estis, 
Monit-I sunt 




Pluperfect, had adv 


'sed ; had been advised. 


Monu-eram, 
Monu-eras, 
Monu-erat ; 


Monu-eramus, 

Monu-eratis, 

Monu-erant. 


Monit-us eram,* 
Monit-us eras, 
Monit-us erat ; 


Monit-I eramiis, 
Monit-I eratis, 
Monit-I erant. 


Future 


Perfect, shall have advised; shall have been advised. 


Monu-er6, 
Monu-eris, 
Monu-erit ; 


Monu-erimiis, 

Monu-eritis, 

Monu-erint. 


Monit-us er6,* 
Monit-us eris, 
Monit-us erit ; 


Monit-i erimus, 
M6nit-i eritis, 
Monit-I erunt 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present, may advise ; may be advised. 



Mon-eam, 
Mon-eas, 
Mon-eat ; 



Mon-erem, 
Mon-eres, 
Mon-eret ; 



Mon-eamus, 

Mon-eatis, 

Mon-eant. 



Mon-ear, 
Mon-earis (re), 
Mon-eatur ; 



Mon-eamur, 
Mon-eamini, 
Mon-eantur. 



Imperfect, might advise ; might be advised. 



Mon-eremiis, 

Mon-eretis, 

Mon-erent 



Mon-erer, 
Mon-ereris (re), 
Mon-eretur ; 



Mon-eremur, 
Mon-eremini, 
Mon-erentur. 



Perfect, may have advised; may have been advised. 



Monu-erim 
Monu-eris, 
Monu-erit ; 



Monu-erimiis, 

Monu-eritis, 

Monu-erint 



Monit-us sim,f 
Monit-us sis, 
Monit-iis sit ; 



Monit-i simiis, 
M6nit-i sitis, 
Monit-I sint. 



Pluperfect, might have advised; might have been advised. 



Monu-issem, 
Monu-isses, 
Monu-isset ; 



Mon-e, 

or mon-eto, 
Mon-et5 ; 



Monu-issemiis, 

Monu-issetis, 

Monu-issent. 



Monit-iis essem.f Monit-i essemiiSj 
Monit-us esses, Monit-I essetis, 



Monit-us esset ; Monit-I esseot. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Mon-ete, 

or mon-etote, 
Mon-ento. 



Mon-erg, 

or mon-etor, 
Mon-etor ; 



Mon-emini, 



Mon-entor. 



* See 331 N. 



\ See 832, N. 



590/ 



PAKADIGMS. 



247 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Pees. Mon-ere. 




Mon-eri. 


Perf. Monu-isse. 




Monit-iis ess& 


Fut. Monit-Orus esse. 


/ 


Monit-iim iri, 


PARTICIPLES. 




Pres. Mon-ens. 


Morat-us. 


Fut Momt-urus. 


Mon-endus. 


GERUND. 




Mon-endi, endo, endum, 


endo. 


SUPINES. 




MoDit-um. 




Monit-u. 



590. Third Conjugation (Inf. ending ere). 

1. Regular endings of the 2d and 3d roots. 

2d, s, or like 1st; 3d, t, sometimes & 

2. Paradigm. 

Regere, to rule: 1st root, reg ; 2d, rex; 3d, recL 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 



Act, 


, I rule. 


Pass., J 


am ruled. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Reg-o, 


Regimus, 


Reg-6r, 


Reg-imur, 


Reg-is, 


Reg-itis, 


Reg-eris (re), 


Reg-imini, 


Reg-it ; 


Reg-unt. 


Reg-itur ; 


Reg-untur, 




Imperfect, was r 


uling ; was ruled 




Reg-ebam, 


Reg-ebamiis, 


Reg-ebar, 


Reg-ebamur, 


"Reg-ebas, 


Reg-ebatis, 


Reg-ebaris (re), 


Reg-ebaminl, 


Reg-ebat ; 


Reg-ebant. 


Reg-ebatur ; 


Reg-ebantur. 




Future, shall ru 


le ; shall be ruled. 




Reg-am, 


Reg-emus, 


Reg-ar, 


Reg-emiir, 


Reg-es, 


Reg-etis, 


Reg-eris (re), 


Reg-emim, 


Reg-et ; 


Reg-ent. 


Reg-etur ; 


Reg-entur 



248 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



[590 



Perfect, have ruled; have been ruled. 



Singular, 


Plural. 


Singular. Plural. 


Rex-I, 


Rex-imiis, 


Rect-iis sum,* Rect-I siimiis, 


Rex-isti, 


Rex-istis, 


Rect-iis es, Rect-I estis, 


Rex-it ; 


Rex-erunt (ere). 


Rect-us est ; Rect-I sunt. 




Pluperfect, had ruled; had been ruled. 


Rex-eram, 


Rex-eramiis, 


Rect-us eram,* Rect-I eraruus, 


Rex-eras, 


Rex-eratis, 


Rect-iis eras, Rect-I eratis, 


Rex-erat ; 


Rex-erant. 


Rect-us erat ; Rect-I erant 


Future Perfect, shall havt 


>, ruled; shall have been ruled. 


Rex-ero, 


Rex-erimiis, 


Rect-us er6,* Rect-I erimis, 


Rex-eris, 


Rex-eritis, 


Rect-us eris, Rect-I eritis, 


Rex-erit ; 


Rex-erint. 


Rect-us erit ; Rect-I erunt, 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present, may rule ; may be ruled. 



Reg-am, 


Reg-amiis, 


Reg-ar, 


Reg-aniur, 


Reg-as, 


Reg-atis, 


Reg-aris (re), 


Reg-amini, 


Reg-at ; 


Reg-ant. 


Reg-atur ; 


Reg-antur. 




Imperfect, might rule ; might be ruled. 


Reg-erem, 


Reg-eremiis, 


Reg-erer, 


Reg-eremiir, 


Reg-eres, 


Reg-eretis, 


Reg-ereris (re), 


Reg-erenrim 


Reg-eret ; 


Reg-erent. 


Reg-eretiir, 


Reg-erentur. 


Perfect, may have ruled ; may have been ruled. 


Rex-erim, 


Rex-erimus, 


Rect-iis sim,f 


Rect-I slmiis 


Rex-eris, 


Rex-eritis, 


Rect-us sis, 


Rect-I sltis, 


Rex-erit ; 


Rex-erint. 


Rect-iis sit ; 


Rect-I sint. 


Pluperfect, might have ruled; might have been ruled. 


Rex-issem, 


Rex-issemus, 


Rect-iis essem,f 


Rect-I essemSsj 


Rex-isses, 


Rex issetis, 


Rect-us esses, 


Rect-I essetis, 


Rex-isset ; 


Rex-issent. 


Rect-iis esset ; 


Rect-I essent. 




IMPERATIVE MOOD. 




Reg-e, 


Reg-ite, 


Reg-ere, 


Reg-imini, 


or reg-ito, 


or reg-itote, 


or reg-itor, 




Reg-it§; 


Reg-unto. 


Reg-itor ; 


Reg-untor. 




* See 331, K 


t See 332, K 





590.] 



PARADIGMS. 



249 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Pees. Reg-ere. Reg-L 

Peef Rex-isse. Rect-iis esse*. 

Fut, Rect-urtis esse. Rect-um iri. 



PARTICIPLES. 



Pees. Reg-ens. 
Fut. Rect-urus. 



Peef. Rect-iis. 
Fut. Rep-endus 



GERUND. 
Reg-endi, endo, endum, endo. 

SUPINES. 
Rect-um. Rect-u. 



3. Paradigm of verbs in i o of the third conjugation. 

Capere, to take: 1st root, cap; 2d, cep; 3d, capU 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

Passive, 



Singular. 
Cap-io, 
Cap-is, 
Cap-it ; 



Cap-iebam, 
Cap-iebas, 
Cap-iebat ; 

Cap-iam, 
Cap-ies, 
Cap-iet ; 



Cap-iam, 
Cap-ias, 
Cap-iSt • 



Active. 

Plural. 
Cap-imiis, 
Cap-itis, 
Cap-mnt. 



Singular. 
Cap-idr, 
Cap-eris (re), 
Cap-itur ; 



IMPERFECT. 



Cap-iebamiis, 

Cap-iebatis, 

Cap-iebant. 



Cap-iemus, 

Cap-ietis, 

Cap-ient. 



Plural. 
Cap-imur, 
Cap-TmYnT, 
Cap-iuntur. 



Cap-iebamiir, 



Cap-iebar, 

Cap-iebans (re), Cap-iebamini, 

Cap-iebatiir ; Cap-iebantur. 



FUTURE, 



Cap-iar, 
Cap-ieris (re), 
Cap-ietur; 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

Cap-iamiis, Cap-iar, 

Cap-iatis, Cap-iaris (re), 

Cap-iant. Cap-iatur ; 



Cap-iemiir, 
Cap-iemini, 
Cap-ientur. 



Cap-iamur, 
Cap-iamini, 
Cap-iantur. 



250 



FIKST LATIN BOOK. 



[591, 



IMPEEATIYE MOOD. 
8dPL. Cap-iunte. | 3d Pl. Cap-iuntor. 

PARTICIPLES, 
Pres. Cap-iens. Fut. Cap-iendiis. 

GERUND. 

Cap-iendi, do, &c. 
The otb er parts of verbs in i 6 are entirely regular. 



591. Fourth Conjugation (Inf. ending Ire), 

1. Regular endings of the 2d and 3d roots. 

2d, w ; 3d, it. 

2. Paradigm. 

Audire, to hear: 1st root, aud; 2d, auMv ; 3d, audit 





INDICATIVE MOOD. 




Present. 


Act 
Singular. 
Aud-i6, 
Aud-is, 
Aud-it ; 


., I hear. 
Plural. 
Aud-imus, 
Aud-itis, 
Aud-iunt. 


Pass., / am heard. 
Singular. Plural. 
Aud-ior, Aud-imur, 
Aud-iris (re), Aud-imini, 
Aud-itur ; Aud-iuntur. 




Imperfect, was hearing ; was heard^ 


Aud-iebam, 
Aud-iebas, 
Aud-iebat ; 


Aud-iebamiis, 

Aud-iebatis, 

Aud-iebant. 


Aud-iebar, Aud-iebamur, 
Aud-iebaris (re), Aud-iebaminT, 
Aud-iebatur ; Aud-iebantur 




Future, shall hear ; shall be heard. 


Aud-iam, 
Aud-ies, 
Aud-iet ; 


Aud-iemus, 

Aud-ietis, 

Aud-ient. 


Aud-iar, Aud-iemur, 
Aud-ieris (re), Aud-iemini, 
A iid-ietur ; Aud-ientur. 




Perfect, have heard; have been heard. 


Audiv-i, 
Audiv-isti, 
Audiv-it ; 


Audiv-imus, 

Audiv-istis, 

Audiv-erunt(ere). 


Audit-us sum * Audit-i siimus, 
Audit-iis es, Audit-i estis, 
Audit-iis est ; Audit-i sunt 




* See 


331, N. 



591.] 



PARADIGMS. 



251 



Pluperfect, had heard; had been heard. 



Audiv-eram, 
Audiv-eras, 
Audiv-erat ; 



Audiv-eramiis, 

Audiv-eratis, 

Audiv-erant 



Audit-iis eram,* Audit-i ei-amus, 
Audit-iis eras, Audit-i eratis, 
Audit-iis erat ; Audit-i erant 



Future Perfect, shall have heard; shall have been heard. 



Audiv-ero, 
Audiv-eris, 
Audiv-erit: 



Aud-iam, 
Aud-ias, 
Aud-iat ; 



Aud-irem, 
Aud-ires, 
Aud-iret : 



Audiv-erim, 

Audiv-eris, 

Audiv-erit; 



Audiv-erimiis, 

Audiv-eritis, 

Audiv-erint. 



Audlt-us ero,* 
Audit-tis eris, 
Audit-iis erit ; 



Audit-i erimiis, 
Audit-i eritis, 
Audit-i erunt. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present, may hear ; may be heard. 



Aud-iamus, 

Aud-iatis, 

Aud-iant. 



Aud-iar, 
Aud-iaris (re),, 
Aud-iatur ; 



Atd-iamur, 
Aud-iamini, 
Aud-iantiir. 



Imperfect, might hear; might be heard. 



Aud-iremus, 

Aud-iretis, 

Aud-irent. 



Aud-irer, 
Aud-ireris (re), 
Aud-ire tiir ; 



Aud-iremiir, 
Aud-iremini, 
Aud-irentiir. 



Perfect, may have heard; may have been heard. 

Audit-us sim,f Audit-i simus, 
Audit-iis sis, Audit-i sitis, 

Audit-iis sit; Audit-i sint. 



Audiv-erimiis, 

Audiv-eritis, 

Audiv-erint. 



Pluperfect, might have heard; might have been heard. 



Audiv-issem, 
Audiv-issgs, 
Audiv-isset ; 



Aud-i, 

or aud-ito, 
Aud-ito ; 



Audlv-issemiis, 

Audiv-issetis, 

Audiv-issent. 



Audit-iis essem,f Audit-i essemiia 
Audit-us esses, Audit-i essetis, 
Audit-us esset ; Audit-i essent 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Aud-ite, Aud-ire, Aud-imini, 

or aud-itote, or aud-itor, 

Aud-iunto. Aud-itor ; Aud-iuntor. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Pres. Aud-ire. 
Perf. Audiv-isse. 
Fut. Audit-urus esse. 



Aud-iri. 
Audit-iis esse. 
Audit-um in. 



* See 331, N. 



f See 332, N 



252 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



[592—594 



PARTICIPLES. 
Piles. Aud-iens. Peef. Audit-us. 

Put. Audlt-unis. Fut. Aud-iendus. 

GERUND. 
Aud-iendi, iendo, iendum, ienda 

SUPINES. 
Audit-urn. I Audit-u. 



Conj. I. 



av. 



592. Formation of Second Boot - 

I Conj. II. I Conj. in. [ Conj. IV. . 



Conj. II. | Conj. in. 

REGULAR. 

u or ev. | s or like I et root. 

FIRST IRREGULARITY. 



1Y 



Radical vowel 
lengthened. 



Reduplication. 

Analogy of 2d 
conj. 



radical vowel 
lengthened. 



radical vowel 
lengthened (and 
often changed). 



radical vowel 
lengthened. 



SECOND IRREGULARITY. 

reduplication. reduplication. 

THIRD IRREGULARITY. 

analogy of 3d I analogy of 2d or | analogy of 2d or 
conj. 4th conj. 3d conj. 



, 593. Deponent Verbs. 

Deponent verbs are such as have a passive form, but an active 
meaning. They take, however, all the four participles ; e. g., 

1) Loquens, speaking; 2) locutus, having spoken; 3) locft- 

turus, about to speak ; 4) loquendiis, to be spoken. 

Rem.— The past participle of a deponent verb is the participle of the perfect active* 
which other verbs do not have. 

Irregular Verbs. 
594. Paradigm of Posse,* to be able. 

2d root, potu. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres. Possum, potes, potest, possiimus, potestis, possunt. 
Imp. poteram; Fut. potero; Per/, potu-i; Pluperf. potu-eram ; Put Perf 
potu-ero. 



* For the conjugation of the simple verb, esse, see 586. 



595.] 



PARADIGMS. 



253 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres. possim ; Imp. possem ; Per/, potu-erim ; Pluperf. potu-issem. 

INFINITIVE. 

Prcs. posse ; Per/, potu-isse. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Potens (used as an adjective, powerful), 

62$. Paradigms of Telle (to be willing) and its compounds. 

Velle. j Nolle. Malle. 

2d root, volw. 2d root, nolu. 2d root malu, 

INDICATIVE. 





PRESENT. 




Volg, 

Vis, 

Vult; 

Volfimu^ 

Vultis, 

Volunt. 


NolS, 

Fonvis, 

Nonvult ; 

Kolumus, 

ISTonvultis, 

Nolunt. 

IMPERFECT. 


Malg, 

Mavis, 

Mavult ; 

Malunms, 

Mavultis, 

Malunt 


Vol-ebam, bas, <H 


Nol-ebam, bas, &c. 

FUTURE. 


Mal-ebam, bas, &c 


Vol-am. 


tfdl-am. 

PERFECT. 


Mal-am. 


Volu-L 


N6lu-L 
PLUPERFECT. 


Malu-L 


Volu-eram. 


Nolu-eram. 
FUTURE PERFECT. 


Malu-eram. 


Vclu-erg. 


Nolu-ero. 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 


Malu-er& 


Vel-im, is, &c. 


Nol-im, is, <fec. \ 

IMPERFECT. 


Mal-im, is, &* 


Vell-em, es, <fec. | 


Noll-em. ! 

PERFECT. 


Mali-em, 


Volu-erim. 


Nolu-erim. 

PLUPERFECT, 


Malu-erim. 


Volu-issem. 


Nolu-issem. 


Malu-ise^P 1 



254 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [596, 

IMPERATIVE. 

INol-I or Ito. 
Nol-Ite or Itote. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres. Velle. I NollS. I Malle. 

Perf. Volu-isse. Nolu-isse, Malu-isse'. 

PARTICIPLES, 
Volens. Nolens. | 

196. Paradigm of Ferre, to bear. 

2d root, tut ; 3d, laL 
INDICATIVE. 

PEE SENT. 

Active, 
Fer-o, fer-s, fer-t, fer-imiis, fer-tis, 



fer-unt. 



Passive. 
Fer-or, fer-ris, fer-tur, fer-imur, 
fer-imini, fer-untur. 



IMPEEFECT. 

Fer-ebam, bas, (fee. Fer-ebar, bans, (fee. 

FUTUEE. 

Fer-am, es, (fee. Fer-ar, ens, (fee. 

PEEFECT. 

Tul-I, isti, <fec. Lat-iis sum, es, (fee. 

PLUPEEFECT. 

Tul-eram, as, (fee, Lat-iis eram, (fee. 

FUTUEE PEEFECT. 

Tul-ero, (fee. Lat-iis ero, (fee. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PEESENT. 

Fer-am, as, (fee. | Fer-ar, aris, (fee. 

IMPEEFECT. 

Fer-rem, res, (fee. | Fer-rer, reris, (fee. 

PEEFECT. 

Tul-erim, (fee. | Lat-iis sim, (fee. 

PLUPEEFECT. 

Tul-issem. | Lat-iis essem, (tee. 



597.] 



PARADIGMS. 
IMPERATIVE. 



256 



Active. 
Fer, or fertg, 
Fer-t6; 

Fer-te, or fer-tote, 
Fer-untg. 



Pres. Fer-re, 
Per/. Tul-isse, 
Fut. Lat-uriis esse. 



Passive. 
Fer-re, or fer-tor, 
Fer-tor; 
Fer-iminl, 
Fer-untor. 



INFINITIVE. 



Pres. Fer-ens, 

Fut Lat-uriis (a, urn) 

Fer-endi, do, dum, do. 



Fer-ri, 

Lat-iis esse, 
Lat-iim iii. 



PARTICIPLES. 

Per/. Lat-iis (a, tim). 
Fut. Fer-endus (a, um). 

GERUND. 



SUPINE. 
Lat-iim. Lat-u. 

Rem.— The compounds of f err e are conjugated like the simple verb. 

597. Paradigm of Fieri, to become, be made. 

PEE SENT. 

Subjunctive. 
Fi-am, f I-as, f I-at, &<x 

IMPERFECT. 

Fi-grem, eres, &c. 

FUTURE. 



Indicative. 
Fi5, fis, fit, &c. 



Fl-ebam, -ebas, <fec. 
Fi-am, es, &c. 
Fact-us sum? <fcc. 
Fact-iis eram, &c. 
Fact-iis erg, &c. 



Sing. Fi, or f i-to, 
Fl-t8. 



PERFECT. 

I 

PLUPERFECT. 



Fact-iis sun, &c 



Fact-us essem, <fcc. 



FUTURE PERFECT. 



IMPERATIVE. 



Plur. Fi-te, or f I-tote, 
Fi-unt6. 



256 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [598, 599, 

INFINITIVE. 
Pres. Fieri ; Per/. Fact-iis esse ; Fut Fact-iim iri. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Per/. Fact-iis (a, urn) ; Fut. Faciendus (a, urn). 

598. Paradigm of Ire, to go. 

2d root, lv ; 3d, it. 

PRESENT. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Eo, is, it ; imus, itis, eunt. Earn, eas, &c. 

IMPERFECT. 

Ibam, ibas, &c. Irem, ires, &c. 

FUTURE. 

Ib5, ibis, &c. | 

PERFECT. 

Iv-i, iv-isti, &c. Iv-erim, eris, <fcc. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Iv-eram, eras, &c. Iv-issem, isses, &c. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

Iv-ero, eris ; &c. \ 

IMPERATIVE. 
Sing. I, or ito, Plur. Ite, or itote, 

Itg. I Euntg. 

INFINITIVE. 
Pres. Ire ; Per/. Iv-isse ; Fut. Iturus esse. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres. lens {gen. euntis) ; Fut. Iturus, a, urn, 

GERUND. SUPINE. 

Eundi, do, dum, do. Itum, ltu. 

599. Edere, to eat. * 

Edere, to eat, is conjugated regularly as a verb of the third con- 
jugation, but has also certain forms like those of esse. These are 
as follows : 



Regular. 
Pres. EdS, &c. 

Imperat. Ede, &c. 
Subj. Imp. Ederem, &c. 
Infin.. Edere. 



Irregular. 

Es, est, estis. 

Es, esto, este, esfcote. 

Essem, esses, &c. 

Esse. 



600, 601.] PARADIGMS. 257 



600. Periphrastic Conjugations, 

There are two periphrastic conjugations formed respectively from 
the, future participles in rus and dm, combined with the various 
tenses of the verb esse. The first periphrastic conjugation repre- 
sents the action as future, or as one that is about to be done; e. g., 
scripturus sum, I am about to write : the second expresses duty or 
necessity ; e. g., virtus colendd est, virtue must be cultivated. 

601. Impersonal Verbs. 

1. Impersonal verbs are such as are used only in the third person 
singular, and never take a personal subject (as I, thou, Tie). The 
subject in English is generally expressed by the pronoun it ; e. g., 

Oportet, it behooves. 

Taedet me, it disgusts me (I am disgusted with). 

2. Besides the verbs which are strictly impersonal, many others 
are often used impersonally ; e. g., 

Constat, it is known. 
Juvat, it delights. 

3. The second periphrastic conjugation is often used imperson- 
ally; e.g., 

Mihi scrlbendum est, I must or should write. 
Tibi scrlbendum est, you must or should write. 
111! scrlbendum est, he must or should write. 
Nobis scrlbendum est, we must or should write. 
Vobis scrlbendum est, you must or should write. 
Illls scrlbendum est, they must or should write. 

4. Those verbs which take no direct object in the active, can only 
be used impersonally in the passive ; e. g., 

Mihi creditur, i" am believed. 

Tibi creditur, Thou art believed. 

Illi creditur, He is believed. 

Nobis creditur, We are believed. 

Vobis creditur, You are believed. 

TP\s creditur, They are believed. 



SYNTAX. 



INTRODUCTION. 

602. Parts of speech (as we have seen, 2), either singly or com- 
bined, form propositions ; e. g., Amas, thou lovest ; puer ludit, the 

boy plays. 

603. Propositions, either singly or combined, form sentences; 
e. g., Equiis currit (one prop.), the horse runs ; Puer ludit et equiis 
currlt (two propositions). 

604. Sentences, in their various forms and combinations, of course, 
comprise the language. 

605. Sentences may be divided into two classes, viz. : 

1) Simple sentences, or such as contain a single proposition; 
e. g., Puer ludit. 

2) Compound sentences, or such as contain more than on© 
proposition; e. g., Puer ludit et equus currit. 

606. In a rompound sentence, the propositions which compose it 
are either, 

1) Independent of each other, as in the above example, and 
are called co-ordinate propositions ; or, 

2) One of them is used to qualify the other, or some part of 
it, and is called a dependent or subordinate proposition, 
while that on which it depends is called a leading or prin- 
cipal proposition ; e. g., Serviis venit iit portas claudat, 
the slave has come to shut the gates. Here, ' servus vlriii? 
is a principal proposition, and id porta* 1 audaU is a de- 
pendent proposition. 



260 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [607 — 611. 

CHAPTER I. 

The Essential Elements of Sentences. — Subject and Predicate. 

Section I. — .Subject. 

607. Every sentence, however simple, consists of two distinct 
parts, viz. : 

1) The Subject, or that of which it speaks, as, puer, in the 
sentence puer ludit. 

2) The Predicate, or that which is said of the subject, as 
ludtt, in the above sentence. 

608. The subject of a sentence must be either, 

1) A noun; e. g., puer, in the sentence puer ludit; or, 

2) A word or clause used as a noun; e. g., mentli% in the 
sentence turpe est mentiri. 

609. Rule I. The Subject. — The subject of a finite* verb is put 
in the nominative ; e. g., Equus currlt, the horse runs. 

610. The subject may either be simple or compound. 

1) The simple subject consists either of a single nominative, 
or of two or more nominatives representing the same per- 
son or thing; e. g., (1) Latlnus regnabat, Latinus was 
reigning ; (2) Latlnus rex regnabat, Latinus the king 
was reigning. 

2) The compound subject consists of two or more simple 
subjects connected by conjunctions, expressed or under- 
stood; e. g., Caesar et Balbiis Romam venerunt, Caesar 
and Balbus came to Rome. 

Section II. — Predicate. 

611. The predicate of a sentence must be either, 

1) A verb ; e. g., ludlt > in the sentence puer ludit ; or, 

2) The verb esse (or sometimes a passive verb) with an at- 
tributivef noun or adjective; e. g., 

* For the subject of an infinitive see 655. 

\ By an attributive noun is meant one "which is used to qualify or de- 
scribe another noun. 



612—616.] syntax. 261 

1. 

Cicero fuit consul, Cicero was consul, 

Christianl est neminem violare, it is the duty of a Chris* 
tian to wrong nobody. Here, fuit consul and Christi- 
anl est are the predicates. 

2. 

Terra est rotunda, the earth is round. 
Humanurn est err are, to err is human. Here, est rotunda 
and humdnum est are the predicates. 

612. Rule II. Finite Verb. — A finite verb must agree with its 
subject in number and person; e. g., Puer ludit, the boy plays. 

Rem.— If the subject is compound, the verb is generally put in the plural. 

613. Rule HI. Attributive Noun. — An attributive noun in the 
predicate, after the verb esse and a few passive verbs, is put, 

1) In the same case as the subject, when it denotes the same 
person or thing; e. g., Cicero fuit consul, Cicero was 
consul. 

2) In the genitive, when it denotes a different person or thing ; 
e. g., Christianl est neminem violare, it is the duty of a 
Christian to wrong nobody. 

614. Rule IV. Adjectives. — Adjectives and participles (whether 
in the subject or the predicate)* agree in gender ■, number, and case, 
with the nouns which they qualify ; e. g., Terra est rotunds the 
earth is round. 

615. The predicate, like the subject, may be either simple or 
compound. 

1) The simple predicate contains but a single finite verb; 
e. g., Puer cumt, the boy runs. 

2) The compound predicate consists of two or more simple 
predicates connected by conjunctions, expressed or under- 
stood; e. g Puer currit et ludit, the boy runs and plays. 

616. In principal sentences (including simple sentences) the verb 
i>f the predicate may be put in any finite mood. 

1) The indicative is used, in positive assertions; e. g., Porta& 
claudit, he is shutting the gates. 

2) The subjunctive is used. 



262 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [617—623. 

a) To express an affirmation doubtfully or conditionally , 
e. g., Daret, he would give it (i. e., if lie had it, perhaps). 

b) Sometimes to express a wish or command; e. g., Serlbat, 
he may write, may he write, or let Mm write. 

3) The imperative is used to express a command ; e. g., Por- 
tas claude, shut the gates. 

617. Rule V. Vocative. — The name of the person or thing ad*- 
dressed is put in the vocative; e.g., Quid est, Catillna? why is 
this, Catiline ? 

Rem.— This, of course, forms no part of the subject or predicate. 



CHAPTER II. 

Subordinate Elements. — Modifiers. 

Section I. — Use of Modifiers. 

618. Both subject and predicate may have qualifying words and 
clauses connected with them, to limit or modify their meaning; e. g., 

1) Latlnus rex regnavit, Lalinus the king reigned. Here the 
subject is modified by rex (59). 

2) Mllites fortiter pugnant, the soldiers fight bravely. Here 
the predicate is modified by fortiter (77). 

619. Any modifier, whether in the subject or the predicate, may 
be itself modified ; e. g., Latlnus, bonus rex, regnavit. Here the 
modifier, rex, is itself modified by bonus. 

620. Nouns, adjectives, verbs, and adverbs, are often found with 
modifiers. 

Section II. — Modifiers of Nouns. 

621. Nouns, including pronouns, may be modified, 
I. By adjectives and participles. 

II. By nouns and clauses used with the force of adjectives, 

622. I. Nouns may be modified by adjectives and participles; e.g., 

Bonus puer, a good boy. 

See Rule IV. 

623. II. Nouns may be modified by nouns and clauses used with 
the force of adjectives. These are, 



624—630.] syntax. 263 

1) Limiting nouns. 

2) Relative clauses. 

624. Rule VI. Limiting Nouns. — A noun limiting the meaning 
of another noun is put, 

1) In the same case as that noun, when it denotes the same 
person or thing ; e. g., Latlnus rex, Latinus the king. 

2) In the genitive, when it denotes a different person or 
thing; e.g., Regis films, the king's son: except, 

a) When it denotes character or quality ; it is then accom- 
panied by an adjective, and is put either in the genitive 
or ablative ; e. g., Puer eximiae pulchritudims, or Puer 
eximia pulchritudme, a boy of remarkable beauty. 

625. Rule VII. Relative Clauses. — The relative pronoun agrees 
with its antecedent in gender and number ; e. g., Puer qui ludit, 

the boy who plays. 

626. The predicate of a relative clause is sometimes in the indi- 
cative and sometimes in the subjunctive. It may be observed, how- 
ever, that the subjunctive is used, 

1) To express purpose or result ; e. g., Legates mlserunt qui 
dicer ent, they sent ambassadors to say (lit., who might say). 

2) To define an indefinite antecedent; e. g., Sunt qui putent, 
there are (some) who think. 

Section III. — Modifiers of Adjectives. 

627. Adjectives may be modified, 
I. By adverbs. 

II. By words (generally the oblique cases of nouns) used, with 
the force of adverbs. 

628. I. Adjectives may be modified by adverbs; e. g., Hand dif- 
f icilis, not difficult. 

629. Rule VIII. Adverbs. — Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, 
and other adverbs ; e. g., Haud diff icilis, not difficult ; miles for- 
titer pfignat, the soldier fights bravely. 

Rem.— It will be observed that adverbs modify verbs and other adverbs as well as 

adjectives. 

630. II. Adjectives may be modified by words (generally the ob- 
lique cases of nouns) used with the force of adverbs. These are, 



264 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [631 — 638. 

1) The genitive, 

2) The dative. 

3) The ablative. 

4) The infinitive. 

631. Rule IX. Genitive. — Many adjectives signifying desire, 
knowledge, skill, participation, recollection, fulness, and the like, toge- 
ther with their contraries, take the genitive ; e. g., Cupidus laudis, 
desirous of praise. 

632. Rule X. Dative. — Many adjectives are followed by the da- 
tive of the object to which the quality is directed, or for which it 
exists ; e. g., Pax mini gratissima erat, peace was very acceptable 
to me. 

633. Rule XL Ablative. — Adjectives may be modified by an 
ablative denoting cause, manner, or means ; e. g., Aeger avaritia, 
diseased by avarice. 

634. Rule XII. Ablative. — The adjectives, dignus, indlgnus, con- 
tends,, praeditus, fretus, and liber, take the ablative ; e. g., Virtus 
parvo contents, est, virtue is content with little. 

635. Rule XIII. Supine in u as Ablative. — The supine in u as a 
verbal noun in the ablative is used after adjectives signifying good 
or bad, easy or difficult, agreeable or disagreeable, &c. ; e. g., Dif- 
ficile dictu (difficult in saying), difficult to say. 

636. Rule XIV. Ablative. — The comparative degree without 

qudm is followed by the ablative ; e. g., Clementia dlvlniiis, more 

godlike than clemency. 

Obs.- -If qudm is expressed, the following noun will be in the same case as that 
which precedes; e. g., Europa minor est quam Asia, Europe is smaller than 
Asia. 

637. Rule XV. Infinitive. — The infinitive sometimes depends 

upon adjectives; e. g., Dignus amarl, worthy to be loved. 

Rem.— Infinitives dependent upon adjectives are generally used as substantives, and 
as such may be referred to Rule XL or XII. 

Section IV. — Modifiers of Verbs. 

638. Verbs may be modified, 

I. By objects. 
II. By adverbial modifiers. 



639—644.] syntax. 265 

§ 1. Objects, 

639, Verbs may be modified by objects. These are, 

1) The oblique cases of nouns. 

2) Infinitives or clauses used as nouns. 

640. Verbs may take one or more oblique cases cf nouns as 
objects; e. g., (1) Caius puellam laudat, Caius praises the girl. 
(2) Balbus puero viam monstrat, Balbus shows the way to the boy. 

841. Rule XVI. — The accusative is used as the direct object of 
m action ; e. g\, Caius puellam laudat, Caius praises the girl. 

642. Rule XVII. — The genitive is used, 

1) After verbs of pitying; e. g., Miseremini sociomm, pity 
the allies. 

2) After verbs of remembering and forgetting ; e. g., Meminl 
vivorum, I remember the living. 

3) After refert and interest ; e. g., Interest omnium, it is the 

interest of all. 

Rem.— Verbs of remembering and forgetting sometimes take the accusative ; e. g., 
MSminT Cinnam, 2" remember Cinna. 

643. Rule XVIII.— The dative is used, 

1) After esse in expressions denoting possession ; e. g., PuerO 
est liber, the boy has a book (lit., there is a book to the boy). 

2) After the compounds of esse, except posse, to be able; 
e. g., Mihi profuit, it profited me. 

3) After the compounds of bene, satis, and male ; e. g., Officio 
suo satisfecit, he tias discharged his duty (lit., has done 
enough for). 

4) After the compounds of the prepositions, ad, ante, con, 
in, inter, 6b, post, prae, sub, and super, together with a 
few others ; e. g., Veni fit inihi succurras, I have come 
that you may assist (succor) me. 

5) After verbs signifying to command or obey, please or dis 
please, favor or injure^ serve or resist, together with to in- 
dulge, spare, pardon, envy, believe, persuade, &c. ; e. g., 
Leglbus paret, he obeys the laws (is obedient to the laws). 

644. Rule XIX.— The ablative is used, 

1) After the deponent verbs, utl, frul, fungi, pollri, vesci, 

12 



266 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [645 — 650. 

dlgnarl,* and their compounds ; e. g., Lacte vescuntiir 
they live upon milk. 
2) After verbs signifying to abound or be destitute of; e. g., 
Nemo aliorum ope car ere potest, no one Gan be (do) with* 
out the assistance of others, 

645. Rule XX. Two Accusatives. — Verbs of asking, demanding 
teaching, and concealing, may take two accusatives, one of the per- 
son and one of the thing ; e. g., Caesar frumentum Aeduos flagita- 
bat, Caesar demanded corn of the Aedui. 

646. Rule XXI. Accusative and Genitive. — Verbs of accusing, 

convicting, acquitting, warning, and the like, take the accusative of 

the person, and the genitive of the crime, charge, &c. ; e. g., Caium 

proditionis accusant, they accuse Caius of treachery. 

Rem.— The genitive is perhaps best explained by making it depend upon the abla- 
tive crimine, understood. See 214, Note. 

647. Rule XXII. Accusative and Genitive. — The impersonal 
verbs of feeling, miseret, poenitet, pudet, taedet, and piget, take the 
accusative of the person, together with the genitive of the object 
which produces the feeling ; e. g., Taedet me vltae, I" am weary 
of life (lit., it wearies me of life). 

648. Rule XXIII. Accusative and Dative. — Any transitive verb 
may take the accusative of the direct object and the dative of the 
indirect object ; e. g., JBalbus puero viam monstrat, Balbus shows the 
way to the boy. 

649. Rule XXIV. Accusative and two Datives. — Transitive verbs 
of giving, sending, imputing (dare, mittere, vertere, &c), some- 
times take a direct object in the accusative, together with two in- 
direct objects in the dative ; e. g., Regnum suum Romanls dono 
dedit, he gave his kingdom to the Romans as a present (for a present). 

650. Rule XXV. Accusative and Ablative. — Verbs signifying to 
separate from, or deprive of, take the accusative of the direct object, 
together with the ablative of that from which it is separated, &c. 
e, g., Me luce prlvant, they deprive me of light. 



* DJgnarl takes a direct object in connection with the ablative ; e. g, 
Te honore dlgnatiir, he thinks you worthy of honor. 



651—659.] syntax. . 267 

651. Rule XXVI. Two Datives. — Intransitive verbs signifying 
to be, to come, to go. and the like, often take two datives, one denot- 
ing the object to which, and the other the object for which; e. g., 
Caesarl auxilio venit, he ivent to the assistance of Caesar. 

652. Rule XXVII. Dative and Ablative. — Opus est and usus est, 
as impersonal verbs signifying need, take the dative of the person 
and the ablative of the object needed; e. g., Duce nobis opiis est, 
we need a leader (lit., there is need to us of a leader). 

653. Verbs sometimes take an infinitive or clause as object; e. g., 

1. Cupit pugnare, he desires (what?) to fight. 

2. Spero te esse beatum, i" hope (what 1) that you are happy. 

3. Nescio unde sol Ignem habeat, I know not (what?) whence 
the sun derives its fire. 

654. Rule XXVIII. Infinitive as Object. — The infinitive mood, 

sither alone or with other words connected with it, may be used as 

,he object of a verb. (See examples above.) 

Rem. — The infinitive as object is used chiefly after verbs of perceiving, declaring, 
desiring, and the like. 

655. Rule XXIX. Subject of Infinitive. — The subject of the in- 
finitive is put in the accusative ; e. g., Spero te esse beatum, i" hope 
you are happy. 

Rem.— In this example te, which is the subject of esse, is put i.i the accusative 
according to rule. 

656. Rule XXX. Dependent Question as Object. — An indirect or 
dependent question may be used as the object of a verb; e. g., Nescio 
unde sol Ignem habeat, I know not whence the sun derives its fire. 

657. The verb in dependent questions is put in the subjunctive, 
as in the above example. 

658. Rule XXXI. Object after Passive Verbs. — Verbs in the 
passive voice are followed by the same cases as in the active, except 
the direct object, which becomes the subject of the passive ; e. g., 
(Act.) Balbiim furti accusant, they accuse Balbus of theft ; (Pass.) 
Balbus furti aeeusatur, Balbus is accused of theft. 

659. Rule XXXII. Agent of Passive Verbs. — After passive verbs, 
the agent of the action is expressed by the ablative with a or ab ; 
e. g., Puer a Caio docetur, the boy is taught by Caius ; except, 



268 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [660—667. 

The second periphrastic conjugation (425), which takes the dative 
of the agent; e. g., Mihi scribendurn est, I must write. 

660. Rule XXXIII. Impersonal Passive Verbs. — Verbs which 
have no direct object in the active voice, are only used impersonally 
in the passive ; e. g., Mihi creditor, I am believed (lit., it is believed 
to me). 

§ II. Adverbial Modifiers. 

661. Verbs often take adverbial modifiers : Jhese are, 

1) Adverbs. 

2) Adverbial expressions. 

662. Verbs may be modified by adverbs ; e. g., Fortiter pugnat, 
he fights bravely. 

See Rule VIII. 
Rem. — Adverbial modifiers are the same whether the verb is active or passive. 

663. Verbs may be modified by adverbial expressions ; these are, 

1) The oblique cases of nouns, with or without prepositions. 

2) Infinitives, or dependent propositions. 

664. The oblique cases of nouns (with or without prepositions) 
used as adverbial modifiers, may be referred to the following classes, 
viz. : 

1) Ad/erbial expressions oi manner, means, Sic. 

2) Adverbial expressions of time. 

3) Adverbial expressions of place. 

4) Miscellaneous adverbial expressions. 

665. The oblique cases of nouns (and sometimes of adjectives) 
may be used as adverbial modifiers denoting manner, means, &e> 

666. Rule XXXIV. Manner, Means, <^c. — The manner or cause 
of an action, and the means or instrument employed, are expressed 
by the ablative ; e. g., Dominiim gladio occldit, lie killed his master 
with a sword. 

667. Rule XXXV. Price. — Price, when expressed by nouns, is 
usually put in the ablative, and when expressed by adjectives, 
usually in the genitive; e. g., (1) Avarus patriam auro vendet, the 
avaricious man will sell his country for gold ; (2; Avarus pecuniam 
magni aestimat, the avaricious man values money highly. 



668—676.] syntax. 269 

668. The oblique cases of nouns may be used as adverbial modi* 
fiers denoting time. 

669. Rule XXXVI. Time. — Time when is expressed by the ab- 
lative without a preposition ; e. g., Hieme ursiis dormit, the bear 
sleeps in winter. 

670. Rule XXXVII. Length of Time.-— Length of time is gene- 
rally expressed by the accusative ; e. g., Cams annum unum vixit, 
Caius lived one year 

671. The oblique cases of nouns (with or without prepositions) 
may be used as adverbial modifiers denoting place. 

672. Rule XXXVIII. — The name of a town where any thmg in, 
or is done, if of the first or second declension and singular numoer, 
is put in the genitive, otherwise in the ablative; e. g., (1) Caius 
Cortonae vixit, Caius lived at Cortona ; (2) Caius Tlbure vixit, 
Caius lived at Tibur. 

673. Rule XXXIX. — The name of a place where any ming is, 
or is done, when not a town, is generally put in the abktive with 
a preposition ; e. g., Ursiis in antro dormit, the bear sleep$ in a cave. 

674. Rule XL. — After verbs of motion, 

1) The place to which the motion is directed, n a town or 
small island, is expressed by the accusative without a pre- 
position, otherwise by the accusative with one ; e. g., (1) 
Romam venire, to come to Rome ; (2) In ItUiam venire, 
to come into Italy. 

2) The place from which the motion proceeds, if a town or 
small island, is expressed by the ablative without a pre- 
position, otherwise by the ablative with one; e. g., (1) 
Roma venire, to come from Ro?ne; (2) Ab Italia venire, 
to come from Italy. 

675. Rule XLI. — Domus and rus, together witn the genitives 
belli, hurnl, and mlRtiae, are used like names of towns; e. g., Cams 
rure rediit, Caius returned from the country; Balbus et doml et 
mllidae fuit, Balbus was with me both at home and on service. 

676. Rule XLII. — The supine in um, as a verbal noun in the ac- 
cusative, follows verbs of motion to express the purpose or object 



270 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [677 — 684. 

of that motion ; e. g., Mittit legates pacem petltum, he sends am* 
bassadors to sue for peace, 

677. The ablative absolute and the oblique cases of nouns with 
prepositions are used to express various adverbial relations. 

678. Rule XLIII. Ablative Absolute. — A noun and a participle 

standing grammatically independent of the rest of the sentence, are 

put in the ablative absolute ; e. g., Caesar victls hostlbus, Caesar 

having conquered his enemies (or, when he had conquered ; lit., his 

enemies being conquered). 

Rem. — The ablative absolute generally expresses either the adverbial relation of 
time (as in the above example) or that of cause ; sometimes, however, it add? 
an attendant circumstance. 

679. Rule XLIV. Prepositions with Accusative. — The following 
twenty-six prepositions govern the accusative ; viz., Ad, adversus, 
ante, apud, circa or circum, cis or citra, contra, erga, extra, infra, 
inter, intra, juxta, 6b, penes, per, pone, post, praeter, prope, prop- 
ter, secundum, supra, trans, ultra, versus (rare). 

680. Rule XLV. Prepositions with Ablative. — The following- 
eleven prepositions govern the ablative ; viz., A (ab or abs), absque, 
coram, cum, de, e or ex, palam, prae, pro, sine, tenus. 

681. Rule XL VI. Prepositions with Accusative or Ablative. — The 
live prepositions, clam, in, sub, subter, and super, take sometimes 
the accusative and sometimes the ablative. 

Rem. 1. — In and sub govern the accusative in answer to whither (i. e. after verbs 
of motion), and the ablative in answer to where (i. e. after verbs of rest). Subter 
generally takes the accusative. Super takes the accusative after verbs of mo- 
tion, and also when it signifies upon, and the ablative when it signifies on or of 
(as of a subject spoken or written about). 

Rem. 2.— Prepositions in composition often govern the same cases as when they 
stand alone. 

682. Verbs may be modified by infinitives or by dependent pro- 
positions. 

683. Rule XL VII. Infinitive as Modifier of Verb.— The infinitive 
mood may be used after verbs denoting custom, ability, and the like; 
e. g., Non facere possum, I am not able to do, &c. 

684. Dependent propositions, as adverbial modifiers, are gene- 



685—692.] syntax. 271 

rally introduced by conjunctions, and express a great variety of rela 
tions, as time, place, manner, condition, Slg. 

685. Dependent propositions take the verb, 

1) Sometimes in the indicative; e. g., Iter faciebam, quiim 
has litteras dabam, J was making a journey when I gave 
these letters. 

2) But nore commonly in the subjunctive; e. g., Si quid 
habeat, dabit, if he has any thing, he will give it. 

Section V. — Modifiers of Adverbs. 

686. Adverbs are modified by other adverbs; e. g., Satis bene 
scripsit, he has written sufficiently well. 

687. Prepositions and conjunctions are connectives, and neither 
modify nor are modified. 

688. Interjections are expressions of emotion or mere marks of 
address, and have no grammatical influence upon the rest of the 
sentence. 



CHAPTER III. 

Use of Moods, Participles, Gerunds, and Supines. 

689. The indicative is used in positive assertions; e. g., Puer 

ludit, the boy plays. 

Rem.— The indicative is commonly used in principal propositions, but sometimes 
in dependent ones. 

690. The subjunctive is used both in principal and dependent 
propositions. 

691. I. In principal propositions the subjunctive is used, 

1) To express a wish or a command; e. g., Scrlbat, he may 
write, may he write, or let him write. 

2) To express an affirmation doubtfully or conditionally ; e. g., 
Daret, he would give it (i. e. if he had it, perhaps). 

692. II. In dependent propositions. 

1) With ut, ne, quo, quln, quommus, to express purpose osf 



272 FIEST LATIK BOOK. [693—695 

consequence ; e. g., Venit lit scrlbat, lie has come to write ; 
Caio nihil obstat quomlnus sit beatus, nothing prevents 
Caiusfrom being happy (by which he should be less happy). 

2) With quum (cum), when it introduces a cause or reason, 
or in any way shows the dependence of one event upon 
another ; e. g., Quae cum ita sint. since these things are so, 

3) With licet, although, quasi, tanquam, ac si, as % dura, 
modo, dummbdb, provided, if only, quamtis, however much, 
however; e. g.. Improbus ita vlvit, quasi nesciat, &c, the 
wicked (man) lives, as if he did not know, &c. ; Nemo, 
quamvis sit locuples, no one, however wealthy he may be. 

4^ In conditional sentences, to represent the condition either 
as simply possible or as impossible ; e. g., Si quid habeat, 
dabit, if he has any thing, he will give it. Si quid haberet, 
daret, if he had any thing, he would give it. 

5) In indirect or dependent questions ; e. g., Nescio unde sol 
Ignem habeat, I know not whence the sun derives its fire. 

6) In relative clauses, (1) to express purpose or result, and 
(2) to define an indefinite antecedent; e. g., (1) Legates 
miserunt qui dicerent, they sent ambassadors to say ; (2) 
Sunt qui fufent, there are (some) who think. 

693. Subjunctive Tenses in Dependent Propositions. — The sub- 
junctive, (1) when dependent upon a present tense (pres., per/, 
def, or fat.) is put in the present to denote an incomplete action, 
and in the perfect to denote a completed action ; and (2) when de- 
pendent upon a past tense (imperf, perf. indef, or pluperfi), in the 
imperfect to denote an incomplete action, and in the pluperfect to 
denote a completed action ; e. g., 

1. Nescio quid dlcat, I know not what he is saying. 

2. Nescio quid dixerit, I" know not what he said. 

3. Nesclvit quid dlceret, I knew not vjhat he said. 

4. Nesclvit quid dixisset, I knew not what he had said. 

694. The imperative is used to express a command; e. g., Portas 
claude, shut the gates. 

695. The infinitive, which expresses the simple meaning of the 
verb without reference to person or number, is used, 

1) As the subject of another verb ; e. g., Difficile est judicare, 
it is difficult to judge. 



696.] syntax. 273 

2) As the object of another verb; e.g., Cupio sapere, I de- 
sire to be wise. 

3) As the modifier of an adjective or verb; e. g., (1) Dlgnus 
amarl, worthy to beloved; (2) Non facere possum, I am 
not able to do, &c. 

696. Participles, gerunds, and supines are followed by the various 
cases of nouns like the other parts of verbs. In regard to their own 
government, it must be observed, 

1) That participles, like adjectives, agree with substantives. 

2) That gerunds are governed like the same cases of sub- 
stantives. 

3) That supines, as verbal nouns, are governed like tiie same 
cases of other nouns. 



10* 



DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 



1 To think nothing o£ 
2, To value highly * 



ENGLISH IDIOM. LATIN IDIOM, 

To reckon at nothing (nihili ducere 

or facer e). 
To value at a high price (magni 

aestimare). 
To value at a little price (parm 

aestimare). 
Nothing of stability {nihil sUbili- 

tatis). 
Something of time (aliquid tempo- 

ris). 
Much of good (multum boni). 
Mow much of pleasure (quantum 

voluntatis). 

Rem. — Hence no, some (when they denote quantity, not number), much, how much^ 
are to be translated by nihil, aliquid, multum, quantum, followed by the gen. 



3. To think little off i 
To hold cheap. j 

4. No stability. 

Some time. 

Much good. 

How much pleasure. 



5. He did it unwillingly. 

6. It is disgraceful to lie. 

7. It is the part 

— duty 

— ■ business 

mark 

character 



of a wise 
man. 



8. To condemn a man to death. 

9. As many as possible. 

he can or could. 

The greatest possible. 
he can or could. 



: 



10. On the top of the mountain. 
In the middle of the water. 



He unwilling did it. 
To lie is disgraceful. 



It is of a wise man. 

To condemn a man of the head. 
As the most (quam plurimi). 

As the greatest (quam maxtmus). 

[That is, as many as the most : as 

great as greatest, &c] 
On the mountain highest. 
In the water middle (in summo 

monte ; in media aqua). 



* To value very highly (maximi aestimare). 

f The substantive will follow in the accusative notwithstanding the of 
for that has nothing to do with the Latin verb. 



276 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



ENGLISH IDIOM. 

11. Is going to bed. 

1 2. It is hard to say. 

13. "Whilst they were (are, <fcc.) 
playing. 

14. The intention of writing a letter. 

15. We must cultivate virtue. 

16. Caius must write. 

17. "We must believe Caius. 

IS. The ways of expressing the 
purpose are, 

He comes to see the games. 



19. a) I may go. 

b) I might Jiave gone, 

20. a) I ought to go. 

6) I ought to have gone, 



LATIN IDIOM. 

Is going to lie down (cubitum, sup.) 
It is hard in saying (difficile est 

dictu; supine). 
During playing (inter ludendum). 

The intention of a letter to-be-writ" 

ten (scribendae epistolae). 
Virtue is to-be-cultivated (colenda 

est virtus). 
It is to-be-written by Caius (Oaio 

scribendum est). 
It is to-be-believed to Caius (creden- 

dum est Gaio). 



(a) Venit ut ludos spectet. 

(b) Venit ludos spectatum (sup.). 

(c) Venit ludos spectaturus. 

^ (d) Venit ad ludos spectandos. 

To which add, 
(e) Venit causa (for the purpose) 
ludorum spectandorum ; and 
(/) Instead of ut, the relative 

may be used : 
He sent ambassadors, qui pacem 
peterent (to sue for peace). 
Mihi ire licet (it is permitted to me 

to go). 
Mihi ire licuit (it was permitted te 

me to go). 
Me ire oportet. 
Me ire oportuii 



CAUTIONS. 



a. Him, her, them (or he, she, they, when they are to be translated by 
the accusative), must be translated into Latin by the proper case of 
mil, when they and the nominative of the'ierb stand for the same 
person. Also, in the same case, his, hers, its, theirs, must be trans- 
lated by suits. 

l>. In a sentence with that dependent on a past tense, the perfect is to be 
translated into Latin by the present infinitive, whenever the notion 
expressed by it is not to be described as over before the time of the 
principal verb. 

c. Would, should, after a past tense are future forms : 

j He says that he will come. 
( He said that he would come. 

d. Thing should be expressed by res (fern.), when the adjective alone 
would leave it doubtful whether men or things were meant : 

Thus, of many things, not multorum, but multarum rerum. 

e . Cum is written after, and as one word with the ablatives me, te, &c. ; 
mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, vobiscum. 

f. Many English verbs become transitive by the addition of a preposi- 
tion ; for instance, to smile at, <fec. 

g. Such in English is often used where size is meant, rather than quality. 
It should then be translated into Latin by tantus, quantus ; not talis, 
qualis. 

h. That or those, when it stands for a substantive which has been ex- 
pressed in a preceding clause, is not to be translated. 
t. When that introduces a consequence, that not is ut non, not ne, 

That-not \ for a P ur P° se ** 

( for a consequence ... ut non. 

j. After verbs of fearing, the "Eng. future and the participial substantive 
are translated into Latin by the present or imperfect subjunctive, with 
ut or ne. 

k. Who, what, which, are often dependent inter rogatives, especially after 
verbs of asking, knowing, doubting, <fec. 



278 . FIRST LATIN BOCK. 

I. May, might, sometimes mean can, could, and must be translated by 
possum. 

m. The per/, infin. must be translated into Latin by the present infin, 
after might, could, ought, unless the action is to be represented as 
over before the time to which might, could, &c. refer. 

»*. In English, substantives standing before and spoken of other substan- 
tives, are used adjectively, and must be translated into Latin by ad- 
jectives. 

o. What is sometimes used for how (quam); sometimes for how great 
(quantus). 

p. For and as are to be untranslated, when the noun that follows can be 
placed in apposition to another noun in the sentence. 

q. Wi en one, two, &c. mean one, two, &c. apiece, or for each, they must 
be translated by the distributive numerals, singuli, bini, &c. 

r. I have to do it, must be translated by the part, in dus. 
{Eng) With whom we have to live. 
(Lat.) With whom it is to-be-lived (quibuscum vivendum est). 

8. It is, followed by what is in form the infin. pass., generally expresses 
necessity, fitness, or something intended. 

t But is to be sometimes means, not necessity, fitness, or intention, but 
possibility ; as, 'the passage is to be found in the fifth book/ = the 
passage may or can be found in the fifth book. 

u. A present participle must be translated into Latin by a perfect parti- 
ciple (or its substitute, quum with perf or pluperf subj.) when the 
action expressed by it must be over, before that expressed by the 
verb begins. 

v. The English present part. act. is generally translated by the Latin past 
partic, when the verb is deponent. 

10. When the action was not done in, but only near a town, at must be 
translated by ad or apud. 

x. One often means some one (aliquis) or a certain one (quidam). 

y. Will and would, will not and would not, are often principal verbs, to be 
translated by velle and nolle respectively. 
They are to be so translated when for 

will, would, we may substitute 

is (are, &c.) willing, was (were, &c.) willing. 

s. When an English word is followed by a preposition, consider whether 
the Latin word to be used is followed by a preposition or by a case ; 
and then by what preposition or what case. 



LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



A. 

A, ab, abs {prep, with all.), from, by. 

Abire, i, it, to go away, depart. 

Absolvere, v, ut, to acquit. 

Ac, and. 

Accedere, cess, cess, to approach. 

Accipere (io), cep, cept, to receive, 

accept. 
Accipiter, tris, hawk. 
Accusare, av, at, to accuse. 
Acer, acris, acre, sharp, severe. 
Achilles, is, Achilles, a Grecian hero. 
Acies, el, line of battle. 
Ad (prep, with ace), to. 
Adducere (ad and ducere), dux, duct, 

to lead to. 
Adeo, so, in such a manner. 
Adesse (ad and esse), fu, tut, to be 

present. 
Adjumentum, I, aid, help. 
Adjuvare, jiiv, jut, to aid, help. 
Admiratio, onis, admiration. 
Admonere, u, it, to admon ish, warn. 
Adulatio, onis, flattery. 
Adulator, oris, flatterer. 
Adventus (advenlre), us, approach. 
Aedif icare, av, at, to build. 
Aedif icium, 1, building, edifice. 
Aeneas, ae, Aeneas, a Trojan prince. 
Aequitas, atis, equity, justice. 
Aestas, atis, summer. 
Aestimare, av, at, to value, prize; 

magni aestimare, to prize highly. 
Afferre (ad and ferre), attul, allat, 

to bring to. 
Ager, agrl, field. 
Agere, 6g, act, to drive, lead, do; 

gratias agere, to render thanks. 
Agnus, I, lamb. 
Agricola, ae, husbandman. 
:.ando, sm 



Aliquis, qua, quid, any one, an% 
some; aliquid temporis, some time, 
Alius, a, ud (113. R,), other. 
Alpes, ium, the Alps. 
Alttis, a, um, high, lofty. 
Amare, av, at, to love. 
Ambitus, us, bribery. 
Ambulare, av, it, to walk. 
Americanus, a, um, American. 
Amicitia, ae, friendship, 
Amicus, i, friend. 
Amittere, mis, miss, to lose. 
Amphibium, I, an amphibious ani» 

mal. 
Ampliiis (adv.), more, further. 
Amplus, a, um, ample, large. 

An, interrog. part, used in double 
questions, 482. 

Anchises, ae, Anchises, the father 
of Aeneas. 

Anguis, is, m. or/., snake. 

Angustiae, arum, a narrow pass, de- 
file. 

Animal, alis, animal. 

Animus, I, mind, soul. 

Annuere, nu, nut, to assent, to give 
assent. 

Annus, I, year. 

Ante (prep, with ace), before. 

Antea (adv.), before. 

Antrum, I, cave. 

AnuLus, I, ring. 

Aperlre, eru, ert, to uncover, to open. 

Appropinquare, av, at, to approach 

Aqua, ae, water. 

Aquaii, at, to bring water. 

Aquila, ae, eagle. 

Ara, ae, altar. 

Arare. av, at, to plough. 

Arbor, oris,/, tree. 
■ 



280 



FIKST LATIN" BOOK. 



Armiger, 1, armor-bearer, 
Arripere (io), ipu, ept, to snatch, 

seize. 
Ars, artis, art 
Arx, arcis, citadel, tower. 
Ascanius, I, Ascanius, son of Ae- 
neas. 
Asinus, 1, ass. 
Aspergere (or adspergere), ers, ers, 

io sprinkle. 
At, but. 
Athenae. aiiini, Athens, city of 

Greece. 
Atheniensis (Athenae), e, Athenian, 

pi., the Athenians. 
At qui (conj.), but, now (as used in 

reasoning). 
Attamen, but, but yet. 
Attingere (ad and tangere), tig, tact, 

to attain, reach. 
Auctor, oris, author. 
Auctumniis, I, autumn. 
Audax, acis, doling, audacious. 
Audlre, Iv, it, to hear. 
Augere, aux, auct, to increase. 
Aureus (aurum), a, um, golden. 
Aurum, I, gold. 

Aut, or; aut — aut, either — or. 
Autem, but. 
Auxiiium, I, aid. 
Avaricia, ae, avarice. 
A varus, a, iim, avaricious. 
Avis, is, bird. 



B. 



Balbus, I, Balbus, a man's name. 

Barba, ae, beard. 

Beate (beatus), happily. 

Beatus, a, um, happy. 

Bellum, I, war. 

Bene, well. 

Beneficium. i, benefit. 

Benignus, a, iim, kind. 

Bibere, bib, bibit, to drink. 

Bienniiim, I, two years, space of two 
years. 

Bonus, a, iim, good. 

Brachiiim, I, arm. 

Brevis, e, short. 

Brutus, i, Brutus, a Roman con- 
sul. 



C. 



Cadere, cecid, cas, to fall. 

Caecus, a, iim, blind. 

Caesar, aris, Caesar, a distinguished 

Roman general. 
Caiiis, I, Caius, a man's name. 
Calamities, atis, misfortune, calamity 
Oandidiis, a, iim, white. 
Canere, cecin, cant, io sing. 
Canis, is, c, dog. 
Cantare (canere), av, at, to sing. 
Capere (io), cep, capt, to take, w 

ceive. 
Captiviis, a, iim, caj. * ive. 
Caput, itis, head; capitis, of the 

head, to death. 
Carpere, carps, carpt, to gather, to 

pluck, to card. 
Carthagmiensis (Carthago), e, Car- 
thaginian. 
Carthago, inis, Carthage, an ancient 

city in northern Africa. 
Castigare, av, at, to chastise. 
Castra, oruni, camp. 
Catena, ae, chain. 
Cavere, cav, caut, to take care, to be 

on one's guard against. 
Celeber, bris, bre, celebrated. 
Celeriter, quickly. 
Certanien, inis, contest. 
Certiis, a, iim, certain. 
Christianiis, J, Christian. 
Cibiis, I, food. 
Cicero, onis, Cicero, the great Roman 

orator. 
Cingere, nx, net, to surround. 
Circumdare (circum and dare), ded, 

dat, to surround. 
Cis, on this side. 
Civilis (civis), e, civil. 
Civis, is, citizen. 
Civitas (civis), atis, state. 
Claudere, claus, claus, to shut. 
Clemens, entis, mild, merciful. 
dementia, ae, mildness, clemency. 
Clipeiis, T, shield. 
Coelum, i, heaven, the heavens. 
Coena, ae, supper, feast 
Cogitare, av, at, to think, to think 

about 
Oognitus, a, iim, known. 



LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY, 



283 



Cognoseere, nov, nit, to ascertain. 

Colore, colu, cult, to till, cultivate, 
practise. 

Colloquium, 1, conference. 

Color oris, color. 

Columba, ae, dove. 

Committere, mis, miss, to engage ; 
proelium committere, to engage 
battle. 

Comparare, av, at, to procure, raise, 
levy. 

Compellere, pul, puis, to compel, 
drive. 

Compescere, escu, to restrain, re- 
press. 

Complere, ev, et, to fill. 

Comprehendere, nd, ns, to arrest. 

Concertare, av, at, to contend, quarrel. 

Concilium, I, council, meeting. 

Condere {con [ciim] and dare), did, 
dit, to build, found. 

Conditio, onis, condition, terms. 

Confugere (io), fug, to flee for re- 
fuge. 

Conjux, ugis, spouse, wife, husband. 

Conservare, a 7, at, to preserve. 

Consilium, 1, advice, instruction. 

Conspicere (io), spex, spect, to see, 
discover. 

Constat (impers.), it is known, is an 
admitted fact. 

Constituere, u, fit, to arrange, ap- 
point. 

Construere, strux, struct, to build, 
construct. 

Consul, iilis, consul, the Roman chief 
magistrate. \advice. 

Consiilere, siilu, suit, to consult, ask 

Contemnere, ps, pt, to despise. 

Contentus, a, um, contented, content. 

Continere, u, tent, to restrain, confine. 

Continuiis, a, iim, successive. 

Contra (prep, with ace), against. 

Convemre (con [ciim] and venire), 
ven, vent, to come together. 

Convertere, t, s, to turn, convert. 

Copiae, arum, forces. 

Coquere, x, ct, to cook, to bake, to 
ripen. 

Cor, cordis, n., heart. 

Coram (prep.with abl.), before, in pre- 
sence of; adv., openly, in person. 



Corona, ae, crown, garland. 
Corpus, oris, body. 
Corrlgere, rex, reel to correct. 
Corrumpere, rup, rupt, to mislead* 

corrupt. 
Crabro, onis, wasp. 
Creber, bra, brum, frequent. 
Credere, credid, credit, to believe^ 

put confidence in. 
Crescere, crev, cret, to increase, to 

wax (as moon). 
Culpa, &e,faidt, blame. 
Ciim ( prep, with abl.), with. 
Cunctus, a, iim, all as a whole. 
Ciipere (io), Iv (i), it, to desire. 
Cupiditas, atis, desire, passion. 
Cupidiis, a, iim, desirous of. 
Curare (curd), av, at, to take cars 

Currere, cucurr, curs, to run. 

Curriis. us, chariot. 

Custodire (custos), Iv, it, to guard. 



D. 



Damnare, av, at, to condemn. 

Dare, ded, dat, to give. 

De {prep, with abl.), from, about^ 

concerning. 
Decern, ten. 
Decernere, crev, cret, to decree, de* 

cide. 
Decimiis, a, um, tenth. 
Decipere (io), cep, cept, to deceive. 
Dedere, dedid, dedit, to surren* 

der. 
Defendere, d, s, to defend. 
Deglubere, ups, upt, to skin, flay. 
Delere, lev, let, to destroy. 
Demoustrare, av, at, to shoiv, demon- 

sir ate. 
Deprehendere, d, s, to seize, catch* 
Deterrere, u, it, to deter, prevent. 
Devincere, vie, vict, to conquer. 
Dicere, dix, diet, to say. 
Dido, onis, Dido, the foundress of 

Carthage. 
Dies, el, day. 
Diff icilis, e, difficidt. 
Digniis, a, iim, worthy. 
Dilaniare, Sv, at, to tear in pieces. 
Diligens, tis, diligent. 



282 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



Diligentia (diligens), ae, diligence. 
Dimittere, mis, miss, to dismiss. 
Discere, didic, to learn. 
Discipulus, I, pupil. 
Disjungere, x, ct, to separate. 
Dividere, vis, vis, to divide. 
Divinus, a, inn, divine. 
Divitiaciis, i, Divitiacus, a man's 

name. 
Docere, u, t, to teach. 
Dolere, u, it, to grieve. 
Dolor, oris, pai:i, grief, sorroio. 
Doininiis, 1, master as owner. 
Domus, tis or i, /., house ; domi, at 

home. 
Donare, av, at, to give, present. 
Doniim, I, gift. 
Dormire, iv, it, to sleep. 
Dubitare, av, at, to doubt. 
Ducenti, ae, a, two hundred. 
Dticere, dux, duct, to lead. 
Dura, while. 

Duinniodd, if but, provided. 
Duo, ae, 6, two. 
Duodecim, twelve. 
Durare, av, at, to last. 
Dux, ducis, leader, guide. 

E. 

Edere, ed, es (420), to eat. 

Educere (e and ducere), dux, duct, to 
leadjorth. 

Efficere (io), fee, feet, to effect, ac- 
complish. 

Ego, mei, &c, I. 

Elegantia, ae, elegance. 

Elephas, antis, on., elephant 

Emere, em, empt, to buy, purchase. 

Eniin,/<9r, indeed. 

Enumerare, av, at, to enumerate. 

Epistola, ae, letter, epistle. 

Epitome, es, abridgment. 

Eques, itis, horseman. 

Equitatus, us, cavalry. 

Equus, I, horse. 

Erga {prep, with ace), towards. 

^rgo (co?ij.), therefore. 

Errare, av, at, to err. 

Eradire, iv, it, to instruct. 

Esse, fu, fiit, to be; est, is, it is. 

Et, and; et— et, both— and. 



Etiam, also, even ; etiam atque eti« 

am, again and again. 
Evertere, rt, rs, to pull down, ta 

overthrow. 
Evolare, av, at, to fly away, to fee 

from. 
Ex (prep, with abl.), from. 
Excitare, av, at, to excite, arouse. 
Exclamare, av, at, to exclaim, cry 

out. 
Excriiciare, av, at, to torture. 
Exercere, u, it, to practise, exercise. 
Exercitus, us, army. 
Exorare;, av, at, to supplicate. 
Expellere, pill, puis, to expel, banish. 
Exponere, posu, posit, to set forth, 

explain. 
Expugnare (ex and pugnare), av, at, 

to storm. 
Exspectare, av, at, to expect. 



Fabiilosus, a, iim (fabula), fabulous. 

Facere (io), fee, fact, to do, make, 
act. 

Facies, el, face, appearance. 

Facilis, e, easy. 

Fallax (fallere), acis, false, decep- 
tive. 

Fames, is, hunger. 

Faustulus, I, Faustulus, an Italian 
shepherd. 

Favere, fav, faut, to favor. 

Felicitas, atis, happiness. 

Ferre, tul, lat (414), to bear. 

Ferrum, i, iron. 

Fidelis, e, faithful. 

Fides, el, faith, fidelity ; f idem vio- 
lare, to break one's word. 

Fieri, fact (416), to become, be made. 

Figura, Re, figure. 

Filia, ae (D. pi. flliabus), daughter. 

Films, i, son. 

Finire (finis), iv, it, to finish. 

Finis, is (m. and /.sing., m. pi.), end. 

Firmtis, a, urn, firm. 

Flagitium, i, crime. 

Flere, flev, net, to weep. 

Florere (fios), u, to flourish, bloom. 

Florescere (florere), to begin to 
bloom. 



LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



283 



Flos, oris, flower. 

Fluere, x, x, to flow. 

Fliimen, inis, river, stream. 

Foedus, ens, treaty. 

Fortis, e, brave. 

Fortiter {fortis), bravely. 

Fort una, ae , fo riune. 

Frangere, freg, tract, to break, 

Frater, fcris, brother. 

Fraudare, av, at, to defraud. 

Fretiis, a, tim, relying on. 

Fiigus, oris, cold* 

Frutex, icis, m., shrub. 

Fuga, ae, flight. 

Fugare {fuga), av, at, to put to 

flight. 
Fugere (io), fug, fugit, to flee. 
Fundus, I, estate, farm. 
Fungi, funct, to discharge, fulfil. 
Furtum, I, theft. 
Futuriis, a, urn, future. 

G. 

Gallicus {Gallia), a, um, Gallic. 

Gallus, I, a Gaul. 

Gener, I, son-in-law. 

Genus, ens, kind, nature. 

Gerere, gess, gest, to carry on, to 

wage (as war). 
Germania, ae, Germany. 
Gladius, I, sword. 
Gloria, ae, glory. 
Graeci, ortim, the Greeks. 
Granum, I, grain. 
Gratia, ae, gratitude, favor ; pi., 

thanks. 
Gravis, e, heavy. 
Grex, egis, m. flock, herd. 

H. 

Habere, u, it, to have. 
Habitare {habere), av, at, to inha- 
bit. 
Haediis, I, kid. 
Hannibal, alis, Hannibal. 
Hasta, ae, spear. 
Herds, Sis, hero. 
Hesternus, a, um, of yesterday. 
Hie, baec, hoc, this. 
Hiems, emis, winter. 
Historia, ae, history. 



Homo, mis, man. 

Honor, oris, honor. 

Hortulus {hortus), little garden. 

Hortus, I, garden. 

Hostis, is, enemy. 

Humaniis, a, iim, human, natural to 

man. 
Humerus, i, shoulder. 



Ibi, there. 

Idem, eadem, idem, same. 

Ideo, therefore. 

Igitiir, therefore. 

Ignarus, a, um, ignorant. 

Ignavus, a, iim, indolent, cowardly. 

Ignis, is, m., fire, heat 

Ignoratio, onis, ignorance. 

Ignoscere, 6v, ot, to pardon. 

Ille, ilia, illud, that, he, she, it 

Illustrare, av, at, to illumine, to en- 
lighten. 

Immensiis, a, iim, immense. 

Immergere, rs, rs, to plunge into. 

Immobiiis, e, immovable. 

Immor talis, e, immortal. 

Impedire, iv, it, to impjede, hinder. 

Impendere, to overhang y threaten. 

Imperare, av, at, to command; im- 
perata, orum, commands. 

Imperator {imperare), oris, com" 
mander. 

Impetus, us, attack. 

Impius, a, um, impious. 

ImprSbiis, a, um, bad, wicked. 

Imprudens, entis, imprudent. 

In {prep, with ace. or obi.), with ace, 
into, to, against ; with abl., in, 

Incendere, d, s, to set on fire, to burn. 

Incept iim, I, beginning. 

Incertiis, a, iim, uncertain. 

Incognitiis, a, iim, unknown. 

Incola {in and colere), ae, inhabi- 
tant. 

Incolumis, e, safe, uninjured. 

Incredibilis {in and credere), e, in- 
credible. 

Indicere-, dix, diet, to declare (as 
war). 

Indigniis, a, iim, unworthy. 

Indoctiis, a, iim, unlearned. 



284 



FIRST LATIIS T BOOS. 



Indulgere, Is, It, to indulge. 

Industria, ae, industry. 

Inferre, intul, illat (414), to wage. 

Infra {prep, with ace), below. 

Infiigere, flix, met, to inflict. 

Ingenium, I, talent, ability. 

Injuria, ae, injury, wrong done. 

Innocens, tis, innocent. 

Imioxius, a, iiin, harmless. 

Instruere, strux, struct, to arrange, 
array. 

Intelligere, lex, lect, to understand. 

Inter {prep, with ace), between, dur- 
ing.^ 

Interdurn, sometimes. 

Interesse, fu, fiit, to be engaged in. 

Interficere (io), fee, feet, to kill. 

Interim, in the meam time, mean- 
while. 

Intervalium, i, distance, space. 

Intra {prep, with ace), within. 

Inutilis, e, useless. 

Invadere {in and vddere), vas, vas, 
io invade. 

Invenire, ven, vent, to find. 

Invi'dere, vid, vis, to envy. 

Invitus, a, una, unwilling. 

Ipse, a, urn, self, he hiynself 

Ira, ae, anger. 

Ire, iv, it, to go. 

Irritare, av, at, to irritate. 

Is, ea, id, he, she, it, that. 

Iste, a, tid, that. 

Italia, ae, Italy. 

Itaque, therefore. 

Iter, itineris, journey, way. 

Iterum, again. 



Jubere, juss, juss, to direct, order. 
Jficundus, a, urn, pleasant, delight- 

fu]. 
Judex, icis, judge. 
Judicare, av, at, to judge. 
Jurare, av, at, to swear. 
Justus, a, um, just, fair. 



Labor, oris, labor. 
Laborare, av, at, to labor 
Lana, ae. wool. 



Latinus, i, Latinus, a Icing of La 

tium. 
Laudare, av, at, to praise. 
Laus, dis, praise. 

Lavare, lav, laut, or lavat, to wash. 
Lavinia, ae, Lavinia, daughter of 

Latinus. 
Legatiis, i, ambassador. 
Legere, leg, lect, to read. 
Legio, onis, legion, body of foot. 
Lenis, e, mild, merciful. 
Leo, onis, lion. 
Lex, legis, law. 
Liber, libn, booh. 
Liber, a, iim, free. 
LiberL 6mm, children. 
Licet (impers. v.), it is lawful. 
Licet, although. 
Liquescere, lieu, to melt. 
Liter ae, arum (pi.), letter, epistle. 
Locuples, etis, wealthy, rich. 
Locus, I (pi. loci or Idea), place, 
Loqui, lucutj to speak. 
Lucere, lux, to shine. 
Luctus, us, grief, sorrow, 
Luciis, I, grove. 
Ludere, lus, lus, to play, 
Ludiis, I, play, sport. 
Lugere, lux, to grieve, mourn, weep 

for. 
Luna, ae, moon. 
Lupus, I, wolf 
Luscinia, ae, nightingale. 
Lux, lucis, light. 



M. 



Maciilare, av, at, to stain, to blem- 
ish, 

Magister, tn, master as teacher. 

Magnitudo {magnus), inis, greatness, 
size. 

Magnus, a, iim, great, large ; magni, 
at a great price, highly ; magnum 
est, it is a great thing. 

Major, iis {comp. of magnus), greater 
larger. 

Male {malus), badly. 

Malle, malu (410), to prefer 

Maliim, I, evil, misfortune. 

Maliis, a, iim, bad. 

Manere, ns, ns, to remain. 



LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



285 



Mantis, us//., hand, force. 

Mare, is, sea'. 

Marams, a, um, marine, of the sea. 

Mater, tris, mother. 

Matrona, ae, matron. 

Maximus, a, urn (superl. ofmagnus), 
greatest, very great ; maximi, at 
a very great price. 

Mediciis, I, physician. 

Medius, a, urn, middle, midst of, mid- 
dle of, 267. 

Mel, mellis, honey. 

Mendaciilm, lie, falsehood. 

Mens, tis, mind, the reasoning fa- 
culty. 

Mensis, is, m., month. 

Metuere, u, to fear. 

Mettis, us, fear. 

Meuc, a, iim (masc. voc. sing., mi), my. 

Micare, u, to glitter, shine. 

Miles, itis, soldier. 

Militia, ae, military service; mlii- 
tiae {gen. sing), in war, on service. 

Mille, thousand. 

Minor, tis (comp. of parvus), smaller. 

Mirabilis, e, wonderful. 

Miser, a, um, miserable, wretched. 

Misereri, ert or erit, to pity. 

Miseret (impers. verb), it pities, one 
pities. 

Mittere, mis, miss, to send. 

Mobilis, e, movable. 

Modo, only. 

Monere, u, it, to advise, admonish. 

Mons, tis, m., mountain. 

Monstrare, av, at, to shoiv. 

Mordere, momord, mors, to bite. 

Mors, tis, death. 

Mortalis (mors), e, mortal. 

Movere, mov, mot, to move. 

Miilier, eris, woman. 

Multitudo (midtus), mis, multitude. 

Multtis, a, um, much, many; multa 
(neut. pi.), many things ; multum 
bom, much good; multum tem- 
poris, much time. 

Mtiriis, I, wall. 

Mutare, av, at, to change. 



K 



Nare, nav, to swim. 

Narrare, av, at, to relate, narrate. 

Narratio (narrare), narration, nar 

rative. 
NascI, nat, to be born. 
Natio, onis, nation. 
Ne, interrog. particle, 287 and 288. 
Ne (used with imperat. and subj.), not 
Nee, neither; nee — nee, neither — 

nor. 
Negligere, lex, lect, to disregard. 
Nemo (inis, not in good use), nobody, 

no one. 
Nequidem, not even, generally i^ith 

the emphatic word between the 

two parts ; as, ne populus quidem, 

not even the people. 
Nere, nev, net, to spin. 
Nescire, Iv, it, not to know, to be ig- 
norant of. 
Nidiis, I, nest. 
Nihil, nothing. 

Nimius, a, um, too much, excessive, 
Mx, nivis, snow. 
Nocere, u, it, to hurt. 
Nolle, nolu (410), to be unwilling. 
Nomen, inis, name. 
Non, not; non solum — sed etiam, 

not only — but also. 
Nondum, not yet 
Nonne, interrog. particle ; expects 

ans, yes. 288, Rem. 
Noster, tra, trum, our. 
November, bris (abl. I), November. 
Nox, noctis, night. 
Nubes, is, cloud. 

Nullus, a, iim (113, R.), no, no one. 
Niim, interrog. particle; expects 

ans, no. 288, Rem. [Rome. 

Niima, ae, Numa, second king of 
Nunc, now. 

Numerare, av, at, to number. 
Numertis, i, number. 
Nunquam, never. 
Nuntiare (nuntius), av, at, to an 

nounce, report. 
Nuntius, I, messenger. 



O. 



Nam, for. 
ETainque, for. 



O (interjection), O. 
O si, if, would that 



286 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



Obesse, fu, fut, to be prejudicial to. 

ObllviscI, oblit, to forget 

Obses, idis, hostage. 

Obstare, stit, stat, to oppose, prevent 

Obtmere, inu, ent, to acquire, obtain. 

Occasio, onis, occasion. 

Occldere (pb and caedere), eld, cis, to 
kill. 

Occidere (ob and cadere), cid, cas, to 
fall. 

Occultare (occulere), av, at, to con- 
ceal, hide. 

Octo, eight 

O cuius, I, eye. 

Odium, I, hatred. 

Off iciiim, I, duty. 

Olim, once, formerly. 

Omnino, in all. 

Omnis, e, all, every. 

Oportet (impers), it behooves, one 
ought. 

Optic, onis, choice. 

Opus, ens, work. 

Oratio, onis, oration. 

Orator, oris, orator. 

Ornare, av, at, to adorn. 

Ovis, is, sheep. 



Pabulaii, at, to forage. 

Pallium, I, cloak. 

Parare, av, at, to prepare. 

Par ere, u, it, to obey. 

Parcere, peperc, parcit, to spare. 

Pars, tis, part 

Parvus, a, inn, small, little; par- 
vtini, little, a little ; parvi, at a 
low price; parvi aestimare, to 
think little of. 

Pastor (pascere), oris, shepherd. 

Pater, tris, father. 

Patria, ae, native country. 

Paucus, a, urn, little, feio. 

Pauper, eris, a poor man. 

Pausanias, ae, Pausanias, a distin- 
guished Spartan general. 

Pavo, 6nis, peacock. 

Pax, pacis, peace. 

Peccare, av, at, to sin, do wrong. 

Pecunia, ae, money. 

Pendere, pepend, to hang. 



Per (prep, with ace), through. 
Perdere, did, dit, to waste. 
Perfidia, ae, perfidy. 
Perfugiiim, I, refuge. 
Perlculosus (periculuni), a, iim, dan 

gerous. 
Peritus, a, urn, skilful, skilled in. 
Pernicies, ei, destruction. 
Perpetuo, for ever. 
Perspicere (io), ex, ect, to perceive 

see. 
Persuadere, s, s, to persuade. 
Pertimescere, timu, to fear greatly, 
Pervenire, ven, vent, to arrive at t 

reach. 
Pes, pedis, foot. 
Petere, Iv or i, it, to seek. 
Philosophus, I, philosopher. 
Pietas, atis, piety, faithfulness. 
Piget (impers), it irks, one is grieved 

at ; me piget, lam grieved. 
Piscis, is, m.j fish. 
Pius, a, um, pious. 
Placare, av, at, to appease. 
Placere, u, it, to please. 
Plane, plainly. 
Plurimiis, a, iim (superl. of multus), 

very much or great; pi., very 

many. 
Poema, atis, poem. 
Poenitet {impers), it repents, one re 

pe?its. 
Poeta, ae, poet 
Ponere, posu, posit, to place. 
Pons, tis, m., bridge. 
Popularis (populus), e, popidar. 
Populus, I, people. 
Porta, ae, gate. 
Poscere, poposc, to demand. 
Posse, potu (irreg., 407), to be able. 
Possidere, ed, ess, to possess. 
Post (prep, with ace), after. 
Postera, urn {mas. not used), next^ 

following. 
Postulate, av, at, to demand. 
Potiri, it, to get possession of. 
Prae (prep, with abl.), before, in 

comparison vjith. 
Praebere, u, it, to furnish, offer. 
Praeceptum, I, precept, instruction* 
Praeda, ae, booty. 
Praeditiis, a, iim, endued with. 



LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



28; 



Praeinittere, mis, miss, to send before. 

Praeparare, av, at, to prepare. 

Praesens, tis, present. 

Praestans, tis, excellent 

Praestat {impers.), it is better. 

Praeteritus, a, um, past ; neut. pi., 
the past. 

Pratuni, I, meadow. 

Pretiosiis, a, um, valuable. 

Primus, a, iim, first. 

Princeps {primus and caper e), ipis, 
chief, leader. 

Privare, av, at, to deprive. 

Privatus, a, um, private, personal. 

Pro {prep, with abl.), for, before. 

Probus, a, tim, honest. 

Prodesse, prom, profut, to profit. 

Proditio, onis, treachery. 

Proditor, oris, traitor. 

Producere, dux, duct, to lead for- 
ward, or out. 

Proeliiim, i, battle. 

Prof icisci, feet, to set out, to march. 

Promittere, mis, miss, to promise. 

Promovere, mov, mot, to move for- 
ward, advance. 

Propensus, a, tim, inclined to. 

Propior, us {comp.), nearer. 

Providus, a, um, cautious, prudent. 

Pro vincia {pro and vincere), ae, pro- 
vince. 

Proximu3, a, tim, nearest, next'. 

Prudens, tis, prudent, cautious. 

Pmdentia {prudens), ae, prudence. 

Pudor, oris, shame, modesty. 

Puella, ae, girl. 

Puer, i, boy. 

Piignare {pugna), av, at, to fight. 

Pulcher, cbra, chnim, beautiful. 

Punire, iv, it, to punish. 

Piitare, av, at, to think, regard. 

Q. 

Quaestio, onis, question. 

Quam {adv.), how ; quam multi, how 
many ; with superl. intensive, as 
quam maximus, as great as pos- 
sible. 

Quam {conj.), than. 

QnamvEs, however, however much. 

Quantus, a, um, how great. 



Quare, wherefore. 

Quarttis, a, um, fourth. 

Quasi, as if. 

Quatuor, four. 

Que (always appended to another 

word), and. 
Qui, quae, quod, who, which, that. 
Qui, quae, quod {interrog.), who, 

which, what ? 
Quia, because. 

Quiescere, e\ et, to rest, be quiet. 
Quin (473), that not, but that. 
Quinque, five. 
Quintus, a, um, fifth. 
Quis, quae, quid {interrog. mbs.), 

who, which, ivhat ? 
Quo, that, in order that. 
QuomTnus (4^2), that not, from. 
Quoque, also. 
Qutim, ivhen; quum — tinn, both— 

and. 



R. 



Ratio, onis, reason. 

Recipere (i6), cep, cept, to receive. 

Recordari, at, to remember, call to 

mind. 
Redire, i, it, to return. 
Reducere, dux, duct, to lead back. 
Referre, tul, lat, to relate. 
Regere, rex, rect, to rule, govern. 
Regina, ae, queen. 
Regnare, av, at, to reign. 
Regniim, i, kingdom, government. 
Reliquus, a, um, remaining, the r&*> 
Reperire, reper, repert, to find. 
Res, rei, thing, affair. 
Resistere, stit, to resist. 
Respondere, d, s, to answer. 
Responsum, i, ansioer, response, 
Respuere, pu, to reject. 
Reus, i, criminal. 
Revertere, vert, vers, to return, fc<mf 

back. 
Rex, regis, king. 
Rlienus, i, Rhine. 
Ridere, ris, ris, to laugh, laugh at. 
Robustus, a, iim, robust, strong. 
Rogare, av, at, to ask, entreat. 
Roma", ae, Rome. 
Romanils {Roma), a, um, Roman. 



2S3 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



Romulus, I, Romulus. 
Rotundus, a, iim, round. 
Ruere, ru, rut (ruit), to rush. 
Rumor, oris, rumor. 
F'lmpere, rup, rupt, to break, vio- 
late. 
Rus, ruris, n., country. 



S. 



Sacerdos, otis, priest, priestess. 

Saepe, often. 

Saevire (saevus), iv (i), it, to rage. 

Sagitta, ae, arrow. 

Saltare, av, at, to dance. 

Saltis, utis, safety. 

Sanare, av, at, to cure, reform. 

Sancire, x, ct, to enact, confirm. 

Sanguis, inis, m., blood. 

Sapere, iv or i, to be wise. 

Sapiens, entis, wise. 

Sapientia, ae, wisdom. 

Satiare, av, at, to satisfy. 

Satis, enough. 

Sceptriim, I, sceptre. 

Scientia, ae, knowledge. 

Sclpio, 6nis, Scipio, a distinguished, 
Roman. 

Scire, iv, it, to know. 

Scribere, ps, pt, to write. 

Secundiis, a, um, second. 

Sed, but. 

Semen, inis, seed. 

Semper, always. 

Sempiternus, a, um, lasting, eter- 
nal. 

Senator, oris, senator. 

Senatus {senex), us, senate. 

Senecttis, utis, old age. 

Senex, senis, an old man. 

Senstis, tis, feeling, perception. 

Sententia, ae, sentiment. 

S entire, s, s, to perceive, to feel (as 
pain). 

Sepellre, peliv or i, pult, to bury. 

Sermo, onis, discourse. 

Servare, av, at, to keep, observe, 
save. 

Servire, iv, it, to serve, be slave to. 

Servius, 1, Servius, a man's name. 

Servus, 1, slave. 

Seu — seu, whether — or, either — or. 



Sex, six. 

SI, if 

Sic, so. 

Siciit, so as, just as. 

Simplex, icis, simple. 

Simulatio, onis, assumed appearance^ 
pretence. 

Sine {prep, with abl.\ without. 

Sinus, us, bosom. 

Siren, enis, siren. 

Sitire, iv, it, to thirst 

Sive — sive, whether — or. 

Socrates, is, Socrates, the celebrated 
Grecian philosopher. 

Sol, solis, m., sun. 

Somnus, I, sleep. 

Sonus, I, sound. 

Soror, oris, sister. 

Spargere, rs, rs, to scatter, sow. 

Speciosus {species), a, iim, specious, 
plausible. 

Spectare {specere), av, at, to look at, 
behold. 

Sperare, av, at, to hope for. 

Spes, el, hope. 

Splendens, tis, shining. 

Spoliare, av, at, to rob of di 
spoil. 

Stabilitas, atis, firmness, stability. 

Statim {stare), immediately. 

Stella, ae, star. 

Studere, u, to study, strive for. 

Studiosus, a, iim, studious. 

Stultitia, ae, folly. 

Suadere, s, s, to advise. 

Subvenlre, ven, vent, to aid. 

Succurrere, curr, curs, to aid, suc- 
cor. 

Suere, su, sut, to sew, stitch. 

Sui, sib! (257), of himself, herself 
&c. 

Sulla, ae, Sulla, a man's name. 

Summus, a, um, highest, greatest, 
sometimes the top of (26*7) ; sum- 
mus mons, the top of the moun* 
tain. 

Suniptus, tis, expense.- 

Superare, av, at, to surpass, conquer, 
to go over. 

Superficies, el, surface. 

Supervacuiis, a, um, unnecessary. 

Supplicatio, onis, thanksgiving. 



LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



289 



Sflpra {adv. and prep, with ace), 
above. 

Snstinere, u, tent, to sustain, en- 
dure. 
S litis, a, iim, his, her, &c. 

T. 

Tacere, u, it, to be silent, to pass over 

in silence. 
Tarn, so; tarn— quam, so — as. 
Tamen, yet 

Tangere, tetig, tact, to touch. 
Tanquam, as if. 
Tantiis, a, um, so great. 
Tarentum, I, Tarentum, a town in 

Italy. 
Tardus, a, iim, slow. 
Tarquiniiis, 1, Tarquin, one of the 

kings of Rome. 
Tectum {teg ere), I, roof house. 
Tegere, tex, tect, to cover. 
Tempiis, oris, time. 
Tenere, u, t, to hold. 
Tentare, av, at, to try, attempt. 
Terra, ae, the earth. 
Terrere, u, it, to terrify. 
Tertius, a, um, third. 
Tibiir, uris, Tibur, a town in Italy. 
Timere, u, to fear. 
Timidus, a, iim, timid. 
Tondere, totond, tons, to shear, 

shave. 
Totus, a, um (1 13, R.), the whole, the 

entire. 
Tran quillus, a, um, calm, tranquil. 
Transire, i, it, to go over. 
Tres, tria, three. 

Trojaniis (Troja), a, um, Trojan. 
Tu, tui, thou. 
Tullia, ae, Tullia, a queen of 

Rome. 
Turpiis, e, base, disgraceful. 
Turris, is (ace, em or %m ; abl., e or i), 

tower. 
Tuus, a, um, your. 

IT. 

Ullus, a, um (113, R.), any. • 

Unde, whence. 

Unquam, ever. \ 

13 



Unus, a, um (113, R.), one, single, 

single one. 

Urbs, ib, city. 

Ursils, I, bear. 

Usque, as far as; usque ad, even 
to. 

Ut {conj.), that, as. 

Utl, us, to use. 

Utilis, e, useful. 

UtiLitas {utilis), atis, utility, advan- 
tage. 

Utinam {conj.), would that. 

Utrum {interrog. part), whether; 
utriim — an, whether — or. 

Uya, ae, grape, 

V. 

Vacare, av, at, to have leisure for. 

Vel {co7ij.), or; vel — vel, either— 
or. 

Velle, volu (410), to wish, be wil- 
ling. 

Velox, ocis, swift. 

Venarl, at, to hunt. 

Vendere, did, dit, to sell. 

Venire, ven, vent, to come. 

Ver, veris, n., spring. 

Verbum, I, word. 

Vereri, it, to fear. 

Ver6, indeed, truly. 

Yerus, a, um, true, real ; veruro, 
truth. 

Yeruntamen, but yet. 

Vester, tra, trum, your. 

Yestis, is, garment. 

Yetustus, a, um, ancient. 

Via, ae, way, road. 

Victima, ae, victim. 

Victoria, ae, Victoria* 

Yidere, vid, vis, to see ; pass., yt 
deri, to seem. 

Vigilare {vigil), av, at, to watch 

Viginti, tioenty. 

Vincere, vie, vict, to conquer. 

Vincire, vinx, vinct, to bind. 

Vinculum, I, chain. 

Yindicare, av, at, to avenge. 

Violare, av, at, to violate, wrongs 
break. 

Vir, viri, man, hero. 

Virgo, inis, virgin, maiden, 



290 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



Virtus, utis, virtue, manliness. 

Vis, vis (ace., vim), pi., vires, vlrium, j 

&c, force, strength. 
Vita, ae, /z/e. 

Vitare, av, at, to shun, avoid. 
Vrtuperare, av, at, fo blame, criticise 
Vivere. vix, vict, to live. 



Vocare, av, at, to ca£Z. 
Volare, av, at, fo^y. 
Voluptas, atis, pleasure. 
Vox, vocis, voice. 
Vulnerare, av, at, to vound 
Vulnus, eris, wound. 
Vuipes, 1S9 fox. 



ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 



A. 



Ability, ingenium, I. 

About, de (with abl.). 

Above, supra {adv. and prep, with 

ace). 
Abridgment, epitome, es. 
Accept, accipere (io), cep, cept 

(550). 
Accomplish, efficere (io), fee, feet. 
Accuse, accusare, av, at. 
Achilles, Achilles, is. 
Acquire, obtinere, tinu, tent. 
Acquit, absolvere, v, fit. 
Act, v., facer e (io), fee, fact. 
Admiration, acmiiratio, onis. 
Admonish, ruonere, u, it, admonere, 

&c. 
Adorn, ornare, av, at. 
Advance, promovere, mov, mot. 
Advantage, utilitas, atis. 
Advice, consilium, 1. 
Advise, suadere, s, s ; monere, u, it. 
Aeneas, Aeneas, ae. 
Affair, res, rei. 
After, post (with ace). 
Again, lteriim. 

Again and again, etiam atque etiam. 
Against, in (ace.) ; contra (ace). 
Aid, s., adjumentiim, I ; auxiliiim, 1 
Aid, v., sub venire, ven, vent, aclju- 

vare, jtiv, jut. 
All (as a whole), cunctus, a, um. 
All (every), omms, e. 
Alps, Alpes, ium. 
^4/so, etiam, quoque. 
Altar, ara, ae. 
Although, licet 
Always, semper. 
Ambassador, legatiis, 1. 
American, Americaniis, a, um. 



Amphibious animal, amphibium, J 
Ample, amplus, a, um. 
Anchises, Ancliises, ae. 
Ancient, vetustus, a, urn. 
And, et, que (enclitic), ac. 
Anger, Ira, ae. 
Animal, animal, alis. 
Announce, nuntiare, av, at (540). 
Answer, s., responsum, 1. 
Answer, v., respondere, d, s. 
Any, ullus, a, um (113, K.). 
Any one, aliquis, a, quid. 
Appearance, facies, el. 
Appease, placare, av, at. 
Appoint, constituere, u, ut. 
Approach, s:, adventus, us (521). 
Approach, v., appropinquare, av, at; 

accedere, cess, cess. 
Arm, brachium, I 
Armor-bearer, armiger, 1. 
Army, exercitiis, us. 
Arouse, excitare, av, at. 
Arrange, constituere, u, tit. 
Arrange, array, instruere, ux, uct. 
Arrest, comprehendere, d, s. 
Arrival, adventus, us (521). 
Arrive at, per venire, ven, vent. 
Arrow, sagitta, ae. 
Art, ars, artis. 
As, tit. 

As far as, usque. 
As if, quasi, tanquam. 
As possible, quam with superl. (309). 
Ascanius, Ascanius, 1. 
Ascertain, cognoscere, nov, nit 
Ask, rogare, av, at. 
Ask advice, con^ulere, lu, It. 
Ass, asiniis, 1. 

Assemble, con venire, ven, vent (550). 
Assent, give assent, aunuere, u, ut. 
Assumed appearance, simulatio, onis 



292 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



At a high price, roagni; at a very 

high price, maximi. 
At a low price, parvL 
At home, doml. 
Athenian, Atheniensis, e. 
Athens, Athenae, arum. 
Attack, impetus, us. 
Attain, attingere, tig, tact. 
Attempt, tentare, av, at. 
Audacious, audax, acis. 
Author, auctor, oris. 
Autumn, auctumuiis, I. 
Avarice, avaritia, ae. 
Avaricious, avarus, a, urn. 
Avenge, vindicare, av, at. 
Avoid, vitare, av, at. 



E. 



Bad, improbiis, a, um ; malus, a, iim. 

Badly, male. 

Bake, coquere, cox, coct. 

Balbus, Balbiis, I. 

Banish, expellere, pul, puis. 

Base, turpis, e. 

Battle, proelium, I. 

Be, esse, fu, fut. 

Be able, posse, potu. 

Be born, nasci, nat. 

Be engaged in, interesse, fu, fat. 

Be ignorant of, nesclre, Iv (i),.it. 

Be made, fieri, fact. 

Be on one's guard against, cavere, 

cav, caut. 
Be prejudicial to, obesse, fu, fut. 
Be present, ad esse, fu, fut. 
Be quiet, quiescere, quiev, quiet. 
Be silent, tacere, u, it. 
Be slave to, servire, Iv, it. 
Be unwilling, nolle, nolu. 
Be ivilling, velle, volu. 
Be wise, sapere, Iv or i. 
Bear, s., ursus, I. 
Bear, v., ferre, tul, lat. 
Beard, barba, ae. 
Beautiful, pulcher, chra, chrum. 
Because, quia. 
Become, fieri, fact. 
Before (adv.), antea. 
Before (prep.), ante, coram, prae, pro. 
Beg for, sue for, petere, Iv (i), it. 
Benin to blr>nn, florescere (544). 



Beginning, inceptum, L 

Behold, spectare, av, at. 

Believe, credere, credid, credit 

Below, infra (with ace). 

Benefit, benef lciiim, I. 

Between, inter (with ace.). 

Bind, vinclre, vinx, vinct. 

Bird, avis, is,/. 

Bite, mordere, momord, mora 

Blame, s., culpa, ae. 

Blame, v., vituperare, av, at 

Blind, caeciis, a, una. 

Blood, sanguis, inis, m. 

Bloom, florere, u. 

Body, corpus, oris. 

Book, liber, libri. 

Booty, praeda. 

Bosom, sintis, us. 

Both — and, et — et; qutLn — tuo. 

Boy, puer, I. 

Brave, fortis, e. 

Bravely, fortiter. 

Break, frangere, freg, fract ; rum- 

pere, rup, rupt ; violare, av, at : 

break one's word, f idem violare. 
Bribery, ambitiis, us. 
Bridge, pons, tis, m. 
Bring, bring to, afferre, attul, allat. 
Bring water, aquaii, at. 
Brother, frater, tris. 
Brutus, Brutus, I. 
Build, aedificare, av, at; construere, 

x, ct ; condere, did, dit. 
Building, aedif iciiim, I. 
Burn, incendere, d, s. 
Bury, sepelire, iv (i), pult. 
But, sed, at, autem. 
But, now (in reasoning), atqui. 
But, but yet, attamen, veruntamen. 
But that, quin. 
Buy emere, em, empt. 
By {with voluntary agent), a, Kk t ftp*, 

in other cases indicated by abl* 

C. 

Caesar, Caesar, aris. 
Caius, Caius, 1. 
Calamity, calamitas, atis. 
Call, vocare, av, at. 
Call to mind, recordari, at. 
Calm, tranquillus, a, una. 



ENGLISH-LATIX VOCABULARY. 



293 



Camp, castra, oriim. 

Captive, captivus, I. 

Card\ carpere, ps, pt. 

Carry, ferre, tul, lat. 

Carry on (as war), gerere, gess, gest. 

Carthage, Carthago, inis. 

Carthaginian, Carthaginiensis, e. 

Catch, deprehendere, d, s. 

CoMkus, prudens, tis; providus, 

a, um. 
0<zvalry, equitatus, us. 
Cave, antrum, I. 
Celebrated, celeber, bris, bre. 
Censure, vituperare, av, at. 
Certain, certus, a, iim. 
Chain, vinculum, I; catena, ae. 
Change, nrutare, av, at. 
Chariot, currus, us. 
Chastise, castigare, av, at. 
Chief, princeps, cipis. 
Children, liberi, oriim. 
Choice, optio, onis. 
Christian, Christianus, I. 
Cicero, Cicero, 6ms. 
Citadel, arx, arcis. 
Citizen, civis, is. 
City, urbs, urbis. 
Civil, civilis, e (528). 
Clemency, dementia, ae. 
Cloak, pallium, L 
Cloud, nubes, is. 
Cold, frigiis, oris. 
Collect, comparare, av, at 
Color, color, oris. 
Come, venire, ven, vent. 
Come together, convenire, ven, vent. 
Command* v., imperare, av, at. 
Commands, s., imperata, oriim. 
Commander, imperator, oris (521). 
Compel, compellere, pul, puis. 
Conceal, occultare, av, at. 
Concerning, de {xvith abl.). 
Condemn, damnare, av, at. 
Condition, conditio, onis. 
Conference, colloquium, I. 
Confine, continere, tinu, tent. 
Confirm, sanclre, sanx, sanct. 
Conquer, siiperare, av, at ; vincere. 

vie, vict ; devincere, vie, vict. 
Construct, construere, x, ct. 
Consul, consul, lilis. 
Consult, consulere, lu, It. 



Contend, concertare, av, at 
Contented, contenttis, a, una. 
Contest, certamen, inis. 
Convert, convertere, t, s. 
Cook, coquere, cox, coct. 
Correct, corrigere, rex, rect 
Corrupt, corrumpere, rup, rupt 
Council, concilium, i. 
Country, rus, ruris. 
Cover, tegere, tex, tect. 
Cowardly, ignavus, a, um. 
Crime, flagitium, i. 
Criminal, reus, i. 
Criticise, vituperare, av, at. 
Groivn, s., corona, ae. 
Crown, crown with a garland, corona 

cingere, nx, net 
Cry out, exclamare, av, at. 
Cidtivate, colere, colu, cult 
Cure, sanare av, at 



D. 



Dance, saltare, av, at. 

Dangerous, periculosus, a, um. 

Daring, audax, acis. 

Daughter, filia, ae. 

Day, dies, ei. 

Death, mors, tis. 

Deceive, decipere (io), cep, cept 

Deceptive, faliax, acis. 

Decide, decernere, crev, cret. 

Declare, indicere, dix, diet; declare 

war, bellum indicere. 
Decree, decernere, crev, cret. 
Defend, defendere, d, s. 
Defile, angustiae, arum. 
Defraud, fraudare, av, at 
Delightful, jucundiis, a, um. 
Demand, poscere, poposc; postulare 

av, at 
Demonstrate, demonstrare, av, at. 
Depart, abire, i, it. 
Deprive, privare, av, at 
Derive, have, habere, u, it 
Desire, s., cupiditas, atis. 
Desire, v., cupere (io), Iv or i, It 
Desirous of, cupidiis, a, iim. 
Despoil, spoliare, av, at 
Destroy, delere, ev, et 
Destruction, pernicie3, el. 
Deter, deterrere, u, it 



294 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



Dido, DiOo, onls. 

Difficult, cliff icilis, e. 

Diligence, diligentia, ae. 

Diligent, diligens, tis, 

Direct, order, jubere, juss, juss. 

Discharge, fungi, funct. 

Discourse, serruo, onis. 

Discover, conspicere (io), spex, spect. 

Disgraceful, turpis, e. 

Dismiss, dimittere, mis, miss. 

Disregard, negligere, lex, lect. 

Distance, interyallum, I. 

Divide, dividere, yis, vis. 

Divine, divinus, a, iim. 

Divitiacus, Divitiacus, I. 

Do, facere (io), fee, fact. 

Do good to, prodesse, profu, profut 

Do wrong, peecare, av, at. 

Dog, eanis, is. 

Doubt, diibitare, av, at. 

Dove, columba, ae. 

Drink, bibere, bib, bibit. 

Drive, agere, eg, act; compellere, 

pul, puis. 
During, inter (with ace). 
Duty, officium, I. 
Dwell, habitare, av, at. 



E, 



Eagle, aquna, ae. 

Earth, terra, ae. 

Easy, facilis, e. 

Eat, edere, ed, es. 

Edifice, aedif icium, I. 

Effect, efficere (io), fee, feet. 

Eight, octo. 

Either — or, aut — aut. 

Elegance, elegantia, ae. 

Elephant, elepkas, antis, 

Enact, sancire, x, ct. 

End, finis, is, m. and/. 

Endued with, praedltiis, a, iim. 

Endure, sustinere, tinu, tent; ferre 

tul, lat 
Enemy, hostis, is, c. 
Engage {as battle), committer*?,, mis 

miss ; engage battle, proeliiim com- 

mittere. 
Enjoy, frui, fruct (fruit). 
Enlighten, illustrare, av, at. 
Enough, satis. 



Entire, totiis, a, iim 113, R.), 
Entreat, rogare, av, $.£. 
Enumerate, enumerare, av, at 

. invidere, vid, vis. 
Epistle, epistoia, ae ; literae, arum 
Equity, aequitas, atis. 
Err, errare, av, at. 
Estate, fundus, I. 
Eternal* seropiternus, a, urn. 
Even, etiam. 
Even to, usque ad. 
Ever, unquam. 
Every, omnis, e. 
Evil,. malum, I. 
Excellent, praestans, tis. 
Excessive, ninuus, a, iim. 
Excite, excitare, av, at. 
Exclaim, exclarnare, av, at 
Exercise, exercere, u, it. 
Expect, exspectare, av, at. 
Expel, expeliere, pul, puis. 
Expense, sumptus, us. 
Explain, exponere, posu, posit. 
Eye, oculus, L 



F. 



Fabulous, fabulosiis, a, iim. 

Face, fades, el. 

Faith, fides, ei. 

Faithful, fidelis, e. 

Faithfulness, pietas, atis. 

^cdl, cadere, cecid, cas; occidere. 

cid, cas. 

'alse, fallax, aeis (535). 

alsehood, mendacium, I. 
Farm, fundus, I. 

father, pater, patris. 
'ault, culpa, ae. 
Faustulus, Faustuliis, L 
Favor, s., gratia, ae. 
Favor, v., favere, fav, faut. 
Fear, s., metus, us. 
Fear, v., timere, u ; metuere, u, ut 

vereri, it 
Fear greatly, pertimescere, jtkl. 
Feast, coena, ae. 
Feel (as pain, &c), sentire ► % 
Feeling, sensiis, us. 
Few+ pauci, ae, a. 
Fidelity, fides, el. 
Field, ager, agn. 



*> 



ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 



295 



Fifth, qumtiis, a, urn. 
Fight, pugnare, av, at. 
Figure, fitgura, ae. 
Fill, complere, ev, et. 

Find, invenire, ven, vent ; repeiire, 

reper, repert. 
Fine, beautiful, pulcher, chra, chrum. 
Finish, finire, Iv, it (540). 
Fire, ignis, is, m. 
Firm, firmus, a, urn. 
F'irmness, stabilitas, atis. 
First, primus, a, inn. 
Fish, piscis, is, m. 
Five, quinque. 
Flatterer, adulator, oris. 
Flattery, adulatio, onis. 
Flag, deglubere, ps, pt. 
Flee, ftigere (io), fug, fugit. 
Flee for refuge, confugere \ib), 

fug. 
Flee from, evolare, av, at. 
Flight, fiiga, ae. 
Flock, grex, gregis, m. 
Flourish, florere, u. 
Flow, nuere, x, x. 
Flower, flos, oris. 
Fly, volare, av, at. 
Fly away, evolare, av, at. 
Following, postera, iim (masc. nom. 

not used). 
Folly, stultitia, ae. 
Food, cibiis, I. 
Foot, pes, pedis. 
For (conj.), enim, nam, namque. 
For {prep.), pro (with abl.). 
For ever, perpetuo. 
Foiagc, pabular!, at. 
Force, mantis, us vis, vis (pi. 

vires). 
Forces, copiae, arum. 
Forget, obllvisci, oblit. 
Formerly, olim. 
Fortune, fortuna, ae. 
Found, condere, did, dit (550). 
Four, quatuSr. 
Fourth, quartiis, a, urn. 
Fox, vulpes, is. 
Free, liber, a, iim. 
Frequent, creber, bra, brum. 
Friend, amicus, I. 
Friendship, amieitia, ae. 
Frighten, t err ere. u, it. 



From, a, ab, abs, de ex, and some- 
times before participial nouns, 
quominus. 

Fulfil, fungi, funct. 

Furnish, praebere, u, it. 

Further, amplius. 

Future, futfims, a, unx 

G. 

Gallic, Gallicus, a, um. 
Game, ludtis, I. 
Ga/rden, hortiis, I. 
Garland, corona, ae. 
Garment, vestis, is. 
Gate, porta, ae. 
Gather, carpere, ps, pt. 
Gaid,a Gaul, G alius, I. 
Germany, Germania, ae. 
Get possession of, potiri, it. 
%&ift, dontim, L 
Girl, puella, ae. 
Give, dare, ded, dat; dona re, av, 

at. 
Glitter, micare, u. 
Glory, gloria, ae. 
Go, ire, iv or I, it. 
Go away, abire, i, it. 
Go over, transire, i, it ; siiperare, av, 

at. 
Gold, aurum, L 
Golden, aureus, a, iim. 
Good, bonus, a, iim. 
Govern, regere, rex, rect. 
Government, regntim, I. 
Grain, granmn, L 
Grape, uva, ae. 
Gva+Hude, gratia, ae. 
Great, magnus, a, iim ; at a great 

price, magni ; it is a great thing i 

magnum est. 
Greater, major, iis. 
Greatest, highest, summus, a, iim. 
Greatest, very great, maxrmus, a, iim,* 

at a very great price, maximl. 
Greatness, magnitudo, inis. 
Greeks, Graeci, orum. 
Grief, dolor, oris; luctiis, us. 
Grieve, dolere, u, it ; liigere, lux* 
Grove, luciis, L 

Guard, custodire, iv, it (540). 
Guide, dux, diicis. 



298 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



EL 

Hand, mantis, us. 

Hang, pendere, pepead. 

Hannibal, Hannibal, alls. 

Happily, beate. 

Happiness, felicitas, atis. 

Happy, beatus, a, iim. 

Harmless, innoxius, a, iim. 

Hatred, odium, I. 

Have, habere, u, it. 

Haivk, accipiter, tris. 

He himself, ipse, a, iim. 

He, she, it, ille, a, iid. 

He, she, or it is, est. 

Head, caput, itis. 

Hear, audlre, Iv, It. 

Heart, cor, cordis, n. 

Heat, ignis, is, m. 

Heaven, the heavens, coelum. L 

Heavy, gravis, e. 

Help, s., adjunientiim, 1. 

Help, v., adjuvare, juv, jut. 

Herd, grex, gregis, m. 

Hero, yir, virl ; heros, ois. 

Hide, occultare. ay, at. 

High, altus, a, um. 

Highest, sunmms, a, iim. 

Hinder, impedire, Iv (i), It. 

His, her, its, &c, suiis, a, iim. 

History, historia, ae. 

Hold, tenere, u, tent. 

Home, domiis, us or I, f. 

Honest, probus, a, um. 

Honey, mel, mellis. 

Honor, honor, oris. 

Hope, s., spes, el. 

Hope, hope for, sperare, ay, at. 

Horse, equiis, I. 

Horseman, eques, itis. 

Hostage, obses, idis. 

House, tectum, I ; domiis, us or I, f 

How, quam ; how many, quam multi. 

How great, quantiis, a, iim; how 

much, quantum (with gen). 
However, however much, quamyis. 
Human, humaniis, a, iim. 
Hunger, fames, is. 
Hunt, venari, at. 
Hurt, nocere, u, it. 
Husband, coumx, ugis. 
Husband/nuM, agncola, ae. 



/, ego, mel. 

If, si, dummodo. 

Ignorance, Ignoratio, onla, 

Ignorant, ignariis, a, iim. 

Illumine, iliustrare, av, at 

Immediately, statim. 

Immense, immensiis, a, iim. 

Immortal, iminortaiis, e. 

Immovable, immobilis, e. 

Impede, impedire, Iv (i), It, 

Impious, impius, a, iim. 

Imprudent, imprudens, tis. 

In, in (with abL). 

In all, omnlno. 

In comparison with, prse. 

In order that, quo. 

In person, in presence of, coram. 

In the mean time, interim. 

In such a manner, adeo. 

Inclined to, propensus, a, iim. 

Increase, augere, aux, auct : crescer& 

crev, cret. 
Incredible, incredibilis, e. (535). 
Indeed, enim, vero. 
Indolent, IgnFiviis, a, iim. 
Indulge, indulgere, Is, it. 
Industry, industria, ae. 
Inflict, infligere, x, ct. 
Inhabit, habitare, av, at 
Inhabitant, ineola, ae, (560.) 
Injury, injuria,, ae. 
Innocent, innocens, tis. 
Instruct, erudire, Iv, it. 
Instruction, consilium, I: pra?cep 

turn, I. 
Into, in (with ace). 
Invade, inyadere, vas, vas, (550.) 
Invite, call, vocare, av, at. 
Iron, ferriim, I. 
Irritate, irrltare, av, at. 
It behooves, oportet. 
It is better, prssstat. 
It is well known, is an admitted fact } 

constat. 
It is lawful, licet. 
It pities, one pities, miseret. 
It repents, one repents, pcenitet. 
Italy, Italia, ae 



ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 



297 



J. 

Journey, iter, itineris, n. 
Judge , s., judex, icis. 
Judge, v., judicare, av, at. 
Just, Justus, a, uru. 
Just as, sicut. 
Justice, sequitas, atis. 

K. 

Keep, servare, av, at. 

1M, haediis, I. 

Kill, oecldere, <£d, els; interficere 

(io), fee, feet. 
Kind, sort, s., genus, eris. 
Kind, a., benignus, a, ik. 
King, rex, regis. 
Kingdom, regnum, T. 
Know, scire, sclv, scit. 
Knowledge, scientia, ae. 
Known, cognitus, a, urn. 



Labor, s., labor, oris. 

Labor, v., laborare, av, at. 

Lamb, agniis, I. 

Large, ruagniis, a, iim ; ampliis, a, 

urn. 
Larger, major, us. 
Last, diirare, av, at. 
Lasting, sempiternus, a, um. 
Latinus, Latinus, I. 
Laugh, laugh at, ridgre, lis, lis. 
Lavinia, Lavinia, ae, 
Law, lex, legis. 
Lead, ducere, dux, duct; agere, 6g, 

act. 
Lead bach, reducere, dux, duct. 
Lead forth, educere, dux, duct. 
Lead forward or out, producere, 

dux, duct. 
Lead to, adducere, dux, duct. 
Leader, dux, dticis. 
Learn, discere, didic. 
Legion, legio, onis. 
Letter, literae, ariim : epistola, ae. 
Levy, comparare, av, at. 
Lie, a falsehood, mendacium, L 
Life, vita, ae. 
Light, lux, lucis. 

13* 



Line of battle, acies, eL - 

Lion, leo, onis. 

Listen to, audii'e, Iv, It. 

Little, parvus, a, um ; a little, par 

viim : paucus, a, iim. 
Little garden, kortuliis, I. (515). 
Live, vivere, vix, vict. 
Lofty, altus, a, iim. 
Look at, spectare, av, at. 
Lose, amittere, mis, miss. 
Love, amare, av, at. 

M. 

Maiden, virgo, inis. 

Make, facere (io), fee, fact : make a 
reply, responsiim dare. 

Man, homo, mis : vir, I. 

Manliness, virtus, utis. 

Many, multiis, a, iim ; many things 
multa. 

March, prof icisci, feet. 

Marine, of the sea, martmis, a, um. 

Master as teacher, magister, tri. 

Master as owner, dominus, I. 

Matron, matraua, ae. 

Meadow, pratiim, I. 

Meanwhile, interim. 

Meeting, concilium, I. 

Melt, liquescere, Kcu. 

Merciful, clemens, tis : lenis, e. 

Messenger, nuntiiis, I. 

Middle, midst of, middle of, medius, 
a, iim, (267.) 

Mild, lenis, e : clemens, tis. 

Mildness, dementia, ae. 

Military service, militia, ae. 

Mind, animus, I ; mind, the reason- 
ing facidty, mens, tis. 

Miserable, miser, a, iim. 

Misfortune, calamitas, atis : maliim, L 

Mislead, corrumpere, rup, rupt 

Modesty, piidor, oris. 

Money, pecunia, ae. 

Month, mensis, is, m. 

Moon, luna, ae. 

More, ampliiis, (adv.). 

Mortal, mortalis, e. 

Mother, mater, tris. 

Mountain, mons, tis, m. 

Mourn, wear mourning for, hlgere, 
x, et 



298 



FIEST LATIN BOOK, 



Movable, mobilis, e. 

Move, movere, mov, mot. 

Move forward, proinovere, mov, mot. 

Much, multus, a, um ; muck good, 
multiim bom ; much time, mul- 
tiim temporis. 

Multitude, multitudo, inis. 

My, me us, a, um. 



11 



Name, nomen, inis. 
Narrate, narrare, av, at. 
Narration, narrative, narratio, onis, 

(521.) 
Narrow pass, angustiee, arum. 
Nation, natio, onis. 
Native country, patria, ae. 
Natural to man, kumanus, a, um. 
Nature, genus, ens. 
Nearer, propior, us. 
Neither, nee ; neither — nor, nee— 

nee. 
Nest, nidiis, I. 
Never, nunquam. 
Next, nearest, proximus, a, urn; 

next following, postera, iim (masc. 

no?n. not used). 
Night, nox, noctis. 
Nightingale, luscinia, ae. 
No, no one {adj.), nullus, a, um 

(113, R.). 
No one, nobody, (sub.), nemo, (inis). 
Not, non ; with imperat. or subj., ne ; 

not only — but also, non soliim — 

sed etiam. 
Not even, nequidem. 
Not to know, nescire, Iv, it. 
Not yet, nondum. 
Nothing, nihil (indec). 
November, November, bris (abl. i.), 
Numa, Numa, ae. 
Number, s., numems, i. 
Number, v., numerare, av. at. 

O. 

0,0. 

O if, o si. 
Obey, parere, u, it. 
Observe, servare, av, at. 
Obtain, obtinere, u, tent. 



Occasion, occasio, onis. 

Of himself, sui. 

Of yesterday, hesterniis, a, iim. 

Offend- against, violare, av, at. 

Offer, praebere, u, it. 

Often, saepe. 

Old age, senectiis, utis. 

Old man, senex, senis. 

On service, miiitiae. 

On this side, cia. 

One, single one, uniis,a, iim (113. R.), 

One is grieved at, piget ; I am grieved 

at, me piget. 
One ought, oportet. 
Only, modo. 
Open, aperire, u, t. 
Openly, coram. 
Opporttmity, occasio, onis. 
Oppose, obstare, stit, stat. 
Or, aut, vel ; either — or, vel — veL 
Or, in double questions, an. 
Oration, oratio, oni3. 
Orator, orator, oris. 
Order, jiibere, juss, juss. 
Other, alius, a, iid (113. R.). 
Our, noster, tra, trimi. 
Overhang, impendere. 
Overthrow, evertere, rt, rs. 



P. 



Pain, dolor, oris. 

Pardon, ignoscere, nov, net 

Parent, parens, entis. 

Part, pars, tis. 

Pass over in silence, tacere, u, it. 

Passion, ciipiditas, atis. 

Past, praeteritiis, a, iim ; the past, 

praeterita. 
Pausanias, Pausanias, ae. 
Peace, pax, cis. 
Peacock, pav6, onis. 
People, populus, I. 
Perceive, sentire, s. s; perspicerS 

(io), spex, spect. 
Perception, sensiis, us. 
Perfidy, perfidia, ae. 
Personal, privatus,* a, urn. 
Persuade, persu.adere, s. s. 
Philosopher, plnlosoplius, L 
Physician, mediciis, I. 
| 



ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 



299 



Pious, phis, &, iim, 

Pity, misereri, it. 

Place, s., locus, I. (pi. I, or a.) 

Place, v., ponere, pusu, posit. 

Plainly, plane. 

Plausible, speciosus, a, um. 

Play, s. f ludus, I. 

Play, v., ludere, s. s. 

Pleasant, jucundiis, a, um. 

Please, placere, u, it. 

Pleasure, voluptas, atis. 

Plough, arare, av, at. 

Pluck, carpere, ps, pt. 

Plunge into, immergere, rs, rs. 

Poem, poema, atis. 

Poet, poeta, ae. 

Poor man, pauper, eris. 

Popular, popiilaris, e (528). 

Possess, possidere, ed, ess. 

Practise, colere, u, cult ; exercere, 

u, it. 
Praise, s., laus, dis. 
Praise, v., laudare, av, at. 
Precept, praeceptum, I. 
Prefer, malle, malu. 
Prepare, parare, av, at ; praeparare. 
Present (adj.), praesens, tis. 
Present, to make a present, donare, 

av, at. 
Preserve, conservare, av, at. 
Pretence, simulatio, onis. 
Prevent, deterrere, u, it; obstarg, 

stSt, stat. 
Priest, priestess, sacerdos, Otis. 
Private, privatus, a, um. 
Priz\, t aestimare, av, at ; prize highly, 

magirl aestimare. 
Procure, comparare, av, afc. 
Profit, prodesse, profu, profut. 
Promise, promittere, mis, miss. 
Provided, dummodo. 
Province, provincia, ae. 
Prudence, prudentia, ae. 
Prudent, prudens, tis ; providus, a, 

um. 
Pull down, evertere, t, s. 
Punish, ptinire, iv, it. 
Pupil, discipuliis, I. 
Purchase, emere, em, empt. 
Put confidence in, credere, ere did, 

Put ht, mgare, av, at, (540). 



Q. 

Quarrel, concertare, av, at. 
Queen, regma, ae. 
Question, quaestio, onis. 

Quickly, celeriter. 

R. 

Rage, saevire, iv, it. 

Raise, comparare, av, at. 

Reach, attingere, tig, tact ; perve* 
nlre, ven, vent. 

Read, legere, leg, lect. 

Real, veriis, a, um. 

Reason, ratio, onis. 

Receive, accipere (io)> cep, cept; 
recipere (io) ; capere (io), cep, 
capt. 

Reform, sanare, av, at. 

Refuge, perfugium, I. 

Regard, piitare, av, at. 

Reign, regnare, av, at. 

Reject, respuere, pu. 

Relate, narrare, av, at; referre, tul, lat. 

Relying on, fretus, a, urn. 

Remain, manere, mans, mans. 

Remaining, reliquiis, a, um. 

Remember, recordari, at. 

Render thanks, gratias agere. 

Repent, one repents, poenitet (485). 

Report, s., rumor, oris. 

Report, nuntiare, av, at. 

Repress, compescere, cu. 

Resist, resistere, stit, stit. 

Response, responsum, I. 

Rest, the rest, reliquiis, a, um. 

Rest, quiescere, quiev, quiet. 

Restrain, continere, u, tent ; com- 
pescere, cu. 

Return, redire, i, it ; revertexe, t, 8 
(551.) 

Rhine, Rheniis, I. 

Rich, locuples, etis. 

Ring, anuliis, I. 

Ripen, coquere, cox, coct. 

River, flumen, inis. 

Road, via, ae. 

Rob of, spoliare, av, at 

Robust, robustiis, a, iim. 

Roman, Romaniis, a, um 
te Rom&, a€ 



800 



FIEST LATIN BOOK, 



Romulus, Romulus, I. 
Roof, tectum, T. 
Round, rotundus, a, iim. 
Rule, regere, rex, rect. 
Rumor, rumor, oris. 
Run, currere, cucurr, curs. 
Rush,rueve, ru, rut. 

S. 

Safe, incolumis, e. 

Safety, salus, utis. 

Same, Idem, eadem, idem, 

Satisfy, satiare, av, at. 

Save, servare, av, at. 

Say, dicere, dix, diet. 

Scatter, spargere, spars, spars. 

Sceptre, sceptrum, I. 

Scipio, Scipio, onis. 

Sea, mare, is. 

Second, secundiis, a, iim. 

See, videre, vld, vis ; conspicere 

(io), spex, spect. 
Seed, semen, iuis. 
Seek, petere, Iv or i, it. 
Seem, videri, vis. 
Seize, ampere (io), ipu, ept ; depre- 

hendere, bend, hens. 
Self, ipse, a, iim. 
Sell, vendere, did, dit. 
Senate, senatus, us, (517.) 
Senator, senator, oris. 
Se?id, mittere, mis, miss. 
Send before, praemittere, mis, miss. 
Sentiment, sententia, ae. 
Separate, disjungere, x, ct. 
Serve, servire, Iv (i), it. 
Servius, Serviiis, I. 
Set forth, exponere, posu, posit. 
Set on fire, incendere, d, s. 
Set out, proficisci, feet. 
Severe, acer, acris, acre. 
Sew, stitch, suere, su, sut. 
Shame, piidor, oris. 
Sharp, acer, acris, acre. 
Shave, tondere, totond, tons. 
Shear, tondere, totond, tons. 
Sheep, ovis, is. 
Shepherd, pastor, oris. (520.) 
Shield, clipeiis, I. 
Shine, micare, u ; lucere, x. 
Shining, splendens, tis. 



Short, brevis, e. 

Shoulder, humerus, I. 

Show, monstrare, av, ab; demon* 

strare, av, at. 
Shrub, frutex, icis, ?n. 
Shun, vltare, av, at. 
Shut, claudere, s, s. 
Silver, argentiim, I. 
Simple, simplex, icis. 
Sin, peccare, av, at. 
Since, ciim, quiim. 
Sing, canere, cecin, cant; cantare, 

av, at. 
Single, single one, unus, a, um 

(113, R). 
Siren, siren, enis. 
Sister, soror, oris. 
Six, sex. 

Size, magnitiido, inis. 
Skilful, skilled in, peritiis, a, iim. 
Skin, deglubere, ps, pt. 
Slave, serviis, I. 
Sleep, s., somniis, L 
Sleep, dormire, Iv, it. 
Slow, tardus, a, iim. 
Small, parvus, a, iim. 
Smaller, minor, iis. 
Snake, anguis, is, m. 
Snatch, arripere (io), ipu, ept. 
Snow, nix, nivis. 
So, sic, adeo, tarn; so — as, tarn— - 

quam, siciit. 
So great, tantiis, a, um. 
Socrates, Socrates, is. 
Soldier, miles, itis. 
Some, aKquis, qua, quid (quod); 

some time, aliquid temporis. 
Some time, some time or other, all* 

quando. 
Sometimes, intenm. 
Son, filius, I. 
Son-in-law, gener, I. 
Sorrow, dolor, oris ; luctiis, us. 
Soul, animiis, I. 
Sound, sonus, I. 
Sow, spargere, rs, rs. 
Space, intervalliim, 1. 
Spare, parcere, peperc (pars), parcii 

(pars). 
Speak, loqui, locutiis. 
Spear, hasta, ae. 
Specious, speciosiis, a, um (530), 



ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 



301 



Spin, nere,.nev, net. 

Sport, liidils, %. 

Spouse, conjux, gis. 

Spring, ver, veris, n. 

Sprinkle, aspergere, rs, rs. 

Stability, stabllitas, atis 

Stain, macuiare, av, at. 

Star, stella, ae. 

State, civitas, atis. 

Storm, expugnare, av, at. 

Stream, numen, inis. 

Strength, vis, vis (pi., vires). 

Strive for, stiidere, u. 

Strong, robustus, a, um. 

Studious, sttidiosus, a, um. 

Study, stiidere, u. 

Successive, contmuus, a, um. 

Succor, succurrere, rr, rs. 

Sue for, petere, Iv (i), It. 

Sulla, Sulla, ae. 

Summer, aestas, atis. 

Sun, sol, solis, m. 

Supper, co3na, ae. 

Supplicate, exorare, av, at. 

Surface, superficies, el. 

Surpass, superare, av, at. 

Surrender, dedere, did, dit. 

Surround, eircumdare, ded, dat ; cin- 

gere, x, ct. 
Sustain, sustinere, u, tent. 
Sivear, jiirare, av, at. 
Swift, velox, ocis. 
Swim, nare, av, at. 
Sword, gladiiis, 1 

T. 

Take, capere (io), cep, capt. 
Tak < care, cavere, cav, caut. 
Take care of, curare, av, at. 
Take by storm, expugnare, av, at 

(550). 
Talent, ingenium, 1. 
Tarentum, Tarentum, i. 
Tarquin, Tarquiniiis, I. 
Teach, docere, u, doct. 
Tear in pieces, dilaniare, av, at. 
Ten, decern. 
Tenth, decimus, a, iim. 
Terms, conditio, onis. 
Terrify, terrere, u, it 
Than, quam. 
Thanks, gratiae, arum, 



Thanksgiving, suppiicatio, onis. 
That (pron.), ille, a, ud ; is, ea, id ; 

iste, a, ud. 
That (conj.), tit, with comp. (469) s 

quo. 
That not, quominus, quln. 
The entire, totus, a, um (113, R.). 
Theft, fui'tum, L 
There, ibi. 

Therefore, ergo, itaqiie, ideo, igitur. 
Thing, res, rei. 
Think, piltare, av, at ; think about, 

cogitare, av, at ; think little of 

parvi aestimare, av, at. 
Third, tertiiis, a, um. 
Thirst, sitire, iv, it. 
This, hie, haec, hoc. 
Thou, you, tu, tui. 
Thousand, mille. 
Threaten, impendere. 
Three, tres, tria. 
Through, per. 
Tibur, Tlbur, uris, 
Till, colere, u, cult. 
Time, tempus, oris. 
Timid, timidiis, a, iim. 
To, ad, in (with ace). 
To death, capitis. 
Too much, niinius, a, iim. 
Top, the top, sunimiis, a, iim ; agree- 

ing with the noun, as, Bumrnua 

mons, the top of the mountain. 
Torture, excriiciare, av, at. 
Touch, tangere, tetig, tact. 
Towards, erga (luith ace). 
Tower, arx, cis ; turris, is (ace., $m 

or im, abl. e or i). 
Traitor, proditor, oris. 
Tranquil, tranquillus, a, iim. 
Treachery, treason, proditio, onia 
Treaty, foedus, ens. 
Tree, arbor, oris,/. 
Trojan, Trojanus, a, iim, 
True, veriis, a, iim. 
Truly, ver6. • 
Truth, veriim, T. 
Try, tentare, av, at. 
Tullia, Tullia, ae. 
Turn, convert, convertere, t, s 8 
Turn back, revertere, t, s. 
Twelve, duodecim. 
Twenty, vigintL 



802 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



Two, duo, duae, duo. 
Two hundred, dticenti, ae, a. 
Two years, space of two years, bien- 
uium. 

U. 

Uncertain, incertiis, a, urn (550). 
Uncover, aperire, ru, rt. 
Understand, intelligere, lex, lect. 
Uninjured, incoltimiB, e. 
Unknown, incognitiis, a, iim. 
Unlearned, indoctus, a, um, 
Unnecessary, supervacuus, a, iim. 
Unwilling, invltus, a, urn. 
Unworthy, indignus, a, lira. 
Use, v., uti, us. 
Useful, utilis, e. 
Useless, luutilis, e. 
Utility, utilitas, atis. 

V. 

VoluaMe, pretiosiis, a, iim. 

Value, aestimare, av, at. 

Very (before a noun or pronoun, 

sometimes), ipse, a, iim. 
Very fond, studiosiis, a, um. 
Very much or great, plurimtis, a. 

iim ; very many, plurrml. 
Victim, vietima, ae. 
Victoria, Victoria, ae (prop. name). 
Victory, victoria, ae. 
Violate, violare, av, at; rumpere, 

rtip, rupt. 
Virgin, virgo, mis. 
Virtue, virtus, utis. 
Voice, vox, vocis. 

W. 

Wage (as war), gerere, gess, gest ; 

inferre, tiiL lat. 
Walk, ambuf^lre, av, at. 
Wall, tour 
War, bellui 

Warn, admorigr^ u, it. 
Wash, lavare, \av, laut, and la vat. 
Wasp, crabro, oms. 
Waste, perdere, qid, dit. 
Watch, vigilare, aV at. 
Water, aqua, ae. ) 
Wax (as moon), crescere, crev, cret. 
Way, via, ae ; iter, itineris, n. 



Wealthy, locuples, etis. 
Weep, flere, ev, et. 
Weep for, lugere, lux. 

Well, bene. 

When, quum. 

Whence, unde. 

Wherefore, quare. 

Whether, utrum; whether — or, in 

double questions, utrum — an, in 

other cases, seu — seu ; slve — sive, 
While, dum; while walking, inter 

ambulandum. 
White, candidiis, a, iim. 
Who, which, that (rel.), qui, quae, 

quod. 
Who, which, vihat? (interrog.), quis, 

quae, quid ? (subs.) ; qui, quae, 

quod? (adj.). 
Whole, totus, a, iim (113, R.). 
Wicked, improbiis, a, um. 
Wife, conjux, gis. 
Winter, hiems, is. 
Wisdom, sapientia, ae. 
Viise, sapiens, tis. 
Wish, velle, volu. 
With, cum. 

Within, intra (with ace). 
Without, sine (with abl.). 
Witness, spectare, av, at (543). 
Wolf, lupus, T. 
Woman, mulier, is. 
Wonderful, mlrabilis, e. 
Wool, lana, ae. 
Word, verbum, I. 
Work, opiis, eris. 
World, mundiis, I : 
Worthy, digniis, a, 
Would that, utinam, o si 
Wound, s., vulniis, eris. 
Wound, v., vulnerare, av, at. 
Wretched, miser, a, um. 
Write, scrlbere, ps, pt. 
Wrorig, v., violare, av, at 

Y. 

Year, annus, L 
Yesterday, hesterno die. 
Yet, tamen. 
You, Tti, till. 

Your, thy, tuur t, iim ; your, vestg?\ 
a trum. 



orbis terrariu> 
iim. 



" .. 



D. APPLE TON db CO., PUBLISHERS. 



ARNOLD'S FIRST LATIN BOOK; 

modelled and beweitten, and adapted to the ollendobff method m 

INSTETTCTION. 

By ALBEKT HAEKNESS, A. M. 
12mo. 302 pages. Price 1o Cents. 

This book is designed to take the place of the American edition of 
Arnold's First and Second Latin Book, issued five years since, Undei 
the labors of the present author, the work of Arnold has undergone 
radical changes, and been adapted to the Ollendorff improved method 
of instruction, and is superior to the former work in its plan and all of 
the details of instruction. 

From N. W. Benedict, Prin. Grammar School, Rochester University 
"Having thoroughly examined Harkness' Arnold's First Latin Book, and watched 
the results of its introduction into several seminaries of learning in this section of the 
State, I can safely say that I consider it superior to any of the primary Latin works with 
which I am acquainted. Its plan and execution are such as to render correct instruction 
in the Latin language, in its initiatoryste.ps, practicable to a greater number of teachers 
than have hitherto been accustomed to instruct in that department, and such as to lay 
.pen the practical benefits of such instruction to very many who have not heretofore 
been thought to be in circumstances to derive any benefit from attention to classical 

From W. E. Toman, Instructor in Providence High School. 
" I have used ■ Arnold's First Latin Book, remodelled and rewritten ' by Mr Hark- 
ness, in my classes during the past year, and I find it to be a work not so much 're- 

Z wlnt^/T 1 - ten ' " T entirdV UeW ' b ° th iD itS Plan and fa its station to 
the wants of tne beginner in Latin." 

From J. E. Boise, Professor of Ancient Languages, in Michigan University 
I nave examined your First Book in Latin, and am exceedingly pleased both with 
iie plan and execution. I shall not fail to use my influence towards introducing it into 
the classical schools-of this State." 

From George Capeon, Principal of Worcester High School. 
"I have examined the work with care, and am happy to say that I find it superior 
to any similar work with which I am acquainted. I shall recommend it to mynszt 
class." 

From Me. A. P. S. Stewaet, Principal of Eolton High School. 
"The clearness with which principles are stated and illustrated, and especially the 
syntax in which the nature and the relations of the different elements of a sentence are 
more fully developed than in works of similar kind, have struck me as being among ife 
chief excellencies. It is better suited to the wants of beginners than any other work 
witn which I am acquainted." 

From Peof. Gamjiell, of Brown University. 
"The book seems to me, as I anticipated it would be, a valuable additior to th« 
works now m use among teachers of Latin in the schools of the United States, and ft* 
wsny of them it will undoubtedly form an advantageous substitute." 

38 



D. APPLE TON $ CO., PUBLISHERS. 

SECOND LATIN BOOK ; 

Comprising a Historical Latin Reader, with Notes and R lies for Tians 
lating, and an Exercise Book, developing a complete Analytical 
Syntax, in a Series of Lessons and Exercises, involving the Cob 
gfcruction, Analysis, and Reconstruction of Latin Sentences. 

By ALBEET HABKNESS, A M. 
12mo. 361 pages. Price 90 Cents. 

This work is designed as a sequel to the author's " First Latin Book/ 
which has acquired a wide reputation. It comprises a complete ana 
iytieal syntax, exhibiting the essential structure of the Latin language 
from its simplest to its most expanded and modified form. 

From J. F. Bichardson, Professor of the Latin Language and Literature* Roches- 
ter University. 

" I have examined it with considerable care, and I am glad to see this addition to thu 
valuable series of classical works now issued by the Appletons. 

" A faithful study of the work upon the plan indicated by the author, will greatly 
facilitate the student's acquisition of the general principles of the language, and prepar* 
him for the intelligent reading of the Latin classics." 

From Prof. Haven of the University of Michigan 
" I am fully convinced that a faithful use of the First and Second Latin Books will 
place the pupil securely on the right track, and facilitate, more than any other element- 
ary treatises with which I am acquainted, his thorough understanding of the language. 

" I heartily wish that all students preparing for this college would study both books 
thoroughly. 1 ' 

From, Prof. Anderson, of Lewisourg University, Pa. 

" A faithful use of the work would diminish the drudgery of the student's earliest 
studies, and facilitate his progress in his subsequent course. 1 wish the work a widy 
circulation." 

From Prof. Lincoln, of Brown University. 

" It seems to me, to cany on most successfully the method pursued in the First 
Book. Though brief, it is very comprehensive, and combines judicious and skilfully 
formed exercises with systematic instruction." 

From Eev. J. A Spencer, D. D., late Prof. Latin and Oriental Languages in 
Burlington College, AT, J. 
" The present volume appears to me to carry out excellently the system on which 
the late lamented Arnold based his educational works ; and in the selections for Bead- 
ing, the Notes and Bules for Translating, the Exercises in Translating into Latin, the 
Analyses, &c, I think it admirably adapted to advance the diligent student, not only 
rapidly, but soundly, in an acquaintance with the Latin language." 

From J. J. Owen, D. D. Prof of the Latin and Greek Languages and Liteixtturs 
in the Free Academy, New York. 
" This Second Latin Book gives abundant evidence of the Author's learning and 
»ct to arrange, simplify, and make accessible to the youthful mind the great and fun 
damental principles of the Latin language. The book is worthy of a >lace in every 
dasslcal school, and I trust will have an extensive sale." 

S» 



L>. APPLE TON §■ CO., PUBLISHERS, 



DR. ARNOLD'S CLASSICAL SERIES. 
FIRST AND SECOND LATIN BOOK AND PR ACTIO A I 
GRA MAR. Revised and carefully corrected by J. A. Spencer, I).I> 
1 vol. 12rao Price 75 Cents. 
PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO LATIN PROSE COMPO 
SITION Revised and carefully corrected by J. A Spencer, D. D. 
1 vol. 12mo. Price $1 00. 
CORNELIUS NEPOS, with Practical Questions and Answers, and 
in Imitative Exercise on each Chapter. Carefully Revised, with 
Notes by E. A. Johnson, Prof, of Latin in Uni 1 /. of New York. New 
Edition, enlarged, with a Lexicon, Historical and Geographical Index, 
<fcc. 1 vol. 12mo. Price $1 00. 
FIRST GREEK ROOK, on the Plan of the First Latin Book. Re 

vised by J. A Spencer, D. D. 1 vol. 12mo. Price 75 cents. 
PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO GREEK PROSE COMPO- 
SITION. Revised by J. A. Spencer, T). D. } vol. 12mo. Price 
75 Cents. 
SECOND PART TO THE ABOVE. By J. A Spencer, D, IX 

12ino. Price 75 Cents. 
GREEK READING BOOK. New Edition, Revised and Corrected. 
Containing the substance of the Practical Introduction to Greek 
Construing and a Treatise on the Greek Particles ; and comoua 
selections from Greek authors, with Critical and Explanatory Eng- 
lish Notes and a Lexicon. Revised by J. A. Spencer, D. D. 1 vol. 
618 pages. 12mo. Price $1 25. 

In the preparation of the above series, by thorough classical scho- 
lars and practica 1 teacl 7 ers, the utmost care has been devoted to a com- 
plete revision of Dr. Arnold's works ; they have been rearranged and 
improved in many important respects, and made feo conform, in an 
eminent degree, to the Ollendorff plan of acquiring languages. 

From N. W". Benedict, A. M., Prin. Grammar School, Rochester University. 
" 1 am specially pleased with the kind of help afforded in his CorneLus Nepos, which 
Is such as to give the student a critical and accurate understanding of the text, and at 
the same time to stimulate his mind to greater exertion to apprehend the beauties of the 
Anguage. The plan is designed and well adapted to make the knowledge obtained th« 
property of the scholar." 

From R. B. Tschttdi, Prof, of Ancient Languages, Norfolk,, Va. 
" After having in constant use since their first appearance, Arnold's Series of botfc 
Latin and Greek books, my experience enables me confidently to pronounce upon theii 
anrivalled merits. I state without fear of contradiction, that, even with greater labes 
ltd pains on the part of the teacher, equal progress cannot be made without, as can b4 
Irith them. And they c acceed admirably in awakening an interest in the pupil, and Id 
snaking a lasting impresair-D upon his memory. It is an application of Bacon's principle 
few forming an accurate tran." 



D. APPLE TON §r CO., PVBLISHER8, 



CICERO DE OFFIOIIS. 

CBTEFLY SELECTED AND TRANSLATED FROM ZUMPT ABB 

BON NELL, ENGLISH NOTES 

BY THOMAS A. THACHEE, of Yale College. 

1 Yol. 12mo. 194 pages. Price 90 Cents. 

In this edition, a few historical notes have been introduced in casei 
■arhere the Dictionaries m common use have not been found to contaia 
the desired information ; the design of which being to aid the learnex 
m understanding the contents of the treatises, the thoughts and con- 
nections of thought of the author, and to explain the grammatical dif- 
ficulties, and inculcate a knowledge of grammatical principles. The 
Editor has aimed throughout to guide rather than to carry the learner 
through difficulties ; requiring of him more study, in consequence of 
his help, than he wcdd have devoted to the book without it. 

"The text is beautifu' iy and correctly printed. The notes are neat, well arrange^ 
and appropriate."— Presbyterian. 

"A very elegant edition of this well-known work."— The Wisconsin. 



SELECT ORATIONS OF M. THELITIS CICERO. 

WITH NOTES, FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES 
BY E. A. JOHNSON, 
Professor of Latin in the University of New York. 
1 Yol. 12mo. Price |L 

This edition of Cicero's Select Orations possesses some special advan 
tages for the student which are both new and important. It is th* 
only edition which contains the improved text that has been prepared 
by a recent careful collation and correct deciphering of the best manu- 
scripts of Cicero'3 writings. It is the work of the celebrated Orelli, 
together with that of Madvig and Klotz, arid has been done since the 
appearance of Orelli's complete edition. The Notes, by Prof. Johnson, 
of the New York University, have been chiefly selected, with great care, 
from the best German authors, as well as the English edition of Arnold 

From Thomas Chase, Tutor in Latin in Harvard University. 

"An edition of Cicero like Johnson's has long been wanted; and the excellence oi 

fcfce text, the illustrations of words, particles, and prononns, and the explanation of v«fr 

sua points of construction and interpretation, bear witness to the Editor's familiarity 

«?itn some of the most important results of modern scholarship, and entitle his work u 

4&rge share of public favor." 

81 



D. APPLETON $ CO., PUBLISHERS. 



THE WORKS OF HORACE. 

WITH ENGLISH NOTES, FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND 

COLLEGES, 

BY J. L. LINCOLN, 

Professor of the Latin Language and Literature in Brown University. 

1 Vol. 12mo. Price $1 25. 

The text of this edition is that of Grelli, in the edition of 18*3-44 
tite comparatively few readings of Orelli, not adopted, are given at th* 
foot of the page. The most important various readings are also given 
in foot-notes. The method pursued in the preparation of the $otes ia 
the same as that followed by the Editor in his edition of Livy, except 
so far as it is modified by the character of the present author, and by 
the fact that his writings belong to a later stage in a course of classical 
studies. While the grammatical study of the language has been kept 
in view, it has been a cherished objact to take advantage of the means 
so variously and richly furnished by Horace for promoting the literary 
culture of the student. 

From an article written by Prof. Bater of the University of Heidelberg, and Pub' 
Ushed in the Heidelberg Annals of Literature. 
" There are already several American editions of Horace, intended for the use o! 
schools ; of one of these, which has passed through many editions, and has also been 
widely circulated in England, mention has been formerly made in this journal ; but 
that one we may not put upon equality with the one now before us, inasmuch as this 
has taken a different stand-point, which may serve as a sign of progress in this depart- 
ment of study. The Editor has, it is true, also intended his work for the use of schools 
and has sought to adapt it in all its parts to such a use ; but still, without losing sight oJ 
this purpose, he has proceeded throughout with more independence. In respect to th€ 
text, all the demands which could be made of the editor are fully met, and yet the 
limits observed which are necessary in a school edition. In an Introduction which 
precedes the text, the Editor gives a sketch of the Life of Horace, with a critique ot 
his writings, which is well suited to the purpose of the whole work, and is, in our view, 
entirely satisfactory. In the preparation of Notes, tne Editor has faithfully observed 
the principles laid down in his Preface ; ' the explanations of the poet's words commend 
themselves by a compressed brevity, which limits itself to what is most essential, and 
by a sharp precision of expression; and references to other passages of the poet, and 
also to grammars, dictionaries, &c, are all wanting; all other learned apparatus is omit 
ted, on grounds which need no lengthened explanation. The entire outward execution oJ 
the work merits special and thankful acknowledgment" 

From George Ticknor, LL. D., Boston. 
w 1 received a few days since a copy of Horace you have lately published. As I hav« 
found leisure since, I have read with your notes some of the portions I best like, an<3 
have been struck with the correctness of your readings, and the condensed, faithfu, 
learning and good taste of the commentary. It seems to me that you have succeeds! 
ife»3omm.only well in your purpose." 

82 



U, APPLE TON §• CO,, PUBLISHERS. 



C. JULIUS CESAR'S 
COMMENTARIES ON THE GALLIC WAR. 

WITH ENGLISH NOTES, CRITICAL AND EXPLANATORY ; A LSXl 
CON, GEOGRAPHICAL AND HISTORICAL INDEXES, $c. 

BY EEY. J. A. SPENCER, D. D 
] Vol. 12mo. with Map. Price $1 00. 

The text which Mr. Spencer has adopted is that of Oudenorp, -with 
such variations as were suggested by a careful collation of the leading 
critics of Germany. The notes are as they should be, designed to aid 
the labors of the student, not to supersede them. In addition to these, 
the volume contains a sketch of the life of Csssar, a brief Lexicon of 
Latin words, an Historical and Geographical Index, together with a Map. 



BEZA'S LATIN TESTAMENT. 

1 Vol. 12mo. Price 75 Cents. 

The Editor of the present edition has exerted himself to render it, 
by superior accuracy and neatness, worthy of patronage, and the pub- 
lishers natter themselves that the pains bestowed will insure for it pre- 
ference over other editions. 



SHORT AND COMPREHENSIVE GREEK GRAMMAR, 

BY J. T. CHAMPLXN. 

Professor of Latin in Waierville College. 
12mo. Price 15 Cents. 

From Kev. Me. Andebsdx, New Orleans. 

"I "believe the author has fully accomplished what he proposes in his preface. To 
those wishing to study Greek, I am satisfied he has presented a book which will much 
Lend to simplify the study to beginners— and at the same time without being too volu- 
minous, presents as lucid and full an exposition of the principles of the language, as 
ean be contained within so small a compass. 

"The examples under the different declensions are full and well selected; so as fully 
k? illustrate the principles on which the rules are founded. 

44 His arrangement of Anomalous Yerbs we think excellent, and not loaded witl 
reperfiuous matter. 

84 



D. AP1LET0N f CO., PUBLISHERS 



TACITUS' GERMAN-IA AND AGRICOLA. 

Wl TH NO TES F OR CO LEE G ES 
BY W. S. TYLER, 

Professor of the Greek and Latin Languages in Amherst College 
1 Vol. 12mo. Price 62| Cents. 

It has beei the endeavor of the Editor to bring down the literature 
nf Tacitus to the present time, and embody in a small compass the most 
valuable labors of such recent German editors as Grimm, Giinther, 
Gruber, Kiessling, Dronke, Roth, Rapeti, and TValther 
From Prof. Felton, of Harvard University. 
" I am much pleased with the book, and you seem to me to have discharged the duty 
of editor with becoming judgment and skill." 

From Prof. Lincoln, of Broicn University. 
I have found the book in daily use with my class of very great service, very practi* 
cal, and well suited to the wants of students. I am very much pleased with the Life 
of Tacitus, and the Introduction, and indeed with the literary character of the Book 
throughout. We shall make the book a part of our Latin course. 1 ' 
From Prof. Packard, of Bozcdoin College. 
" I have given it such examination as my time would permit, and shall introduw 
*t this y6ar into my course of study." 



THE HISTORIES OF TACITUS. 

WITH NOTES FOR COLLEGES. 

BY W. S. TYLEE. 

1 Vol. 12iiio. Price $1 25. 

1 The editor has at least endeavored to avoid the fault, which Lord 
Bacon says 'is over usual in annotations and commentaries, viz., to 
blanch the obscure places, and discourse upon the plain.' The indexes 
have been prepared with much labor and care, and, it is believed, will 
add materially to the value of tne work." — Extract from Preface. 

From Prof. Thacher, Newton Theological Seminary. 
"The notes appear to me to be even more neat and elegant than those on the c Ger- 
mania wid Agricola.' They come as near to such notes as I would be glad to write my • 
ealf on a classic as almost any thing that I have yet seen." 

From Ea. Z. H. Taylor, Principal of Philips 1 Academy. 
"I have esamined parts of it with some care, and am very highly pleased with St 
The Essay on the style ol vacuus, tne Preliminary Eemarks, the judicious and schdsj* 
$y Notes afford all the assistance which the student can wish for the study of tois soms 
wh24, difficult author." 

85 



. ^ ^ETOJS $ CO., PUBLISHERS. 

GREEK OLLENDORFF. 

BY A. C. KENBRICK, D. D. 
Professor of Greek Language and Literature in the University of Rochester. 
Vol. 12mo. 371 pages. Price $1. 

This is a progressive exhibition of the piinciples of the Greet 
Grammar, designed for beginners in Greek, and as a book for exercise! 
in academies and colleges. 

There is probably no elementary treatise upon the Greek language 
extant which has, in so short a time, secured sc large a share of the 
confidence, popular favor, and patronage of educators throughout the 
country, as this work. It seems exactly fitted for the purpose intended, 
vi&, by instilling into the minds of the young the more simple elemen- 
tary principles of the language, thus to prepare them for a more exten- 
sive and familiar acquaintance with the ancient Greek Classics. 

We think the author pursues the only philosophical method of teaching this lan- 
guage." — {Dover) Morning Star. 

"It is an excellent. publication, and is admirably adapted to the purposes in view."- 
New Orleans Bee. 



XENOPHON'S MEMORABILIA OF SOCRATES. 

BY PEOF. BOBBINS, Middlebttry College. 
1 Vol. 12mo. 420 pages. Price $1. 

The text of the present edition is that of Kuhner, with occasional 
alterations in pointing and things of minor importance, Where it ap- 
peared desirable, various readings have been given in the notes, and 
reasons for the one adopted briefly stated. 

From Prof. Harrison, University of Virginia. 

"The Notes contain in much detail, the grammatical and other explanations, which 
it would be convenient for the learner to have placed before him, instead of having to 
refer to various books. I have no doubt that the notes are very carefully prepared, and 
In accordance with the best authorities." 

From Prof. A. S. Packard, Bowdoin College. 

" I have examined the work somewhat, and am pleased with it, as being creditabia 
to our American scholarship. I shall recommend it to my classes." 
From Prof. v7m. H. Allen, Girard College. 

" It is a very handsome and valuable edition of that admirable work, with copie«a 
a >tes, index, and a biography of Socrates, and it will prove highly acceptable to classical 
scholars and teachers." 

From Prof. Geo. Bttrrowes, Lafayette College. 

" 1 have been highly gratified, on examining the work, not only with the way in 
wnich it is got up, but with the editorial labor which is such as to leave nothing to b*i 
&*sired by tbe student, and makes this edition a truly valuable addition to oui classic* 
itterafcure " 



D. APPLET ON §- CO., PUBLISHERS. 



KUHNER'S GREEK GRAMMAR. 

TRANSLATED BY PROFESSORS EDWARDS AND TAYLOR, 

One Large 12 mo Volume. Price $1 50. 

This is a most concise and comprehensive grammar, "based on a pro 
found and accurate knowledge of the genius and principles of Greek 
grammar, arranged in a clear and satisfactory manner. The fulriesi 
cf illustration, correctness of the principles advanced, as well as the 
perfect analysis to which the forms of language are subjected, are all 
that could be desired in a work of this kind. 

From Professor of Greek in Williams College. 
" 1 think highly of your edition of Runner's Greek Grammar. "We have nothing 
in use among us that is equal to it as a comprehensive, systematic analysis of the lar* 
guage. In many respects the translators have much improved this edition, and I should 
be glad to have its pages more generally consulted by our young men." 

From Pkof. Geo. Buekowes, Lafayette College. 

" I beg to tender you my thanks for the copy of the new revised edition of Kuhner'a 

Greek Grammar, translated by Edwards and Taylor. The high character of this book 

is fully established, and the friends of Gieek literature are under obligations as well 

to the publishers as to the translators for making it accessible to the students of our 

country." 

From Prof. J. T. Champ lin, Water ville College. 

" Please accept my thanks for a copy of your new edition of Kuhner's Greek School 
Grammar. The work is greatly improved both in form and substance in this edition. 
In its improved dress, there can be no doubt that it deserves and will take the very firs* 
place among Greek grammars for consultation and reference." 



EXERCISES IN GREEK GRAMMAR. 

ADAPTED TO THE FIRST BOOK OF XENOPHON'S ANABASIS. 
BY JAMES K. BOISE, 
Professor in Mich. University. 
1 Vol. 12mo. 185 pages Price 15 Cents. 

These Exercises eoneist of easy sentences, similar to those in th 
Anabasis, in having the same words and constructions, and are designed 
ty frequent repetition to make the learner familiar with the language 
$f Xenophon. Accordingly, the chapters and sections in both are made 
to correspond. 

87 



D. APPLETON §■ CO., PVSLISHS11& 

VOLTAIRE'S HISTORY OF CHARLES XII., 

KING OF SWEDEN. 

CAREFULLY REVISED. 

BY PROF. GABEIEL SUKENNE. 

12mo. 262 pages. Price 50 Cents. 

This is a neat edition of this valuable history, published under iht 
direction of a distinguished scholar, and well adapted for the use ol 
schools in this country. 

" To students of tbo French language this edition of a history ndiich has net bees 
ixeelied, in its class, which is like Southey's Life of Nelson, in our own tongue, will be 
particularly &cceptabie." — Evening Post. 



A. NEW FRENCH MANUAL, 

AND TRAVELLER'S COMPANION. 

BY G. SURENNE. 

16mo. 287 pages. Price 62 Cents. 

This work is intended as a Guide for the Tourist, and a Class-book 
for the Student. 

" An excellent work, and one which to a good student will prove most valuable. 
It seems to be complete in all its departments and arrangements, and to take the placa 
of a French teacher, as far as that may be: giving every aid in pronunciation. 'Wt 
cheerfully reoommend it to all engaged in this study." — Educat. Magazine. 



FRENCH CONVERSATION AND DIALOGUES. 

BY GUSTAYE CHOUQUET. 
1 Vol. IS mo. 200 pages. Price 50 Cents. 

Tliis volume contains conversations on ordinary subjects, designeJ 
to familiarize the student with the idiomatic expressions which most 
frequently occur in French conversation. It is very complete, clear, 
end distinct. 

YOUNG LADIES 1 GUIDE TO FRENCH COMPOSITION, 

BY GUSTAYE CHOUQUET. 
1 Vol. 12mo. 2 91 pages. Price 15 Centa* 

This useful work consists of two parts ; the first part being a O-e 
neral Treatise on Rhetoric, which, as an elementary work, has decided 
merits. 

The second part contains great variety of subjects, with full and veil- 

ihosen exercises, with selections trom the best and purest Freuch writer* 

m 



D. APPLETON #• CO. PCTBLTSHEAS. 

SERIES OF FRENCH READERS. 



NEW ELEMENTARY FRENCH READER. Being an Introduetioi 
to the French Language Containing Fables, Select Tales, Remark- 
able Facts, Amusing Anecdotes, <fcc. With a Dictionary of all the 
Words translated into English. By M. De Fivas, Member of Several 
Literary Societies. 16mo. Price 50 Cents. 

This little work is nsed as a Class-Book in nearly all schooV in thi§ 
©ountry where the elements of Frencito*e taught. The selection com 
prises a great variety of subjects, mostly of a Uvelyand familiar style 
The Phrases will serve as elements in conversation, and enable the stu 
dent to read with facility other French books. 



IHE CLASSIC FRENCH READER; for Advanced Students; Or, 
Beauties of the French Writers, Ancient and Modern. By Alain 
De Fivas. With a Vocabulary, French and English, of all the Words 
and Idioms contained in the work, by J. L. Jewett. 1 Vol. 12mo 
Price $1 00. 

This work embraces selections from the writings of all the literary 
periods, and specimens of the various styles of the most distinguished 
writers, and unites the advantage of a Reader, Lexicon, and Grammar. 
Occasional Notes are added, which explain and enhance the value of 
the work. The work has met with universal favor and patronage. 

ROEMER'S FIRST FRENCH READER. With an Analytical Study 
of the French Language, a Treatise on French Poetry, and a Diction- 
ary of Idioms, Peculiar Expressions, <fcc. Price $1 00. 
This Treatise on the Analytical Study of the French Language, and 
mi the Rules of French Versification, evinces a true and discriminating 
philological taste. The Selections, from agreeable French literature, 
tre made with great judgment, and by bringing the affinities of the 
English and French directly in view, the acquisition of the French ig 
tiade comparatively easy. 

ROEMER'S SECOND FRENCH READER Illustrated with Histori- 
cal, Geographical, Philosophical, and Philological Notices. Price 
$1 25. 

This is one of the most original, ingenious, and useful manuals pub- 
whed, and will prove a treasure to the student of the French. 

As a compilation of elegant extracts, this volume is second to none 
they are marked by good taste and sound judgment, many of the;? 
Siting perfect gems of French literature. 



D. API LE TON $ CO., . UBLISHERS. 



SERIES OF FRENCH READERS 



ROMAN'S MODERN FRENCH READER. Selections from tnodera 
French authors, adapted to young persons learning the French, 
With a Vocabulary of the new and difficult words and idiomatic 
phrases adopted in modern French literature. By J L. Jewett. 1 
Vol. 12mo. Price 75 Cents. 

The chief object of this wo^e ig to afford the means of making the 
youth acquainted with the French language as It is spoken at the pre- 
sent day, and as presented by modern French authors. The selections 
are choice and unexceptionable. 

" The selections are made with great taste and judgment, and the moral of all is good." 
-"Com. Advertiser. 

"We do not know any book of the kind better calculated for a reading-book foi 
in our schools." — Boston Atlas. 



SELECT POETRY FOR YOUNG PERSONS. By Madame H. Ooutan. 

12mo. Price $1 00. 

A collection of some of the mo3t choice, beautiful, and interesting 
poetical productions of the French language. 

" It is a very charming collection of some of the sweetest and most graceful verses 
In the French Language. We were hardly aware, till we looked over this book, that so 
many distinguished French authors had contributed to a class of productions, so peca- 
liarly suited to readers of an early age." — Evening Post. 

DRAMATIC FRENCH READER. Being a selection, in progressive 
order of the chief Dramatic Works of the French language, with 
notes to facilitate the pupil's progress. By Prof. A. G. Collot. 1 
Vol. 12mo. $1 00. 

This volume is made up of fourteen complete dramas, tal be Trom 
the works of the best and purest writers among which are fk rneilie; 
Racine, Moliere, and Prior. 

** It will undoubtedly prove a valuable assistant to those who are engaged in obtain 
fc$ a knowledge of the language it is intended to teach." — Courier & Enquirer, 

STEW FRENCH TESTAMENT. According to the Translation of J. 
Ostkrvald's Stereotyped Edition, printed by the Edinburgh Univer 
ttity 32mo. Price 38 Cents. 



D. APPLET 0^1 $ CO., PUBLISHERS: 



OLLENDORFF'S FRENCH GRAMMARS. 



OLLENDORFF'S FIRST LESSONS IN LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, 
AND SPEAK THE FRpTCH LANGUAGE. Being an Introduces 
to Ollendorff's larger grammar. Third edition, Enlarged and Re- 
written by G. W, Greene, Instructor in Brcwn University. 1 6 ma 
Price 50 Ce~ ;3, 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE 
AND SPEAK THE FRENCH IANGUAGE. With an Appendix 
containing the Cardinal and OnSMfi Numbers, and full Paradigms 
of the Regular and Irregular, Auxiliary, Reflective, and Impersonal 
Verbs. By J. L. Jewett. 1 Vol. 12mo. Price $1 00. 
jar KEY TO EXERCISES. Separate Volume. Price 75 Cents. 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, 
AND SPEAK THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. With the Lessons 
divided into Sections of a proper length for daily tasks, and num> 
rous corrections, additions, and improvements, suitable for this 
country ; to which is added Value's System of French Pronuncia- 
tion; his Grammatical Synopsis, a new Index, and Short Models 
of Commercial Correspondence. By V. Value. 1 Vol. 12mo. 
Price $1 00. 
G®~ KEY TO EXERCISES. Separate Volume. Price 75 Cents. 

OLLENDORFF'S COMPANION TO NEW METHOD OF LEARNING 
TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 
Containing Dialogues and a Vocabulary. By Geo. W. Greens. 
12mo. Price 75 Cents. 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD FOR FRENCHMEN TO LEARN TO 
READ WRITE, AND SPEAK THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. By 
Charles Badois. 12mo. Price $1 00. 
%^= KEY TO EXERCISES. Separate Volume. Price 50 Cents, 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD FOR SPANIARDS TO LEARN TO 
READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. Con- 
taining Progressive, Oral, and Written Exercises, with an Appendix, 
containing Rules of Syntax and rules for the formation and conjuga 
tion. By Theodore Simonne. 12mo. Price $2 00. 
^ KEY TO EXERCISES. Separate Volume. Price 75 Cents. 
Few school manuals have been so highly approved, and used for « 

9®i ies of years with such universal acceptance, as the Ollendorff Series, 

tor th* acquirement of the French Language; that system being no 1 ? 

almost universally acknowledged to be the only correct one. 

41 



D. APPLET02) k CO., I OBLISEERS, 



A NEW AND ENLARGED EDITION, IN LARGE TYPE 
STANDARD 

PRONOUNCING FfiENC#.DICTIONART. 

IN TWO PARTS. 

I. FEENCH & ENGLISH. H. ENGLISH & FRENCH. 

BY GABRIEL SU^R EN^E, F. A. S. E. 
1 large Vol. 12mo^Wl4: pages. Price $1 50. 

The First Part of this well-known and universally popular woil 
contains: Words in common use; Terms connected with science; Terms 
belonging to the fine arts ; and 

Four thousand historical names ; Four thousand geographical names ; 
and 

Upwards of eleven thousand newly published terms. 

The pronunciation of every word according to the French Academy 
and the most eminent lexicographers and grammarians ; also, 

More than seven hundred critical remarks, in which the various 
methods of pronouncing employed by different authors, are mvest: 
gated, and compared with each other. 

The Second Part contains : A copious list of English words and ex 
pressions, with their proper pronunciation ; also, a critical and compre 
hensive system of French pronunciation. 

u Every student of the French language, and every person of taste who is fond ol 
reading French, and wishes to become proficient in that tongue, should possess this 
comprehensive but compbte dictionary. It embraces all the words in common use. 
and those in science and the fine arts, historical and geographical names, etc., with the 
pronunciation of every word according to the French Academy, together with such 
critical remarks as will be useful to every learner. It is published in a form of extreme 
condensation, and yet contains so full a compilation of words, definitions, etc., as scarcely 
to leave any thing to be ctasired." — New York Observer. 



AN ABRIDGMENT OF THE ABOVE. 

1 Yol. 16mo. 556 pages. Price 90 Cents. 
It is confidently anticipated that this volume will prove not only s 
usefcd auxiliary to the student, hut also a convenient Pocket Companion 
fco the traveler, wherever the French language is spoken. A vocahs- 
isry of proper names accompanies the work. 

'' M. Surenne is a very prominent professor in Edinburgh ; and all who use his book* 

at? rely on having before them the purest style of the French tongue."— Chrizt&a 

Intelligencer. 

42 



t B. APPLE TON & CO., PUBLISHERS 

SPIERS & SURENNE'S 
FRENCH & ENGLISH, AND ENGLISH & FRENCH 

PRONOUNCING DICTIONARY. 

EDITED BY G. P. QUACKENBOS, A. M. 

i large Vol. 8vo., of about 1,300 pp., neat type, fine paper, and strong 
binding, Price $3 00. 

THE PUBLISHERS CLAIM FOR THIS WORK, 

1st. That it is a revision and combination oi (Spiers') the best defining, 
and of (Surenne's) the most accurate pronouncing dictionary extant. 

2d. That in this work the numerous errors in Spiers' dictionary hav« 
been carefully and faithfully corrected, 

3d. That some three thousand new definitions have been added. 

4th. That numerous definitions and constructions are elucidated by 
grammatical remarks and illustrative clauses and sentences. 

5th. That several thousand new phrases and idioms are embodied. 

6th. That upwards of twelve hundred synonymous terms are ex- 
plained, by pointing out their distinctive shades of meaning. 

?tk. That all of the irregular parts of the verbs are inserted in alpha- 
betical order, so that one reference gives the mood, tense, person, 
and number. 

8th. That some four thousand new French words, connected with sci« 
8nce, art, and literature, have been added. 

9th. That every French word is accompanied by an as exact pronun- 
ciation as can be represented by corresponding English sounds, and 
vice versa. 
10th. That it contains a full vocabulary of the names of persons and 
places, mythological and classical, ancient and modern. 

1 1th. That it is the most complete, accurate, and reliable dictionary of 
these languages published. 

From Washington Ieving. 

** As far as I have had time to examine it, it appears to me that Mr. Quackenbos, h§ 
fits revision, corrections and additions, has rendered the Paris Edition, already so exesi* 
assi, the most complete and valuable lexicon now in print." 

From Wm. H. Peescott. 
<: In the copiousness of its vocabulary and its definitions, and in the great variety eg 
ifttonmtic phrases and synonymes, it far exceeds any other French and English dictJoa 
uy with which I am acquainted." 

48 



D. APPLETON §• CO., PUBLISHERS. 

A MANUAL OF THE FRENCH VERBS. 

COMPRISING 

The formation of persons, tenses, and moods oi the regnlai and inesr>%*j 

verbs; a practical method to trace the infinitive of a verb cnt 

of any of its inflections ; models of sentences in their 

different forms ; and a series of the most useful 

idiomatical phrases. The whole illustrated 

by numerous examples. 

BY T. SIMONNE. 

12mo. 108 pages. Price 50 Centg. 

This little work has been prepared with a view to simplify the French verbs to be 
giimArs in the study of that language, and contains a series of simple but certain ruiei 
for forming the numerous inflections of the verb, and for enabling the student to trace 
out tne root from any of the inflections. Its value is further increased by a list of idio- 
matic phrases, and models of sentences peculiar to the French language." — Hartford 
Courant. 

" The student of French will find this little volume an invaluable auxiliary in acquir- 
ing a knowledge of the most elegant of languages. It is emphatically multum in parno 
— containing within the limits of 108 pages, more that is useful, than is to be found in 
many a folio. It will save the learner a vast amount of unnecessary labor." — Pennsyl- 
vanian. 

"A book that should be in the hands of every French student. It comprises the for- 
mation of persons, tenses, and moods of the regular and irregular verbs ; a practical 
method to trace the infinitive of a verb out of any of its inflections; models of senten- 
ces in their different forms, and a series of the most useful idiomatical phrases. The 
whole is illustrated by numerous examples. The student who has experienced tha 
difficulty of tracing the root from the inflections of the verb, will readily conceive thai 
this work mus$ be & great help in his studies."— Daily Capitol. 



THE STANDARD EDITION. 

THE ADVENTURES OF TELEMAQUE 

BY FENELON. 

EDITED BY GABRIEL SURENNB 

1 vol. 18mo. 50 cents. 

The above is a neat and convenient School Edition of this work oJ 

^orld-wide celebrity. 



I). APPLEPUN f CO., PUBLISHERS. 



SERIES OF SPANISH READERS. 



MANDEVILLE'S PRIMARY READER, in Spanish. 16mo. Price ?£* 

MANDEVILLE'S SECOND READER, in Spanish. 12mo. Price 50 n 

THE SPANISH TEACHER AND COLLOQUIAL PHRASE-BOOK 
An Easy and Agreeable Method of Acquiring a Speaking Knowledge 
of the Spanish Language. By Prof. Butler. A w-w edition, 
1 Voi. 18mo. Price 50 cents. 

THE ELEMENTARY SPANISH READER AND TRANSLATOR. 
By M. F. Tolon. Price 63 Cents. 

This is one of the best elementary Spanish Readers, not only for the 
purposes of self-instruction, but also as a class-book for schools, that 
has ever been published. The contents are varied in style, including 
didactic, descriptive, colloquial, and poetical. Also, containing a full 
Vocabulary. The orthography conforms to that established by the 
Royal Academy of Madrid. 

AN EASY INTRODUCTION TO SPANISH CONVERSATION. Con- 
taining all that is necessary to make a rapid progress in it. Parti- 
cularly designed for persons who have little time to study, or are 
their own instructors. By Mariano Velasquez de la Cadena. 1 8mo, 
100 pages. Price 38 cents. 

A NrW SPANISH READER. Consisting of Extracts from the works 
of the most approved Authors in Prose and Verse, arranged in pro- 
gressive order, with especial reference to those who wish to obtain 
a practical knowledge of the Language. With Notes explanatory 
of the Idioms and most difficult constructions, and a Copious Voca- 
bulary. By M. Velasquez de la Cadena. 12mo. Price $1 25. 

CERVANTES' DON QUIXOTTE, in Spanish. New Edition, revised 
corrected by Don Eugenio de Ochoa. 1 Vol. 1.2mo. Priee $1 25, 

This edition is enriched by the observations, comments, and illus- 
trations of Bowie, Pellicer, and other learned authors, whose study 
and research have facilitated the understanding of this masterly pro- 
iucuon, 

45 



I). AFPLETON $ CO., PUBLISHERS. 



OLLENDORFF'S 

SPANISH, GERMAN, AND ITALIAN GRAMMARS. 



OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE 
AND SPEAK THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. To whteh is added, 
a Systematic Outline of the different Parts of Speech, their Inflee 
uon and Use, with full Paradigms, and a complete List of the lr 
regular Yerbs. By George J. Adler, A. M., Professor of Germau 
in the University of the City of New York. One volume. 12mo 
Price $1 00. 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD FOR GERMANS TO LEARN TO 
READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Ar- 
ranged and adapted to Schools and Private Academies. By P 
Gand& 12mo. Price $1 00. 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, 
AND SPEAK THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. With an Appendix, 
containing a brief but comprehensive Recapitulation of the Rules 
as well as of all the Yerbs, both Regular and Irregular, so as to 
render their use easy and familiar to the most ordinary capacity. 
Together with Practical R,ules for Spanish Pronunciation, and Models 
of Social and Commercial Correspondence. The whole designed foi 
Young Learners and persons who are their own Instructors. By M. 
Yelazquez and T. Smaione, Professors of the Spani.-h and French 
Languages. 12mo. 560 pages. Si 50. 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD FOR SPANIARDS TO LEARN TO 
READ, WRITE AND SPEAK THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. With 
a Treatise on Pronunciation, and an Appendix, by Palenzuela and 
Carenno. 12ma Price $2 00. 
|j^- KEYS TO EACH OF THE ABOYE, in Separate Yolumes. 

f r±ce 75 Cents each. 

OLLENDORFF'S PRIMARY LESSONS IN LEARNING TO READ, 
WRITE, AND SPEAK THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE. Introduc 
tory to the larger Grammar. By Geo. W. Greene. 18mo. Price 50 c 

.OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, 
AND 3PEAK THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE. With Additions and 
Corrections By Felix Forestl Price $1 50. 

KEY TO THE EXERCISER in Senarute Yolumes. Price 75 a 

43 



D. AFPLETON f CO., PUBLISHERS. 

GRAMMAR OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE 

WITH A HISTORY OF THE LANGUAGE AND PRACTICAL EXERCISER 

BY M. SCHELE DE VEEE, 

OF THE UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA. 

12mo. 213 Pages. Price $1. 

No Student of the Castilian dialect should be without this grammar. It possesses 
Several advantages over most other Spanish grammars published in this country, Dot ex- 
©epting the "System" of Ollendorff. It is at once concise and comprehensive— mid^ 
turn, in parvo — containing nothing that is redundant, yet omitting nothing that is essen- 
tial to the learner. The conjugations are so admirably arranged as no longer to piesent 
that stumbling-block which has frightened so many from the study of one of the ri.--he«t 
fend most majestic of languages. —Philadelphia Daily News. 



BOOK-KEEPING. IN SPANISH. 

B T 0. C. M A ES H. 
8vo. Price $1 50. 



FIRST BOOK IN ORTHOGRAPHY. IN SPANISH 

12mo. Price 50 cents. 
Designed for the use of Primary Schools. 



FIRST BOOK IN GEOGRAPHY. 

Illustrated by 100 engravings and 14 maps. By Asa Smith, A. M. 
Translated and adapted to the use of schools in South America, Mexico, 
and the West Indies. 

BY THEMISTOOLES PAKEDES, 
SECRETARY 07 LEGATION OF NEW GRANADA 

Just Ready. 



GESEMUS' HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

Fourteenth Edition, as revised by Dr. E. Rodiger. Translated by 
T. J. Conant, Professor of Hebrew in Madison University, 1ST. Y. With 
the Modifications of the Editions subsequent to the Eleventh, by Dr. 
Davies, of Stepney College, London. To which are added a Course of 
Exercises in Hebrew Grammar, and a Hebrew Chrestomathy, prepared 
fey the Translator. 

12mo. 447 pages. Price $1 25. 
47 

^» ** i- <# **■ 

i * ■."■'■" 



IT. APPLE TON §• CO., PUBLISHERS 



SEOANE'S EDITION OF NEUMAN AND BARETTTS 
SPANISH & ENGLISH, AND ENGLISH & SPANISH 

PRONOUNCING DICTIONARY. 

SSWLT COMPOSED FROM THE SPANISH DICTIONARIES OF THE SPANISH AOADEMT, ISfc 

REEOS AND SALVA, AND FEOM THE ENGLISH DICTIONARIES OF 

WEBSTER, WORCESTER, AND WALKER. 

BY MAEIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADEISA 

Professor of the Spanish Language and Literature in Colombia Coktge. 

Ln2 large Vol. 8vo. of more than 1,300 pp., neat type, iine paper, an J 

strong binding. Price $5. 

In the revision of this work more than eis;ht thousand worda 
idioms, and familiar phrases have been added. 

Also, the technical terms most frequently used in the arts, and id 
chemistry, botany, medicine, and natural history, as well as nautical 
and mercantile terms and phrases, — most of which are not found in 
oiher dictionaries. 

And also, many Spanish words used only in American countries 
which were formerly dependencies of Spain. 

The pronunciation of the Castilian language is so clearly set forth in 
this dictionary, as to render it well-nigh impossible for any person who 
can read English readily, to fail of obtaining the true sounds of the 
Spanish words at sight. 

It also contains in both languages the exact equivalents and corre- 
spondents of the words in genera,! use, both in their literal and meta- 
phorical acceptations. 

The irregularities of the verbs in Spanish and English are here, loi 
the first time, given in full, in their alphabetical order. 

The work likewise contains a grammatical synopsis of both lai* 
guages, arranged for ready and convenient reference. 

From Ms Excellency Valentine Canedo, Captain General of Cuba*. 

u The Pronouncing Dictionary of the Spanish and English Languages, by Don Ms 
Ei?,tv> Velazquez de la Cadena, published by you, having been examined, and its tiu*H8 
asikaowledged, I have ordered it to be recommended by the Board of Education.' 1 

ABRIDGMENT OF THE ABOVE. 

12mo. 888 page* Price $1 15. 



f'Tl* * 












-^ 










y 


>* 
































W 










> </> 



.A 

Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: July 2006 














* 


















, \* 



V 



PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Tnomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



K ' 







** v 



o5 ^ 



* <^ 












